T2232-370-01 SG-Edu Lec EN

T2232-370-01
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 5.0
Authored and published using
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Copyright 2009 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its
subsidiary companies (collectively PTC), and their respective licensors. This software
is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and
proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and
other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to
third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN
CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright
laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement
that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to
the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation
if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance
with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy
made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided
by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of
PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to
any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any
means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make
copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to
change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by
PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may
appear in this document.
For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see
backside of this guide.
About PTC University

Welcome to PTC University!
With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge,
PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only
PTC University offers:
tio
na
lU
se
nl
An innovative learning methodology - PTCs Precision Learning

Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and
deliver learning solutions.
Flexible Delivery Options PTC University ensures you receive the same
quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive
experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules
facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.
Premier Content and Expertise A thorough instructor certification process
and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting
organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified
instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices
derived from thousands of deployments.
Global Focus PTC University delivers training where and when you
need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries
offering content in nine languages.
Delivering Value A role-based learning design ensures the right people
have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the
organizations overall performance goals.
uc
a
The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning
offerings that PTC University has available. These include:
Fo
r
Ed
Instructor-led Training (ILT) - The ideal blend of classroom lectures,

personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and
post-classroom tools.
Pro/FICIENCY - This Web-based, skills assessment and
development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity.
eLearning Libraries - 24/7 access to Web-based training that will
compliment your instructor-led course.
Precision LMS - A powerful learning management system that will manage
your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are
corporate learning programs designed to your organizations specific goals,
current skills, desired competencies and training preferences.
Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most
out of your PTC products.
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
nl
na
lU
se
Europe
Education Services Registration

Tel: (888) 782-3773
Fax: (781) 370-5307
Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
Tel: (800) 477-6435
Fax: (781) 707-0328
License Management and Contracts
Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)
Fax: (781) 707-0331
North America
Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting

Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)
Asia
Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact

information.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web
site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions
to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical
support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base
searches, reference libraries and documentation. You can also find general
information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer
Support, and PTC Partners.
Precision Learning
Precision Learning In The Classroom
PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop
effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity
of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven
instructional design principal of Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do:
nl
Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key

concepts.
These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the
software application.
You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.
na
lU
se
After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided in order for you to

assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also
identify the class topics that require further review.
At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via
your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training
on how to do this after the class.
Precision Learning After the Class
uc
a
tio
Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning
account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already
have one.
As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:
Fo
r
Ed
A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a

Recommended Learning Report based on your results.
A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same
instructional approach of lecture, demonstration and exercise. The
Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training
that you may want to review.
Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.
The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the
live class.
Precision Learning Recommendations
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated
training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are
available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of
our Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.
Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and
that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.
Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map
corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor
recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that
corresponds to your role and job functions.
Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01
Introduction to the Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Basic Modeling

Process
Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Concepts
Using the Pro/ENGINEER Interface
Selecting and Editing
Creating Sketcher Geometry
Module 02
Module 03
Module 04
Module 05
nl
Day 2
Using Sketcher Tools

Creating Sketches for Features
Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes
Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs
Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded Datums
Creating Sweeps and Blends
na
lU
se
Module 06
Module 07
Module 08
Module 09
Module 10
Module 11
Day 3
tio
Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft

Creating Rounds and Chamfers
Project I
Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools
Creating Patterns
Measuring and Inspecting Models
uc
a
12
13
14
15
16
17
Ed
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Day 4
18
19
20
21
22
23
Fo
r
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Assembling with Constraints

Assembling with Connections
Exploding Assemblies
Drawing Layout and Views
Creating Drawing Annotations
Using Layers
Day 5
Module 24
Module 25
Module 26
Module 27
Investigating Parent/Child Relationships

Capturing and Managing Design Intent
Resolving Failures and Seeking Help
Project II
Fo
r
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
nl
Table of Contents
Introduction to the Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Basic Modeling Process 1-1
Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Basic Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
nl
Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Feature-Based Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Parametric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Associative Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Model-Centric Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recognizing File Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-8
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Using the Pro/ENGINEER Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Understanding the Main Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Understanding the Folder Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Understanding the Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Understanding the Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files . . . . . 3-10
Managing Files in Pro/ENGINEER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Understanding Basic Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Understanding the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Creating and Managing View Orientations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Creating Style States using the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Managing and Editing Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Setting Up New Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Fo
r
Selecting and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Using Drag Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Using Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Understanding the Model Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Understanding Model Tree Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Understanding Basic Model Tree Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Selecting Items using Direct Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Selecting Items using Query Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Using the Search Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Using the Smart Selection Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Understanding Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Renaming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Editing Features and Regenerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Activating and Editing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Dynamic Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting and Suppressing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Feature and Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
4-39
4-42
4-46
4-50
na
lU
se
nl
Creating Sketcher Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Reviewing Sketcher Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Understanding Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Modifying the Sketcher Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Utilizing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Sketching with On-the-Fly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Sketching Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Sketching Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Sketching Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Sketching Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Sketching Circular Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Sketching Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Using Sketcher Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Understanding Construction Geometry Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Sketching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Sketcher Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Creating New Sketch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Placing Sections into Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Creating Sketches for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Specifying the Sketch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Utilizing Sketch References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Thickening Edges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Datum Features Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-7
Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Creating Solid Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Creating Solid Revolve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Creating Profile Rib Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded Datums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Creating Internal Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Creating Embedded Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
na
lU
se
nl
Creating Sweeps and Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Creating a Parallel Blend Protrusion or Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Experimenting with Parallel Blend Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Analyzing Parallel Blend Section Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Ed
uc
a
tio
Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Creating Coaxial Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Creating Linear Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Creating Radial and Diameter Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Exploring Hole Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Creating Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Creating Draft Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Creating Basic Split Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
Fo
r
Creating Rounds and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Creating Rounds Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Creating Full Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Creating Round Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Creating Chamfer Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Project I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Air Circulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piston Assembly Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and Impeller Housing . . . . . . .
The Frame and Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Creating Local Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Copying and Pasting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Moving and Rotating Copied Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Mirroring Selected Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Mirroring All Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Creating Mirrored Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
na
lU
se
nl
Creating Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Direction Patterning in the First Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Direction Patterning in the Second Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Axis Patterning in the First Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Axis Patterning in the Second Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Creating Reference Patterns of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Creating Reference Patterns of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-25
Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-28
uc
a
tio
Measuring and Inspecting Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Viewing and Editing Model Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Investigating Model Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Analyzing Mass Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Measuring Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-13
Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
Measuring Global Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-21
Fo
r
Ed
Assembling with Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

Understanding Assembly Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Creating New Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Understanding Constraint Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Understanding Assembly Constraint Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
Assembling Components using the Default Constraint . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Analyzing Basic Component Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
Constraining Components using Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
Constraining Components using Mate Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Constraining Components using Align Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25
Constraining Components using Align and Mate Offset. . . . . . . . . 18-30
Constraining Components using Align and Mate Oriented . . . . . . 18-34
Constraining Components using Align and Mate Angle . . . . . . . . . 18-37
Constraining Components using the Automatic Option . . . . . . . . . 18-40
Utilizing the Accessory Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-45
Assembling with Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Understanding Connection Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dragging Connected Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembling Components using the Slider Connection . . . . . . . . . .
19-1
19-2
19-3
19-6
Assembling Components using the Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9

Assembling Components using the Cylinder Connection . . . . . . . 19-12
Analyzing Collision Detection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-14
Exploding Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Creating and Managing Explode States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Creating Explode Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Animating Explode States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Drawing Layout and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Analyzing Drawing Concepts and Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Analyzing Basic 2-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Understanding the Drawing Ribbon User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Creating New Drawings and Applying Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
Creating and Orienting General Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
Utilizing the Drawing Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-14
Managing Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-17
Adding Drawing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-21
Creating Projection Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-25
Creating Cross-Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-28
Creating Detailed Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-32
Creating Auxiliary Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-36
Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-37
Modifying Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-41
Creating Assembly and Exploded Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-45
Fo
r
Ed
Creating Drawing Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Analyzing Annotation Concepts and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Inserting a Bill of Materials Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6
Cleaning Up Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
Manipulating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
Creating Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-18
Inserting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-22
Analyzing Drawing Associativity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-26
Publishing Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-30
Using Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Understanding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Creating and Managing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Utilizing Layers in Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6
Creating Layer States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9
Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12
Investigating Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Understanding Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Viewing Part Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5

Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9
Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information . . . . . . . . . . 24-13
nl
Capturing and Managing Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Reordering Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6
Inserting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9
Redefining Features and Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13
Capturing Design Intent in Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17
Capturing Design Intent in Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-19
Capturing Design Intent in Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-21
Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-23
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Resolving Failures and Seeking Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Understanding and Identifying Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
Analyzing Geometry Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
Analyzing Open Section Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-9
Analyzing Missing Part References Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-12
Analyzing Missing Component Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-16
Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-19
Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22
Understanding Resolve Mode Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-27
Recovering Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-29
Using Pro/ENGINEER Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-30
Fo
r
Ed
Project II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Air Circulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piston Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Block and Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27-1
27-2
27-3
27-4
27-5
27-6
27-7
Student Preface Using the Header
na
lU
se
Modules
Topics
Concept
Theory
Procedure
Exercise (if applicable)
Course Handbook Layout:
nl
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and
the header used to begin each lab in Pro/ENGINEER.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Procedure / Exercise Header:
Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate
information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into
modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics,
with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:
na
lU
se
nl
Concept This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and
is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with
figures and bullets.
Theory This section provides detailed information about content
introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not
shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional
paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.
Procedure This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to
complete the topic within Pro/ENGINEER. Procedures are short, focused,
and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook
only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that
contain only Concept and Theory.
Exercise Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are
typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models.
Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an
associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide
and/or the online exercise HTML files.
The first module for certain courses is known as a process
module. Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level
processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.
tio
Procedure / Exercise Header
uc
a
To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as labs) as

concise as possible, each begins with a header. The header lists the name
of the lab, a brief scenario, the working directory, the file you are to open,
and the initial datum display.
Ed
The following items are indicated in the figure above:
Fo
r
1. Procedure/Exercise Name This is the name of the lab.

2. Scenario This briefly describes what will be done in the lab.
3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed A reminder that you should
close any open files and erase them from memory. These icons have
been added to the left side of the main toolbar:
Click Close Window
until the icon is disabled.
and then click OK.

Click Erase Not Displayed
Folder Name This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are
stored in topic folders. The path to the lab files is:
users/student/course_folder/module_folder/topic_folder
In the example, Extrude_Features is the topic folder, and should be set
as the Working Directory.
To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or
browser, and select Set Working Directory.
5. Model to Open This is the file to be opened from the working
directory. In the above example, extrude_1.prt is the model to open.
The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, an so on. If you are
4.
6.
expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead create a
new model, you will see Create New.
To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and
select Open.
Datum Display Setting The initial datum display you need to set
na
lU
se
Two other items to note for labs:
nl
indicates that you

is shown using icons. For example,
should display only datum planes. Datum axes, datum points, and
datum coordinate systems should be disabled in this case.
Before beginning the lab, set the icons in the datum display toolbar to
match those shown in the header.
7. Task Name Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one
or more tasks within a lab.
8. Lab Steps These are the individual steps required to complete
a task.
Saving Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless

otherwise stated.
Exercises Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
Setting Up Pro/ENGINEER for Use with Training Labs
tio
Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you
configure Pro/ENGINEER to ensure the system is set up to run the lab
exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a
computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
The extracted zip will create the default course folder path automatically,
such as C:/users/student/course_folder.
Locate your existing Pro/ENGINEER shortcut.
Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as
the course folder. For example, C:/users/student/course_folder.
Start Pro/ENGINEER using the newly configured shortcut.
The configuration files specific to the course will be loaded.
The default working directory will be set to the course folder. You can
then navigate easily to the module and topic folders.
PROCEDURE - Student Preface Using the Header

Scenario
In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Pro/ENGINEER
working environment for each lab in the course.
extrude_1.prt
Topic1_Folder
Configure Pro/ENGINEER to ensure the system is set up to run

the lab exercises properly.
nl
Step 1:
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer
outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.
na
lU
se
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
The extracted ZIP will create the default course folder path
automatically, such as C:/users/student/course_folder.
tio
2. Locate your existing Pro/ENGINEER shortcut.

Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same
as the course folder, for example C:/users/student/course_folder.
Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to
avoid any possible conflicts.
Fo
r
Step 2:
Ed
uc
a
3. Start Pro/ENGINEER using the newly configured shortcut.

The configuration files specific to the course are loaded.
The default working directory is set to the course folder. You can
then navigate easily to the module and topic folders.
1. Notice the two icons indicated in the header.
2. Click Close Window

the icon grays out.
from the main toolbar as necessary until
3. Click Erase Not Displayed

from the main toolbar.
Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
Step 3:
Browse to and expand the module folder for this procedure and
set the folder indicated in the header as the Pro/ENGINEER
working directory.
1. Notice the folder indicated in the

header.
2. If necessary, select theFolder
nl
na
lU
se
Click Working Directory

to view the current working
directory folder in the browser.
Click Folder Tree to expand
it from the bottom of the
navigator.
Navigate to the users/student/Course_Folder/Module1_Folder/Topic1_Folder by
clicking the + next to each
folder.
tab from the
Browser
navigator.
tio
3. Right-click the Topic1_Folder

folder and select Set Working
Directory.
uc
a
4. Click the Topic1_Folder folder

to display its contents in the
browser.
Fo
r
Ed
Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the

browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and
select Set Working Directory from the browser.
Step 4:
Open the file for this procedure and set the initial datum display
according to the icons shown in the header.
1. Notice the lab model is specified

in the header.
Double-click extrude_1.prt in
the browser to open it.
2. Notice the initial datum display is
specified in the header.
Click Point Display

disable their display.
Click Csys Display
enable their display.
y
nl
to
Click Axis Display

to
to
na
lU
se
Click Plane Display

to
uc
a
tio
3. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:
Read the first task.
Perform the first step.
Perform the remaining steps.
Ed
Remember to perform all the above tasks based on the header

contained in subsequent procedures.
Fo
r
This completes the procedure.
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
nl
Introduction to the Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire

Basic Modeling Process
In this module, you learn about the basic modeling process that is typically
used to scope, model, assemble, and document a Pro/ENGINEER solid
model. This simplified process is fundamentally used at most companies,
although your specific company process may differ. The process is supported
throughout the course modules and again followed in a course project.
Objectives
uc
a
tio
This module also introduces you to various fundamental Pro/ENGINEER

concepts including feature-based modeling and associativity between part
models, assemblies, and drawings. You will learn more detail about these
and other concepts in subsequent modules.
Fo
r
Ed
After completing this module, you will be able to:

Prepare for a part model design by scoping the design parameters of an
adjoining part.
Create a new part model by following the required design parameters.
Create an assembly by assembling the new part model with existing part
models.
Create a 2-D drawing of the new part model that includes views,
dimensions, and a title block.
2009 PTC
Module 1 | Page 1
Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Basic Modeling Process
nl
The Basic Modeling Process can be summarized in four

high-level steps:
na
lU
se
1. Preparing for Part Model Design
uc
a
tio
2. Creating a New Part Model
4. Creating a Drawing of the New

Part Model
Ed
3. Creating a New Assembly by

Assembling the Part Models
Preparing for Part Model Design
Fo
r
Often, before you create a new part model design, it is necessary to know
information about the components that will surround it in an assembly.
Consequently, you may want to open and inspect these parts before
beginning the new design. At your company, this preparation stage may
occur at the same time as the new part model design, or it may not occur at
all. Either way, having knowledge of adjoining parts can help in the new
part model design.
Creating a New Part Model

A new part model accurately captures a design from a concept through solid
feature-based modeling. A part model enables you to graphically view the
product before it is manufactured. A part model can be used to:
Capture mass property information.
Vary design parameters to determine the best options.
Graphically visualize what a model will look like before it is manufactured.
Module 1 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Creating a New Assembly by Assembling the Part Models

An assembly is created from one or more parts. The parts are located and
assembled with respect to one another just as they are on a real product.
An assembly can be used to:
Check for fit between parts.

Check for interference between parts.
Capture bill of material information.
Calculate the total weight of an assembly.
Creating a Drawing of the Part or Assembly
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Once a part or assembly has been modeled, it is usually necessary to

document that part or assembly by creating a 2-D drawing of it. The 2-D
drawing usually contains views of the part or assembly, dimensions, and a
title block. The drawing may also contain notes, tables, and further design
information. Not every company requires that a drawing be created of a
model.
2009 PTC
Module 1 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Process Exercise

Objectives
After successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to:
Scope the design parameters of an existing part.
Create a new part model using required design parameters.
Create a new assembly by assembling part models.
Create a new drawing of the new part model.
Scenario
nl
Before you can begin modeling the key handle, you need to scope the design
on the adjoining key base model. You know from experience that the hole in
the key base is not large enough in diameter for a strong key handle, and the
key base does not provide enough clearance to use the tool.
Step 1:
na
lU
se
Once you have properly scoped the design, you can create the key handle
part and assemble it with the key base. Finally, you can document the key
handle design by creating a 2-D drawing.
Preparing for part model design Open and edit the dimensions
of an existing part model to watch the geometry update
automatically.
tio
1. To open the KEY_BASE.PRT

part model, do the following:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
from the
Click Open
main toolbar at the top of the
interface.
In the File Open dialog box,
click Working Directory
.
Double-click the Module_01
folder to view its contents.
Right-click folder
BasicModelingProcess
and select Set Working
Directory.
Double-click the
BasicModelingProcess
folder to view its contents.
Select KEY_BASE.PRT.
Click Open.
Module 1 | Page 4
2009 PTC
2. Click Plane Display

Display
, Axis
, Point Display
nl
O
na
lU
se
3. To edit the hole diameter from

3.5 to 5, do the following:
Click the hole in the model to
select it. It should outline in
red.
Right-click and hold, and
select Edit.
Double-click the 3.5 value to
edit it.
Edit the value from 3.5 to 5
and press ENTER.
and Csys Display

from the
interface to disable their display.
uc
a
tio
from
Click Regenerate
the main toolbar at the top
of the interface to update the
model geometry to the new
diameter value.
4. Click Named View List

from the main toolbar at the top of the
interface and select FRONT.
Fo
r
Ed
5. To edit the shaft height from 25

to 35, do the following:
Click the shaft in the model to
select it. It should outline in
red.
In the graphics window
containing the model,
right-click and hold, and
select Edit.
Double-click the 25 value to
edit it.
Edit the value from 25 to 35
and press ENTER.
from
Click Regenerate
the main toolbar at the top
of the interface to update the
model geometry to the longer
shaft value.
2009 PTC
Module 1 | Page 5

from
the main toolbar at the top of the
interface and select Standard
Orientation.
nl
na
lU
se
Axis Display
from the main
toolbar at the top of the interface
to enable their display.
and
tio
8. To save the KEY_BASE.PRT part model and close the window, do

the following:
uc
a
from the main toolbar at the top of the interface.

Click Save
In the Save Object dialog box, click OK.
Click Close Window
interface to close the window containing KEY_BASE.PRT.
Ed
Creating a new part model Create a new part model named

KEY_HANDLE.PRT and model its geometry.
Fo
r
Step 2:
1. To create a new part model, do

the following:
from the main
Click New
toolbar at the top of the
interface.
In the New dialog box, select
Part as the Type and Solid as
the Sub-type.
Type key_handle as the
Name and click OK.
Module 1 | Page 6
2009 PTC
2. To start a new Sketch feature, do

the following:
nl
O
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
3. To sketch a circle and edit its

diameter to 5, do the following:
Click Center and Point
Circle
from the Sketcher
toolbar on the right side of the
interface.
In the graphics window, cursor
over the intersection of the
vertical and horizontal lines.
The cursor will snap to the
center. Click to place the
circle at the intersection, drag
your mouse outward to start
sketching the circle, and click
again to complete the circle.
from
Start the Sketch Tool
the feature toolbar on the right
side of the interface.
In the graphics window, click
datum plane FRONT to select
it.
Click Sketch from the Sketch
dialog box.
Fo
r
Ed
Click Select One By One

from the Sketcher toolbar on
the right side of the interface.
A diameter dimension appears
for the circle.
Double-click the diameter
dimension, edit its value to 5,
and press ENTER.
4. Click Done Section

from the
Sketcher toolbar on the right side
of the interface.
from the main toolbar and select
Standard Orientation.
2009 PTC
Module 1 | Page 7
6. To create an Extrude feature

using the sketch you just created,
do the following:
Ensure that the Sketch feature
is still selected (it should be
red, if not, click it to select it).
nl
O
tio
na
lU
se
from Blind
to Symmetric
.
In the dashboard, edit the
depth value to 12 and press
ENTER. The yellow geometry
depth increases. Yellow
geometry is preview geometry
and is representative of how
the feature will appear when it
is completed.
Click Complete Feature
from the dashboard.
Start the Extrude Tool

from the feature toolbar on the
right side of the interface.
In the dashboard at the top of
the interface, edit the depth
uc
a
7. To start a second new Sketch

feature, do the following:
Fo
r
Ed
Start the Sketch Tool

from
on the front surface of the
cylinder geometry to select it
as the sketching plane for the
new Sketch feature.
dialog box.
Module 1 | Page 8
2009 PTC
y
nl
na
lU
se
Click Select One By One

from the Sketcher toolbar on
the right side of the interface.
A diameter dimension appears
for the circle.
8. To sketch a circle and edit its

diameter to 7, do the following:
Click Center and Point
from the Sketcher
Circle
toolbar on the right side of the
interface.
In the graphics window, cursor
over the intersection of the
vertical and horizontal lines.
The cursor will snap to the
center. Click to place the
circle at the intersection, drag
your mouse outward to start
sketching the circle, and click
again to complete the circle.
uc
a
tio
Click Refit
from the
interface.
Double-click the diameter
dimension, edit its value to 7,
and press ENTER.
from the
Ed

Sketcher toolbar.
Fo
r

2009 PTC
Module 1 | Page 9
nl
O
tio
na
lU
se
Start the Extrude Tool

from the feature toolbar on the
right side of the interface.
In the dashboard at the top
of the interface, click Change
Depth Direction
to flip the
yellow preview geometry into
the existing geometry.
and drag the small white,
square drag handle to change
the depth to 5.
from the dashboard.
11. To create a second Extrude

feature using the second sketch
you just created, do the following:
Ensure that the Sketch feature
is still selected (it should be
red, if not, click on it to select
it).
uc
a

and Axis Display
from the main toolbar
at the top of the interface to disable their display.
13. To round two edges of the
geometry, do the following:
Fo
r
Ed
from
Start the Round Tool
In the graphics window, press
and hold CTRL and click on
the two edges to be rounded
to select them.
round radius to 0.5 and press
ENTER.
from the dashboard.
14. Click in the background of the

graphics window to deselect the
completed round feature.
Module 1 | Page 10
2009 PTC
nl
O
na
lU
se
Start the Mirror Tool

from
In the model tree, click datum
plane FRONT to select it
as the datum to mirror the
geometry about.
from the dashboard.
15. To mirror the part, do the

following:
In the model tree on the left
side of the interface, press and
hold CTRL and click features
Extrude 2 and Round 1 to
select them.
Ed
uc
a
tio
16. To modify geometry dimensions

to their proper length and
regenerate the model, do the
following:
In the model tree, on the left
side of the interface, right-click
feature Extrude 1 and hold,
and select Edit.
In the graphics window,
double-click the 12 dimension,
edit it to 60 and press ENTER.
Fo
r
Click Regenerate
from
the main toolbar. Notice that
the model geometry grows
long.
17. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT part model, do the following:

Click Save
from the main toolbar at the top of the interface.
In the Save Object dialog box, click OK.
Step 3:
Creating a new assembly by assembling the part models

Create a new assembly CHUCK_KEY.ASM and assemble the
KEY_HANDLE.PRT and KEY_BASE.PRT.

interface to enable their display.
2009 PTC
Module 1 | Page 11
nl
Click New
from the main
toolbar at the top of the
interface.
Assembly as the Type and
verify that Design is the
Sub-type.
Edit the Name to chuck_key.
Click OK.
2. To create the CHUCK_KEY.ASM

assembly model, do the
following:
3. To assemble the
KEY_BASE.PRT, do the
following:
na
lU
se
You will need to resize the new assembly window that appears.
uc
a
tio
Click Assemble
from the
feature toolbar at the right side
of the interface.
In the Open dialog box, select
component KEY_BASE.PRT
and click Open.
constraint in the drop-down list
Fo
r
Ed
from Automatic to Default

.
Click Complete Component
from the dashboard.
interface to disable their display.
Module 1 | Page 12
2009 PTC
nl
O
na
lU
se
Click Assemble
from the
feature toolbar.
In the Open dialog box,
click the component
KEY_HANDLE.PRT to select
it and click Open.
the inside hole surface on
KEY_BASE.PRT to select it as
the assembly reference.
Click the shaft surface on
it as the component reference.
The KEY_HANDLE.PRT will
reposition itself through the
hole in KEY_BASE.PRT, and
the Insert constraint is created.
5. To start assembling
KEY_HANDLE.PRT by creating
the Insert constraint, do the
following:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
6. To continue assembling
KEY_HANDLE.PRT by creating
the Mate constraint, do the
following:
click on the flat surface on
it as the component reference.
Cursor over the upper
left of the top surface
of KEY_BASE.PRT to
pre-highlight it. Right-click
to query the back, flat surface
of KEY_BASE.PRT and click
to select it as the assembly
reference. The Mate constraint
is created.
2009 PTC
Module 1 | Page 13
nl
O
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
8. To edit the shaft length of

KEY_HANDLE.PRT within the
assembly, do the following:
In the model tree, click
the + icon next to
KEY_HANDLE.PRT to expand
its list of features.
Right-click Extrude 1 in the
model tree and select Edit.
double-click the 60 dimension
to edit it.
Edit the 60 dimension value to
45 and press ENTER.
7. To edit the Mate constraint offset

value and complete the assembly
of KEY_HANDLE.PRT, do the
following:
and drag the small white,
square drag handle to edit
the offset value of the Mate
constraint to 6.
Click Complete Component
from the dashboard.
Fo
r
Ed
from
Click Regenerate
the main toolbar to update the
geometry to the new length.
Module 1 | Page 14
2009 PTC
Step 4:
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
9. To verify the geometry

length change in the
KEY_HANDLE.PRT, do the
following:
In the main menu,
click Window >
KEY_HANDLE.PRT to
switch windows from the
CHUCK_KEY.ASM assembly
to the KEY_HANDLE.PRT part
model.
In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Edit.
Notice that the shaft length is
now 45, even though it was
edited in the assembly.
Click in the background of the
graphics window to clear the
dimensions.
Creating a drawing of the new part model Create a new drawing

KEY_HANDLE.DRW for the part model KEY_HANDLE.PRT.
uc
a
tio
1. To create the new

KEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing,
do the following:
Fo
r
Ed
from the main

Click New
toolbar.
Drawing as the Type.
Edit the Name to key_handle.
Clear the Use default
template check box.
Click OK.
In the New Drawing dialog
box, verify that the default
model is KEY_HANDLE.PRT.
Select the Use template
option and click Browse
to browse for the drawing
template.
In the Open dialog box, select
the student_template.drw
template and click Open.
Click OK from the New
Drawing dialog box.
2009 PTC
Module 1 | Page 15
nl
O
na
lU
se
3. To change the drawing scale, do

the following:
In the bottom-left corner of the
graphics window, double-click
the Scale value to edit it.
The input window prompts
you to enter the new value for
scale. Type 5 as the new scale
value and press ENTER. The
drawing views automatically
rescale to the new value of 5.
2. The input window prompts you

for the drawn_by parameter.
Type your first initial, followed
by your surname, and press
ENTER. Your name is entered
into the title block as the drawing
displays in the graphics window.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
4. To move the 7 diameter

dimension to the other drawing
view, do the following:
Select the Annotate tab in the
Drawing ribbon at the top of
the interface.
Click the 7 diameter
dimension in the right drawing
view to select it. It will highlight
red.
Right-click in the graphics
window and select Move Item
to View.
Select the left drawing view.
The dimension is moved to
this new drawing view.
Module 1 | Page 16
2009 PTC
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
5. To move the 5 diameter

dimension to another location
in the drawing view, do the
following:
the 5 dimension in the right
drawing view to select it. It will
highlight red.
Cursor over the highlighted
dimension. The cursor will
appear as four arrows. This is
an indication that you can now
click and drag this dimension
to move it to another location
on the drawing. Click and
drag to move the 5 diameter
dimension to the center of the
drawing view.
6. Click Window > KEY_HANDLE.PRT to switch to the window

containing KEY_HANDLE.PRT.
Ed
uc
a
tio
7. To edit the KEY_HANDLE.PRT

shaft length and save it, do the
following:
Right-click Extrude 1 in the
model tree and select Edit.
double-click the 45 dimension
to edit it.
Edit the 45 dimension value to
60 and press ENTER.
Fo
r
Click Regenerate
the main toolbar.
from
8. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and close the window, do the

following:
Click Save
Click OK from the Save Object dialog box.
In the main toolbar, click Close Window
KEY_HANDLE.PRT window.
2009 PTC
to close the
Module 1 | Page 17
nl
O
na
lU
se
Click Save
from the main
toolbar.
Click OK from the Save Object
dialog box.
In the main toolbar, click Close
Window
to close the
CHUCK_KEY.ASM window.
9. To activate the
CHUCK_KEY.ASM assembly, save it, and close the
window, do the following:
Click Window >
CHUCK_KEY.ASM from
the main menu to switch to the
assembly and activate it.
Note that the geometry

and dimension in the
drawing have both
updated.
tio
10. To save the KEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing, close the window, and

erase all files from session memory, do the following:
uc
a
Click Save
Click OK from the Save Object dialog box.
to close the
Ed
In the main toolbar, click Close Window

KEY_HANDLE.DRW window.
Fo
r
Click Erase Not Displayed

from the main toolbar along the
top of the interface.
Click OK from the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
Module 1 | Page 18
2009 PTC
Module
2
O
nl
Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Concepts

Module Overview
tio
na
lU
se
In this module, you will first learn about basic concepts and benefits of solid
modeling using Pro/ENGINEER. You will then learn how complex models
can be easily created using a combination of simple features. Parametric
capabilities that are native to Pro/ENGINEER enable you to easily add design
intent and make design changes. Associativity means that a change made to
your solid model design will be automatically propagated to all referenced
objects such as drawings, assemblies, and so on. You will also learn how a
model-centric modeler enables downstream deliverables to be created with
references to and driven by the design model.
Objectives
uc
a
Finally, you will learn how to recognize some of the basic file extensions used
to identify different types of Pro/ENGINEER objects.
Fo
r
Ed

Understand solid modeling concepts.
Understand feature-based concepts.
Understand parametric concepts.
Understand associative concepts.
Understand model-centric concepts.
Recognize basic Pro/ENGINEER file extensions.
2009 PTC
Module 2 | Page 1
Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts

Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire enables you to create solid model
representations of your part and assembly models.
Solid Models:
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Are realistic visual representation of designs.

Contain properties such as mass, volume, and center of gravity.
Can also be used to check for interferences in an assembly.
Mass Properties
Ed
Interference Check
Understanding Solid Modeling Concepts
Fo
r
Pro/ENGINEER enables you to create realistic solid model representations

of your part and assembly models. These virtual design models can be
used to easily visualize and evaluate your design before costly prototypes
are manufactured.
The models contain material properties such as mass, volume, center of
gravity, and surface area. As features are added or removed from the model,
these properties update. For example, if you add a hole to a model, then
the mass of the model decreases.
In addition, solid models enable tolerance analysis and clearance/interference
checking when placed into assemblies.
Module 2 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Understanding Feature-Based Concepts

Pro/ENGINEER is a feature-based product development tool.
With Feature-Based Modeling:
na
lU
se
nl
You build one simple feature at a time.

Each new feature can reference previous features.
Connecting Rod Features
Understanding Feature-Based Concepts
uc
a
tio
Pro/ENGINEER is a feature-based product development tool. The models

are constructed using a series of easy to understand features rather than
confusing mathematical shapes and entities.
Ed
The geometric definition of a model is defined by the type of features used

and by the order in which each feature is placed. Each feature builds upon
the previous feature and can reference any of the preceding features; this
enables design intent to be built into the model.
Fo
r
Individually, each feature is typically simple but as they are added together
they form complex parts and assemblies.
In this example, we have a connecting rod in seven stages of its creation:
First, an extrusion is created, which forms the overall shape and size of
the model.
An additional extrusion is created at the top of the model.
A third extrusion is created at the bottom of the model.
A hole is created at the bottom of the model.
Another hole is created at the top of the model.
A round is created on the four inside edges.
A small radial hole is created at the top of the model.
2009 PTC
Module 2 | Page 3
Understanding Parametric Concepts

The parametric nature and feature-to-feature relationships in
Pro/ENGINEER enable you to easily capture design intent and
make design changes.
Parametric:
Model geometry is controlled by parameters and dimensions.
When you modify dimension values, relevant geometry is automatically
updated.
nl
Parent/Child Relationships:
tio
na
lU
se
Features referenced during creation become parents.

If parent features change, child features accordingly and predictively
change as well.
uc
a
Parametric Feature Relationships
Understanding Parametric Concepts
Fo
r
Ed
Pro/ENGINEER models are value driven, using dimensions and parameters

to define the size and location of features within the model. If you change the
value of a feature dimension, that feature will update according to the change.
The change then automatically propagates through to related features in
the model, updating the entire part.
Parent/Child Relationships
Relationships between features in Pro/ENGINEER provide a powerful tool for

capturing design intent. During the modeling process, design intent is added
as one feature is created with reference to another.
When creating a new feature, any feature referenced during its creation
becomes a parent of the new feature. The new feature referencing the parent
is referred to as a child of the parent. If the parent feature is updated, any
children of the parent update accordingly. These relationships are referred to
as parent/child relationships.
This example shows a piston model intersected with a hole feature. In the
middle figure, the piston height is modified from 18.5 to 25. Notice that the
hole moves upward as the piston height increases. The design intent of the
piston is to have the hole located a specified distance from the top of the
piston. The hole will maintain that distance no matter how tall the piston
Module 2 | Page 4
2009 PTC
becomes. This intent was added by dimensioning the hole to the top surface
of the piston.
Alternatively, if the intent of the design is to have the hole located a specified
distance from the bottom of the piston, the hole would be dimensioned from
the bottom surface of the piston, yielding a different result when the height of
the piston is modified.
The right most figure shows modifications made to the location and diameter
of the hole.
Best Practices
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
When creating features in your model, try to reference features and geometry
that are robust, will likely not be deleted, and provide the desired design
intent. While this is not always possible, striving to do so will help you build
robust, easy to modify models.
2009 PTC
Module 2 | Page 5
Understanding Associative Concepts
na
lU
se
nl
Pro/ENGINEER is a bi-directionally associative product

development tool.
Associativity
tio
Understanding Associative Concepts
uc
a
Bi-directional associativity means that all changes made to an object in any

mode of Pro/ENGINEER are automatically reflected in every related mode.
Ed
For example, a change made in a drawing is reflected in the part being

documented in the drawing. That same change is also reflected in every
assembly using that part model.
Fo
r
It is important to understand that the associativity between different modes is

possible because the part shown in a drawing is not copied into the drawing,
but rather associatively linked to the drawing. Likewise, an assembly is not
a large file containing copies of every part in the assembly, but rather a file
containing associative links to every model used in the assembly.
Best Practices
Because drawing and assembly files have associative links to the models
contained in them, these objects cannot be opened without the models they
contain being present.
In other words, you cannot send your colleague only a drawing file to open,
he or she must have the drawing file along with any model referenced in the
drawing. For an assembly, he or she must have the assembly file and all
models used in the assembly.
Module 2 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Understanding Model-Centric Concepts

In Pro/ENGINEER, the model is the center of all downstream
deliverables.
Assemblies reference the models being assembled.

The drawing references the model being documented.
The FEM model references the model being meshed.
The mold tool references the model being molded.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Model-Centric
Model-Centric
Ed
Understanding Model-Centric Concepts
Fo
r
In a model-centric product development tool, the design model is the common

source for all deliverables making use of that design model. This means that
all downstream deliverables point directly to a common design model. The
model is referenced as components in assemblies, views in a drawing, the
cavity of a mold, geometry meshed in a FEM model, and so on.
The benefit of using a model-centric development tool is that a change
made to the design model will automatically update all related downstream
deliverables.
2009 PTC
Module 2 | Page 7
Recognizing File Extensions

Each Pro/ENGINEER object type has a unique file extension
used to identify it.
The following are common Pro/ENGINEER file
extensions:
.prt - Part File

.asm - Assembly File
.drw - Drawing File
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Part File
Drawing File
Assembly File
uc
a
Recognizing File Extensions
Fo
r
Ed
The following are three file extensions used to identify three common
Pro/ENGINEER object types: parts, assemblies, and drawings.
.prt This extension represents a part object.
.asm This extension represents an assembly object. An assembly file
contains pointers and instructions that identify and position a collection of
parts and subassemblies.
.drw This extension represents a 2-D drawing. The drawing file contains
pointers, instructions, and detail items for documenting part and assembly
models in a drawing.
Module 2 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Module
3
O
nl
Using the Pro/ENGINEER Interface

Module Overview
na
lU
se
Pro/ENGINEER's user interface is an intuitive, user-friendly experience. The

system is designed to make the most of its available space by displaying
certain information at the right time, and then using that space to display
different information at a different time.
Objectives
uc
a
tio
This module introduces you to the main user interface and defines each
area and how you will use it. You will gain an understanding of basic skills
including file manipulation and management, as well as setting the working
directory and saving and opening files. You will learn basic Pro/ENGINEER
display options for datum display that will aid you throughout this course.
You will also learn about 3-D view orientations and style states, as well as
understand how to manage and apply appearances.
Fo
r
Ed

Understand Pro/ENGINEER's main interface, folder browser, Web browser,
and menu system.
Set the working directory and manage files in Pro/ENGINEER, including
how to open and save files.
Understand basic Pro/ENGINEER display options including model display
and datum display.
Create and manage basic 3-D orientations.
Create style states using the view manager.
Manage and apply Pro/ENGINEER appearances.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 1
Understanding the Main Interface

The Main Interface includes the following areas:
Graphics Window
Main Menu
Toolbars
Dashboard
Message Window
Dialog Boxes
Menu Manager
Drawing Ribbon
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
The Main Interface
Fo
r
Main Interface Theory

There are many different areas of the Pro/ENGINEER user interface that you
use when creating models. The areas that display depend upon the function
being performed. Areas of the main interface include:
Graphics Window The working
area of Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire
in which you create and modify
Pro/ENGINEER models such as
parts, assemblies, and drawings.
Module 3 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Main Menu Located at the top of the interface, the main menu
contains standard options such as File, Edit, and View.
Toolbars Toolbars contain icons for commonly used tools and
nl
Message Window The

message window provides you
with prompts, feedback, and
messages from Pro/ENGINEER
Wildfire.
functions.
tio
na
lU
se
Dashboard Locked at the top of the user interface, the Dashboard

appears when you create or edit the definition of a feature. The
Dashboard provides you with controls, inputs, status, and guidance for
carrying out a task, such as creating or editing a feature. Changes are
immediately visible on the screen. Various dashboard tabs are available
with additional feature options. Dashboard icons on the left include
feature controls while the Pause, Preview, Create Feature, and Cancel
Feature options are on the right.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Dialog Boxes Are

content-sensitive windows
that appear, displaying and
prompting you for information.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 3
Menu Manager A cascading

menu that appears on the far right
during the use of certain functions
and modes within Pro/ENGINEER
Wildfire. You work from top to
bottom in this menu; however,
clicking Done is done from
bottom to top. Bold menu options
will be automatically selected
if the middle mouse button is
clicked.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Drawing Ribbon A context-sensitive menu across the top of the

interface that appears when working on drawings. The drawing ribbon
arranges commands into logical tasks through tabs and groups.
Module 3 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Understanding the Folder Browser
Ed
uc
a
nl
O
tio
na
lU
se
The Folder Browser is divided into:

Common Folders
Folder Tree
The Folder Browser enables you
to:
Browse folders.
View In Session objects.
View contents of your Desktop,
My Documents, and Network
Neighborhood.
Browse directly to the Working
Directory.
Resize the width by dragging
the sash control.
Click the sash expand/collapse
buttons to close the Navigator.
The Folder Browser is a pane in the Navigator that enables you

to browse the folders on your computer and network.
The Folder Browser Pane
Fo
r
Folder Browser Theory

The Navigator is a pane in the Pro/ENGINEER user interface that contains a
series of tabs across the top. One of those tabs is the Folder Browser. By
default, Pro/ENGINEER launches with the Folder Browser open. The Folder
Browser enables you to browse the folders on your computer and network.
You can resize the Folder Browser width by dragging the sash control or
close the Navigator entirely by clicking the sash expand/collapse buttons.
The Folder Browser is divided into the Common Folders and the Folder Tree.
The Folder Tree

The Folder Tree enables you to browse your computer's folder structure. By
default, the Folder Tree is collapsed at the bottom of the Folder Browser
window. You can also use the Folder Tree to set a new working directory, add
folders to the Common Folders, as well as add, delete, and rename folders
on your computer. The contents of a folder selected in the Folder Tree are
displayed in the Browser.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 5
The Common Folders

The Common Folders area of the Navigator contains folders that, when
selected, direct you to the folder location in the Folder Tree or Browser. To
add a folder to this area of the interface, right-click the folder in the Folder
Tree or Browser and select Add to common folders. The six standard
Common Folders include:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
In Session Enables you to view all files currently In Session.

Desktop Enables you to view the contents of your Desktop.
My Documents Enables you to view the contents of your My Documents
folder.
Working Directory Enables you to view the contents of the current
Working Directory.
Network Neighborhood Enables you to view the contents of your
Network Neighborhood.
Favorites Enables you to view the folders or Web sites you have
designated as favorites. To access your favorites you could also select the
Favorites tab from the top of the Navigator.
Module 3 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Understanding the Web Browser
nl
O
na
lU
se
You can perform the

following tasks:
Browse the file
system.
Preview
Pro/ENGINEER
models.
Open Pro/ENGINEER models.
Browse and
Navigate Web
pages.
Set the Working
Directory.
Cut/Copy/Paste/Delete folders and
objects.
The Web Browser is an embedded Pro/ENGINEER window that

enables you to perform context-sensitive tasks.
The Web Browser
tio
Understanding the Web Browser Theory
Ed
uc
a
The browser is an integrated content viewer within Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire.

It works in conjunction with the Folder Browser so you can find files on your
computer as well as browse Web pages. The browser is embedded in the
Pro/ENGINEER interface, and slides over the graphics window. The Web
browser is divided into four sections: file list, preview window, browser
controls, and sash.
Fo
r
File List Displays the contents

of a folder selected in the Folder
Browser. You can set either List
or Details display, filter the list
based on file type, or display
instances and/or all versions of
a file. Double-click a folder to
view its contents or double-click a
file to open it in Pro/ENGINEER.
Select a file to preview it in the
preview window or drag and drop
it into the graphics window to
open it. You can also cut, copy,
paste, and delete folders and
objects in the File List.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 7
Preview Window When a

model is selected from the file list,
you can dynamically preview it by
expanding the preview window.
You can Spin, Pan, and Zoom in
the preview window to observe
model geometry. You can also
edit the model display. By default,
the preview window is collapsed
at the bottom of the browser.
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Browser Controls The Web browser contains standard control buttons

Back, Forward, Stop, Refresh, Home, and Print, and supports tabbed
browsing. Select a sub-folder to view its contents in the browser, or type
a Web address in the Address field. Click the arrow next to a folder in
the Address field to view its contents or begin typing the name of the
desired file or folder in the Search field to dynamically filter the folder's
contents in the browser. You can switch between tabs by clicking on the
desired one, as well as add and close tabs.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Sash Enables you to open

or close the browser, as well
as adjust its width. To open
or close the browser, click the
expand/collapse buttons on the
sash. To adjust the width of the
browser, drag the window sash.
The Web browser also displays other context-sensitive information,

including model and feature information.
Module 3 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Understanding the Window Menu
nl
The Window Menu
na
lU
se
A window must be active to use

all applicable Pro/ENGINEER
features.
The word Active appears on the
title bar of the active window next
to the model name.
The active model has a dot next to
its name in the Window menu.
The Window Menu contains commands for activating, opening,

closing, and re-sizing Pro/ENGINEER widows. You can also
switch between open windows.
Switching Between Open Windows
An Active Window
The Importance of the Active Model
Ed
uc
a
tio
Pro/ENGINEER enables you to have multiple windows open at the same time,
each containing a different model. This is a common occurrence during the
design process. However, at any given moment, all applicable functionality
is available only on the active model. Click Window > Activate to activate
the model in the window you selected, or click Window > MODEL_NAME
to activate a different open window. You can determine which window is
active in two different ways:
Fo
r
The word Active appears on the title bar of the active window next to the
model name.
The active model has a dot next to its name in the Window menu.
Other Window Menu Functions
In addition to activating windows and switching between open windows, the

following additional functions are available in the Window menu:
Create a new window - When a part or assembly is open, click Window
> New to create a new window with the current object present in the new
window. This new window becomes the active window.
Close a window - Clicking Window > Close closes the active window.
If there was an object in that window, the object remains in memory. If
only one window was open, the object is removed from the window and
the window remains open.
Resize a window - You can resize the Pro/ENGINEER window by
clicking Window > Maximize, Window > Default Size, and Window
> Restore. You can also click the maximize or minimize buttons in the
window's title bar.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 9
Setting the Working Directory and Opening and

Saving Files
The Working Directory is the location for opening files from and
saving new files to.
nl
Pro/ENGINEER is started in the

default working directory.
Different working directories can
be set.
New working directory locations
are not saved upon exiting
Pro/ENGINEER.
na
lU
se
Working Directory Common Folder
Set Working Directory in Folder Tree
tio
Working Directory Theory
uc
a
The working directory is the designated location for opening and saving
files. Typically, the default working directory is the directory from which
Pro/ENGINEER is started. However, there are three methods to define a
new working directory:
Fo
r
Ed
From the Folder Tree or Browser Right-click the folder that is to be the
new working directory and select Set Working Directory.
From the File menu Click File > Set Working Directory and browse to
and select the directory that is to be the new working directory. Click OK.
From the File Open dialog box Right-click the folder that is to be the new
working directory and select Set Working Directory.
You can browse directly to the working directory at any time by
selecting the Working Directory common folder from the Navigator.
The new working directory setting is not saved upon exiting

Pro/ENGINEER.
Opening Files
You can use any of the following methods to open a file:
Browse to the desired folder using the Navigator (either with Common
Folders or through the Folder Tree) to display its contents in the browser.
Then, you can either double-click the file in the file list, or right-click the
file in the file list and select Open.
Module 3 | Page 10
2009 PTC
You can also drag the file from the file list onto the graphics window.
Click File > Open from the main menu or Open
from the main toolbar
and the File Open dialog box appears. Browse to the file, select it, and
either double-click it or click Open.
The File Open dialog box is the equivalent of the Navigator and
Browser combination in the main interface.
Saving Files
You can use any of the following methods to save a file:
Click File > Save from the main menu.
Saving a Copy of Files
na
lU
se
nl
Click Save
from the main toolbar. By default, a file is saved to the
current working directory. However, if a file is retrieved from a directory
other than the working directory and then saved, the file saves to the
directory from which it was retrieved.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
You can also save a copy of an existing file. Saving a copy enables you to
create an exact copy of a file, but with a different name. When saving a
copy of an assembly, you must also decide what to do about its dependent
components. You can do nothing, or save a copy of them also and either
rename them with a suffix or give them all new names.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 11
PROCEDURE - Setting the Working Directory and

Opening and Saving Files
Scenario
Set the working directory, and open and save a file.
nl
na
lU
se
1. In the Folder Browser

, click
Working Directory
.
Click Folder Tree to expand it.
If necessary, expand the
Intro_ProE_WF5 folder and
click Module_03 to view its
contents in the Browser.
Right-click the Sample_Topic
folder and select Set Working
Directory.
Set the working directory, open a file, and then save it.
Task 1:
uc
a
tio
For each procedure in

this course, the working
directory to be set is
specified in the header at
the top.
Fo
r
Ed
2. In the Browser, double-click

Sample_Topic to view its
contents.
Select NUT.PRT.
Click and drag the Preview
window to expand it.
In the Preview window,
right-click and select Refit.
Double-click NUT.PRT to open
it.
3. Click Save
Click OK.
Module 3 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Set a new working directory, open a new model, and then save it.
1. In the Folder Tree, expand the

Sample_Topic folder.
2. Right-click Sample_Subfolder
and select Set Working
Directory.
nl
3. Double-click Sample_Subfolder
to view its contents in the
Browser.
na
lU
se
4. Double-click SCREW.PRT to
open it.
tio
5. Click the Folder Browser
uc
a
6. In the Folder Tree, right-click the

Sample_Topic folder and select
Set Working Directory.
Fo
r
Ed
.
7. Click Save
Notice that even though the
working directory is set to
Sample_Topic, the file is
saved to Sample_Subfolder.
Click OK.

the main toolbar.
from
9. Close the Folder Tree in the Folder Browser
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 13
Managing Files in Pro/ENGINEER
nl
In Session in the Folder Browser

and File Open Dialog Box
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
An object in system memory is In

Session.
Erasing Memory (RAM)
Erase Current
Erase Not Displayed
Version Numbers are increased by
one each time you save the model.
Deleting Models
Delete All Versions
Delete Old Versions
Renaming Models
Rename On Disk and In
Session
Rename In Session
Pro/ENGINEER is a memory-based system, meaning that files

are stored within RAM while you work on them.
Ed
The Rename Dialog Box
Model Versions
Fo
r
Understanding In Session Memory and Erasing Models from It

Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire is a memory-based system, which means that files
you create and edit are stored within system memory (RAM) while you are
working on them. It is important to remember that until you save your files,
you risk losing them if there is a power outage or system crash. When a
model is in system memory, it is referred to as being In Session.
Models are stored In Session (in system memory, or RAM) until you either
erase them or exit Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire. When you close the window that
contains a model, the model is still In Session. This is especially important
if you are working on files that have the same name but are in various
stages of completion, such as in this course. Both the Folder Browser and
File Open dialog boxes have an icon that will cause only models In Session
to be displayed.
There are two different methods to erase models from session:
Current Only the model in the current window is erased from system
memory (and the window closed). You can click File > Erase > Current
Module 3 | Page 14
2009 PTC
from the main menu to erase the current window's contents from system
memory.
Not Displayed Only erases from system memory those models that
are not found in any Pro/ENGINEER windows. You can click Erase Not
Displayed
from the main toolbar or you can click File > Erase > Not
Displayed from the main menu.
Erasing models does not delete them from the hard drive or network storage
area; it only removes them from that session.
Understanding Version Numbers
nl
Every time you save an object, you write it to disk. Rather than overwriting
the current file on disk, the system creates a new version of the file on disk
and gives it a version number that increments each time the file is saved.
This is also known as a dot number, and can be seen in the lower-right figure.
na
lU
se
Deleting Models
Deleting files permanently removes them from the working directory on your
hard drive or network storage area. Be careful when deleting files; you
cannot undo deleted files.
There are two different methods to delete models:
uc
a
Renaming Models
tio
Old Versions The system deletes all but the latest version of the given
file.
All Versions The system deletes all versions of the given file.
If you need to edit the name of any model, you can rename it from directly
within Pro/ENGINEER.
Ed
There are two different methods to rename models:
Fo
r
On Disk and In Session The system renames the file both in system
memory and on the hard drive.
In Session The system renames the file only in system memory.
Problems can result if you rename a file on disk and then retrieve
a model (not already in session) that depends on the previous file
name; for example, a part cannot be found for an assembly.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 15
PROCEDURE - Managing Files in Pro/ENGINEER

Scenario
Erase files from memory and rename a part.
drill_bit_black.prt
Managing_Files
Task 1:
Open and close files to understand the In Session concept.

nl

from the main toolbar and click OK
from the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
from the Folder Browser to view the

3. Click Working Directory
working directory contents in the Browser.
na
lU
se
4. In the Browser, double-click DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT to open it again.

5. Click Folder Browser
from
the top of the model tree.
uc
a
tio
7. In the Browser, double-click

DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT to open
it.
Fo
r
Ed

from the main toolbar to
close the window containing
DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT. This
leaves DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT
still open.
9. Close the Browser window by

clicking the sash collapse button.

from
11. In the Folder Browser, click In
Session
to view in session
contents in the Browser.
Right-click
DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT and
select Open.
Module 3 | Page 16
2009 PTC

the main toolbar.
from

nl
na
lU
se
16. Click In Session

from the
Folder Browser. Notice that
DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT is no
longer in session memory.

from
14. Click OK from the Erase Not

Displayed dialog box to erase
DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT from
system memory.
17. Close the Browser by clicking

the sash collapse button.
Task 2:
Rename DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT and erase it from session.
tio
1. Click File > Rename from the

main menu.
uc
a
2. In the Rename dialog

box, edit the new name to
DRILL_BIT_NEW.
Ed
3. Verify that the Rename on

disk and in session option is
selected.
Fo
r
4. Click OK to complete the

rename.
5. Click OK from the Rename

Success dialog box.

8. Click OK from the Erase Not
Displayed dialog box.

2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 17
Understanding Basic Display Options
nl
O
redraws the screen.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Repaint
Datum Display Options
na
lU
se
Display is controlled independently

for the following datum options:
Datum Planes
Datum Axes
Datum Points
Coordinate Systems
There are four different model
display options:
Shaded
No Hidden
Hidden Line
Wireframe
You can modify the display of both the model and datum types.
Model Display Options
Setting Datum Display
Fo
r
Datum entities are 2-D reference geometry that you use for building feature
geometry, orienting models, dimensioning, measuring, and assembling.
There are four main datum types:
Datum Planes
Datum Axes
Datum Points
Coordinate Systems
The display of each of these datum types is controlled independently by using

the following icons on the main toolbar:
Plane Display
Axis Display
Point Display
Module 3 | Page 18
Enable/Disable datum plane display.

Enable/Disable datum axis display.
Enable/Disable datum point display.
2009 PTC
Csys Display
Enable/Disable datum coordinate system display.
The initial datum display for a given exercise is included after

the specified file to be used for that exercise. For example,
means that you should display datum planes
only, and that you should not display datum axes, datum points,
and datum coordinate systems.
Setting Model Display
There are four different 3-D model display options in the graphics window:
No hidden
nl
The model is shaded according to the view orientation.

Shading
Hidden lines are not visible in shaded view display.
Hidden lines in the model are not displayed.
na
lU
se
Hidden line
Hidden lines in the model are displayed, by default, in a
slightly darker color than visible lines.
Wireframe
Hidden lines are displayed as regular lines. That is,
all lines are the same color.
tio
In the lower-right figure, the same model is displayed in four different ways.
Clockwise from the top left, the display is Shaded, No Hidden, Wireframe,
and Hidden Line.
Repainting the Screen
uc
a
You can repaint a view to remove all temporarily displayed information.

Repainting redraws the screen, and is done either by clicking View > Repaint
Fo
r
Ed
from the main menu or Repaint
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 19
PROCEDURE - Understanding Basic Display Options

Scenario
Edit the datum entity display and model display.
basic_display.prt
Basic_Display
Edit the datum display.
, and Csys Display
Display
na
lU
se
from the main toolbar to

, Point
nl
1. Click Axis Display
Task 1:

from
the main toolbar to disable their
display.
uc
a
tio

from
the main toolbar to enable their
display.
Ed

their display.
Fo
r
5. Click Point Display

to disable
to
6. Click Point Display

to
7. Click Csys Display

to
Module 3 | Page 20
2009 PTC
8. Click Csys Display

from the
2. Click Hidden line
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
1. Click No hidden
main toolbar.
Edit the model display.
nl
Task 2:
to
Fo
r
Ed
3. Click Wireframe
4. Click Shading
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 21
Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation
nl
O
na
lU
se
3-D Orientations using the Keyboard and

Mouse
Ed
uc
a
tio
Keyboard/Mouse
Orientation:
Spin
Pan
Zoom
Turn
Wheel Zoom
Additional Orientation
Options:
Previous
Refit
Named View List
Spin Center
Manipulate the 3-D orientation of your design models in the

Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire graphics window.
The Spin Center
Fo
r
Orientation using Keyboard and Mouse Combinations

To view a model in a specific orientation, you can spin, pan, and zoom the
model using a combination of keyboard and mouse functions. For each
orientation, you press and hold a key and click the appropriate mouse button,
as shown in the following table.
Orientation
Keyboard and Mouse Selection
Spin
Pan
Module 3 | Page 22
2009 PTC
Orientation
Zoom
Turn
Zoom Level
nl
Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function uses
the cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scroll
wheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using the
scroll wheel, as shown in the following table:
Fine Zoom
tio
Coarse Zoom
na
lU
se
Zoom
uc
a
Additional Orientation Options
In addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the following

additional model orientation options are available:
Ed
Previous - Reverts the model to the previously displayed orientation by

clicking View > Orientation > Previous.
Refits the entire model in the graphics window.
Fo
r
Refit
Named View List

Displays a list of saved view orientations
available for a given model. Select the name of the desired saved view,
and the model reorients to the selected view. The default Pro/ENGINEER
template comes with the following views:
Standard Orientation The initial 3-D orientation which cannot be
altered.
Default Orientation Similar to the Standard Orientation, but its
orientation can be redefined to a different orientation.
BACK, BOTTOM, FRONT, LEFT, RIGHT, and TOP.
Enables and disables the spin center. When enabled,

Spin Center
the model spins about the location of the spin center. When disabled, the
model spins about the cursor location. Disabling the spin center can be
useful when orienting a long model, like a shaft.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 23
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation

Scenario
Practice using saved views, the spin center, and basic keyboard and mouse
model orientation.
Basic_3D_Orientation
Task 1:
orient.asm
Use saved views.
nl
and

select LEFT.

from
the main toolbar and select TOP.
Task 2:
Use the spin center.
na
lU
se

and
select Default Orientation.
tio
1. Middle-click and drag to spin the assembly.
2. Spin the assembly again in a different direction.
uc
a
3. Spin the assembly in a third direction.
Ed
The assembly is spinning about the spin center.
Fo
r

5. Click Spin Center
and select Standard Orientation.
from the main toolbar to disable it.
6. Cursor over the lower portion

of the assembly, near the
CHUCK_2.PRT, and spin the
assembly.
7. Click View > Orientation >

Previous from the main menu.
8. Cursor over the upper portion
of the assembly and spin the
assembly. Notice that the center
of rotation is the cursor location.
9. Click Spin Center
from the
main toolbar to enable it.
Module 3 | Page 24
2009 PTC
Task 3:
Pan the assembly.
1. Press and hold SHIFT, then

middle-click and drag to pan the
assembly.
and
select Standard Orientation.
na
lU
se
2. Press and hold CTRL, then

middle-click and drag to the right
to turn the assembly clockwise.
nl
1. Press and hold CTRL, then

middle-click and drag to the
left to turn the assembly
counter-clockwise.
Turn the assembly.
Task 4:

and
Zoom in and out of the assembly.
tio
Task 5:
1. Press and hold CTRL, then middle-click and drag upward to zoom out.
your mouse is equipped with a wheel:

Roll the mouse wheel away from you to zoom out.
Roll the mouse wheel towards you to zoom in.
Press and hold CTRL, then roll the mouse wheel away from you to
coarsely zoom out.
Press and hold SHIFT, then roll the mouse wheel towards you to
finely zoom in.
Fo
r
Ed
3. If
uc
a
2. Press and hold CTRL, then middle-click and drag downward to zoom
in.

and
5. Cursor over the hole next to the
teeth. Press and hold CTRL,
then middle-click and drag
downward to zoom in to the hole.
6. Click Refit
from the main toolbar to refit the model.

2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 25
Understanding the View Manager

The view manager is a powerful content-sensitive dialog box
that enables you to edit how a model displays in the graphics
window.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Use the view manager to

create and manage:
View orientations
Style states
Cross-sections
Explode states
Layer states
The View Manager
Ed
Understanding the View Manager
Fo
r
The view manager ntent-sensitive dialog box that enables you to edit how
a model displays in the graphics window. The view manager contains
numerous tabs that enable you to create and manage the following:
is a powerful co
View orientations
Style states
Cross-sections
Explode states
Layer states
Some important facts about the view manager include:

The active item is indicated by a red arrow next to its name. In the figure,
the active view orientation is the Front.
A plus sign after the name of the active item indicates that it has changed.
You can either save the modified item to capture what has changed, or
double-click it or another item to dismiss the changes. In the figure, view
orientation Front has been modified from how it was saved.
Module 3 | Page 26
2009 PTC
Creating and Managing View Orientations

You can create and edit view orientations using the View
Manager and Orientation dialog boxes.
na
lU
se
nl
Orientation Dialog Box:

Orient by reference.
Two references and two
directions required.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Typical TOP View Orientation
Typical LEFT View Orientation
Typical FRONT View Orientation
Fo
r
Saved View Orientation Theory

A model displays in a certain view orientation when it is first created and
any time it is retrieved. In addition to using mouse and keyboard methods
to orient a model, you can create predefined view orientations and save
them as part of the model. This enables you to set the model orientation in a
repeatable, consistent manner for company standards, drawing creation, and
quick navigation. Not only does a saved view capture the model's orientation,
it also captures the model's level of zoom in the graphics window.
Creating a New View Orientation

You can create a new view orientation using the view manager or the
Orientation dialog box. When you create a new view orientation, a default
name is created for your view. If desired, you can edit the view name. The
new view orientation is automatically created at the current model orientation.
You can edit the view orientation by redefining it. The Orientation dialog box
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 27
enables you to specifically define your model orientation, compared to using

keyboard and mouse functions, which are more approximate.
The view orientations that display in the Orient tab of the view
manager are the same as those that are displayed in the Named
View List
and Orientation dialog box.
Orient by Reference
One method of changing the model orientation in the Orientation dialog box is
to Orient by Reference. The Orient by Reference option enables you to select
references by which to orient the model. Two directions and two references
are required to orient a model.
nl
You can click Undo from the Orientation dialog box to undo any changes you
made. The model returns to its most current view state.
na
lU
se
Creating View Orientations in the Orientation Dialog Box
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
You can click Reorient

from the main toolbar to open the Orientation
dialog box directly. This method will display the saved views directly inside
of the dialog box. Therefore, you can Orient by Reference and save a new
view orientation directly within the dialog box, which is an alternative to using
the view manager.
Module 3 | Page 28
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing View Orientations

Scenario
Create and access saved view orientations.
manage_orient.asm
Manage_Orient
Task 1:
Create view orientations with the view manager.
nl
O
na
lU
se
2. Start the View Manager

Select the Orient tab and click
New.
Edit the name to 3D-1 and
press ENTER.
1. Orient the model as shown.
3. In the view manager, double-click Default Orientation, then

double-click 3D-1.
4. Zoom in on the assembly as
shown.
Create view orientations with the Reorient dialog box.
Ed
Task 2:
uc
a
tio
5. In the view manager, click New.

Edit the Orientation name to
Conn_Rod and press ENTER.
Click Close.
Fo
r

2. Click Reorient
toolbar.
and select Default Orientation.
from the main
3. Select the surface in the upper

figure as Reference 1.
4. Select the surface in the lower
figure as Reference 2.
5. Edit the Reference 2 direction
from Top to Left.
6. Spin the assembly as necessary
and select the surface in the
lower figure again as Reference
2.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 29
7. In the Orientation dialog box,

expand the Saved Views area if
necessary.
In the Name field, type the
name of the saved view as
CYL_HOLE.
Click Save and OK.
Redefine view orientations with the view manager.
2. Orient the model as shown.

Double-click 3D-1.
nl
Task 3:
na
lU
se
3. In the view manager, right-click

on 3D-1(+) and click Save.
4. Click OK from the Save Display

Elements dialog box.
tio
5. In the view manager, double-click

Cyl_Hole.
Right-click Cyl_Hole and
select Redefine.
uc
a
6. Orient the assembly as shown
Fo
r
Ed
7. Select the surface shown in

the upper figure as the new
Reference 1.
In the graphics window, select
the surface shown in the lower
figure as the new Reference 2.
Click OK from the Orientation
dialog box.
8. Click Close from the view

manager.
Module 3 | Page 30
2009 PTC
Creating Style States using the View Manager

Create a style state in an assembly to capture components in
various displays and visibilities.
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Style states are only in assemblies.

Set individual model display (shaded, transparent, wireframe, hidden
line, no hidden).
uc
a
Style State Example
Style States Theory
Fo
r
Ed
A style state is a captured state of component visibility in an assembly.

You can vary component visibility independently of other components. For
example, you can set one component to be displayed as shaded, set another
to be displayed as wireframe, and set still another to be displayed as no
hidden. In the figure, the component display of the cylinder head has been
edited, while the remainder of the assembly remains shaded.
If you redefine a style state you can also edit its component display
to blank, or turn off, the display of any component in the assembly.
Creating a Style State

To create a new style state, click New in the Style tab of the view manager. If
desired, edit the default style name and press ENTER. The Edit dialog box
opens, enabling you to blank (or, in other words, turn off) components from
the graphics window. You can select components either from the graphics
window or from the model tree. You can also select the Show tab and then
set the method of model display. As you select components, their model
display changes to the method currently selected in the Edit dialog box.
As you define component visibilities and displays, the model tree displays
which settings have been specified for the components. When you finish
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 31
creating the style state, the graphics window displays the name of the style
state.
You can also create style states by first editing component displays, and then
capturing the displays in a style state.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
There are two default style states in every assembly: Default Style and
Master Style. The Master Style cannot be modified, but the Default Style
can be modified.
Module 3 | Page 32
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Style States using the View

Manager
Scenario
Create style states.
Style_States
na
lU
se
2. In the main menu, click View >

Display Style > No Hidden.
nl
1. In the graphics window, select

the CYLINDER_4.PRT.
Create a style state using the view manager.
Task 1:
style_states.asm
tio

Ed
uc
a
4. In the view manager, select the

Style tab.
Right-click Master Style and
select Save.
Fo
r
5. In the Save Display Elements

dialog box, edit the Style name to
Cyl_No_Hidden and click OK.
Master Style.
Double-click
CYL_NO_HIDDEN.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 33
Task 2:
Create another style state based on the CYL_NO_HIDDEN style

state.
1. In the graphics window, press

and hold CTRL and select the
ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_4.PRT
and
ENG_BLOCK_REAR_4.PRT.
nl
na
lU
se
4. In the Save Display Elements

dialog box, edit the Style name
to Castings_Transparent and
click OK.

Cyl_No_Hidden and select
Save.
2. Click View > Display Style

> Transparent from the main
menu.

Master Style.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
6. Click Close.
Module 3 | Page 34
2009 PTC
Managing and Editing Appearances
nl
O
The Appearances Manager
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
A company-standard
appearance file is common.
Use the Appearances
Manager to manage, create,
and edit appearances.
Use the appearance
gallery to select and apply
appearances.
Apply appearances to parts,
surfaces, or components.
Clear selected or all
appearances.
You can create and manage appearances and apply them to

your models.
Ed
Appearances Applied
Managing and Editing Appearances Theory
Fo
r
A new model is assigned a greyish-blue, solid appearance by default. The

appearance palette can be used to set a new appearance for an entire model,
surface, or component in an assembly. The appearance gallery contains a list
of user-defined appearances that a company typically creates and distributes
as its standards. Your company-specific appearance gallery is usually loaded
automatically when you launch Pro/ENGINEER.
Appearances within Pro/ENGINEER typically revolve around three main
tasks:
Creating and editing appearances.

Applying and clearing appearances.
Managing appearances.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 35
All appearance operations are initiated from a single icon in the

main toolbar. However, the icon is divided into two parts: the icon
itself, and the down arrow next to it. When you see
in the
content, you should select the down arrow to the right of the icon;
when you see
in the content, you should select the icon itself.
The Appearance Gallery
nl
You access the appearance gallery by clicking Appearance Gallery

from the main toolbar. You must select the arrow portion of this icon to
access the appearance gallery. The appearance gallery is divided into three
distinct palettes:
The Appearance Manager
na
lU
se
My Appearances Displays an available list of user-defined appearances.

Model Displays the appearances that are applied to a component, part,
or surface display.
Library Displays a predefined library of appearances from which to use.
These libraries accurately simulate real world materials including metals
and plastics. You can switch the library that is displayed by expanding
the drop-down list next to it.
tio
The appearance manager enables you to manage your appearances.

You access the appearances manager by clicking Appearance Gallery
uc
a
from the main toolbar and selecting Appearances Manager

.
The Appearances Manager dialog box contains both the contents of the
appearance gallery and the appearance editor.
Ed
Creating and Editing Appearances
Fo
r
An appearance consists of both Color and Highlight Color. You can modify
the properties of both within the appearance editor to create your desired
appearance. You can even apply textures and decals to your appearance.
To edit an appearance within the appearances manager, you must first copy
it into the My Appearances palette. You can copy the appearance from the
Library palette or Model palette by right-clicking and selecting Copy to My
Appearances. You can also select an appearance in the My Appearances
palette and click New Appearance , which copies the appearance to a
new name.
You can also edit an appearance by right-clicking it in the appearance gallery
and selecting Edit. This launches the appearance editor.
Use pre-existing appearances as a starting point to quickly and
easily create new appearances.
Applying Appearances
Once an appearance has been created, you can apply it to entire part models,
part surfaces, or components in an assembly. You can use the selection filter,
Module 3 | Page 36
2009 PTC
if necessary, to filter the item that you wish to apply the appearance. If an
appearance is assigned to a part at the assembly level, the appearance is
saved in the context of the assembly and does not change the appearance
of the part at the part level. You can select the appearance first and then
apply it to the reference, or you can select the reference first and then apply
the appearance.
To apply an appearance, you can click Appearance Gallery
from the
main toolbar and select the desired appearance. This selected appearance
is now the active appearance, and is the appearance that is applied to
the selected references. You can also search for the appearance using the
Search field at the top of the appearance gallery and Appearances Manager.
nl
(the icon itself, not the down arrow portion

Clicking Apply Appearance
of the icon) from the main toolbar enables you to apply the last active
appearance.
Model Appearances versus My Appearances
tio
na
lU
se
Appearances that are applied to a component, part, or surface display in the

Model palette of the appearance gallery and Appearances Manager. You
can modify a Model appearance either within the appearances manager or
within the model appearance editor. This enables you to replace, or edit, the
Model appearance to dynamically change all applied occurrences without
affecting the appearance located in the My Appearances palette. Once
you are satisfied with the modified appearance, you can copy it into the My
Appearances palette within the appearances manager.
Clearing Appearances
uc
a
To clear appearances applied to a component, part, or surface, you can
Ed
either click Clear Appearance

or Clear All Appearance
from the
appearance gallery. When clearing an appearance, you are prompted
to select the references from which you want the appearance removed.
However, the Model appearance is still retained.
Fo
r
For a part, clearing all appearances removes all Model appearances and
reverts the part to its default assigned appearance. For an assembly, clearing
all appearances removes all Model appearances and returns the components
to the appearances they were assigned at the part level.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 37
PROCEDURE - Managing and Editing Appearances

Scenario
Create and apply appearances.
appearance.asm
Appearance
Task 1:
Copy a library appearance into the My Appearances palette.
nl
Appearances Manager
1. Click Appearance Gallery

na
lU
se
2. In the Appearances Manager

dialog box, select the drop-down
in the Library palette and select
std-metals.dmt.
3. Select the
ptc-std-aluminum-polished appearance, right-click, and select
Copy to My Appearances.
Task 2:
uc
a
5. Click Close.
tio
4. Locate and select this new

appearance from the My
Appearances section.
Apply an appearance to assembly components.
Ed
1. Press and hold CTRL and select

GEARBOX_REAR_5.PRT and
GEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT.
Fo
r
2. Click Apply Appearance

Task 3:
Copy and edit an appearance.
and select Appearances Manager
Module 3 | Page 38
2009 PTC
2. Select the
ptc-std-aluminum-polished
appearance sphere from the
Model section.
3. Rightclick and select Copy to
My Appearances.
nl
O
5. Drag the Transparency slider to

70 and click Close.
4. In the My Appearances section

of the dialog box, select the new
<ptc-std-aluminum-polished>
appearance and edit the
name to aluminum-polishedtransparent and press ENTER.
na
lU
se

and select the aluminum-polished-transparent appearance
sphere.
Task 4:
uc
a
tio
7. Press and hold CTRL and select

GEARBOX_REAR_5.PRT and
GEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT, and
then click OK.
Create a new appearance.
Ed
1. Click Tools > Appearances

Manager.
Fo
r
2. In the My Appearances section

of the dialog box, select the
upper-left appearance sphere,
ref_color1.
Click New Appearance
to copy the ref_color1
appearance.
Edit the new appearance
Name to MyColor1 and press
ENTER.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 39
3. In the Basic tab, click the Color

rectangle to edit the color.
Expand the RGB / HSV Slider
section.
Edit the RGB colors to 127,
137, and 145, and click Close.
Task 5:
na
lU
se
nl
4. Click Close from the

Appearances Manager.
Apply an appearance to a part.

CHUCK_5.PRT.
tio
2. Right-click and select Open.

3. Click Apply Appearance
uc
a
4. Select CHUCK_5.PRT from the

model tree and click OK.
Fo
r
Ed

to view
the new part appearance in the
assembly.
Task 6:
Apply an appearance to a group of surfaces.
1. In the model tree, expand

DRILL_CHUCK_5.ASM and select CHUCK_COLLAR_5.PRT.
and select the Black
appearance.
Module 3 | Page 40
2009 PTC
4. Press and hold CTRL, and select

the four surfaces shown.
nl
na
lU
se

to view
the new part surface appearance
in the assembly.
5. Click OK.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 41
Setting Up New Part Models

Your company can create customized templates that can be
used to create new part models.
na
lU
se
nl
Create new parts using the

New dialog box.
Use customized part
templates.
Part templates include:
Datums
Layers
Units
Parameters
View Orientations
tio
New Part Created using Template
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Examples of Parameters
Layers Created from Part Template
Creating New Parts
Create new part models within Pro/ENGINEER either by using File > New, or
clicking New . You type the name of the part and select whether you want
to use a default template or not. Unless you select the Empty template, the
new part will display in the graphics window with some default datum features.
Using Templates
New models should be created using a template. Your company will likely
have created customized templates to be used. Using a template to create a
new model is beneficial because it means that, regardless of who created it,
the model will contain the same consistent set of information, including:
Datums Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and
default coordinate system, all named appropriately.
Module 3 | Page 42
2009 PTC
Layers When every model contains the same layers, management of

both the layers and items on the layer is easier.
Units Most companies have a company standard for units in their
models. Creating every model with the same set of units ensures that no
mistakes are made.
Parameters Every model can have the same standard metadata
information.
View Orientations Having every model contain the same standard view
orientations aids the modeling process.
Creating Parameters
nl
Parameters are metadata information that can be included in a model

template or created by a user in his own part or assembly. Parameters are
important because they enable you to add additional information into part and
assembly models. Parameters have several uses:
tio
na
lU
se
Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be driven

by relations.
Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, the
parameter Cost might have a different value for each instance.
Parameter values can be reported in drawings, or viewed with data
management tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions.
User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, or
component) or to a feature or pattern.
You can create parameters that accept the following types of values:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Real Number Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667,

10.5E3, and PI..
Integer Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257.
String Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (letters
or numbers).
Yes/No Accepts either the YES or NO value.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 43
PROCEDURE - Setting Up New Part Models

Scenario
Create new part models.
New_Part_Models
nl
na
lU
se
1. Click New
from the main
toolbar.
Select Part as the Type and
Solid as the Sub-type.
Edit the Name to new_part.
Notice that the Use default
template check box is
selected.
Click OK.
Create a new part using the default template.
Task 1:
Create New
tio
2. Explore the default datum

features created in the graphics
window and model tree.
uc
a
3. In the model tree, click Show
Fo
r
Ed
and select Layer Tree.

Notice the default layers.
4. Click File > Properties from the

main menu to access the Model
Properties dialog box.
Notice the units that are set.
Click Close.
Module 3 | Page 44
2009 PTC
5. Click Tools > Parameters from the main menu.

6. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter
Value field.
Edit the value to NEW PART and press ENTER.
Click New Parameter
and edit the Name to PURCHASED.
Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default value of NO.
na
lU
se
. Notice the default view

orientations.
nl
Click New Parameter

and edit the Name to PART_NUMBER.
Edit the Type to Integer.
Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289.
Click OK.

again to close it.
Create a new part by selecting a different template.
tio
Task 2:
Ed
uc
a
1. Click New
from the main
toolbar.
Edit the Name to
select_template.
template check box.
Click OK.
Fo
r
2. In the New File Options dialog

box, select the inlbs_part_solid
template.
Click OK.
3. Again, notice the datum features.

5. Notice the units that are set.
6. Click Close.
2009 PTC
Module 3 | Page 45
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 3 | Page 46
2009 PTC
Selecting and Editing
4
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Before you can edit design models or create new features on models, you
have to be able to select within Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire. Selection enables
you to choose features, geometry in a part model, or components in an
assembly. Once a selection is made, you can perform a variety of operations
including editing. Editing enables you to modify not only dimensions of
existing design models or features, but you can also edit shape, size,
location, and visibility.
Objectives
uc
a
tio
In this module, you learn the different ways to select different items in
Pro/ENGINEER as well as understand the feedback the system provides you
both before and after item selection.
Fo
r
Ed

Understand the basic Pro/ENGINEER mouse controls, keyboard shortcuts,
and color feedback.
Understand the purpose of the model tree, its basic columns, and available
display filters.
Select items using Direct Selection, Query Selection, and the Search Tool.
Filter the selection of items using Selection Filters.
Activate, edit, hide/unhide, suppress/resume, delete, and regenerate
models and features.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 1
Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Basic Controls
nl
O
Preselection Highlighting
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
System Color Assignments in the

graphics window:
Cyan Preselection
Highlighting
Red Selected Geometry
Yellow Preview Geometry
Keyboard and mouse actions
perform different functions:
Cursor Over (Preselection
Highlight)
Query to Next Item
Select
Clear Selection
The graphics window provides you with color-based feedback to

mouse and keyboard inputs.
Preview Geometry
Selected Geometry
Fo
r
Understanding Color-Based Feedback

Pro/ENGINEER provides you with color-based feedback during various
operations you are performing on models in the graphics window. The
following list explains the system color assignments:
Cyan: Preselection Highlighting When you cursor over a model or an
area of a model, various geometry will outline in the cyan color. This is
called Preselection Highlighting, which is an indicator of what would be
selected if you were to click that location.
Red: Selected Geometry Once you cursor over and select geometry, it
changes to red.
Yellow: Preview Geometry New geometry in a model displays in yellow,
enabling you to preview the completed model. In an assembly, a new
component being assembled displays in light yellow and once it is fully
constrained displays in darker yellow. This yellow preview color is very
Module 4 | Page 2
2009 PTC
beneficial; it provides you feedback when you create valid geometry during
creation.
These same three colors apply for both features created in a part
and components in an assembly.
Mouse and Keyboard Controls for Making Selections

Different combinations of keyboard and mouse controls enable you to use
different methods to make different selections. The following table displays
the keyboard and mouse selections that comprise various selection types:
Keyboard and Mouse
Selection
na
lU
se
Query to Next Item (Feature or

Component Beneath)
Over Geometry
Preselection Highlighting (Cyan color)
nl
Selection Type
Until Highlighted
Select Highlighted Geometry (Red

color)
tio
Add or Remove Items from Selection
uc
a
Select Range of Geometry (Chain / Set

Selection)
On Background
Fo
r
Ed
Clear Selection
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 3
Using Drag Handles

Drag handles are graphical objects used to manipulate geometry
or components during creation or redefinition in real time.
na
lU
se
nl
Drag handles are used to:

Resize geometry.
Reorient geometry.
Move geometry.
Reference geometry.
Adjust component offset.
Access context-sensitive right
mouse button options.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Dragging Piston Extrude Depth
Fo
r
Adjusting Piston Pin Component

Offset
Dragging Copied Ring Groove Cut
Drag Handle Theory
Drag handles are small, white squares that display in the graphics window.
These graphical objects are used to manipulate geometry during creation
or redefinition in real time. Using your mouse, drag the handles to resize,
reorient, move feature geometry in a model, or reference geometry. In an
assembly, drag the handle to adjust component offset. Your changes display
dynamically in the graphics window. Right-click a drag handle to access
context-sensitive menu options.
You can use various keyboard and mouse combinations to modify how the
drag handle is used. The following table displays dragging options comprised
of various keyboard and mouse combinations on a drag handle.
Module 4 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Keyboard and Mouse

Selection
Dragging Option
Adjust Drag Handle Resize, reorient,

move, and reference geometry; adjust
component offset.
Snap Drag Handle Reference
geometry such as a datum plane, edge,
point, vertex, or surface.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Access context-sensitive menu options.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 5
Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts are used to quickly perform commonly used
functions.
Keyboard shortcuts can be used

for:
Common file operations
Common edit operations
Common view operations
Keyboard and Mouse
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
The CTRL Key
Keyboard Shortcuts Theory
Ed
You can use various keyboard shortcuts to quickly perform commonly used
functions. Keyboard shortcuts facilitate a more efficient experience in the
user-interface by eliminating the need to move the mouse to make icon or
menu selections.
Fo
r
Except for the Delete operation, all keyboard shortcuts use the CTRL
key on your keyboard in conjunction with another letter key. There are
keyboard shortcuts for various areas of Pro/ENGINEER usage, including file
operations, edit operations, and view operations.
The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various file operations.
Keyboard Shortcut
File Operation
CTRL + N
New Create a new object.
CTRL + O
Open Open an existing object.
CTRL + S
Save Save the active object.
The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various edit operations.
Module 4 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Keyboard Shortcut
Edit Operation
CTRL + G
Regenerate Regenerate model.
CTRL + F
Find, or Search Search for, filter,

and select items in the model by
rule.
DEL
Delete Delete selected features.

Copy Copy selected features.
CTRL + V
Paste Paste selected features.
CTRL + Z
Undo Undo last operation.
CTRL + Y
Redo Redo last operation.
na
lU
se
nl
CTRL + C
The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various view operations.
Keyboard Shortcut
View Operation
Repaint Redraw the current view.
CTRL + R
Standard Orientation Display

object in standard orientation.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
CTRL + D
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 7
Understanding the Model Tree

The model tree lists the features in a model, in the order in which
they were created. The model tree also displays the order of the
parts and sub-assemblies in an assembly.
na
lU
se
nl
The model tree enables you to:

Visualize model features.
Visualize feature order.
Select items.
Edit items.
Show options:
Layer/Model tree
Expand/Collapse all
Preselection highlighting
Highlight geometry
Ed
uc
a
tio
The Model Tree
Layer Tree
Show Menu Options
Fo
r
Model Tree Basics
The model tree is part of the Navigator window and, by default, displays along
the left side of the main interface. When you open a part model, assembly, or
drawing, the Navigator automatically changes its display to the model tree.
The model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in the
order created as well as the display status (hidden/unhidden, suppressed)
of those features and components. The model tree can also be customized
to display other information.
The model tree can be used in the following ways:
Visualize model features/assembly components The model tree displays

all features that comprise a model. For assemblies, the model tree also
displays the components that comprise that assembly, as well as the
assembly constraints for each assembled component.
Visualize feature order/component assembly order A model's features
are displayed in the order in which they were created, from top to bottom.
Module 4 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Similarly, an assembly's components are displayed in the order in which

they were assembled, from top to bottom.
Selection Selecting a feature or component in the model tree causes
that feature or component to become selected in the graphics window.
Editing The model tree can be used to edit features or components,
their display, or their name.
Since the model tree is part of the Navigator, it has a sash that can control
the width or whether the model tree window is open or closed. The sash
control can be seen in the top figure of the slide.
Model Tree Show Options
nl
The Show menu is located at the top of the model tree and is accessed by
clicking Show
, as shown in the lower-right figure. The Show menu
contains the following options:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Layer/Model Tree Shown in the lower-left figure on the slide, this option
toggles the model tree to the layer tree so that all layers associated with a
model, assembly, or drawing are displayed. If the layer tree is displayed
and the Show menu is selected, the Layer Tree menu selection is replaced
by the Model Tree menu selection.
Expand All Fully expands every branch within the model tree and
mechanism tree.
Collapse All Fully collapses every branch within the model tree and
mechanism tree.
Preselection Highlighting Toggles on or off preselection highlighting. If
on, when you cursor over an item in the model tree it is preselected in the
graphics window. By default, this option is turned off.
Highlight Geometry Toggles on or off Highlight Geometry. If on, when
you select an item fromthe model tree it is also selected (in red) in the
graphics window.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 9
Understanding Model Tree Filters
nl
Use model tree filters to control both item and feature type
display.
Model Tree Items Dialog Box
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Model Tree Features Filter Before

and After
Model Tree Used Sketches

Before and After
Ed
Model Tree with Suppressed Objects

Turned On
Model Tree Filters Theory
Fo
r
The model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in the

order created. You can filter what is displayed in the model tree both in terms
of item display and feature types. The filtering of item display and feature
types is controlled by the Model Tree Items dialog box, shown in the top-left
figure. Open the Model Tree Items dialog box by clicking Settings
the top of the model tree, and then selecting Tree Filters.
from
The filters applied to the model tree are unique to each window except in the
case of assemblies, where applied filters only propagate to sub-assemblies
of assemblies.
Controlling Model Tree Item Display

The display of the following specific types of items is controlled on the left
side of the Model Tree Items dialog box:
Features The top-right figure shows the model tree with the display of
features turned on and off. Notice that when features are turned off, they
are turned off in both the assembly and part levels of the model tree. When
Module 4 | Page 10
2009 PTC
nl
features are turned off in the assembly, you can only see the components
that are assembled, but nothing more granular.
Placement folders Toggles the display of component placement
constraints within assembly components.
Annotations Toggles the display of annotations.
Suppressed Objects Toggles the display of suppressed features and
components. Suppressed objects in the model tree are preceded with
a black square. In the bottom-left figure, the EDGE_ROUNDS and
LUBE_HOLE features are suppressed. If the display of suppressed objects
was turned off, these two features would not be visible in the model tree.
Incomplete Objects Toggles the display of incomplete features.
Excluded Objects Toggles the display of excluded components.
Blanked Objects Toggles the display of blanked mold/cast components.
Envelope Components Toggles the display of envelope components.
Copied References Toggles the display of copied references.
na
lU
se
Controlling Model Tree Feature Types Display
The display of feature types is a more granular method of determining which

level of feature display you want. In the Feature Types section of the Model
Tree Items dialog box, you can control specifically which features to display
or not display in the model tree:
Ed
uc
a
tio
Datum Planes
Datum Axes
Curves
Datum Points
Coordinate Systems
Rounds
Auto Round Members
Cosmetics
Sketches
Used Sketches Used sketch features are those sketches that are used
in another feature, like an Extrude or Revolve feature. When a sketch
is used it is automatically changed to a hidden status, as shown in the
lower-right figure.
Fo
r
Saving Model Tree Display

The model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. Click
Settings
from the top of the model tree and select Save Settings File to
save the current model tree display. The default save location is the working
directory, and the default settings file name is tree.cfg. You can configure
Pro/ENGINEER to always consider tree.cfg as the default model tree display.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 11
Understanding Basic Model Tree Columns

Add additional columns of information to the model tree display.
nl
Basic information columns that

can be added include:
Feat #
Feat ID
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Adding Columns to the Model Tree
Viewing Added Columns in

the Model Tree
Fo
r
Basic Model Tree Columns Theory

You can add informational columns to the model tree, including:
Feat # Displays the feature number of each feature in the model tree.
The first feature created in a model is feature number one, and each
consecutive feature is assigned an ascending integer increment.
Feat ID Displays the feature ID of each feature in the model tree. The
feature ID is a unique number that is assigned by Pro/ENGINEER to each
feature that is created.
The information displayed in these columns can be obtained using other
methods, but this particular method ensures that it is always displayed
directly with no querying required. You can add other informational columns
in addition to Feat # and Feat ID. In addition, you can add other column
types of information including model parameters, feature parameters, layer
information, and mass property information. You access the Model Tree
Columns dialog box by clicking Settings
Module 4 | Page 12
from the top of the model tree

2009 PTC
and selecting Tree Columns. The order of column display and the width of a
displayed column can be changed in the Model Tree Columns dialog box.
The columns displayed in the model tree are unique to each window except
in the case of assemblies, where displayed model tree columns propagate to
sub-assemblies of assemblies.
Saving Model Tree Column Display

The model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. Once
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
you have added the desired columns to the model tree, click Settings
from the top of the model tree and select Save Settings File. The default
save location is the working directory, and the default settings file name is
tree.cfg. You can configure Pro/ENGINEER to always consider tree.cfg as
the default model tree display.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 13
Selecting Items using Direct Selection
nl
O
na
lU
se
Select Components in Model Tree or

Graphics Window
uc
a
tio
You can direct select:

Components
Features
You can perform direct
selection in:
The graphics window
The model tree
Select multiple items using
CTRL.
Select a range of items using
SHIFT.
Multiple ways to de-select.
Direct selection occurs when you place the mouse cursor over a
feature or component and click to select.
Ed
The CTRL Key
Select Features in Model Tree or

Graphics Window
Fo
r
Selecting Items using Direct Selection

After selecting features, geometry, or components in a model, assembly, or
drawing, you are able to make modifications to the selected items. Direct
selection is one of the three basic methods of selection.
Direct selection occurs when you place your mouse cursor over a feature or
component and click to select it. Some key factors about direct selection
include:
You can perform direct selection on both components in an assembly and
features in a model.
You can perform direct selection in both the graphics window on a model
or assembly, and in the model tree. When you initially cursor over a
model in the Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire graphics window, the component or
feature preselects in the cyan color. When you select the item, it becomes
highlighted in red.
The selected item is dependent on whether you have a part or assembly
open. If you have a part open, a selected feature highlights in a red
Module 4 | Page 14
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
wireframe. If you have an assembly open, the selected component

highlights in a red wireframe.
You can select multiple items by using the CTRL key.
You can select a range of items from the model tree using the SHIFT key. If
you select an item, press SHIFT and select a second item, the entire range
of items in between is also selected.
You can de-select components or features three different ways:
Press CTRL and click the selected item again.
Click in the graphics window background.
Click Edit > Select > Deselect All from the main menu.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 15
PROCEDURE - Selecting Items using Direct Selection

Scenario
Select items using the direct selection method.
direct_selection.asm
Direct_Select
Task 1:
Select components using direct selection.
4. De-select the component.
nl
na
lU
se
3. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT from

the model tree.

graphics window to de-select the
component.

the graphics window.
uc
a
tio
5. Press CTRL and select

and
ENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRT
from the graphics window.
Ed

from the graphics window to
de-select it.
Fo
r

ENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRT
from the model tree to de-select
it.
8. Press CTRL and select the two

BOLT_5-18_6.PRT and the three
BOLT_5-28_6.PRT from the
model tree.
9. Click Edit > Select > Deselect

All from the main menu.
Module 4 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Select features using direct selection.

the graphics window, right-click,
and select Open.
2. Select the hole from the

graphics window. Notice that
the feature highlights in the
graphics window and model tree,
and that the feature name is
SPARK_PLUG_HOLE.
na
lU
se

SPARK_PLUG_HOLE and
BASE_ROUND from the
graphics window.
nl
3. De-select the feature.

SPARK_PLUG_HOLE from
the graphics window to de-select
it.
uc
a
tio

BASE_ROUND from the model
tree to de-select it.
7. Press CTRL and select the four

mount hole features from the
model tree.
Fo
r
Ed
8. Click Edit > Select > Deselect

All.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 17
Selecting Items using Query Selection

Query selection enables selection of features, geometry, or
components that are hidden beneath another item.
na
lU
se
nl
Query Selection:
Select by querying the model.
Select using the Pick From List.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Pick From List
Fo
r
Original Model, Cursor Over to Highlight, Query to Highlight, Select
Selecting Items using Query Selection
Query selection is one of the three basic methods of selection. Query

selection enables you to select features, geometry, or components that are
hidden beneath another feature or model. For example, in the lower figure,
you may want to select the piston so you can change the overall height of the
part. However, the cylinder part obstructs your attempts to click and select
the piston. In this situation, you can easily query and select the piston. There
are two methods of query selection:
Select by querying the model When you select a model directly in the
Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire graphics window, the blue edges designate a
preselected item. By right-clicking the preselected model or feature, you
can query directly through the initial model or feature to the next model or
feature. You can continue to right-click to query the next model or feature.
When you have queried to the desired model or feature, you then click to
make your selection.
Module 4 | Page 18
2009 PTC
Select using the Pick From List The Pick From List is similar to querying
the model, except that all of the query possibilities are listed in the dialog
box for the cursor location. To activate the Pick From List, you cursor over
the location you want to query and right-click and select Pick From List.
Items highlighted in the Pick From List menu also preselect in the graphics
window.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Remember:
Cursor over to highlight, right-click to query, and click to select.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 19
PROCEDURE - Selecting Items using Query Selection

Scenario
Use query selection in an assembly and part model.
query_select.asm
Query_Select
Task 1:
Use query selection in an assembly.
na
lU
se
nl
1. Cursor over the assembly.
uc
a
tio
2. Right-click to query until the

PISTON_9.PRT highlights, and
then click to select it.
Ed
3. Move the cursor down slightly

until the CYLINDER_9.PRT
model preselects.
Fo
r
4. Press CTRL, then right-click and

select Pick From List.
It is necessary for you
to right-click and hold to
display pop-up menus.
5. Still pressing CTRL, select

CONNECTING_ROD_9.PRT
from the Pick From List dialog
box.
Click OK.
Module 4 | Page 20
2009 PTC
6. Press CTRL and cursor over

PISTON_9.PRT. Right-click to
query until the PISTON_9.PRT
highlights, and then select it.
na
lU
se

CYLINDER_9.PRT. Right-click
and select Open.
nl
Use query selection in a part model.
Task 2:
7. This de-selects the component.
2. Cursor over the bottom, center

area of the CYLINDER_9.PRT.
tio
3. Right-click and select Pick From

List.
uc
a
4. In the Pick From List dialog

box, click the down arrow until
the CYLINDER_CUT feature is
preselected..
Ed
5. Click OK from the Pick From List

dialog box.
Fo
r
7. Cursor over the area where

the CYLINDER_CUT feature is
located, right-click to query until
the CYLINDER_CUT feature
highlights, and then select it.
8. Orient the model to observe the
CYLINDER_CUT feature.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 21
Using the Search Tool

The Search Tool is a powerful method for selecting many types
of objects.
na
lU
se
nl
Search by various methods and

then select items.
Look For
Look By
Look In
Name
Found/Selected Objects
Ed
uc
a
tio
The Search Tool
Fo
r
The Found and Selected Lists

Axes Selected using Search Tool
Using the Search Tool

The Search Tool is the third basic method of selection. It includes several
options to search models by a variety of criteria including:
Look For Specifies the type of items you want to search for. For
example, you can search for only datum planes, components, or axes.
Look By Specifies the types of items you want to search by. This is a
further refinement to the Look for option, and is context-sensitive based on
the Look for option specified.
Look In Specifies which model or models the search will be conducted
against. If an assembly or sub-assembly is specified as the Look in object,
you can choose whether sub-models are included. You can set the Look
in object either by selecting it from the drop-down list in the Search Tool
Module 4 | Page 22
2009 PTC
dialog box, or you can click Select Model

and select the model from
Name Enables you to refine the search by typing in part or all of the
name of what you want to search for. You can also use wildcards, both at
the beginning and end of the name search string. In the upper-right figure,
wildcards are used to search for all features containing pin in their name.
The items that fulfill the criteria specified display in the Found list on the left
side of the Search Tool. If you select items in the Found list they will preselect
in the graphics window. You can select multiple items using CTRL or SHIFT,
or you can select all items by pressing CTRL + A. Move items to the Selected
list on the right to select them in the graphics window and therefore perform
operations.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
The Search Tool becomes invaluable as the complexity of your model

increases.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 23
PROCEDURE - Using the Search Tool

Scenario
Use the Search Tool.
search_tool.asm
Search_Tool
Use the Search Tool in an assembly model.
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
2. In the Search Tool dialog box,

edit the Look for value to
Component.
Type *gear_shaft_11 as the
Criteria Value.
Click Find Now.
In the Found list, select the first
component, press and hold
CTRL, and select the second
and third components.
Select REDUCTION_GEAR_
SHAFT_11 and click Add Item
.
Click Close.
De-select the component.
from the main toolbar to start the Search Tool.
nl
1. Click Find
Task 1:
3. Click Find
Search Tool.
to start the
Fo
r

edit Look for to Feature.
Edit Look by to Datum Plane.
Edit the Criteria Value to front.
Click Find Now.
5. In the Search Tool dialog
box, edit Look in to
DRILL_CHUCK_11.ASM.
6. Click Find Now.
7. Edit Look in to CHUCK_11.PRT.
8. Click Find Now.

9. In the Found list, click Add Item
and click Close.
Module 4 | Page 24
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Use the Search Tool in a part model.
1. Open
GEARBOX_FRONT_11.PRT.

5. Click Find
Search Tool.
nl
O
na
lU
se

edit Look for to Feature if
necessary.
Edit Look by to Feature.
Edit the Criteria Value to
reduction*
Click Find Now.
Select
REDUCTION_GEAR_HOLE
.
and click Add Item
Click Close.
2. Press CTRL + F to start the

Search Tool.
to start the
Ed
uc
a
tio

edit Look for to Datum Plane.
Edit the Criteria Value to rib*.
Click Find Now.
Select RIB_PLANE_3 and
.
click Add Item
Click Close.
Fo
r
7. De-select the datum plane.

.
8. Click Repaint
9. Click Find

edit Look for to Axis.
Edit the Criteria Value to *pin*
Click Find Now.
Select
ALIGNMENT_PIN_TOP and
.
click Add Item
Click Close.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 25
Using the Smart Selection Filter

The smart filter enables you to select the most common types of
items that are valid for the current geometrical context.
na
lU
se
nl
Smart Filter:
The selection of features, geometry, or components is a nested
process.
Select specific items of interest after the initial selection.
Smart filter selection levels:
Feature/Component level.
Geometry level (surfaces, edges, or vertices).
You may need to zoom in for surface selection.
tio
Example of Smart Filter Selection Levels
Using the Smart Selection Filter
Ed
uc
a
Pro/ENGINEER automatically selects the Smart selection filter, if it is

available. When using the Smart selection filter, the selection of features,
geometry, or components is a nested process. This means you can select
specific items of interest after the initial selection. There are two levels of
selection when using the Smart Filter:
Fo
r
Feature/Component Level
Geometry Level
When selecting a part in the graphics window, your initial selection highlights
a feature in a red wireframe. The Smart selection filter then automatically
narrows the selection scope, enabling you to select specific items on that
feature that you wish to either modify or use to create another feature. For
example, you can select an edge where you wish to add a chamfer. The
three specific items that you may wish to select highlight differently, as shown
in the figure. Selected surfaces highlight as red-shaded items; selected
edges highlight in bold red; and selected vertices highlight in red. The entire
selection process occurs automatically. Selection of surfaces usually occurs
easier if you zoom in on that area of the model first.
Assemblies have a similar selection scheme. Components are selected
initially, followed by geometry such as surfaces, edges, and vertices.
The Smart selection filter is not available if you disable preselection
highlighting.
Module 4 | Page 26
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Using the Smart Selection Filter

Scenario
Use the smart selection filter in an assembly and part model.
Smart_Filter
Task 1:
smart_filter.asm
Use the smart selection filter in an assembly.
na
lU
se
nl
1. In the graphics window,

select component
ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_8.PRT.
2. Zoom in to the tab on the

upper-left area of the part.
uc
a
tio
3. Select the planar tab surface.
Fo
r
Ed
4. Select the cylindrical tab surface.
5. Select the edge of the hole in the

tab.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 27
6. Select the vertex on the edge of

the hole.
7. De-select the vertex.
tio
na
lU
se

the BOLT_5-18_8.PRT model,
right-click, and select Open.
nl
1. Press CTRL + D to orient

the assembly to the standard
orientation.
Use the smart selection filter in a part model.
Task 2:
3. Select the hex cut feature.
uc
a
4. Select the edge of the hex cut

feature.
Fo
r
Ed
5. De-select the hex cut edge.
6. Select the top protrusion feature.
7. Select the front cylindrical

surface of the top protrusion
feature.
Module 4 | Page 28
2009 PTC
Understanding Selection Filters

The selection filter provides various filters to help you select
items.
nl
Filters include:
Parts
Features
Geometry
Datums
Quilts
Annotation
tio
na
lU
se
The Selection Filter
Viewing the Selection Filter
uc
a
Understanding Selection Filters
Fo
r
Ed
Each filter in the selection filter narrows the item types that you can select,
enabling you to easily select the item you are looking for. All filters are
context-sensitive, so that only those filters that are valid for the geometrical
context are available. For example, the Parts filter would not be available
while working in a part; rather it would be available while working in an
assembly. Pro/ENGINEER automatically selects the best filter according to
the context. However, you can always change the filter by simply selecting it
from the selection filter.
The following filters are available in Part mode and Assembly mode:
Parts Available in Assembly mode only, enables you to only select

components in the assembly.
Features Enables you to only select features in a part or component
in the assembly.
Geometry Enables you to only select geometry, such as edges,
surfaces, and vertices.
Datums Enables you to only select datum features, including datum
planes, datum axes, datum points, and coordinate systems.
Quilts Enables you to only select surface quilts.
Annotation Enables you to only select annotation features.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 29
PROCEDURE - Understanding Selection Filters

Scenario
Understand how to use the selection filter for parts and assemblies.
selection_filters.asm
Selection_Filters
Task 1:
Use the selection filter in an assembly.
1. Edit the selection filter to Parts.
na
lU
se
nl
2. Select BOLT_5-18_7.PRT from

3. Select CRANKSHAFT_7.PRT
uc
a
tio
4. Notice that BOLT_5-18_7.PRT is

automatically de-selected.
Ed

FLYWHEEL_7.PRT from
Fo
r

CRANKSHAFT_7.PRT from
the graphics window. Notice that
it de-selects.
7. De-select FLYWHEEL_7.PRT.
8. Edit the selection filter to

Features.
round features.
10. De-select the rounds.
Module 4 | Page 30
2009 PTC

hole features.
12. De-select the holes.
na
lU
se
14. Zoom in on
and select the front surface.
nl

Geometry.
15. Zoom in on the

BOLT_5-18_7.PRT component.
16. Select the inner planar surface

on the hex of BOLT_5-18_7.PRT,
as shown on the left.
uc
a
tio
17. Select the top edge on the hex

of BOLT_5-18_7.PRT, as shown
on the right.
18. Select the top vertex on the hex
of BOLT_5-18_7.PRT.
Ed
19. De-select the vertex.
Fo
r

their display.
to
to enable

Datums.
23. Press CTRL and select datum
axis A_4 and datum plane TOP.

2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 31
Renaming Objects
Rename objects to more descriptive names so that they are
easily recognized in the model tree.
na
lU
se
nl
Objects that can be renamed

include:
Features
Components
uc
a
tio
Features Before and After Rename
The Rename Dialog Box
Connecting Rod
Ed
Renaming Features
Fo
r
When you create a feature in a part model, it is automatically assigned a

generic name based on its type. For example, the feature may be called
Sketch 1 or Extrude 2, or Revolve 3. While these names describe the
type of feature, they do not describe what the feature is in the context of the
design. Consequently, it can be helpful to rename the feature to something
more descriptive. The top-right figure shows the model tree before and after
feature renaming has occurred. You can see that the model tree is more
intuitive once the features have been renamed to a descriptive name. It is
much easier to find a feature that needs to be edited.
You can rename model features by using any of the following methods:
Select the feature in the model tree or graphics window, then right-click and
select Rename from either the graphics window or model tree.
Select the feature to be renamed in the model tree. Once selected, select it
again from the model tree.
Click File > Rename from the main menu.
Names can contain up to 31 characters and may not include spaces.
Module 4 | Page 32
2009 PTC
Renaming Components
To avoid assembly failures, you must rename components within the context
of the assembly instead of using Windows Explorer to rename components
on the hard drive.
You can rename components by using either of the following methods:
Rename on disk and in session The system renames the component
both in system memory and on the hard drive.
Rename in session The system renames the component only in system
memory.
Click File > Rename from the main menu to rename components. Within the
Rename dialog box, shown in the lower-left figure, you can click Commands
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
And Settings
, and then select the component to be renamed from either
the model tree or graphics window. You can also rename the assembly in
this dialog box. In fact, this is the default item to be renamed when this
dialog box appears.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 33
Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations

You can easily undo and redo model changes.
Undo and Redo
Capabilities:
Pop-Up Text
Undo List
Redo List
na
lU
se
nl
Pop-Up Text
Undo List
Redo List
tio
Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations Theory
uc
a
You can undo and redo most of the operations performed on a model. The
operations are sequentially stacked in memory as they are performed. You
have access to the undo/redo stack when you click the Undo or Redo icons.
Ed
Operations valid for undo or redo include creating, deleting, editing,

redefining, suppressing, resuming, patterning, and reordering.
Fo
r
The Undo and Redo operations have the following capabilities:

Pop-Up Text A preview of the operation that is to be undone or redone.
Undo List You can select one or many sequential actions to undo.
Redo List You can select one or many sequential actions to redo.
Module 4 | Page 34
2009 PTC
Editing Features and Regenerating
Pause Feature
nl
to update
Ed
uc
a
tio
Use Regenerate
the model.
na
lU
se
Resume Feature
Drag handles.
Context-sensitive right mouse
button options.
Edit:
Enter a value directly on the
model.
Use the Most Recently Used
option.
Edit Definition using:
The dashboard.
Preview Feature
Edit enables you to alter dimensions of a selected feature or

component. Edit Definition enables you to modify feature type,
size, shape, location, references, or options.
Editing a Model
Editing Features using Edit
Fo
r
Edit is a menu selection available from the model tree, pop-up menu, or
the drop-down menu. After choosing Edit, the dimensions of the selected
features or components display in the graphics window.
Using Edit, you can quickly change the dimensions of a selected feature
using one of the two following methods:
Edit directly on the model To edit directly on the model, double-click the
dimension. Type the new dimensional value and regenerate the model.
Edit using the Most Recently Used option When you edit a model,
you can also use the most recently used option. When you double-click
a dimension, a drop-down list displays the most recent values of the
model, as shown in the middle image. You can select a suitable value
and regenerate the model.
The most recently used option only displays recent values from
the current session. It does not display values used in a previous
Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire session.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 35
Editing Features using Edit Definition

Using Edit Definition, you can significantly change the model by redefining
the feature:
Type Change a protrusion into a cut, for example.
Size Make a feature larger or smaller.
Shape Change a round cut into a square cut, for example.
Location Move a cut from one reference to a different reference.
References Change the location of the feature or change the
dimensional references.
Options Change the additional details of the feature, such as its depth.
nl
In Edit Definition, you can modify the model by:
Editing with the dashboard. This is the graphical area in which you can
change a feature's type, size, shape, and location.
2. Editing with drag handles. You can directly change features on a model
by manipulating the drag handle. Your changes display dynamically in
3. Using the various context-sensitive right mouse button options on the
dynamic preview or drag handles.
na
lU
se
1.
Within the dashboard there is a set of icons along the right side that perform
the following operations:
tio
Previews what the completed feature or

Preview Feature
component will look like in the graphics window.
uc
a
Pause Feature
Pauses the current feature's edit definition operation,
enabling you to perform other functions such as inserting datum features.
Resumes a paused feature's edit definition
Ed
Resume Feature
operation.
Regeneration Theory
Fo
r
The Regenerate
function recalculates the model geometry, incorporating
any changes made since the last time the model was saved or regenerated.
It is necessary to regenerate a model after you have edited it. However, if you
edit the definition of a feature, the regeneration is done for you.
Module 4 | Page 36
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Editing Features and Regenerating

Scenario
Edit the UPPER and BASE features of a part model.
edit_regenerate.prt
Edit_Regenerate
Task 1:
Edit the features of a part model.
1. In the model tree, right-click

UPPER and select Edit.
nl
2. Double-click the rear 4

dimension, edit it to 8, and
press ENTER.
na
lU
se
3. Click Regenerate
to
regenerate the geometry.

BASE and select Edit.
tio
It is necessary for you

to right-click and hold to
display pop-up menus.
uc
a
5. Double-click the 8 dimension,

edit it to 16, and press ENTER.
6. Click Regenerate
Ed

BASE and select Edit Definition.
8. Drag the drag handle to 12.
Fo
r
9. Click Complete Feature

the dashboard.
2009 PTC
from
Module 4 | Page 37
nl
tio
na
lU
se
11. In the dashboard, select the

Options tab.
Edit the Side 1 depth to To
Selected
.
Select the lower front surface.
Edit the Side 2 depth to To
Selected
.
Query select the lower rear
surface.

UPPER and select Edit
Definition.
uc
a

BASE and select Edit.
Ed
14. Double-click the 12 dimension

and select 16 from the drop-down
list.
.
Fo
r
15. Click Regenerate
16. Click Undo

from the main
toolbar and Undo 3 Actions.
from the main
17. Click Redo
toolbar three times.
Module 4 | Page 38
2009 PTC
Activating and Editing Models
nl
O
na
lU
se
From an assembly, you can

activate:
Components
Sub-assemblies
You can do the following to the
active component or subassembly:
Edit
Edit Definition
Create features
You can activate components and sub-assemblies within a

top-level assembly and edit their features and components,
respectively.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Viewing the Activated Component
Editing the Definition of a Chamfer

in the Activated Crankshaft
Editing the Number of Fins in

the Activated Flywheel
Fo
r
Activating and Editing Models
From an open assembly, you can activate individual components or

sub-assemblies within the assembly. You can then perform Edit and Edit
Definition operations on features of the activated component or components
of an activated subassembly. You can also create features on the activated
part or sub-assembly in the context of the top-level assembly.
Activating a component or sub-assembly in an assembly is different
than activating a window using the Window menu.
An active component or sub-assembly is denoted in the Pro/ENGINEER
interface in three ways:
A green symbol displays in the model tree next to the active component.
Text in the graphics window states which component is active.
All other non-active components become grayed out in the graphics
window.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 39
PROCEDURE - Activating and Editing Models

Scenario
Activate assembly components and edit their features.
activate_edit.asm
Activate_Edit
nl
na
lU
se
1. In the model tree, expand the

CRANK_10.ASM sub-assembly.
Right-click
FLYWHEEL_10.PRT and
select Activate.
Activate assembly components and edit their features.
Task 1:
tio
2. Expand the FLYWHEEL_10.PRT

in the model tree.
Right-click PATTERN_FINS
and select Edit.
uc
a
3. Double-click the 16
FIN_ROUNDS value, edit it
to 10, and press ENTER.
.
Fo
r
Ed
4. Click Regenerate
5. Click Window > Activate to

activate the top-level assembly.
Module 4 | Page 40
2009 PTC

CRANKSHAFT_10.PRT and
select Activate.
7. Zoom in to the end of the
CRANKSHAFT_10.PRT.
8. Select the chamfer and click
Edit > Definition from the main
menu.
nl
9. Drag the drag handle to a value

of 1.
11. In the model tree, right-click ACTIVATE_EDIT.ASM and select

Activate.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 41
Using Dynamic Edit
nl
Dynamically Editing Depth
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Example feature dimensions

include:
Depth
Rounds/Chamfers
Patterns
Datums
Features are regenerated in real
time.
Child features regenerate in real
time.
The Dynamic Edit operation enables you to dynamically drag a

feature's dimensions or its section entities.
Dynamically Editing a Section
Viewing the Caution Icon
Using Dynamic Edit
Ed
The Dynamic Edit operation enables you to dynamically drag a feature's

dimensions or its section entities. Examples of feature dimensions that can
be dynamically dragged include:
Fo
r
Depth You can drag a feature's depth, as shown in the upper-right figure.
Rounds You can drag a round's radius.
Chamfers You can drag a chamfer's angle and D values.
Pattern Dimensions You can drag dimensions used in a pattern feature.
You can also dynamically edit datum feature dimensions.
The Dynamic Drag operation is not available for features created
using the menu manager. It is also not available for sheetmetal
features at this time.
Features are regenerated in real time when they are dynamically edited.
Additionally, child features also regenerate in real time. Real time
regeneration may be slow if dragging a parent feature in a large model.
If you dynamically edit a feature in such a way that it cannot successfully
regenerate, a caution icon displays next to your cursor and the geometry
displays red, as shown in the lower-right figure. You can simply undo the edit
Module 4 | Page 42
2009 PTC
or dynamically edit the feature back to a successful status. Other downstream

features that do not successfully regenerate display in blue.
Dynamic Edit Right-Mouse Button Options

While using dynamic edit, the following options are available in the
right-mouse button menu:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Show/Hide All Dims Enables you to toggle the display of all dimensions
on or off. This option can be used when you are more concerned about a
feature's shape than its dimensions.
Show/Hide Sketch Dims Enables you to toggle the display of a sketch's
section dimensions on or off. This option can be used to clean up the
display if you are only modifying a feature using drag handles.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 43
PROCEDURE - Using Dynamic Edit

Scenario
Dynamically edit features in a part model.
dynamic-edit.prt
Dynamic_Edit
Task 1:
Dynamically edit features using drag handles.

BASE and select Dynamic Edit.
na
lU
se
3. Click in the background to exit

the dynamic edit operation.
nl
2. Drag the depth handle to 12.

UPPER and select Dynamic
Edit.
5. Drag the front depth handle to 6.
tio
6. Zoom in and drag the rear depth

handle to 6.
uc
a

8. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
Ed

the lower round, right-click, and
select Dynamic Edit.
Fo
r
10. Drag the round radius to a value

greater than 10.
11. Notice the caution icon that
displays next to the cursor.
12. Notice that the round feature has

become red in color.
If the dynamically edited result produces cautions, you can
always undo the operation that caused it.
Module 4 | Page 44
2009 PTC
13. Drag the round radius value

down to 4.
1. Select feature BASE, right-click,

and select Dynamic Edit.
na
lU
se
2. Drag the section to increase the

diameter to approximately 22.5.
nl
Dynamically edit features by dragging sections.
Task 2:

3. Double-click the diameter

dimension, edit it to 22.5, and
press ENTER.

uc
a
tio

feature MAIN and select
Dynamic Edit.
Ed
6. Zoom in slightly and drag

the upper-left section vertex
so that the overall height is
approximately 62 and the
section width at that point is
approximately 8.
Fo
r
7. Edit the dimensions to 62 and 8,

respectively.
8. In the graphics window, click in

the background.
9. Right-click and toggle off
Show/Hide Sketch Dims.
10. Drag the depth handle from 2.5

to 6.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 45
Deleting and Suppressing Items
nl
O
na
lU
se
Suppressed Items in the Model

Tree
Ed
uc
a
tio
Delete:
Is permanent.
Follows Parent/Child Rels.
Suppress:
Items can be restored via
Resume.
Follows Parent/Child Rels.
Resume:
Selected items.
All items.
Suppressing an item removes it from the graphics display and

regeneration cycle, but the item can be resumed. Deleting an
item is permanent.
Fo
r
Viewing Children of Item to

Be Suppressed
Both Parents and Children

Suppressed
Deleting and Suppressing Items
If you delete an item from a model and save it, that item is permanently
removed from the graphical display and regeneration cycle of the model.
Suppressing an item also removes it from the graphical display and
regeneration cycle. However, you can restore a suppressed item by resuming
it. Resuming a suppressed item returns it to the graphical display and
regeneration cycle.
Suppressed items are denoted in the model tree by a black square,
although they can be filtered from the model tree. The upper-right figure
shows two suppressed items.
Suppressing items causes regeneration speed to increase. However,
suppressing items is not meant to be a technique for managing complex
models or large assemblies.
Module 4 | Page 46
2009 PTC
You can resume all suppressed items by clicking Edit > Resume >
Resume All from the main menu.
You can select an object and either delete or suppress from that object to
the end of the model using Edit > Delete > Delete to End of Model or Edit
> Suppress > Suppress to End of Model.
You can select an object and either delete or suppress all objects other than
the selected one and its parents using Edit > Delete > Delete Unrelated
Items or Edit > Suppress > Suppress Unrelated Items.
Handling Parent/Child Relationships
Best Practices
na
lU
se
nl
If you suppress an item that is a parent to another item, the child item
highlights in magenta and the system warns you that the child item will be
suppressed, too. In the lower-left figure, the gear is a parent to the drill
chuck sub-assembly in how it was assembled. Therefore, when the gear
is suppressed, the chuck assembly is also suppressed, as shown in the
lower-right figure. The same parent/child relationships hold true if you try to
delete an item that is a parent to another item. Again, the child item highlights
in magenta and the system warns you that the child item will need to be
deleted, too.
tio
It is recommended that you use Suppress/Resume to temporarily remove

features or components in the graphics window to test design variations. It
is a best practice to remove (delete) all suppressed features or components
before saving your final design.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
If you want to remove non-solid features or components in the graphics

window for the long-term, it is a best practice to use layers or simplified
representations.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 47
PROCEDURE - Deleting and Suppressing Items

Scenario
Delete and suppress items in an assembly.
delete_suppress.asm
Del_Suppress
Task 1:
Delete, suppress, and resume items from an assembly.
4. Click Undo
na
lU
se
3. Click OK from the Delete dialog

box.
2. Click Edit > Delete > Delete

from the main menu.
nl
1. In the model tree, select

DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM.
5. Select DRILL_CHUCK_12.ASM
again.
6. Click Edit > Suppress >
Suppress from the main menu.
uc
a
8. Click Undo
tio
7. Click OK from the Suppress

dialog box.
9. Query select the

FINAL_GEAR_SHAFT_12.PRT.
Ed
10. Right-click and select Delete.

11. Read the contents of the Delete
dialog box and click Cancel.
Fo
r
12. With the component still selected,

right-click and select Suppress.
dialog box.
14. Press CTRL and select both suppressed components from the model
tree.
15. Right-click and select Resume.
Module 4 | Page 48
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Delete and suppress items in a part.
1. Open CHUCK_12.PRT.
2. Select FRONT_ROUND and
press Delete on your keyboard.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Undo
5. Select FRONT_ROUND again.

6. Right-click and select Suppress.
8. Select the radial hole.

9. Right-click and select Delete.
11. Click Undo
na
lU
se
10. Read the contents of the Delete

dialog box and click OK.
nl
7. Click OK.
12. Select the radial hole again.

14. Click OK.
15. Click Undo
tio
13. Right-click and select Suppress.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 49
Editing Feature and Component Visibility

The Hide and Unhide operations respectively remove and
display components or non-solid feature geometry from the
graphic display.
na
lU
se
nl
Hide/Unhide:
Components in an assembly
Datum features
Solid features
Does not affect parent/child
relationships.
Changes are not saved by default.
Save Status
uc
a
tio
Hidden Features in the Model Tree
Hiding Datum Features
Ed
Hiding Components
Editing Feature and Component Visibility
Fo
r
The Hide and Unhide operations respectively remove and display components
or non-solid feature geometry from the graphic display. You can hide items to
enable easier selection and visualization while completing tasks. You may
then unhide items to return them to the display after your tasks are complete.
Hidden objects are grayed out in the model tree. The datum features in
the upper-right figure are hidden.
Hiding objects does not affect parent/child relationships with other
components or features.
Hiding solid geometry features in a part does not remove the geometry
from the display; rather, it hides just the non-solid components of the
feature (such as the axis of a hole) from the display.
Hidden items are placed in the Hidden Items layer in the Layer tree.
You can unhide all hidden objects at once by clicking View > Visibility >
Unhide All. Unhide All does not unhide items that were automatically
hidden by Pro/ENGINEER, such as datums created on the fly or used
sketches.
Module 4 | Page 50
2009 PTC
Saving Feature and Component Visibility

If you want hidden items to open in their still-hidden state the next time the
file is opened (once it has been erased from session), you must use the
Save Status option in the View > Visibility menu to save changes to the
Hide/Unhide status before saving the model; changes to the Hide/Unhide
status are not saved with the model by default.
Best Practices
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
It is recommended that you use Hide/Unhide to temporarily remove non-solid

features or components in the graphics window. If you want to remove
non-solid features or components in the graphics window for the long-term, it
is a best practice to use layers or simplified representations.
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 51
PROCEDURE - Editing Feature and Component Visibility

Scenario
Edit feature and component visibility in assemblies and parts.
feat_comp_visibility.asm
Visibility
Task 1:
Edit component visibility in an assembly.
3. Press CTRL and select all

four BOLT_5-18_13.PRT
components.
nl
O
na
lU
se
2. Click View > Visibility > Hide

from the main menu.

GEARBOX_FRONT_13.PRT
and GEARBOX_REAR_13.PRT.
4. Right-click and select Hide.
uc
a
6. Click Save
Click OK.
tio

LEFT.
Ed
Notice the warning in the message window stating that the layer
display status was not saved.
Fo
r
7. Click View > Visibility > Save Status from the main menu.
8. Click Save
Click OK.
Task 2:
Edit feature visibility in a part.
1. Open CHUCK_13.PRT.
Axis Display
display.
and
to enable their

planes RIGHT, TOP, and FRONT
Module 4 | Page 52
2009 PTC
5. Expand the first Pattern (Hole)

feature in the model tree.
Select each Hole feature to
highlight it.
Select the first Hole id 156,
right-click, and select Hide.
na
lU
se
nl
6. Press CTRL and select the other

two Hole features.
The axis is hidden, but there

is no effect on the hole itself.
tio
9. Click Save
Click OK.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
2009 PTC
Module 4 | Page 53
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 4 | Page 54
2009 PTC
Creating Sketcher Geometry
5
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Most 3-D geometry created in Pro/ENGINEER begins with a 2-D sketched

section. Consequently, sketching is one of the most fundamental, consistently
performed operations.
In this module, you review the theory behind sketching and learn what goes
into creating a robust, predictable sketch. You also learn the tools available
for creating sketch geometry.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Review sketcher theory and understand design intent.
Modify the sketcher display.
Learn and use constraints.
Learn how to sketch lines, centerlines, rectangles, circles, arcs, fillets, and
chamfers.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 1
Reviewing Sketcher Theory

A sketch is a 2-D entity that graphically captures an idea with
lines, constraints, and dimensions.
na
lU
se
nl
2-D sketches are:

Placed on a 3-D model.
Used to create solid features.
Ed
uc
a
tio
2-D Sketch
Fo
r
Sketches are Used to Create Solid

Features
Sketch Placed on a 3-D Model
Reviewing Sketcher Theory
In Pro/ENGINEER, you use the 2-D Sketcher mode to capture your

engineering idea. You sketch your idea using various types of lines which
are then trimmed, constrained, dimensioned, and modified accordingly. An
example of a sketch is shown in the upper-right figure.
This 2-D sketch is then placed into a 3-D model, as shown in the lower-right
figure. Once the sketch is placed, it can be used to create solid features, as
shown in the figures on the left. Notice that the same sketch can be used to
create two completely different types of geometry.
Module 5 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Understanding Design Intent
nl
O
na
lU
se
Design intent is captured in

sketches by:
How it is constrained.
How it is dimensioned.
Capture design intent by using the
Intent Manager to:
Maintain fully defined sketches
at all times.
Maintain weak/strong items.
Design Intent in Sketcher is to create, constrain, and dimension

a sketch in a manner that will cause it to update predictably if
modified.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Freehand Sketch and Desired

Sketch
Fo
r
Design Intent Captured with

Dimensions
Design Intent Captured with

Constraints
Understanding Design Intent Theory
When creating models with Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire, it is critical that you

capture the design intent of the model. Design intent ensures predictable
results when a model is modified. Creating sketch features enables you
to capture design intent. Design intent is captured and can be varied in
sketches by:
How it is constrained Changing how a sketch is constrained affects the
predictable behavior of the sketch, thereby varying design intent.
How it is dimensioned Changing how a sketch is dimensioned affects
the predictable behavior of the sketch, again varying design intent.
Using the Intent Manager to Capture Design Intent

The upper-right figure shows a freehand sketch. No design intent has been
applied to it. When you edit the sketch, it is not known how it will behave.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 3
The middle-right figure shows the desired sketch to be achieved. The Intent
Manager helps you apply design intent to your sketch so it appears as the
middle image, not the top image.
Start by sketching the rough shape of your desired sketch. The Intent
Manager will begin to dynamically apply constraints to help you lock in your
sketch. For example, if you sketch a line approximately vertical, the Intent
Manager will dynamically apply a vertical constraint to that line, helping you
lock in design intent. When you stop sketching, a series of gray dimensions
appears in addition to your constraints.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
The Intent Manager must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times. The
dimensions and constraints maintain the size, shape, and location of all
sketched items, which helps you capture design intent. Modify the default
dimension scheme if needed by editing or adding dimensions so you
properly capture your intended design intent.
The Intent Manager contains both Weak and Strong items.
Weak items are gray, whereas Strong items are light orange.
Dimensions and constraints can be Weak or Strong.
The system will add or remove Weak items as necessary to maintain
the fully constrained sketch.
You cannot delete Weak items.
Strong items are Weak items that were made strong either directly or
by modifying them.
Module 5 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Modifying the Sketcher Display

You can modify the Sketcher Display to enable easier
visualization when completing tasks.
nl
reorients
Showing Dimensions
tio
na
lU
se
Sketch Orientation
parallel to the screen.
The following display options are

available in Sketcher:
Dimensions
Constraints
Grid
Section vertices
Sketcher Display Options
uc
a
Sketcher Display Options
Ed
When you enter Sketcher mode, there are four different Sketcher Display
types that can be controlled to aid visualization while completing tasks:
Toggles the display of dimensions on or off.
Display Constraints
Toggles the display of constraints on or off.
Fo
r
Display Dimensions
Display Grid
Display Vertices
Toggles the display of the grid on or off.

Toggles the display of section vertices on or off.
The Sketcher Display for a given exercise is included within the

procedure and exercise steps where applicable. When you see the
sketcher display icons in exercises, you should set your sketcher
display to match. For example,
indicates that
you should display dimensions, constraints, and section vertices.
Orienting the Sketch Parallel to the Screen

If you reorient the sketch while in Sketcher mode for any reason, you can
click Sketch Orientation
the screen.
2009 PTC
. This causes the sketch to reorient parallel to
Module 5 | Page 5
Utilizing Constraints
Constraints are rules enforced by Pro/ENGINEER on your
sketched entities.
nl
Constraint types
include:
Vertical
Horizontal
Perpendicular
Tangent
Midpoint
Coincident
Symmetric
Equal
Parallel
Constraints Flyout
tio
na
lU
se
Sketch Before and After Constraints Applied
uc
a
Sketch Before and After Constraints Applied
Utilizing Constraints Theory
Fo
r
Ed
Constraining the sketch is an important means to capture design intent. As

you add constraints, you add logic to your sketches. You also minimize the
number of dimensions required to document your design intent. This is why
it is important to constrain your sketched entities before dimensioning your
sketch.
The following table lists the available constraints, which can be activated
from the flyout in the Sketcher toolbar, by selecting multiple entities and
right-clicking, or by clicking Sketch > Constrain from the main menu:
Constraint
Vertical
Horizontal
Description
Makes lines vertical or aligns points vertically.
Makes lines horizontal or aligns points horizontally.
Perpendicular
Makes lines perpendicular to one another.
Tangent
Makes lines tangent to arcs and circles.
Module 5 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Description
Constraint
Places a point on the middle of a line or arc.
Midpoint
Coincident
Aligns two entities or vertices to the same point. Also

creates Collinear and Point on Entity constraints.
Symmetric
Makes two points or vertices symmetric about a

centerline.
Makes lines equal length, gives arcs/circles equal
radii, makes dimensions equal, or creates equal
curvature.
Parallel
Makes lines parallel to one another.
nl
Equal
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
At any time, you can click Sketch > Constrain > Explain and select a
constraint from the sketch. The message window provides an explanation
of the constraint.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 7
PROCEDURE - Utilizing Constraints

Scenario
Redefine sketches to apply constraints.
Utilizing_Constraints
2. Sketcher display:
na
lU
se
3. Click Equal from the Sketcher

toolbar.
Select the small circle, then
the larger circle.
nl

Sketch 1 and select Edit
Definition.
Apply the Equal, Horizontal, and Coincident constraints to the

Sketch 1 feature.
Task 1:
constraints.prt
uc
a
tio
When using the Equal

constraint, you can select
two or more entities or
dimensions to set them
equal.
Ed
4. Click Horizontal
from the
Sketcher toolbar and select the
center of each circle.
5. Click Select One By One
the Sketcher toolbar.
from
Fo
r
6. Drag the circle centers to test the

Horizontal constraint.
7. Drag the circle radii to test the
Equal Radii constraint.
8. Click Undo
toolbar twice.
from the main
9. Click Coincident
from the
Sketcher toolbar and select one
circle center and the horizontal
reference.
Click OK from the Select
dialog box.
Sketcher toolbar.
Module 5 | Page 8
from the
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Apply the Midpoint and Coincident constraints to the Sketch 2

feature.
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2.

2. Click Midpoint
Sketcher toolbar.
from the

Task 3:
nl
O
na
lU
se
4. Click Coincident
.
Select the circle radius,
then select the upper-right
rectangle vertex.
Click OK.
3. Select the circle center, then

select the vertical line on which
it resides.
Apply the Perpendicular, Equal, Vertical, and Coincident

constraints to the Sketch 3 feature.
tio
uc
a
2. Click Perpendicular
from the
upper and right lines.
Ed
from the
3. Click Parallel
upper and lower lines.
4. Middle-click to enable selection.
Fo
r
5. Press CTRL and select the upper

and lower lines, then right-click
and select Equal.
6. Select the left line, then right-click

and select Vertical.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 9
7. Select the right line, press CTRL,

select the vertical reference,
then right-click and select
Coincident.
Select the lower line, press
CTRL, select the horizontal
reference, then right-click and
select Coincident.
Apply the Coincident, Tangent, and Symmetric constraints to the

Sketch 4 feature.
na
lU
se
Task 4:
For most constraint types,

you can select entities first,
and then right-click to apply
the desired constraint.
nl
tio
2. Press CTRL and select the

endpoints on either side of the
gap.
Right-click and select
Coincident.
uc
a
3. Click Tangent
and select the
right arc and the upper line.
Fo
r
Ed
4. Click Symmetric
and select
the upper vertex of the right arc,
the upper vertex of the left arc,
and the vertical centerline.
Click OK.
5. Drag the centerline to the right.

Module 5 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Sketching with On-the-Fly Constraints

When sketching entities, you can manipulate constraints
on-the-fly as they appear.
nl
On-the-fly constraints enable you

to capture design intent.
Constraint manipulations include:
Lock/Disable/Enable
Disable constraints from
appearing on the fly
Toggle the active constraint
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Locking a Constraint
Disabling a Constraint
Toggling the Active Constraint
Ed
Sketching with On-the-Fly Constraints Theory
Fo
r
As you sketch geometry entities, constraints appear dynamically on-the-fly to

quickly capture design intent. The constraints actually cause the geometry to
snap as you sketch it, based on the constraint that appears. For example, as
you sketch a line close to horizontal, a Horizontal constraint will dynamically
display and snap the line horizontal, enabling you to quickly capture your
horizontal line design intent. Taking advantage of these constraints ensures
that you do not have to manually constrain entities after they are sketched.
When a constraint appears, you should perform the following manipulations
to further aid you while sketching:
Lock constraint Enables you to lock the constraint so the geometry
remains snapped. Locked constraints are denoted by circles, as shown in
the upper-right figure.
Disable constraint Enables you to disable the constraint so it does not
influence the geometry. Of course, you can always re-enable the disabled
constraint. Disabled constraints are denoted by slashes, as shown in the
lower-left figure.
Disable constraints from appearing on-the-fly Enables you to sketch an
entity without any on-the-fly constraints appearing.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 11
Toggle active constraint When a constraint appears on-the-fly while

sketching, it displays in red and is considered active. When more than one
constraint appears at the same time, only one can be the active constraint.
The active constraint has the previously defined manipulations applied to
it. The toggle manipulation is only available if more than one on-the-fly
constraint appears at the same time. In the lower-right image, the Equal
Length constraint is active in the left image and the Horizontal constraint
is active in the right image.
The following table lists the manipulations available and the corresponding
mouse and keyboard operation:
Mouse/Keyboard Operation
Lock/Disable/Enable the
Constraint
Right-click to toggle between constraint

types.
Disable constraints from

appearing on-the-fly
Press and hold SHIFT while sketching the

entity.
Toggle the Active Constraint
Press TAB.
na
lU
se
nl
Constraint Manipulation
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Manipulating the constraints on-the-fly does not cancel the Sketcher entity tool
that you are using. For example, if you are sketching a line and manipulate a
constraint that dynamically appears, the Line tool remains active.
Module 5 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Sketching Lines
Sketched entities are the basis for a solid face or surface of a
3-D model.
na
lU
se
nl
There are two types of

lines:
2 Point Line
2 Tangent Line
2 Tangent Line
Ed
uc
a
tio
2 Point Line
Sketching Lines
Fo
r
There are two main types of lines available in Sketcher:

2 Point Line Click Line
from the Sketcher toolbar or right-click and
select Line to create a line between two points. Each time you click the
mouse you start a line point or endpoint. You can continue clicking the
mouse to create lines that are chained together. That is, the endpoint of
one line is the starting point of the next line. You can either middle-click or
select another function from the Sketcher toolbar to terminate line creation.
from the Sketcher toolbar to
2 Tangent Line Click Line Tangent
create a line that is tangent to two circles, two arcs, or a circle and arc. You
can only select arcs or circles when creating a 2 Tangent Line.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 13
PROCEDURE - Sketching Lines

Scenario
Sketch lines in Sketcher.
sketch_lines.prt
Sketching_Lines
Task 1:
Sketch line entities in Sketcher.
nl
na
lU
se
from the Sketcher
3. Click Line
toolbar.

LINE and select Edit Definition.
4. Click the existing line endpoint.

Move the cursor down, and
click again at the vertical and
horizontal reference intersection.
Notice the Vertical constraint.
tio
5. Move the cursor to the right, and

notice the Horizontal constraint.
Ed
uc
a
6. Continue to move the cursor to

the right and you will see the
Equal Length constraint.
Fo
r

the right until you see the Vertical
Alignment constraint.
8. Click again to complete the

horizontal line.
9. Move your cursor up and to the

right to create a diagonal line.
Continue to move the cursor
upward until you see the Parallel
constraint.
Module 5 | Page 14
2009 PTC

increase the line length until the
Equal Length constraint appears.
nl
na
lU
se
13. Right-click two times to disable

the Equal Length constraint.
12. Press TAB again to toggle the

active constraint back to the
Equal Length constraint.
11. Press TAB to toggle the active

constraint to the Parallel
constraint.
14. Keeping the line parallel,

continue to move the cursor to
increase the line length.
15. Press TAB to activate the Parallel

constraint.
tio
16. Right-click to lock the Parallel

constraint.
uc
a
17. Move the cursor to further extend

the line length and click to finish
the line creation.
Ed
18. Move the cursor upward. Notice

the Vertical constraint.
19. Click to finish the vertical line
creation.
Fo
r
20. Move the cursor to the left and

notice the Horizontal constraint.
Drag the line horizontally to the
left until the Vertical Alignment
constraint appears.
21. Click to finish the horizontal line
creation.
22. Move the cursor down and drag
the line vertically until it snaps to
the arc endpoint. Click to finish
the vertical line creation.
23. Middle-click to stop sketching.

Sketcher toolbar.
2009 PTC
from the
Module 5 | Page 15
Task 2:
Sketch tangent lines in Sketcher.
1. Edit the definition of 2-TANGENT_LINE.

2. Click Line Tangent
from the flyout in the Sketcher toolbar.
3. Click the bottom of the smaller

circle to begin sketching a line.
tio
na
lU
se
5. Click the top of the larger circle

to complete the line. Notice the
Tangent constraints.
nl
4. Move the cursor around the

circle, and notice that the line
stays tangent to the circle.
from the Sketcher toolbar.
uc
a
7. Select the tangent line and press DELETE.
Ed
Fo
r
9. Sketch another tangent line.
10. Sketch a third tangent line.


Module 5 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Sketching Centerlines
A centerline is a type of construction geometry that can be used
to enforce symmetry and control sketch geometry.
nl
There are two types of construction

Centerlines:
Centerline
2 Tangent Centerline
tio
na
lU
se
Symmetry Created using Centerline
uc
a
Dimensioning a Circle without

a Centerline
Dimensioning a Circle using

a Centerline
Ed
Sketching Centerlines
Fo
r
A centerline is a type of construction geometry that can be used to define

a line of symmetry with a sketch. They are also used to control sketch
geometry. In the lower-left figure the circle is dimensioned to the vertical
and horizontal references. In the lower-right figure the circle is dimensioned
radially by using a centerline. Centerlines must be fully constrained by using
dimensions or constraints like any other sketched entity. They have infinite
length and do not create feature geometry.
There are two types of construction Centerlines:
Centerline Click Centerline
from the Sketcher toolbar or right-click
and select Centerline to create a Centerline through two points.
2 Tangent Centerline Click Sketch > Line > Centerline Tangent from
the main menu to create a centerline that is tangent to two circles, two arcs,
or a circle and arc. You can only select arcs or circles when creating a 2
Tangent Centerline.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 17
PROCEDURE - Sketching Centerlines

Scenario
Sketch centerlines in Sketcher.
Centerlines
na
lU
se
3. Notice that the horizontal line is

asymmetric about the vertical
reference. Notice also the
dimensioning scheme for the
angled line.
nl

CENTERLINE, right-click, and
select Edit Definition.
Sketch centerlines in Sketcher.
Task 1:
sketch_centerlines.prt
5. Press DELETE.
6. Click Centerline
tio
4. Click and drag a window around

the two lines.
from the Line flyout in the Sketcher toolbar.
uc
a
7. Click on the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references to

start sketching a centerline.
Ed
8. Move the cursor upwards and click on the vertical reference to create
a vertical centerline on top of the vertical reference.
Fo
r
9. Click on the intersection of

the vertical and horizontal
references to start sketching a
second centerline.
10. Drag the centerline so it

measures approximately 70
from vertical, and click to place it.
Module 5 | Page 18
2009 PTC
11. Click Line

toolbar.
from the Sketcher
12. Click in the top left quadrant

of the graphics window to start
sketching a line.
13. Move the cursor horizontally to

the right side of the vertical
centerline until it snaps
symmetric about the vertical
centerline and click to place it.
nl
14. Middle-click to stop line creation.
na
lU
se
15. Click Select One By One from the Sketcher toolbar, and click and
drag one of the line endpoints to resize it to a length of approximately
13. Notice that the line stays symmetrical about the vertical centerline
as it is resized.
16. Click Line
from the Sketcher
toolbar and click the right
endpoint of the horizontal line.
uc
a
tio
17. Move the cursor down to the

angled centerline, move the
cursor up and down on the
centerline until the Perpendicular
constraint appears, and click to
complete the line.
18. Middle-click to stop line creation.
Ed

de-select the line.
and
Fo
r
20. Click and drag the angled

centerline to approximately
60. Notice that the angled
line always stays perpendicular
about the angled centerline.

Sketcher toolbar.
from the
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 19
Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms

Quickly sketch four-sided shapes.
nl
The four lines are independent.

You can delete, trim, and align
each line individually.
Can create symmetric rectangles
using centerlines.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Slant Rectangle
Rectangle
Parallelogram
Ed
Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms Theory
Fo
r
To create a rectangle, click the Rectangle

icon from the Sketcher toolbar
or right-click and select Rectangle. When you sketch a rectangle, you click
to define locations for two opposite corners.
To create a slant rectangle, click the Slant Rectangle
icon from the
rectangle flyout within the Sketcher toolbar. When you sketch a slant
rectangle, you click two locations to define a line that becomes the first side,
and then specify a third location to define the width.
To create a parallelogram, click the Parallelogram
icon from the rectangle
flyout within the Sketcher toolbar. When you sketch a parallelogram, you click
two locations to define a line that becomes the first side, and then specify a
third location to define the width and side angle.
Keep in mind the following when sketching rectangles and parallelograms:
The four lines are independent once created.

You can delete, trim, and align each line individually.
You can use centerlines to create symmetric rectangles.
Module 5 | Page 20
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms

Scenario
Sketch rectangles in Sketcher.
rectangle_parallelogram.prt
Rect_Parallel
na
lU
se
3. Select the upper line of the

rectangle and press DELETE.
nl

RECTANGLE and select Edit
Definition.
Create rectangles in Sketcher.
Task 1:
tio
4. Press CTRL and select the three

remaining lines.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
5. Rightclick and select Delete.
6. Click Rectangle
Sketcher toolbar.
from the
7. Click in the upper-left quadrant

to start the rectangle. Move
the cursor to the lower-right
quadrant, ensuring that the
rectangle is symmetric about
centerlines.
8. Click to complete the rectangle.
Middle-click to complete
sketching and view the
constraints.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 21
9. Right-click and select Rectangle.

Click the midpoint of the right
side of the rectangle.
na
lU
se
1. Select Parallelogram
from the rectangle flyout in the
Sketcher toolbar.
nl
Sketch a parallelogram and a slanted rectangle.
Task 2:
10. Move the cursor to the right until

the second rectangle snaps to
equal length. Move the cursor
down until the second rectangle
snaps to the bottom of the first
rectangle, and click to complete
the rectangle.
2. Click the upper-right vertex of

the second rectangle and then
click the upper-right vertex of the
first rectangle.
uc
a
tio
3. Move the cursor up vertically

until the height snaps to equal
length, then click to complete the
parallelogram.
Ed
4. Select Slant Rectangle

from the rectangle flyout in the
Sketcher toolbar.
Fo
r
5. Click the upper-left vertex of the

parallelogram to begin sketching
a slant rectangle.
6. Move the cursor to the vertical
reference and upwards until the
line snaps parallel, and then
click.
7. Move the cursor up and to the

right until it snaps to equal length,
then click to complete the slant
rectangle.
8. Middle-click to stop sketching.
Module 5 | Page 22
2009 PTC
Sketching Circles
nl
There are four types of Circles:

Center and Point
Concentric
3 Point
Tangent to 3 Entities
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Concentric Circle
Ed
Circle Tangent to 3 Entities
Circle Created by Picking 3 Points
Sketching Circles
Fo
r
There are four types of circles available in Sketcher:
Center and Point Click Center and Point Circle

from the Sketcher
toolbar and select the location for the center and a location that determines
the diameter. You can also right-click and select Circle.
Concentric Click Concentric Circle
from the Sketcher toolbar to
create a circle that is concentric about an existing circle or arc.
from the Sketcher toolbar and select

3 Point Click 3 Point Circle
three locations that the circle must pass through.
Tangent to 3 Entities Click 3 Tangent Circle
from the Sketcher
toolbar and select three arcs, circles, or lines that the circle must be
tangent to.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 23
PROCEDURE - Sketching Circles

Scenario
Sketch Circles in Sketcher.
Sketching_Circles
Task 1:
sketch_circles.prt
Sketch circles and concentric circles in Sketcher.
na
lU
se
3. Click Center and Point Circle

nl
1. In the model tree, right-click CTR-PNT_CONCENTRIC_CIRCLE and

select Edit Definition.
4. Select the vertical and horizontal

reference intersection.
tio
5. Move the cursor out until the

circle diameter snaps to equal
diameter with the arc. Click to
complete the circle.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
6. Sketch another circle so it snaps

to the arc endpoint.
7. Click Concentric Circle

from the Sketcher toolbar and
select the largest circle.
Move the cursor up until the
circle diameter snaps to the
right arc endpoint.
Click to complete the circle.
Middle-click to cancel further
circle creation.
Module 5 | Page 24
2009 PTC
8. Select the arc and create another

concentric circle.
9. Middle-click to cancel further
circle creation.
na
lU
se
1. Edit the definition of

3-PNT_CIRCLE.
2. Click 3 Point Circle
Sketcher toolbar.
Sketch 3 point circles in Sketcher.
Task 2:
from the
nl

Sketcher toolbar.
from the
3. Select the line endpoint and a

rectangle corner.
tio
4. Select the opposite rectangle

corner.
Task 3:
uc
a
Sketch a tangent circle in Sketcher.
Ed

3-TANGENT_CIRCLE.
from
Fo
r
2. Click 3 Tangent Circle

3. Select the upper circle.
4. Select the left arc.
5. Select the right circle.

2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 25
Sketching Arcs
You can create numerous types of arcs within Sketcher.
nl
There are five types of Arcs:

3-Point
Tangent End
Concentric
Center and Endpoints
Tangent to 3 Entities
tio
na
lU
se
3-Point Versus Tangent Arc

Creation
uc
a
Arc Tangent to 3 Entities
Center and Endpoints Arc
Sketching Arcs
Ed
There are five types of arcs available in Sketcher:
Fo
r
3-Point Click 3-Point / Tangent End Arc from the Sketcher toolbar
and select the locations for the two arc endpoints and the arc diameter.
When you select an existing line endpoint, a green "quadrant" symbol
appears around that endpoint. Move the cursor through the quadrants
perpendicular to the line to create a 3-Point arc. You can also right-click in
Sketcher and select 3-Point/Tangent End.
Tangent End Click 3-Point / Tangent End Arc from the Sketcher
toolbar, select an existing line endpoint, and move the cursor through the
green quadrants parallel to the line to create a Tangent End arc. You can
also right-click and select 3-Point/Tangent End.
from the Sketcher toolbar to create
Concentric Click Concentric Arc
an arc that is concentric about an existing arc or circle.
Center and Endpoints Click Center and Ends Arc
from the Sketcher
toolbar to create an arc with center and ends that you select.
Tangent to 3 Entities Click 3 Tangent Arc
from the Sketcher toolbar
and select three arcs, circles, or lines that the arc must be tangent to.
Module 5 | Page 26
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Sketching Arcs

Scenario
Sketch Arcs in Sketcher.
Sketching_Arcs
Task 1:
sketching_arcs.prt
Sketch 3 Point and Tangent End Arcs in Sketcher.
uc
a
4. Click Undo
tio
na
lU
se
3. Click 3-Point / Tangent End

Arc from the Sketcher toolbar.
Select the upper line endpoint,
move the cursor horizontal to
the left, and select the vertical
and horizontal reference
intersection.
Move the cursor above the
horizontal reference and click
to create the arc.
nl
1. In the model tree, right-click 3-PNT_TANGENT-END_ARC and select

Edit Definition.
Fo
r
Ed

right-click and select 3-Point /
Tangent End.
Select the upper line endpoint,
move the cursor up, and select
reference intersection to
create the tangent arc.
6. Select the endpoint of the
previous arc and create a new
tangent arc of equal radius.
7. Select the endpoint of the

previous arc and create a new
tangent arc.
Sketcher toolbar.
2009 PTC
from the
Module 5 | Page 27
Task 2:
Sketch Concentric Arcs in Sketcher.
nl
O
2. Click Concentric Arc

from
Select the upper arc and select
the horizontal reference to the
left of the center.
Move the cursor clockwise and
select the horizontal reference
again to create the arc.
Middle-click to stop concentric
arc creation.
1. Edit the definition of CONCENTRIC_ARC.
na
lU
se
3. Select the lower arc and select

the left arc endpoint.
4. Select the right arc endpoint to
create the concentric arc.
5. Middle-click to stop concentric
arc creation.
.
Task 3:
uc
a
tio
Sketch Center and Ends Arcs in Sketcher.
Ed
1. Edit the definition of CENTER-ENDS_ARC.

to disable their display.
Fo
r
2. Click Display Constraints
3. Click Center and Ends Arc

from the Sketcher toolbar flyout.
Select the vertical and
horizontal reference
intersection.
Select the left and upper
endpoints of the lines to create
the arc.
Module 5 | Page 28
2009 PTC
4. Select the vertical and horizontal

reference intersection again.
5. Select the right and bottom
endpoints of the lines to create
the arc.
1. Edit the definition of 3-TANGENT_ARC.
na
lU
se
nl
Sketch 3-Tangent Arcs in Sketcher.
Task 4:
3. Click 3 Tangent Arc

from
the Sketcher toolbar flyout.
4. Select the left circle, right circle,

and line.
.
uc
a
tio
5. Click Undo
6. Click 3 Tangent Arc
Ed
7. Select the line, left circle, and

right circle.
.
Fo
r
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 29
Sketching Circular Fillets

Round sharp corners of a Sketch using Circular Fillets.
na
lU
se
nl
Circular Fillets:
Can be applied to concave or
convex corners.
Corners do not have to be 90.
Radius size is based on pick
location.
uc
a
Concave Fillet
tio
Convex Fillet
Radius Size Based on Pick Location
Ed
Sketching Circular Fillets
Fo
r
The Circular Fillet

option creates a rounded intersection between any
two non-parallel entities. When you create a Circular Fillet between two
lines, the lines are automatically trimmed to the fillet. If you create a Circular
Fillet between any other entities, you must delete the remaining segments
manually.
Circular Fillets can be applied to either concave or convex corners. The
corners do not have to be at 90.
The radius size is based on pick location, as shown in the lower-right figure.
In addition to the icon, you can right-click in Sketcher and select
Fillet.
Module 5 | Page 30
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Sketching Circular Fillets

Scenario
Sketch Circular Fillets in Sketcher.
Sketch_Fillets
Task 1:
sketch_fillets.prt
Sketch circular fillets in Sketcher.
from the
na
lU
se
3. Click Circular Fillet

Sketcher toolbar.
nl
1. In the model tree, right-click CIRCULAR_FILLET and select Edit

Definition.
tio
4. Select the two points to create

the fillet.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
5. Select two points to create the

next fillet.

next fillet.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 31

next fillet.
na
lU
se

from the main toolbar to enable
their display.
nl
8. Click OK from the Select dialog

box.

fillets.
11. Right-click and select Equal.
.
tio
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Module 5 | Page 32
2009 PTC
Sketching Chamfers
Create chamfer geometry in a sketch.
nl
O
na
lU
se
Can be applied to concave or

convex corners.
Corners do not have to be 90
degrees.
Entities do not have to intersect.
Size and angle is based on pick
locations.
Default Chamfer creates
construction lines.
Chamfer Trim removes geometry.
Chamfers in Sketcher:
Ed
uc
a
tio
Chamfer Created
Chamfer Trim Created
Fo
r
Original Sketch
Sketching Chamfers Theory
The Chamfer
option creates a straight line between selected locations
on any two non-parallel entities. When you create a chamfer, construction
lines are created leading from the chamfer endpoints to the intersection of the
original entities.
You click Chamfer Trim
the original geometry.
to create a Chamfer and automatically trim away
Keep in mind the following points when sketching chamfers:
Chamfers can be applied to either concave or convex corners.

The corners do not have to be at 90 degrees.
Entities do not have to intersect.
The size and angle of the chamfer line is based on pick locations.
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 33
PROCEDURE - Sketching Chamfers

Scenario
Sketch chamfers in Sketcher.
chamfers.prt
Chamfers
Task 1:
Sketch chamfers.
1. In the model tree, right-click CHAMFERS and select Edit Definition.
from the
na
lU
se
3. Click Chamfer
Sketcher toolbar.
nl
tio

chamfer. The construction lines
are automatically created.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

next chamfer.
Task 2:
Sketch chamfers using the Chamfer Trim option.
1. Click Chamfer Trim

from the
Sketcher toolbar flyout.
2. Select two points to create
the chamfer. The geometry is
trimmed away.
Module 5 | Page 34
2009 PTC

next chamfer.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
2009 PTC
Module 5 | Page 35
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 5 | Page 36
2009 PTC
Using Sketcher Tools
6
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Once you sketch geometry, it typically needs to be modified or further

manipulated.
In this module, you learn the tools available for modifying and manipulating
your sketch, as well as how to handle any conflicts that may arise while
sketching.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Understand construction geometry theory.
Learn how to sketch points.
Use geometry tools to edit geometry in a sketch.
Create new sketch files, as well as place and manipulate sketches.
Create and modify dimensions, as well as handle any sketcher conflicts
that arise.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 1
Understanding Construction Geometry Theory

Use Construction Geometry to help control design intent,
simplify dimension schemes, and simplify sketches.
na
lU
se
nl
Construction Geometry:
Can be dimensioned and
constrained.
Solid geometry snaps to it.
Does not add entities to final
sketch.
Can make an otherwise difficult
scheme easy.
Can reduce the number of
dimensions/constraints used.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Construction Geometry Controls

a Sketch
Fo
r
Construction Geometry Simplifies

Sketches
Construction Geometry Simplifies

Dimension Schemes
Understanding Construction Geometry Theory
Construction entities enable you to create references on the fly. Construction

geometry is important because it enables you to easily constrain your sketch.
It is signified by a dashed yellow entity within Sketcher.
Construction geometry can be dimensioned and constrained just like
regular, solid geometry.
Solid sketched geometry will snap to construction geometry which means
that construction geometry can be used to control a sketch. In the
upper-right figure, the arc centers are snapped to the construction line
endpoints. Therefore, changing the construction geometry length or angle
dimensions will cause the arcs to move accordingly.
Construction geometry does not appear in the final Sketch feature.
Therefore, it does not add entities to the final sketch.
Module 6 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Construction geometry can make an otherwise difficult dimensioning

scheme easy. In the lower-right figure, one dimension is used to control
the entire sketch. All line endpoints are snapped to the construction circle.
Without the construction circle, a lot more dimensions and constraints
would be required to properly constrain the sketch.
Construction geometry can simplify sketches. In the lower-left figure, the
sketch has been simplified by constraining line vertices that must snap to
an imaginary arc to a construction geometry arc.
Creating Construction Geometry
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Almost any solid sketched geometry entity can be converted into construction
geometry. Create construction geometry by sketching conventional geometry.
Next, select the geometry, right-click, and select Construction. You can
also click Edit > Toggle Construction from the main menu. To change
construction geometry back to solid geometry, select it and either right-click
and select Geometry or click Edit > Toggle Construction.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 3
Sketching Points
Sketcher points, like construction geometry, do not contribute to
the resulting sketch geometry.
nl
Sketcher Point uses the following:

Dimension to theoretical sharps.
Dimension slanted on arcs.
Provide an anchor or pivot point
in a sketch.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Dimensioning to Theoretical Sharp
Dimensioning Slanted on Arcs
Ed
Providing a Pivot Point
Sketching Points
Fo
r
Sketcher Points are created by using the Point

icon from the Sketcher
toolbar. Sketcher points do not contribute to the resulting sketch geometry in
a feature. This makes them similar to construction geometry.
Sketcher points have the following uses:
Dimension to theoretical sharps In the upper-right figure, a Sketcher
Point has been placed at the theoretical corner sharp. As a result, this
theoretical sharp can be used for controlling design intent through a
dimension.
Dimension slanted on arcs In the lower-right figure, a Sketcher Point has
been placed on each arc. As such, a slanted dimension can be created to
measure the distance between arc tangencies.
Provide an anchor or pivot point In the lower-left figure, a Sketcher
Point has been placed at the intersection of the arc and the vertical and
horizontal references. As such, the angular dimension can be modified,
and the entire sketch will pivot about the Sketcher Point.
Module 6 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher
Use Geometry Tools to modify existing sketched entities.
nl
Using Trim/Delete Segment
Using Mirror
tio
Using Divide
na
lU
se
Using Trim Corner
Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher Theory
Ed
uc
a
You can use various Geometry Tools within Sketcher to modify existing
geometry. You can dynamically trim entities, trim entities to other entities,
divide entities, and mirror entities. You can undo any operation done using
Geometry Tools.
Using Trim/Delete Segment
Fo
r
You can dynamically trim the parts of sketched entities you no longer need.
When dynamically trimming, any entity that you touch while dragging will be
deleted. In the upper-left figure, the extra arcs are deleted.
Using Trim Corner
You can trim or extend sketched entities to other entities in Sketcher. To trim
entities, select the entity side you want to keep. In the upper-right figure, the
two entities are selected to be trimmed, and the gap between the entities is
closed.
Using Divide
You can divide a sketched entity into two or more new entities. The system
divides the entity at the point(s) you select. In the lower-left figure, the circle
is divided to become two separate arcs.
Some sketched features require portions of a sketch to maintain an
equal number of entities.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 5
Using Mirror
You can mirror selected sketched entities about a centerline. Mirrored entity
geometry will join with the original entity to become one entity given the
following two criteria:
The entity is normal to the centerline being mirrored about.
One endpoint lies on the centerline.
In the lower-right figure, the top horizontal line and bottom are both
perpendicular to the mirroring centerline and have an endpoint that lies on
the centerline. When the geometry is mirrored, the result is one horizontal
entity on the top and one arc on the bottom.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You cannot mirror dimensions, text entities, or centerlines.
Module 6 | Page 6
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher

Scenario
Use the different geometry tools in Sketcher.
Geometry_Tools
na
lU
se
3. Click Trim/Delete Segment

from the Sketcher toolbar, and
click and drag to dynamically
trim the entities.
nl

DYNAMIC_TRIM and select Edit
Definition.
Dynamically trim sketched entities.
Task 1:
geom_tools.prt
tio
4. Zoom in on the upper-right part

of the sketch.
uc
a
5. Dynamically trim the three extra

arcs.
6. Perform the same trims to the
lower sketch portion.
from the
Ed

Sketcher toolbar.
Trim sketched entities to other sketched entities.
Fo
r
Task 2:

TRIM_ENTITIES.

3. Click Trim Corner
from the
Sketcher toolbar, and select the
two entities to trim.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 7
4. Click Undo
5. Click Trim Corner

and select
the two entities to trim.
na
lU
se
nl
6. Select the two entities to trim.
uc
a
tio

.
Fo
r
Ed
Task 3:
Divide sketched entities.
1. Edit the definition of DIVIDE.

from the
2. Click Divide
Sketcher toolbar, and select the
two circle locations to divide.
Module 6 | Page 8
2009 PTC
3. Middle click to stop dividing

entities.
4. Select the left half of the divided

circle.
Task 4:
na
lU
se
nl
5. Click Divide
and divide the
arcs four more times.
Mirror sketched entities.
tio
1. Edit the definition of MIRROR.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
2. Click Display Dimensions

to enable their display. Notice
the top 7.25 dimension.
3. Click and drag a window around

all sketched entities.
4. Click Mirror
from the
Sketcher toolbar.
5. Select the vertical centerline.
6. Notice the top 14.50 dimension.
7. Select the upper horizontal line and lower arc.
8. Notice that both are single entities.

2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 9
Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher
Scaled and Rotated Sketch
na
lU
se
nl
Manipulate Sketches using:

Cut/Copy/Paste
Scale and Rotate
Translate
Rotating a Sketch
tio
Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher
uc
a
You can cut, copy, and paste sketched entities. To do this, you can use either
the context-sensitive right-mouse pop-up menu, icons in the main toolbar, or
the Edit menu. You can perform cut, copy, and paste operations from within
a sketch or from one sketch to another.
Ed
Scaling and Rotating Sketches
Fo
r
You can also scale and rotate selected sketch entities. Scaling and rotating
pasted entities are the first available operations when you paste sketched
entities into a sketch. You can scale and rotate existing sketch entities by
selecting them and clicking Edit > Move & Resize from the main menu,
Move & Resize
from the Sketcher toolbar, or by right-clicking and
selecting Move & Resize.
You can scale and rotate entities either by using the Move & Resize dialog
box or you can use the drag handles that appear on the entities.
Click and drag the Location handle
to move the entities about Sketcher.
To help properly place the entities, you can right-click and drag to relocate
the Location handle.
Click and drag the Scale handle

to dynamically scale the entities or
enter a value in the Move & Resize dialog box.
to dynamically rotate the entities or
Click and drag the Rotate handle
enter a value in the Move & Resize dialog box.
You can also move the location handle to a specified location in the sketch by
activating the Reference collector in the Rotate/Scale section of the Move &
Module 6 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Resize dialog box. When you select a reference, the location handle snaps
onto the reference.
Translating Sketches
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Translating entities is another available operation you can perform on

pasted sketches. To translate a sketch you can either click and drag the
location handle or type a distance value into the fields in the Move &
Resize dialog box. The Translate Reference is the location by which the
translation distances are measured. The sketch can be translated parallel
and perpendicular to the reference. You can retain the default translate
reference or you can specify a different one.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 11
PROCEDURE - Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher

Scenario
Manipulate Sketches within Sketcher.
manip_sketches.prt
Manip_Sketches
Task 1:
Copy, scale, and rotate a sketch.
3. Drag a window around all sketched entities.
na
lU
se
4. Right-click and select Cut.
nl
1. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition.
5. Right-click and select Paste.
6. Click in the upper-right quadrant

to place the sketch.
uc
a
tio
7. Right-click on the X Location

handle and drag it to the upper
arc endpoint.
Ed
8. Click and drag the Rotation

handle to rotate the sketch 90
counterclockwise.
Fo
r
9. Click and drag the X Location

handle to reposition the sketch.
10. In the Move & Resize dialog box,

edit the Scale to 1 and the Rotate
to 90 if necessary.
Click Accept Changes .
11. Click Paste
toolbar.
from the main
12. Click in the lower left Sketcher

quadrant.
13. Right-click on the X Location
handle and drag it to the lower
arc endpoint.
Module 6 | Page 12
2009 PTC
14. Click and drag the Rotation

handle to rotate the sketch 90
clockwise.
15. Click and drag the X Location
handle to reposition the sketch.
nl
na
lU
se

and
sketch the tangent line.

edit the Scale to 0.5.
tio

and trim the hanging arcs.
.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 13
Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher
nl
O
Length and Angle Dimensions
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Dimension types include:

Line length
Angle
Distance
Radius
Diameter
Revolved Diameter
Arc length
Included angle
Middle-click to place dimensions.
Location can determine type.
Convert weak dimensions to
strong.
How you dimension your sketch will reflect your design intent.
Revolved Diameter Dimension
Distance, Radius, and Diameter

Dimensions
Fo
r
Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher Theory

When dimensioning a sketch, it is important to create dimensions that capture
your design intent because these dimensions are displayed when you edit
the model and when you create drawings of the model.
icon. You can
Dimensions are all created using the Normal Dimension
also right-click and select Dimension. Select entities to be dimensioned
and middle-click to place the dimension. At this point you can either press
ENTER to accept the current dimension value, or type a different one and
press ENTER. The type of dimension created depends upon what is selected
and where the dimension is placed.
The following dimension types can be created:
Line length Select a line and place the dimension. The line length
is dimensioned.
Angle You can create an angle measurement by selecting two linear
references. Where you place the dimension determines how the angle is
measured (acute versus obtuse). You can also create an arc angle by
Module 6 | Page 14
2009 PTC
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
selecting an arc endpoint, the arc center, and the other endpoint, and then
placing the dimension.
Distance Select two entities to measure the distance between and
place the dimension. Again, where you place the dimension will determine
whether it is vertical, horizontal, or slanted. The Dim Orientation dialog
box enables you to determine whether the dimension is to be vertical or
horizontal.
Radius Select an arc or circle once, then place the dimension. You can
toggle a radius dimension to a diameter or linear dimension by right-clicking
and selecting Convert to Diameter and Convert to Linear, respectively.
Diameter Double-click an arc or circle, then place the dimension.
You can toggle a diameter dimension to a radius or linear dimension by
right-clicking and selecting Convert to Radius and Convert to Linear,
respectively.
Revolved Diameter Select the entity, a centerline, and the entity again
and place the dimension. Alternatively, you can select the centerline, the
entity, and the centerline again.
Arc length You can create an arc length dimension by selecting the
arc segment, its two endpoints, and placing the dimension. The arc
length dimension displays an arch symbol over the dimension value. You
can toggle the arc length measurement to an arc angle dimension and
vice-versa by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Angle and Convert
to Length, respectively.
Included angle Similar to a revolved diameter dimension, you can create
an included angle dimension by selecting an angled line, a centerline,
and the angled line again before placing the dimension. You can toggle
the included angle to an angle dimension and vice-versa by right-clicking
and selecting Convert to Angle and Convert to Total included angle,
respectively.
Ed
Weak Dimensions
Fo
r
Because the Intent Manager must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times,
a sketch initially is dimensioned using weak dimensions. As you dimension
your sketch (these are strong dimensions) using your desired design intent,
the weak dimensions automatically disappear.
You can convert weak dimensions to strong dimensions by selecting
the weak dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Strong. Similar
to creating a new dimension, you can either accept the current
dimension value being made strong, or type a new one. Editing a
weak dimension automatically makes it strong.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 15
PROCEDURE - Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher

Scenario
Dimension entities within Sketcher.
dimensions.prt
Dimensions
Task 1:
Create line length dimensions in Sketcher.
nl

LENGTH and select Edit
Definition.
na
lU
se
3. Click Normal Dimension

4. Select the top horizontal line and

middle-click above it to place the
dimension.
5. Type 190 and press ENTER.
tio
6. Select the angled line and

middle-click to place the
dimension.
uc
a
7. Type 340 as the value and

press ENTER. Notice the weak
dimensions are disappearing.
Ed
8. Middle-click to stop dimension

creation.
Fo
r
9. Select the weak 247.12

dimension, right-click, and
select Strong.

Task 2:
Create angle dimensions in Sketcher.
1. Edit the definition of ANGLE.

3. Select the angled line, the

horizontal reference, and
middle-click to place the angle
dimension.
Module 6 | Page 16
2009 PTC
5. Select the top arc endpoint, the

arc center, and the bottom arc
endpoint, and middle-click to
place the dimension as shown.
Task 3:
Create distance dimensions in Sketcher.
na
lU
se
nl
3. Select the arc centers,

middle-click to the left of
the vertical reference, and press
ENTER.
4. Click Undo
1. Edit the definition of DISTANCE.

uc
a
7. Click Undo
tio

middle-click below the horizontal
reference, and press ENTER.
Ed
9. Select the arcs, middle-click to

place the dimension, and press
ENTER.
.
Fo
r
10. Click Undo
12. Select the arcs, middle-click to

ENTER.
13. Click Undo

dimension, and press ENTER.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 17
Task 4:
Create radius dimensions in Sketcher.
1. Edit the definition of RADIUS.

nl
na
lU
se
Task 5:
4. Select the arc, middle-click to

ENTER.
3. Select the left circle, middle-click

to place the dimension, and
press ENTER.
Create arc and circle diameter dimensions in Sketcher.
tio

ARC_CIRCLE_DIA.
uc
a
3. Double-click the arc, middle-click

to place the dimension, and
press ENTER.
Ed
4. Double-click the circle,

dimension, and press ENTER.
Fo
r
5. Middle-click to stop dimension

creation.
6. Select the 250 dimension,

right-click, and select Convert
to Radius.
Module 6 | Page 18
2009 PTC
Task 6:
Create revolved diameter dimensions in Sketcher.
1. Edit the definition of REV_DIA.

3. Click the long vertical line,

centerline, and long vertical line
again.
4. Middle-click to place the
dimension.
nl
and
na
lU
se

drag the dimension.
8. Click the short vertical line,

centerline, and short vertical line
again.
dimension.
Create an arc length dimension in Sketcher.
uc
a
Task 7:
tio
Ed

ARC_LENGTH.
Fo
r
3. Select the arc, select each

endpoint, and middle-click to
place the dimension as shown.

select the dimension.
and
6. Right-click and select Convert

to Angle.
7. Right-click and select Convert
to Length.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 19
Task 8:
Create an included angle dimension in Sketcher.

INCLUDED_ANGLE.
3. Select the angled line, the

centerline, and angled line again.
dimension as shown.
nl
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Module 6 | Page 20
2009 PTC
Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher

You can modify individual dimensions or many all at once.
nl
Modify dimensions by:

Editing the value.
Dragging the entity to which the
dimension is attached.
Using the Modify Dimensions
dialog box.
tio
na
lU
se
Modify Dimensions Dialog Box
Editing the Value
Dragging an Entity
uc
a
Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher

You can modify dimensions in Sketcher by using any of the following methods:
Fo
r
Ed
Edit the dimension manually by double-clicking it. The geometry placement

will update to the new dimension. You can also edit the dimension value
when you create it without having to double-click it.
Click and drag the entity that the dimension is attached to. The dimension
value will update automatically.
Use the Modify Dimensions dialog box. When you select the dimension,
it highlights in the graphics window. You can edit values or scroll the
wheel next to the dimension you wish to modify. The dimension value will
increase or decrease depending on the direction of scrolling.
You can adjust the sensitivity to adjust how finely or coarsely dimension
wheels scroll.
If Regenerate is selected, the sketch geometry will update immediately
after a dimension is edited. If the check box is cleared, you can adjust
any or all dimensions within the Modify Dimensions dialog box, and the
geometry will not update until you click Regenerate Section .
If Lock Scale is selected, you can modify one dimension and all other
dimension values update automatically to new values at the same ratio.
Locking the scale to edit dimensions is common when creating the
first feature of a model.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 21
PROCEDURE - Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher

Scenario
Modify dimensions within Sketcher.
modify_dimensions.prt
Modifying_Dims
Task 1:
Modify dimensions in Sketch 1.
na
lU
se
3. Click and drag the upper

vertical line until the diameter is
approximately 204.
nl
4. Double-click the 204 dimension,

edit it to 180, and press ENTER.
uc
a
6. Click Undo
tio
5. Edit the 180 dimension to 8. The sketch is distorted due to the relative
dimension differences.
Ed
7. Drag a window around all

dimensions.
Fo
r
8. Click Modify
from the
Sketcher toolbar.
9. In the Modify Dimensions dialog

box click in the 292 dimension
field.
Scroll the wheel to
approximately 400.
Select Lock Scale.
Edit the 400 dimension to 16
and press ENTER.
Click Regenerate Section .
Module 6 | Page 22
2009 PTC
10. Edit the remaining dimension

values.
Modify dimensions in Sketch 2.
nl
Task 2:
3. Click Modify
from the main

.
na
lU
se
2. Click Refit
toolbar.
4. Select each dimension to add it

to the dialog box.
5. Scroll the wheel back and forth for the 108 dimension.
6. Drag the Sensitivity slider to the left.
tio
7. Again, scroll the wheel back and forth for the 108 dimension.
uc
a
8. Edit the 96 dimension to 100 and press ENTER.

9. Clear the Regenerate check box.
10. Edit the dimensions as shown.
.
Fo
r
Ed
11. Click Regenerate Section
12. Click Refit

from the main
toolbar and zoom in.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 23
Sketcher Conflicts
nl
O
Conflicts caused by:

Adding too many dimensions.
Adding too many constraints.
Conflicts handled by:
Deleting unwanted constraints
or dimensions.
Converting dimensions to
Reference dimensions.
Sketcher conflicts occur from manually adding too many

constraints or dimensions.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Sketcher Conflict
Resolve Sketch Dialog Box
Ed
Conflicting Dimension Converted to

Reference Dimension
Sketcher Conflict Causes
Fo
r
The Sketcher Intent Manager strives to maintain a fully constrained sketch

automatically. Sketcher Conflicts are caused by an overconstrained sketch
condition that arises from manually adding too many constraints or too many
dimensions.
Resolving Sketcher Conflicts

When a Sketcher Conflict occurs, the Resolve Sketch dialog box appears,
as shown in the lower right figure. The Resolve Sketch dialog box displays
which constraints and/or dimensions conflict. The graphics window also
highlights the conflicting items in red. When a Sketcher Conflict arises, you
can resolve it by using either of the following techniques:
Delete the conflicting constraints or dimensions to revert the sketch back
to fully constrained.
Convert dimensions to Reference dimensions. A Reference dimension is
not a driving dimension that constrains a sketch. You cannot modify a
Reference dimension, but it does update with geometry changes.
Module 6 | Page 24
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Sketcher Conflicts

Scenario
Resolve conflicts in Sketcher.
sketcher_conflicts.prt
Conflicts
Task 1:
Resolve conflicts due to added constraints.
3. Constrain the arc perpendicular

to the vertical reference.
nl
tio
na
lU
se
4. Select the 6.5 dimension from

the Resolve Sketch dialog box.
Click Delete.
5. Add the constraint that makes

the two highlighted lines equal.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
6. Select the 7.3 dimension from

7. In the Resolve Sketch dialog

box, click Dim > Ref.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 25
Task 2:
Resolve conflicts due to added dimensions.

2. Dimension from the vertical
reference to the upper-right arc
center and place the dimension
under the sketch geometry.
na
lU
se
4. Double-click the lower-left

arc and place the diameter
dimension.
nl
3. Select the 16 dimension from the

Resolve Sketch dialog box.
Click Delete and press
ENTER.
5. Select row 3 from the Resolve

Sketch dialog box.
Click Delete and press
ENTER.
uc
a
tio
6. Click OK from the Select dialog

box.
7. Modify the dimensions as shown.

.
Fo
r
Ed
Module 6 | Page 26
2009 PTC
Creating New Sketch Files

Sketch files can be imported later into other files.
tio
Sketch File
na
lU
se
nl
Click File > New to create a new Sketch.

Save a sketch out of an existing model.
File extension is *.sec.
Creating a New Sketch File
uc
a
Creating New Sketch Files Theory
Fo
r
Ed
A sketch can either be created within a model or it can be saved as its own
file. If created within a model, it can be saved as a sketch file, which has a file
extension of *.sec. You can also create a new sketch file by selecting Sketch
from the New dialog box. Any sketch file can be imported into a model and
placed in a Sketch feature.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 27
PROCEDURE - Creating New Sketch Files

Scenario
Create new sketch files and save sketches from existing parts.
save_sketch.prt
New_Sketches
Task 1:
Save a sketch from an existing part.
nl

EXTRUDE_1 and select Edit
Definition.
na
lU
se

Placement tab.
Click Edit.
4. Click File > Save a Copy from the main menu.
uc
a
tio
5. In the Save a Copy dialog box, type CRANK_LOBE.SEC as the New

Name.
Click OK.
from the dashboard.
Task 2:
Ed
8. Click Window > Close.
Create a new 2-D sketch file.
Fo
r
1. Click File > New from the main menu.

2. In the New dialog box, select Sketch.
Edit the Name to D_shape.
Click OK.

from the Sketcher toolbar
and sketch the circle.
Module 6 | Page 28
2009 PTC
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se

trim the right arc.
nl
4. Click Line
from the Sketcher
toolbar and sketch a vertical
line whose endpoints are on the
circle.

Ed
7. Select the vertical line and the

arc and middle-click to place the
dimension.
Fo
r

9. Double-click the arc and place
the diameter dimension.
11. Click Save

Click OK.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 29
Placing Sections into Sketcher

Placing sections into your model saves time and encourages
reuse of common shapes.
na
lU
se
nl
Place sections:
From the File System
Using the Sketcher Palette
Modify the dimension scheme or value
Placing a Section
tio
The Sketcher Palette
uc
a
Placing Sections into Sketcher Theory
Ed
You can insert preexisting sketches into your sketch. This helps to save time
rather than recreating an existing sketch. It also promotes data reuse. There
are two different methods that you can use to place sections:
Fo
r
Place a section from file This can be a *.sec file that you have created
using File > New and selecting Sketch, or it can be a sketch that you have
saved from a different model. Either way, you can browse to the location of
the existing sketch section file and place it.
Use the Sketcher Palette The Sketcher palette enables you to quickly
place common, basic shapes, such as I-beams and hexagons, into your
sketch. The Sketcher Palette contains a tab for the current working
directory as well as default tabs for polygons, profiles, shapes, and stars.
You can create additional, custom tabs simply by creating folders in the
Sketcher Palette library location. When you add sketch *.sec files to the
folder, they are listed in a tab with the same name in the Sketcher Palette.
When you place a sketch you can scale and rotate it. You can also modify the
dimension scheme or value.
Module 6 | Page 30
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Placing Sections into Sketcher

Scenario
Place sections within Sketcher.
Placing_Sections
Task 1:
place_section.prt
Place a section from a file.
nl
3. Click Sketch > Data from File > File System from the main menu.
na
lU
se
4. Select d_shape.sec from the Open dialog box.

Click Open.
5. Click in the graphics window to
place the section.
6. Relocate the Location handle to

the arc center.
tio
7. Relocate the section to the

vertical and horizontal reference
intersection.
uc
a

edit the Scale to 1.5.
.
Ed
Place a section from the Sketcher Palette.
Fo
r
Task 2:
2. Click Palette
from the
Sketcher toolbar. Notice the .sec
file in the tab for the working
directory.
3. In the Sketcher Palette dialog
box, select each of the different
tabs and review their contents.
Select the Polygons tab.
Select the Octagon section to
preview it.
Double-click the Octagon
section.
2009 PTC
Module 6 | Page 31
4. Click in the graphics window to

place the section.
5. Relocate the section to the
vertical and horizontal reference
intersection.
edit the Scale to 1.
nl
7. Click Close from the Sketcher

Palette.
8. Edit the 1 dimension to 1.5

.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Fo
r
Ed
Module 6 | Page 32
2009 PTC
7
O
nl
Creating Sketches for Features
Module
Module Overview
tio
na
lU
se
Up to this point, you have learned how to sketch geometry within the Sketcher
environment. In this module, you apply that knowledge to the creation of
sketch features. Sketch features typically serve as references to other
features and can exist separately as their own feature or as the starting point
when you create sketch-based features. You learn how to specify the sketch
setup for a sketch feature, utilize sketch references, use entity from edge,
and thicken edges.
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Learn how to create sketch features.
Specify the sketch setup.
Utilize sketch references.
Use entity from edge within Sketcher.
Thicken edges within Sketcher.
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 1
Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature)

To create a Sketch Feature, specify the Sketch Setup, select
additional sketch references, and sketch the geometry.
nl
You can modify the Sketch Setup.

You can use references to snap
geometry or dimensions.
You can create 3-D geometry by
using the Sketch feature.
Feature requirements.
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Specifying Sketch Setup
Modifying Sketch Setup
Sketch Geometry Snapped to

Added Reference
Fo
r
Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature) Theory

You can create a sketch feature by starting the Sketch Tool
from the
feature toolbar. Creating a sketch feature involves the following three steps:
Specify the sketch setup. Once the sketch setup has been defined, you
can always change it to another plane.
Select additional sketch references that you intend to dimension from or
snap to with sketch geometry. For example, in the lower-right figure, some
of the existing geometry was specified as sketch references for a new
Sketch feature.
Sketch the geometry.
Sketch Feature Requirements

The following rules apply to sketched sections when creating sketch features:
A sketched section should not contain any gaps, or open ends.
A sketch cannot contain any overlapping entities.
Module 7 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
An open section sketch is required for creating a rib feature.

All loops of a multiple loop section must be closed.
When creating a revolve feature, you must only sketch geometry on one
side of the centerline.
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 3
Specifying the Sketch Setup
nl
na
lU
se
to
Use Sketch Orientation
orient the sketch parallel to the
screen.
Sketch Setup consists of:

Sketch Plane
Sketch Orientation
Reference
Direction
Model orientation helps determine
initial sketch setup.
The Sketch Setup determines the sketching plane and the

model's orientation in the graphics window.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Default Orientation
Sketch Plane FRONT with

Orientation Reference TOP
Facing Top
Fo
r
Sketch Plane FRONT with

Orientation Reference TOP
Facing Left
Specifying the Sketch Setup Theory
When you create a sketch feature, the Sketch Setup is used to tell
Pro/ENGINEER which plane the sketch feature will be created on and how it
will be oriented:
Sketch Plane The 2-D sketch exists in this planar reference. The
sketching plane can be either a datum plane or a planar surface of an
existing solid or surface feature. If you create more than one sketch on the
same sketch plane, you can click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box to
use the previous sketch feature's sketch setup.
Sketch Orientation Determines how the sketch will be oriented in the
graphics window and model. Sketch orientation consists of two items:
Orientation Reference The orientation reference determines the 2-D
orientation of the sketch. This reference is also either a datum plane or
a planar surface and must be normal to the sketch plane.
Module 7 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Orientation Direction Determines the direction that the orientation

reference faces. The orientation reference can be assigned to face top,
bottom, right, or left. These directions are named to reflect how the
reference orients with regard to the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window.
Note that datum planes have two sides, brown and gray, and that the
brown, or positive side, orients to the selected direction.
When you specify a sketch plane, the default orientation reference
and orientation direction are determined based on the model's
orientation in the graphics window when you entered the sketch
setup.
nl
Different combinations of selected orientation reference and orientation

direction will yield the same sketch orientation in the graphics window. In
the lower-left figure, the datum plane RIGHT could be selected as the
Orientation Reference to face right to yield the same result. You can also
reverse the sketch orientation by clicking Flip from the Sketch dialog box.
If ever you reorient the model while sketching, you can click Sketch
to return the sketch parallel to the screen.
na
lU
se
Orientation
When you start a new sketch feature you are required to specify the sketch
setup. However, once you are creating the sketch feature you can always
reenter sketch setup by clicking either Sketch Setup
from the Sketcher
toolbar or Sketch > Sketch Setup from the main menu.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Within the Properties tab of the Sketch dialog box, you can modify the name
of the sketch feature as it appears in the model tree. Also, if you edit the
definition of an existing closed sketch, you can select X-Hatch from the
Properties tab to hatch the inside of the sketch within the graphics window.
You can also edit the spacing of the hatch lines. While you cannot modify
the angle of the hatch lines, you can modify the angle within the drawing
view of a drawing.
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 5
PROCEDURE - Specifying the Sketch Setup

Scenario
Specify the Sketch Setup on various datum planes.
sketch_setup.prt
Sketch_Setup
Task 1:
Specify the Sketch Setup on datum plane FRONT.
na
lU
se
1. Start the Sketch Tool

from
the feature toolbar.
Select datum plane FRONT.
dialog box.
Notice that now you could
sketch geometry.
nl
The T, R, and F features have been added for training purposes

to help visualize and distinguish datum planes.
tio
2. Reorient the model to a 3-D

orientation.
uc
a
3. Click Sketch Orientation

Fo
r
Ed
4. Click Sketch Setup

from the
Sketcher toolbar.
In the Sketch dialog box, click
Flip.
Click Sketch.
Again, notice that you could
now sketch geometry.
5. Click Quit Section

Sketcher toolbar.
Click Yes.
Task 2:
from the
Specify the Sketch Setup on datum plane TOP.
1. Orient the model to the Standard Orientation.

.
Select datum plane TOP.
Click Sketch.
Module 7 | Page 6
2009 PTC

.
In the Sketch dialog box,
select Bottom as the new
Orientation.
Click Sketch.
.
Specify the Sketch Setup on datum plane RIGHT.
Task 3:
nl

Click Yes.
na
lU
se

.
Select datum plane RIGHT.
Click Sketch.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio

.
In the Sketch dialog box, select
Top as the new orientation for
datum plane TOP.
Click Sketch.

Orientation.
6. Select datum plane FRONT as
the new Reference.
7. Click Sketch.
Click Yes.
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 7
Task 4:
Specify the Sketch Setup on model geometry.

Orientation.
nl
na
lU
se

.
Select the top, flat surface as
the Sketch Plane.
Select datum plane FRONT as
the Reference.
Click Sketch.
2. Resume the four suppressed features in the model tree.
6. Right-click, notice the options,

and select Placement.
Ed
uc
a
tio
7. Select the right surface as the

new Sketch Plane.

Orientation.
Fo
r
9. Select datum plane TOP as the

new Reference.
10. Click Sketch.

Click Yes.
Module 7 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Utilizing Sketch References

Sketch references are used to capture design intent by snapping
geometry or dimensioning to them.
na
lU
se
nl
The following types of entities can

be selected:
Existing geometry
Sketches
Datum features
Unused references automatically
removed.
Ed
uc
a
tio
The References Dialog Box
Fo
r
Geometry Snapped to References
Additional Sketching References

Added
Utilizing Sketch References
You use sketch references to snap sketch geometry to, which can cut
down the number of dimensions required. Sketch references are also used
by the system for creating the initial weak dimensions and constraints.
Should further dimensions be required, you can dimension to or from sketch
references. Sketch references appear as dashed entities in the Sketcher.
When selecting entities from existing features, you create a parent/child
relationship between the sketch and the entity you added as a reference.
However, if you add a sketch reference and it goes unused, the system
automatically removes it as a sketch reference. Conversely, if you dimension
to or from an entity the system automatically adds it as a sketch reference.
from the
You can add sketch references either by clicking References
Sketcher toolbar or Sketch > References from the main menu. At this point,
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 9
the References dialog box opens. The References dialog box consists of the
following items:
na
lU
se
nl
Select References Select entities in the graphics window. The following

types of entities can be selected as sketch references:
Existing geometry Select the edges or surfaces of features that have
already been created.
Sketches Select geometry from existing sketches.
Datum Features Select datum planes, datum axes, points, and
coordinate systems.
Select Xsec References Select a surface or datum plane to intersect
with the sketching plane.
Selection Filters Used for selecting items within the Reference list.
Choices from the drop-down list include Use Edge/Offset, All Non-Dim.
Refs, Chain Refs, and All References.
Replace Select a reference from the list, click Replace, and select a
new reference.
Delete Delete the selected reference from the list.
Reference Status Displays the status of the sketch with respect to
references. Status options include Unsolved Sketch, Partially Placed, and
Fully Placed.
Solve You can solve an unsolved or partially placed sketch after
changing references.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
You can also use sketch references for snapping geometry while sketching.
Module 7 | Page 10
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Utilizing Sketch References

Scenario
Utilize Sketch References in Sketcher.
Sketch_References
nl
na
lU
se

from
Select the surface.
Edit the Orientation direction
to Right.
Click Sketch.
Select and use references in Sketcher.
Task 1:
references.prt
to
uc
a
tio

Ed
4. Click No hidden
Fo
r
5. Click References
from the
Sketcher toolbar.
Query select the vertical edge.
Select the two additional edge
references shown.
Select DTM1 from the model
tree.
6. In the References
dialog box, select the
Edge:F8(EXTRUDE_1)
reference and click Delete.
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 11
7. Select the far left vertical edge in

the graphics window to add it as
a reference.
8. Click Close from the References
dialog box.
Ed
uc
a
12. Click Shading
tio

Orientation.
na
lU
se
nl
9. Click Line
and sketch the five
lines as shown.

.
Fo
r
14. Click No hidden
15. Click References

. The
unused reference was removed
from the left side of the sketch.

Click Yes.
17. Click Shading
18. Hide Sketch 3.

Module 7 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher

You can reuse existing geometry by selecting it with Use Entity
from Edge within Sketcher.
nl
Two types:
Use Edge
Offset Edge
Select edge types:
Single
Chain
Loop
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Reused Entities from Edge
Selecting the Desired Entity

from Edge Chain
Ed
Reused Entities Offset from Edge
Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher
Fo
r
The Use Edge

and Offset Edge
options in Sketcher create sketcher
geometry by projecting selected geometry edges onto the sketching plane.
The two options are the same except the offset edge enables you to specify
an offset value to the edges. A positive offset value causes the geometry
to become larger, whereas a negative offset value causes the geometry to
become smaller. Each entity created has the "~" constraint symbol.
The resulting dimensions are always positive when shown in a
drawing.
When using the entity from edge options, you can select edges three different
ways:
Single Edges are selected one at a time.
Chain Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities.
Select two edges from the same surface or face and select which chain
of geometry you wish to be created. The lower-right figure shows one
possible chain selection from the selected entities.
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 13
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Loop Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. Select a

surface or face and the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If
more than one loop exists, you must select the desired one.
Module 7 | Page 14
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher

Scenario
Use the edges of existing geometry in Sketcher.
use_offset_edge.prt
Use_Edge
4. Click Use Edge
Sketcher toolbar.
na
lU
se
2. Click No hidden

.
Select the front surface.
Click Sketch.
Use the edges of geometry in Sketcher.
nl
Task 1:
from the
uc
a
tio
5. Select the top and bottom halves

of the circle.
Ed
6. Select Chain from the Type

dialog box.
7. Select the bottom arc and top
arc.
Fo
r
8. Click Next from the menu

manager.
Click Accept.

and
sketch two tangent lines.
and trim the four overhanging
arcs.
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 15
Task 2:
Offset the edges of existing geometry in Sketcher.

Click Use Previous.
2. Click Offset Edge
Sketcher toolbar.
from the
3. Select Loop from the Type

dialog box.
na
lU
se
nl
4. Select the surface.
5. Click Accept from the menu

manager.
uc
a
tio
and
Ed

edit the dimension to -10.
Fo
r
to view
8. Click References
the sketcher references.
Click Close.

Orientation.
11. De-select the sketch.
12. Click Shading
Module 7 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Thickening Edges
The Thicken Edge option enables you to offset existing geometry
with a width.
Edge Types:
Single
Chain
Loop
Open
Flat
Circular
nl
End Cap Types:
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Thicken Single Open
Thicken Chain Circular
Ed
Thicken Chain Flat
Thickening Edges Theory
Fo
r
The Thicken Edge

option in Sketcher creates Sketcher geometry by
projecting and then offsetting and thickening selected geometry edges onto
the sketching plane. You are prompted for two values, a thickness and a
positive or negative offset. Both values create Sketcher dimensions that
can be modified. In addition, a reference dimension is automatically created
between the selected edge and the thickened edge. The reference dimension
cannot be modified directly, but will update with other changes.
Even if negative offset values are entered, the resulting dimensions
are always positive when shown in a drawing.
When thickening edges, you can select edges using three different methods:
Single Edges are selected one at a time.
Chain Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities.
Select two edges from the same surface or face and select which chain
of geometry you wish to be created. The lower-right figure shows one
possible chain selection from the selected entities.
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 17
Loop Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. Select a

surface or face and the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If
more than one loop exists, you must select the appropriate one.
In addition, you can control the end cap type on the thickened edges using
the following options:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Open No additional geometry is added to thickened edges.

Flat Line segments are added to ends of the thickened edges.
Circular Arcs are added to ends of the thickened edges.
Module 7 | Page 18
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Thickening Edges

Scenario
Thicken the edges of existing geometry in Sketcher.
thicken_edge

.
Select the top surface.
Click Sketch.
4. Click Thicken Edge
Sketcher toolbar.
na
lU
se
2. Click No hidden
Thicken the edges of geometry using the Single and Chain options.
nl
Task 1:
thicken_edge.prt
from the
uc
a
6. Select the arc.
tio
5. Click Single and Open.
Ed
7. Type 2 for the thickness and

press ENTER.
Fo
r
8. Type 10 for the offset and press

ENTER.
9. Click Chain and Flat.

10. Select the edges shown.
11. If necessary, click Next to
highlight the appropriate chain.
Click Accept.
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 19

press ENTER.
ENTER.
na
lU
se
16. If necessary, click Next to

highlight the appropriate chain.
Click Accept.
15. Select the edges shown.
nl
14. Click Chain and Circular.

press ENTER.
Thicken edges using the Loop option.
Fo
r
Task 2:
Ed
uc
a
tio

ENTER.

Click Use Previous.
2. Click Thicken Edge
Sketcher toolbar.
.
from the
3. Select Loop and select the

surface shown.
4. Click Next to highlight the
appropriate chain.
Click Accept.
Module 7 | Page 20
2009 PTC

press ENTER.
6. Type -1 for the offset and press
ENTER.
8. Press CTRL + D to orient to the

standard orientation.
9. Click Shading
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
2009 PTC
Module 7 | Page 21
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 7 | Page 22
2009 PTC
Module
8
O
nl
Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes

Module Overview
na
lU
se
Datum features are commonly required as references when creating other

features. In this module, you learn the theory behind creating datum features,
and you create datum axes and datum planes.
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio

Learn the theory behind creating datum features.
Create datum axes.
Create datum planes.
2009 PTC
Module 8 | Page 1
Creating Datum Features Theory

Datum features are commonly required as references when
creating other features.
nl
The following types of

datum features can be
created:
Datum Planes
Datum Axes
Datum Points
Datum Coordinate
Systems
na
lU
se
Examples of Datum Features
Creating Datum Features Theory
Datum
Datum
Datum
Datum
Planes
Axes
Points
Coordinate Systems
uc
a
tio
Datum features are commonly required as references when creating other

features. Datum features can be used as dimensioning references, feature
placement references, and assembly references. The default color of datum
features in the graphics window is brown (datum planes are both brown and
grey, depending upon which side is currently being viewed). The following
four types of datum features can be created:
Fo
r
Ed
Examples of each type of datum feature are shown in the figure.
Module 8 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Creating Datum Axes
nl
O
na
lU
se
Definition:
No mass, infinite linear
reference
Display length can be
changed
Uses:
Construction geometry
Reference
Types:
Auto axis
Axis feature
Geometry point
Geometry centerline
Datum axes are particularly useful for making datum planes,

placing items coaxially, and creating axis patterns.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Geometry Axis Created for Revolve Feature
Various Datum Axis Types
Datum Axis Definition
Fo
r
Datum axes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed,

hidden, or deleted. A datum axis is a linear reference that has no mass. It is
infinite in length, but its display length can be edited by selecting a reference,
specifying a value, or dragging the drag handle.
Datum Axis Uses

A datum axis can be used as construction geometry in a feature. It can also
be used as a reference for:
Other datum features such as datum planes.
Other features such as a hole location.
Assembling components.
Datum Axis Types

There are four different types of datum axes that can be created within
Pro/ENGINEER:
2009 PTC
Module 8 | Page 3
Auto Axis Belongs to another feature and is created in the following

two circumstances:
A circle is extruded.
A hole is created.
2. Axis Feature Select most any combination of geometry that defines a
line in 3-D space. You can select single or multiple references which
are set as a combination of Through, Normal, Tangent, and Center
constraint types. The following types of axis features can be created:
Through an edge
Normal to a plane
Through a cylindrical surface
Through the intersection of two planes or planar surfaces
Through two points or vertices
Through the center of an arc
Tangent to an edge
Through a point or vertex, normal to a plane
Through the X, Y, or Z axis of a coordinate system
3. Geometry Point Created only in Sketcher. When the sketch is
completed, the axis appears at the location of the geometry point,
normal to the sketch plane. A geometry point can only be used for
internal sketches of extrude features.
4. Geometry Centerline Created only in Sketcher. A geometry
centerline is created in the sketching plane, and when the sketch is
completed, it displays as a datum axis within the graphics window.
A geometry centerline can be used as the axis of revolution for a
revolve feature. When a geometry centerline is selected in Sketcher,
you can right-click and select Construction to convert it to a sketch
entity. Likewise you can select a centerline and right-click and select
Geometry to convert the centerline to a geometry centerline.
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
1.
Selecting Datum Axes
Fo
r
You can select datum axes by the following methods:
Select the axis line.

Select the axis name tag.
Select the axis in the model tree.
Search for the axis by name in the search tool.
Module 8 | Page 4
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Axes

Scenario
Create datum axes on a part model.
Datum_Axes
Create datum axes on a part model.
nl
1. Start the Datum Axis Tool

from the feature toolbar.
2. Select the edge.
na
lU
se
3. Click OK from the Datum Axis

dialog box.
Task 1:
datum_axis.prt
4. De-select the datum axis.

uc
a
tio
7. Click OK and de-select the

datum axis.
Ed

plane FRONT and the surface.
Fo
r
10. In the Datum Axis dialog box,

select the Display tab.
Select Adjust Outline.
Select Reference from the
drop-down list.
Select the same surface again.
11. In the Datum Axis dialog box,
select the Properties tab.
Edit the name to REF_1.
Click OK and de-select the
datum axis.
2009 PTC
Module 8 | Page 5
14. Right-click and select Offset

References.
nl
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
17. Click OK from the Datum Axis

dialog box.
16. Edit the values to 22 and 3.

surfaces.
Module 8 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Creating Datum Planes
nl
Viewing Datum Plane Sides
tio
na
lU
se
Definition:
No mass, infinite planar
reference
Display size can be changed
2 sides
Uses:
Default datum planes
Construction geometry
Reference
Types:
Through
Normal
Parallel
Offset
Angle
Tangent
Blend section
Datum planes are 2-D reference geometry that you use to build
feature geometry.
Datum Plane Types
uc
a
Datum Plane Definition
Fo
r
Ed
Datum planes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed,

hidden, or deleted. A datum plane is a planar reference that has no mass.
It is infinite in size, but its display size can be edited to visually fit a part,
feature, surface, edge, axis, or radius. You can also drag its drag handle. A
datum plane has two sides that display brown and grey, as shown in the
lower figure. The front, or brown side, is considered to be positive, while the
back, or gray side, is considered to be negative.
Datum Plane Uses
The RIGHT, FRONT, and TOP datum planes included in all the default
templates are known as the default datum planes. Every feature is directly or
indirectly created off of these datum planes. A datum plane can be used as
construction geometry for a feature. It can also be used as a reference for:
Other datum features such as datum axes.
Other features such as sketches on an angle.
Assembling components.
Datum Plane Types

When creating datum planes, you can select most any combination of
geometry that defines a plane in 3-D space. You can select single or multiple
references which are set as a combination of the following seven constraint
types:
2009 PTC
Module 8 | Page 7
5.
6.
7.
Selecting Datum Planes
na
lU
se
3.
4.
2.
Through Select any of the following:

Axis, edge, or curve
Point or vertex
Plane
Cylinder
Normal Select any of the following:
Axis
Edge
Curve
Plane
Parallel Select a plane
Offset Select either of the following:
Plane
Coordinate system
Angle Select a plane
Tangent Select a cylinder
Blend Section Select a blend feature and a section number
nl
1.
You can select datum planes by the following methods:
uc
a
tio
Select the datum frame.

Select the datum plane tag.
Select the datum plane in the model tree.
Search for the datum plane by name in the search tool.
Fo
r
Ed
Module 8 | Page 8
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Planes

Scenario
Create datum planes in a part model.
Datum_Planes
Task 1:
datum-plane.prt
Create datum planes in a part model.
2. Select the right surface and drag

the drag handle to an offset of
12.
nl
1. Start the Datum Plane Tool

na
lU
se
3. Click OK from the Datum Plane

dialog box.
4. With DTM1 still selected, start
the Datum Plane Tool
.
5. Drag the drag handle to an offset

of 8.
uc
a
tio
6. Click OK from the Datum Plane

dialog box and de-select the
datum plane.
Fo
r
Ed
9. In the Placement tab of the

Datum Plane dialog box, select
Through from the drop-down
list.
10. In the datum plane dialog box,

select the Display tab.
Select Adjust Outline.
Edit the drop-down list to
Reference.
Select the surface again.
Edit the drop-down list back to
Size.
Edit the Width and Height to
14 and 10, respectively.
datum plane.
2009 PTC
Module 8 | Page 9

cylinder and edge.
na
lU
se

axis A_2 and datum plane
RIGHT.
nl
13. In the Datum Plane dialog box,

select Tangent from the surface
reference drop-down list.
datum plane.

select Parallel from the datum
plane reference drop-down list.
Click OK.
tio
17. With DTM5 still selected, start

.
uc
a

axis A_2.
Ed

select Normal from the datum
plane reference drop-down list.
datum plane.
Fo
r

axis A_2 and the surface.
22. Edit the offset value to 10 or -10
to attain the proper direction and
click OK.
23. Edit the definition of DTM4.

select the Display tab and click
Flip.
Click OK.
Module 8 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Module
9
O
nl
Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs

Module Overview
na
lU
se
Once you have created 2-D sketches, you can use those sketches to create
3-D geometry.
In this module, you use 2-D sketches to create 3-D solid geometry features
including extrude, revolve, and profile rib features. You also learn about the
common dashboard options associated with these types of sketch-based
features.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Create solid extrude and revolve features.
Create profile rib features.
Learn common dashboard options including extrude depth, feature
direction, thickening sketches, and revolve angle.
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 1
Creating Solid Extrude Features

Create extruded features from 2-D sketches.
nl
Extrude sections perpendicular to

the sketching plane.
Add or remove material from the
model.
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Viewing 2-D Sketches
Extrude Feature Adding Material
Extrude Feature Removing Material
Fo
r
Creating Solid Extrude Features

An extrude feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. It linearly extrudes
a sketch perpendicular to the sketching plane to create or remove material.
You can either select the sketch first and then start the Extrude tool, or you
can start the Extrude tool and then select the sketch.
In an assembly you cannot create an extrude feature that adds
material. You can only remove material.
Module 9 | Page 2
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Extrude Features

Scenario
Create solid extrude features.
extrude.prt
Extrude_Features
Create solid extrude features.
2. Select Sketch 1.
na
lU
se
3. Drag the drag handle down

below datum plane TOP to a
depth of 16.
from

the dashboard.
5. Start the Extrude Tool
6. Select Sketch 2.
tio
7. Edit the height to 24.
from
nl

Task 1:
uc
a
Ed
10. Select Sketch 3.
Fo
r
11. Click Remove Material

the dashboard.
from
12. Edit the depth to Through All

.
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 3
Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth
nl
O
na
lU
se
Extrude depth
options:
Blind
Symmetric
To Next
Through All
Through Until
To Selected
Side 1/Side 2
Set using
dashboard or
right-clicking drag
handle
You can extrude a sketch to many different depth options.
Extrude Depth Options
Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth
tio
When you create an extrude feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth at which
the feature extrudes can be set in a variety of ways depending upon the
design intent you wish to capture. You can specify the desired depth option
using the dashboard or by right-clicking on the drag handle in the graphics
window. Extrude depth options include:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Blind (Variable) This is the default depth option. You can edit this depth
value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or
using the dashboard.
Symmetric The section extrudes equally on both sides of the sketch
plane. You can edit the total depth at which the feature extrudes just as
you can with the Blind depth option. Therefore, the Symmetric depth is
essentially the same as a Blind Symmetric depth.
To Next This option causes the extrude to stop at the next surface
encountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surface
controls the extrude depth.
Through All This option causes the section to extrude through the entire
model. A depth dimension is not required, as the model itself controls
the extrude depth.
Through Until This option causes the extrude to stop at the selected
surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface
controls the extrude depth. Note that the section must pass through the
selected surface.
To Selected This option causes the extrude to stop at the selected
surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls
the extrude depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the section does
not have to pass through the selected surface.
Side 1/Side 2 You can independently control the depth at which the
section extrudes on each side of the sketching plane. By default, the
section extrudes on Side 1; however, you can cause the section to extrude
Module 9 | Page 4
2009 PTC
on Side 2 as well. Any of the above options can be used for either side
except for Symmetric.
The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry present at the
time (in the feature order) when the extrude is created. Features created
after the extrude feature is created do not cause the extrude feature's depth
to change.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can also switch depth options by right-clicking on the drag

handle in the graphics window.
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 5
PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Extrude

Depth
Scenario
Create extrude features using different depth options.
extrude-depth.prt
Extrude_Depth
2. Select sketch BLIND, and edit

the depth to 200.
na
lU
se
nl
Create extrude features using different depth options.
Task 1:
tio
5. Select sketch SYMMETRIC.
uc
a
6. In the dashboard, edit the depth

and drag the
to Symmetric
drag handle to 125.
Ed
Fo
r
9. Select sketch TO_NEXT.

10. Edit the depth to To Next
.
.
The To Next preview displays across the whole model because it

must calculate the whole model to determine the "next" surface.
13. Select sketch THRU_ALL.

Module 9 | Page 6
and click Remove Material
.
2009 PTC
17. Select sketch THRU_UNTIL.

18. Edit the depth to Intersect
Selected Surface
and
select the surface.
na
lU
se
nl
22. Edit the depth to To Selected

and select the surface.
21. Select sketch TO_SURFACE.
24. Notice the contour at the extrude

end.
tio
27. Select sketch TO_PLANE.
uc
a

and select datum plane
DTM1.
.
Ed

Fo
r
31. Select sketch BOTH_SIDES and

edit the depth to 220.
32. Select the Options tab and edit
the Side 2 depth to To Next
.
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 7
Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction

You can edit the depth direction and material direction of a
feature.
na
lU
se
nl
Depth Direction
Side 1
Side 2
Material Direction
uc
a
tio
Same Feature, Flipped Depth

Direction
Fo
r
Ed
Same Feature, Side 2 Depth

Direction Added
Same Feature, Flipped Material

Direction
Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction

When you create a feature, such as an extrude
feature, there are two yellow arrows that appear in
the interface, as shown to the right.
In this case, the arrow on the right displays perpendicular to the section and
denotes the depth direction. The arrow on the left displays parallel to the
section and denotes the material direction.
Specifying the Depth Direction

The depth direction arrow in the interface shows you which direction the
feature will be created with respect to the sketching plane. You can flip the
Module 9 | Page 8
2009 PTC
direction of feature creation either by using the dashboard or by clicking

the arrow in the interface. In the upper-right figure, the depth direction was
flipped.
By default, the feature is created in only one direction. This is known as Side
1. However, you can add the second direction so the feature is created in
both directions from the sketch plane. This second side is Side 2. In the
lower-left figure, the Side 2 depth direction was added to the feature.
Specifying the Material Direction
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
The material direction arrow in the interface shows you which side of the
sketch material will be removed when creating a cut. This arrow only displays
when removing material. Like the depth direction arrow, you can flip the
material direction either by using the dashboard or by clicking the arrow in
the interface. In the lower-right figure, the material direction for the cut was
flipped from the inside to the outside. Consequently, the material that was
removed flipped from the inside to the outside.
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 9
PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Feature

Direction
Scenario
Modify the depth and material directions for various extrude features.
feature-direction.prt
Feature_Direction
Modify the depth and material directions for various extrude

features.
na
lU
se
2. Click Change Depth Direction

from the dashboard.
Click Preview Feature
from the dashboard.
1. Edit the definition of HEX.
nl
Task 1:
tio
3. Orient the model and notice the

cut is now on the underside of
the model.
from
uc
a
4. Click Resume Feature

the dashboard.
Fo
r
Ed
5. In the dashboard, click Change

Material Direction
.
.
Click Preview Feature
The hex feature is now
removing material on the
outside of the sketch.
The hex feature is still removing material from the model (the base).
6. Click Resume Feature

Material Direction
.
Click Complete Feature .
8. Press CTRL+D to orient to the
Module 9 | Page 10
2009 PTC
9. Edit the definition of OVAL.

Notice the depth direction points
upward.
Options tab.
Edit the Side 2 depth to Blind
nl
na
lU
se
11. Orient the model and view the

underside of the model.
and edit the value to 28.

Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 11
Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch

The Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features
including extrude, revolve, blend, and sweep features.
Create solids or cuts.
Edit the material thickness.
Flip the side that thickens.
Thicken open or closed sections.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Flipping the Side that Thickens

and Material Thickness
Ed
Creating a Thickened Cut
Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch Theory
Fo
r
The Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features including

extrude, revolve, blend, and sweep features. When creating one of these
features, you can use the Thicken Sketch
the selected section outline.
option to assign a thickness to
You can create features that either add or cut away material.
You can edit the material thickness, as shown in the lower-right figure.
You can also change the side of the sketch where the thickness is added,
or add thickness to both sides of the sketch by using Change Thickness
Side
to toggle through the options.
You can use this option on both open and closed sketches.
For example, you can use the Thicken sketch option to sketch a circle and
extrude it into a pipe shape with a specified wall thickness, or you can use
it to sketch a rectangle and extrude it into box-shaped tubing, again with a
specified wall thickness.
Module 9 | Page 12
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Thicken

Sketch
Scenario
Thicken the sketches of various extrude features in a model.
Thicken_Sketch
na
lU
se

Orientation.
nl
1. Notice the hex cut in the bottom

of the model.
Thicken the sketches of various extrude features in a model.
Task 1:
thicken-sketch.prt
tio
4. In the dashboard, click Thicken
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Sketch
.
Edit the thickness value to 4.
Click Change Thickness Side
.
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 13

6. In the dashboard, edit the depth
value to 10.
Click Change Depth
Direction
.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Click Remove Material

.
Click Change Thickness Side
to thicken on both sides of
the sketch.
Fo
r
Ed
Module 9 | Page 14
2009 PTC
Creating Solid Revolve Features

Create revolved features from 2-D sketches.
nl
Revolve a section about the axis

of revolution in a sketching plane.
Add or remove material from the
model.
Select different axes of revolution.
First geometry centerline
Axis or edge
na
lU
se
Viewing 2-D Sketches
Removing Material using a

Revolve Feature
uc
a
tio
Same Revolved Sketch using

Different Axes of Revolution
Creating Solid Revolve Features
Fo
r
Ed
A revolve feature is based on a two-dimensional sketch. You can use

a revolve feature to revolve a sketch about an axis of revolution (in the
sketching plane) to create or remove material. You can either select the
sketch first and start the Revolve tool, or you can start the Revolve tool and
then select the sketch.
When you select a sketch to be revolved, the feature uses, by default, the
first geometry centerline sketched within the section as the axis of revolution,
as shown in the left image in the lower-left figure. However, you can also
select any other straight curve or edge, datum axis, or coordinate system axis
as the axis of revolution. If the sketch you are revolving does not contain a
geometry centerline, you will need to select one of these other references as
the axis of revolution. In the right image in the lower-left figure, the axis of
revolution has been changed to the REV datum axis. There are two rules for
defining the axis of revolution:
1. Geometry must be sketched only on one side of the axis of revolution.
2. The axis of revolution must lie in the sketching plane of the section.
You can revolve either an open or closed sketch. In the figures, a closed
sketch is used to create the feature that adds material, while an open section
is used to create the cut that removes material.
You can also thicken the sketch used to create a revolve feature.
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 15
PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Revolve Features

Scenario
Create solid revolve features about different axes.
revolve.prt
Revolve_Features
Task 1:
Create solid revolve features using different axes of revolution.
nl
tio

Orientation.
na
lU
se
3. Click Geometry Centerline

sketch a horizontal geometry
centerline over the horizontal
centerline.
2. Select the vertical centerline,

right-click, and select Geometry.

Notice the vertical and horizontal
centerlines.
from
uc
a
6. Start the Revolve Tool

7. Select Sketch 1 if necessary.
Ed
8. Right-click and select Axis of

revolution Collector.
9. Select datum axis REV.
.
Fo
r
11. Edit the definition of Revolve 1.

Placement tab and click
Internal CL.
their display.
Module 9 | Page 16
to disable
2009 PTC

from
16. Select Sketch 2.

18. Edit the Revolve angle to 75 and

press ENTER.
na
lU
se
nl
20. Edit the definition of Revolve 2.

21. Edit the Revolve angle back to
360 and press ENTER.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 17
Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle

You can revolve a sketch to many different angle depths.
Revolve angle options:
Variable
Symmetric
To Selected
Side 1/Side 2
nl
na
lU
se
Variable Revolve Angle Depth
Symmetric Revolve Angle Depth
uc
a
tio
Side 1 Revolve Angle To Selected,

Side 2 Revolve Angle Variable
Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle
Ed
When you create a revolve feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth angle at
which the feature revolves can be set in a variety of ways depending upon
the design intent you wish to capture. Revolve angle options include:
Fo
r
Variable (Blind) This the default revolve angle option. You can edit this
revolve angle value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on
the model, or using the dashboard. The dashboard also contains four
predefined angles, 90, 180, 270, and 360 that you can select.
Symmetric The section revolves equally on both sides of the sketch
plane. You can edit the total angle at which the feature revolves just as you
can with the Variable depth angle option. Therefore, the Symmetric angle
is essentially same as the Variable Symmetric depth.
To Selected This option causes the revolve to stop at the selected
surface or datum plane. A dimension for angle value is not required, as
the selected surface controls the revolve angle. The location on where you
select the datum plane or surface determines where the revolve stops at in
relation to the axis of revolution. In the lower-left figure datum plane DTM2
was selected to the right of the axis of revolution. If datum plane DTM2
was selected to the left of the axis of revolution, the feature would have
revolved another 180 degrees before stopping.
Side 1/Side 2 You can independently control the angle at which the
section revolves on each side of the sketching plane. By default, the
Module 9 | Page 18
2009 PTC
section revolves on Side 1; however, you can cause the section to revolve
on Side 2. Any of the above options can be used for either side except for
Symmetric.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can also switch revolve angle options by right-clicking on the

drag handle in the graphics window.
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 19
PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Revolve

Angle
Scenario
Use the various revolve angle options for a revolve feature.
revolve-angle.prt
Revolve_Angle
Use the various revolve angle options for a revolve feature.
nl
Task 1:
na
lU
se
2. Select the visible sketch and

select datum axis REV from the
model tree.
Ed
uc
a
tio
3. Edit the revolve angle depth

value to 90 and click Change
.
Angle Side
Fo
r
4. Click Change Angle Side

again.
5. Edit the depth to Symmetric

.
and
select datum plane DTM2 to the
right of the axis of revolution.
Module 9 | Page 20
2009 PTC

Options tab.
Edit the Side 2 depth to
Variable
the value.
and type 90 as
nl
na
lU
se
9. In the dashboard, edit the Side

2 depth to To Selected
and
select datum plane DTM2 to the
left of the axis of revolution.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 21
Creating Profile Rib Features

A profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, except
that it requires an open section sketch.
nl
Profile rib features require an open

sketch.
You can edit the side that thickens.
You can flip to which side of the
sketch you want to create the rib.
Rib geometry adapts to the
adjacent, solid geometry.
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Viewing Open Sketches
Fo
r
Editing the Side that Thickens
Flipping Which Side the Rib

is Created
Creating Profile Rib Features
Ribs are typically used to strengthen parts. A profile rib feature is similar to an
extruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch. The rib
also conforms to existing planar or cylindrical geometry when it is extruded.
After you select an open section sketch and set a thickness, Pro/ENGINEER
automatically creates the profile rib feature by merging it with your model.
The system can add material above or below the sketch, and the thickness
can be applied on either side, or be symmetric about the sketch. The Profile
Rib Tool
enables you to create rib features faster than it would be for you
to create and sketch a protrusion.
Module 9 | Page 22
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Profile Rib Features

Scenario
Create profile rib features on a part model.
rib.prt
Profile_Rib
Task 1:
Create profile rib features on a part model.
nl
1. Start the Profile Rib Tool

2. Select RIB_SKETCH-1.
3. Drag the width to 75.
.
na
lU
se
uc
a
tio
Notice the angled rib surface is not planar; it is contoured to

match the curved surface the sketch is adjacent to.
Ed
6. Select RIB_SKETCH-2.
7. Orient to view orientation RIGHT.
Fo
r
8. Drag the width to 25. The rib is

centered about the sketch.
9. Click Change Thickness
. The rib moves to the
Option
left of the sketch.
2009 PTC
Module 9 | Page 23
10. Click Change Thickness

Option
again. The rib moves
to the right of the sketch.
12. Reorient the model.
na
lU
se
nl
14. Select RIB_SKETCH-3. The rib

is above the sketch.
15. Click the yellow arrow in the

graphics window. The rib is now
on the bottom of the sketch.
.
uc
a
tio
Fo
r
Ed
Module 9 | Page 24
2009 PTC
Module
10
Module Overview
na
lU
se
nl
Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded

Datums
When creating 3-D geometry features, you can select sketches and datum
features to help you create that geometry. However, these items do not
already have to exist in the model tree. Rather, they can be created at the
time they are needed.
Objectives
uc
a
tio
In this module, you learn how to create internal sketches when creating
sketch-based features as an additional option to selecting a preexisting
sketch. You also learn how to create embedded datum features.
Fo
r
Ed

Create internal sketches.
Create embedded datum features.
2009 PTC
Module 10 | Page 1
Creating Internal Sketches

An internal sketch is contained in the feature it defines.
Internal Versus External Sketches
na
lU
se
nl
Internal sketch benefits:

Organization
Reduced Feature Count
External sketch benefits:
Same sketch can be used for
multiple features
Can be unlinked
tio
Internal Sketches
uc
a
External Sketches
Internal Sketches
Ed
Prior to the release of Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire, internal sketches were the

only sketch type available in Pro/ENGINEER. You are now given the choice
of using either internal or external sketches within Pro/ENGINEER.
Fo
r
PTC does not recommend one type of sketch over the other; you should use
the type that works best for you. In this topic, we discuss how to use internal
sketches and some of the benefits they can provide.
Creating an Internal Sketch

Internal sketches are created during the creation of any sketched feature.
Start the feature tool for any sketched feature (for example, Extrude Tool
).
Click Define from the Placement tab in the dashboard and create a
sketch. You can also right-click and select Define Internal Sketch to
enter Sketcher.
Complete the feature and an internal sketch with the name S2D000# is
created and embedded within the feature.
Pros and Cons of Internal Sketches

Internal sketches provide some benefits that external sketches do not.
Module 10 | Page 2
2009 PTC
nl
Organization Because internal sketches are embedded in the feature

they define, you always know where to find them. External sketches are
separate features that can be renamed and reordered like other features.
In a model containing hundreds of features, it can take some time to
determine which sketch is used to define which feature. This is not a
problem, just something to be aware of when selecting the type of sketch
you will use.
Reduced Feature Count Because internal sketches are not features,
they do not add to the total number of features in a model. Creating a
separate external sketch for every sketched feature in your model can
dramatically increase the number of features in a model. In models
containing hundreds or even thousands of features, external sketches
can dramatically increase the total feature count in a model. Again, this
is something you will want to consider when selecting the type of sketch
you will use.
Unfortunately, you cannot simply make an internal sketch external without
saving it out and recreating it.
na
lU
se
Pros and Cons of External Sketches
External sketches provide some benefits that internal sketches do not.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
You can always redefine an external sketch to internal.

You can select a different sketch for the same feature. This enables you to
quickly pursue multiple design options.
The same external sketch can be specified for multiple features.
You can unlink a specified external sketch.
External sketches result in a higher feature count because there is an
additional sketch feature for every sketched feature as displayed in the
model tree.
2009 PTC
Module 10 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Creating Internal Sketches

Scenario
Work with internal and external sketches to see how they differ.
Internal_Sketches
Task 1:
internal-sketch.prt
Work with internal sketches.
nl
tio

Orientation and observe
the 12_POINT sketch.
3. De-select the sketch.
na
lU
se
2. Expand Extrude 2, and notice

that external Sketch 2 is used
within it.
1. Select external Sketch 2 and

notice it in the model.
Ed
uc
a
6. Select the Placement tab in the

dashboard.
Click Define to create the
internal sketch.
Select the front surface of the
model.
Fo
r
7. Click Sketch from the Sketch

dialog box.
9. Click Palette
and place the
Hexagon shape.
10. Delete the length dimension,

and edit the resulting radius
dimension to 10.
Module 10 | Page 4
2009 PTC

Orientation.
14. Click To Selected

and query
select the surface at the bottom
of Extrude 2.
16. Expand Extrude 3 in the model

tree, and notice the internal
sketch S2D0001.
nl
na
lU
se
17. Edit the definition of Extrude 3.

18. Select the sketch feature
12_POINT as the new sketch.
19. Click OK from the Section

Selection dialog box to replace
the existing internal sketch.
.
tio
Ed
uc
a
21. Expand Extrude 3 again in the

model tree. Notice that Extrude
3 now uses the sketch feature
12_POINT, and is external.
Fo
r
22. Select sketch 12_POINT and press DELETE. Notice that Extrude 3
will also be deleted, as it uses the 12_POINT sketch. Click Cancel
from the Delete dialog box.
24. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and click Unlink.
25. Click OK from the Unlink dialog box to break the association.
27. Select sketch 12_POINT and

press DELETE. Click OK to
delete the sketch feature.
Extrude 3 and notice that
it again contains an internal
sketch.
2009 PTC
Module 10 | Page 5
Creating Embedded Datum Features

Embedded datum features are any combination of plane, axis,
point, or coordinate systems embedded within another feature.
nl
Benefits of Embedded Datum

Features:
No need to restart feature
creation.
More organized models.
Automatically hidden datums.
tio
na
lU
se
Embedded in an Extrude
Embedded in a Hole
Embedded in a Datum
uc
a
Benefits of Embedded Datum Features
Ed
Embedded datum features can be used as sketch planes, orientation planes,

dimensioning references, placement references for holes, references for
draft features, and so on. Datum features can even be embedded in other
datum features.
Fo
r
Suppose you have begun the creation of an extrude feature, and then realize
the sketch plane you need has not yet been created. You could cancel out of
the Extrude Tool, create the datum plane, then start the Extrude Tool again. A
better solution would be to simply create the sketch plane as an embedded
datum, while the Extrude Tool is still open.
Another benefit of embedded datum features is that they produce a cleaner,

more organized model tree. For example, if the sketch plane of an extrude
feature you are creating requires that you create three datum planes and
an axis, those four datum features will be embedded within the node of the
extrude feature; they will not clutter the model tree as regular features would.
Each embedded datum feature functions as some type of reference to the
feature in which it is embedded, otherwise it would not be embedded. This
makes it easy to determine what each datum is used for and which feature
references it.
The display of embedded datum features is automatically set to hidden after
they are created. This helps ensure that the display of your model remains
uncluttered.
Module 10 | Page 6
2009 PTC
na
lU
se
Creating Embedded Datum Features
nl
In the following figure, notice the three different displays of the same model
tree. The model on the left was created without using embedded datum
features. The figure in the middle was created using embedded datum
features and the feature nodes are expanded. The figure on the right displays
the same model (as the middle figure) with the feature nodes collapsed.
Embedded datums are created by starting a datum tool during the creation of
another feature. Starting the datum tool will automatically pause the creation
of the current feature, enabling you to create the required datum feature.
After you have created the required datum features, you can resume the
creation of the feature by clicking Resume Feature in the dashboard.
uc
a
tio
By then selecting the newly created datum features as sketch planes,

orientation, dimensioning, placement, or depth references, they become
embedded in the feature.
About Embedded Datum Features
Ed
When you delete a feature containing embedded datum features,

Pro/ENGINEER gives you the option to keep or also delete the embedded
datum features.
Fo
r
Sketch and orientation datum planes can only be embedded in features using
internal sketches.
If for some reason the datum features you create are not embedded as
expected, you can select them in the model tree and drag them into the
feature, after creation. This will embed them and set their display to hidden,
just as if they were originally embedded. Datums can be un-embedded in the
same way, by dragging them from a feature back to the model tree.
Best Practices
Embedded datum features should be used as the design intent dictates. For
example, you cannot reuse an embedded datum feature in a downstream
feature. Their use promotes the creation of models that are easier to edit,
use and thus easier to share with downstream users.
2009 PTC
Module 10 | Page 7
PROCEDURE - Creating Embedded Datum Features

Scenario
Create an extrude feature using a series of embedded datum features
created to define sketch, orientation, and depth references.
embedded-datum.prt
Embed_Datums

,
select the surface, and drag the
Offset to 10.
nl
Create an extrude feature referencing embedded datum features.
Task 1:
na
lU
se
3. In the Properties tab, edit the

Name to OFFSET and click OK.
tio
Creating each of these datum features after starting a feature

tool defines them as embedded.
uc
a
4. With OFFSET still selected,
Ed
start the Datum Axis Tool ,

press CTRL, and select the top
surface.
Fo
r
5. Edit the name to PIVOT and click

OK.
6. With PIVOT still selected, start

,
press CTRL, and select the top
surface.
7. Edit the Rotation to either 25 or
-25 to attain the proper direction.
8. Edit the name to ORIENT and
click OK.
Module 10 | Page 8
2009 PTC
9. With ORIENT still selected, start

,
press CTRL, and select datum
axis PIVOT.
10. Edit the ORIENT reference from
Offset to Normal.
11. Select the Display tab and click
Flip to orient the yellow arrow as
shown.
nl
13. In the dashboard, click Resume Feature
12. Edit the name to SKETCH and

click OK.
na
lU
se
14. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.

Select SKETCH as the Sketch Plane.
Select Orientation Top for datum plane ORIENT.
Click Sketch.
tio
15. If necessary, select datum

plane RIGHT as the vertical
reference and click Close from
the References dialog box.
uc
a

and sketch the circle.
Ed
18. Edit the diameter to 32.

Fo
r
20. Orient to the 3D orientation.

and edit the
Depth Direction
depth to To Selected
.
Axis Display
display.
and
to disable their

,
press CTRL, and select the two
inner hole surfaces.
Edit the name to DEPTH, and
click OK.
2009 PTC
Module 10 | Page 9
24. Click Resume Feature from

the dashboard. Because datum
plane DEPTH is still selected, it
is automatically selected as the
depth reference.
.
and click Complete Feature
nl
na
lU
se
28. Expand Extrude 4 in the model tree. Notice the embedded datums.
Ed
uc
a
tio
29. Edit Extrude 4. Notice that dimensions from the feature and all
embedded datums are displayed.
Fo
r
Module 10 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Creating Sweeps and Blends
11
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Extruded and revolved features comprise the majority of the features on the
models that you create. However, there are occasions when extruded and
revolved features cannot easily create the necessary geometry. In these
instances, you may need to sketch more advanced geometry features.
In this module, you learn how to create two advanced geometry features: the
sweep feature and the blend feature.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Create sweeps with open and closed trajectories.
Analyze sweep feature attributes.
Create a parallel blend protrusion or cut.
Experiment with parallel blend attributes and section tools.
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 1
Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories
nl
O
Sweeping a Closed Sketch Along

an Open Trajectory
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Components of a sweep feature:

Trajectory
Selected or sketched
Start point
Sketched section
Closed or open
Crosshairs mark the
trajectory
Create protrusions or cuts.
Thin option
A sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, or

traverses, along a trajectory.
Sweeping an Open Sketch Along

an Open Trajectory
Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories
You create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section feature that

follows a trajectory curve. A sweep can either be created as a protrusion or
a cut, and is defined as such when starting the feature. Once defined, you
cannot redefine a protrusion to a cut, or a cut to a protrusion. You can also
specify the thin option for both the swept protrusion and swept cut. A sweep
feature consists of both a trajectory and a section.
Defining the Trajectory

The trajectory is the path that a section sweeps along. The trajectory can
be open, meaning that it does not have to create a loop, as shown in the
figures. It can have sharp or tangent corners, as can be seen respectively in
the upper figures' protrusion and the lower figures' cut. The trajectory can
also either be selected or sketched.
Module 11 | Page 2
2009 PTC
na
lU
se
nl
Selected trajectory A selected trajectory can consist of selected datum

curves or edges. Other than selecting a sketched curve, the other allowable
datum curve types for a trajectory are Intersection of two surfaces, Use
Xsec, Project, Wrap, Offset, and Two projection.
When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods and options
are available:
One By One Select individual curves or edges.
Tangnt Chain Select a chain of tangent edges.
Curve Chain Select a chain of curves.
Bndry Chain Select a chain of one-sided edges that belong to the
same surface list.
Surf Chain Select a chain of edges that belong to the same surface.
Intent Chain Select an intent chain.
Select / Unselect Select or unselect chain edges.
Trim / Extend Trim or extend chain ends.
Sketched trajectory Sketch the trajectory to be swept along. The
sketched trajectory is created internal to the sweep feature.
When the trajectory has been defined, you can select the start point for the
section. The start point is the location from which the section begins to sweep.
Defining the Section
uc
a
tio
Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch the
section that will be swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the section
is perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The crosshairs seen in the
sketching plane are the intersection of the trajectory and sketch plane.
Ed
The sketched section may be either open or closed. The swept protrusion
in the upper figures is a closed section, while the swept cut in the lower
figures is an open section.
Causes of a Sweep Failure
Fo
r
A sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occur:
A trajectory crosses itself.
You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the
section changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.
A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and the
feature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories

Scenario
Create open trajectory sweeps with an open and closed sketch.
sweep_open-traj.prt
Open-Traj
Task 1:
Create an open trajectory sweep protrusion with a closed sketch.
1. Click Insert > Sweep > Protrusion from the main menu.
2. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain > Select from the menu manager.
nl
3. Select one segment of Sketch 1 from the graphics window and click
Select All > Done from the menu manager.
na
lU
se
5. Sketch a vertical centerline on
the vertical reference and click
Palette
uc
a
tio
6. Select the Profiles tab and add

the T-profile to the sketch.
Right-click on the X Location
handle and drag it to the
midpoint of the top horizontal
line.
Edit the scale to 0.5 and click
Accept Changes .
Ed

Orientation and notice the
trajectory and section.
.
Fo
r
9. Click OK from the Protrusion

dialog box.

Sketch 1 and select Hide.
Module 11 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Create an open trajectory sweep cut with an open sketch.
1. Click Insert > Sweep > Cut from

the main menu.
2. Click Sketch Traj from the menu
manager and select the top
surface of the model, followed by
Okay from the menu manager.
nl
O
na
lU
se
4. Select datum planes OFFSET

and RIGHT as references, as
well as the top surface and two
vertices.
3. Click Bottom from the menu

manager and select the front "T"
surface.

and sketch two circles that
are tangent to the references.
Ed
uc
a
tio
and sketch two

6. Click Line
vertical lines. The first should
start at the top reference and
snap tangent to the top circle.
The second should start at the
bottom reference and snap
tangent to the bottom circle.
Fo
r

and
create the tangent line.
and trim the circle entities.
10. Click Free Ends > Done from

the menu manager.
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 5
11. Click Center and Ends Arc

and sketch an arc with a radius
of 0.4.
.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
14. Click Okay from the menu

manager and click OK from the
Cut dialog box.
nl
Fo
r
Ed
Module 11 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories
nl
Sweeping a Closed Sketch Along

a Closed Trajectory
Sweeping an Open Sketch Along

a Closed Trajectory
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Components of a sweep
feature:
Trajectory
Selected or sketched
Start point
Add Inn Fcs
Sketched section
Closed or open
Crosshairs mark the
trajectory
Thin option
A sweep feature consists of a sketched section that sweeps, or

traverses, along a trajectory.
Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories
Fo
r
Ed
You create a sweep feature when you want to create a constant cross-section
feature that follows a trajectory curve. A sweep can either be created as a
protrusion or a cut, and is defined as such when starting the feature. Once
defined, you cannot redefine a protrusion to a cut, or a cut to a protrusion.
You can also specify the thin option for both the swept protrusion and swept
cut. A sweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section.
Defining the Trajectory
The trajectory is the path that a section sweeps along. The trajectory can
be closed, meaning that it creates a loop, as shown in the figures. It can
have sharp or tangent corners. The trajectory can also either be selected
or sketched.
Selected trajectory A selected trajectory can consist of selected datum
curves or edges. Other than selecting a sketched curve, the other datum
curve types allowed for a trajectory are Intersection of two surfaces, Use
Xsec, Project, Wrap, Offset, and Two projection.
When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods and options
are available:
One By One Select individual curves or edges.
Tangnt Chain Select a chain of tangent edges.
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 7
Curve Chain Select a chain of curves.

Bndry Chain Select a chain of one-sided edges that belong to the
same surface list.
Surf Chain Select a chain of edges that belong to the same surface.
Intent Chain Select an intent chain.
Select / Unselect Select or unselect chain edges.
Trim / Extend Trim or extend chain ends.
Sketched trajectory Sketch the trajectory to be swept along. The
sketched trajectory is created internal to the sweep feature.
nl
When the trajectory has been defined, you can select the start point by
clicking Start Point from the menu manager and selecting the desired
location on the trajectory. The start point is the location from which the
section begins to sweep.
na
lU
se
After the start point has been defined, you must select whether you want to
add inner faces. When you add inner faces, the top and bottom faces close
the swept solid, as is shown in the lower figures. Note that the sketched
section must be open when adding inner faces.
Defining the Section
tio
Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch the
section that will be swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the section
is perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The crosshairs seen in the
sketching plane are the intersection of the trajectory and sketch plane.
uc
a
The sketched section may be either open or closed. The swept protrusion
in the upper figures is a closed section, while the lower figures display an
open section.
Ed
Causes of a Sweep Failure
A sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occur:
Fo
r
A trajectory crosses itself.

You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the
section changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory.
A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small relative to the section, and the
feature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.
Module 11 | Page 8
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories

Scenario
Create closed trajectory sweeps with an open and closed sketch.
sweep_closed-traj.prt
Closed-Traj
na
lU
se
2. Click Select Traj > Curve

Chain > Select from the menu
manager.
nl
1. Click Insert > Sweep >

Protrusion from the main
menu.
Create a closed trajectory sweep protrusion with a closed sketch

and without inner faces.
Task 1:
3. Select one segment of Sketch

2 in the graphics window and
click Select All > Done from the
menu manager.
tio
4. Click No Inn Fcs > Done from

the menu manager.
uc
a
6. Sketch a vertical centerline on

the vertical reference and click
.
Ed
Palette
Fo
r
7. Select the Profiles tab and add

the T-profile to the sketch.
Right-click on the X Location
handle and drag it to the
midpoint of the top horizontal
line.
Place the section.
Edit the scale to 0.5, edit
the rotation to 180, and click
Accept Changes .

2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 9
Edit the sweep to create a closed trajectory protrusion with an

open sketch and inner faces added.
na
lU
se
1. Edit the definition of Protrusion id 1379.
Task 2:
nl

dialog box.
2. In the Protrusion dialog box, select Attributes and click Define.

3. In the menu manager, click Add Inn Fcs > Done.
tio

and trim the right side of the
sketch.
uc
a

.
Fo
r
Ed

dialog box.
Module 11 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes

You can edit the attributes for the ends of an open trajectory
sweep feature so that they are free or merged.
nl
The ends of a sweep feature can

be set to:
Free ends
Merged ends
tio
na
lU
se
Model with Sweep Feature
uc
a
Ends of the Sweep Feature

are Free
Ends of the Sweep Feature

are Merged
Ed
Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes
Fo
r
If the trajectory of a sweep feature is open (meaning, the start and end points
of the trajectory do not touch) you can edit the attributes of the ends of the
sweep feature to one of the following options:
Merge Ends Merge the ends of the sweep into the adjacent solid. To
do this, the sweep ends must be touching the other solid geometry. The
merged sweep ends are shown in the lower-right figure.
Free Ends Do not attach the sweep ends to the adjacent geometry. This
is the default option, and is shown in the lower-left figure.
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 11
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes

Scenario
Edit the ends of a sweep feature from free to merged.
sweep_attributes.prt
Sweep_Attributes
nl
na
lU
se
1. Orient to the FRONT view.

Notice that there is a gap
between the ends of the curved
tube and the top and bottom flat
surfaces.
Edit the ends of a sweep feature from free to merged.
Task 1:
2. Edit the definition of Protrusion id 429.
3. In the Protrusion dialog box, select Attributes and click Define.
tio
4. In the menu manager, click Merge Ends > Done.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

dialog box. Notice that the gap
between the curved tube and the
top and bottom flat surfaces is
now gone.
Module 11 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Creating a Parallel Blend Protrusion or Cut
nl
O
na
lU
se
Components of a blend feature:

Sections
At least two required
Toggle section
Equal number of entities per
section
Line up start points
Direction
Depth
A parallel blend feature blends sections along a dimensioned,

linear distance.
Blend Depths
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Blend Sections
Creating a Parallel Blend Protrusion or Cut
You create blend features when you need to create models that contain
different transitional cross-sections. This means that you can create
geometry that starts as a circular cross-section, but as you transition along
the length of the feature, the feature changes to a square cross-section.
Therefore, blend features can create cuts and protrusions that use different
cross-sectional sketches. Parallel blends consist of sections, direction of
feature creation, and depth.
Defining the 2-D Sections

To create a parallel blend, there must be at least two sections on the same
sketching plane. Each section, like any sketch, is fully constrained and
dimensioned. When you are ready to create the second or any subsequent
section, you must toggle the section. In doing so, the existing sketches
become grayed out and temporarily inactive.
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 13
Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond
between sections to avoid a twisting effect in the blend. You can move the
start point in a sketch by selecting the desired vertex, right-clicking, and
selecting Start Point. The upper figure shows all three sections as having a
start point at the upper-left.
Each section must contain the same number entities (or vertices) per section.
There are two exceptions to this rule. First, the blend can start or end as a
single point. Second, a number of blend vertex points can be added, which
count as 'entities'. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section
enables the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects
the points of each section to create the blend feature.
nl
Defining the Direction of Feature Creation
na
lU
se
Defining the Depth of the 2-D Sections
You must specify the direction in which the blend sections are projected. You
can flip the direction of feature creation.
The first section created in the parallel blend remains on the sketching plane.
Each subsequent section is projected normal to the sketching plane at a
specified distance in the direction of feature creation. The following depth
options are available:
uc
a
tio
Blind Specify a depth value between projected sections.

Thru Next The section is projected up to the next encountered surface.
Thru All The section is projected through all surfaces.
Thru Until The section is projected up to the specified surface.
From To The section is projected between two selected surfaces.
Fo
r
Ed
Module 11 | Page 14
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating a Parallel Blend Protrusion or

Cut
Scenario
Create a blend protrusion and a blend cut.
Parallel_Blend
Create a 3-section blend protrusion.
Task 1:
blend.prt
nl
1. Click Insert > Blend > Protrusion from the main menu.
na
lU
se
2. In the menu manager, click Done > Straight > Done.

Select datum plane FRONT and click Okay > Default.
uc
a
tio
4. Click Palette
and place the
blend_section1.
Relocate the Location handle
to the center.
Edit the scale to 1 and click
Accept Changes .
Ed
5. Click in the background to clear

the selection, then right-click and
select Toggle Section.
Fo
r
6. Add the blend_section2 from

the Sketcher palette. Relocate
the Location handle to the center,
edit the scale to 1, and click
Accept Changes .
7. Click in the background, then

right-click and select Toggle
Section.
8. Add the blend_section3.
Relocate the Location handle to
the center, edit the scale to 1,
and click Accept Changes .
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 15
10. Edit the depth for section 2 to 30

and the depth for section 3 to 20.
Create a 3-section blend cut.
1. Click Insert > Blend > Cut from the main menu.
Task 2:
nl

Orientation and click OK.
tio
4. Click No hidden
na
lU
se
2. In the menu manager, click Done > Straight > Done.

Select the front surface and click Okay > Default.
Select datum planes TOP and RIGHT as references.
uc
a
5. Click Centerline
and
sketch a vertical and horizontal
centerline.
Ed
6. Click Rectangle
, sketch the
first section, and dimension it.
Fo
r
7. Right-click and select Toggle

Section.
8. Click Rectangle
, sketch the
second section, and dimension
it.
Module 11 | Page 16
2009 PTC

Section.
10. Click Rectangle
, sketch the
third section, and dimension it.
.
13. Click Okay > Blind > Done from

the menu manager.
nl
12. Click Shading
na
lU
se
14. Edit the depth for section 2 to 20

and the depth for section 3 to 30.
tio

Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 17
Experimenting with Parallel Blend Attributes

You can edit the attributes for connecting blend sections so that
they are straight or smooth.
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Blend sections can be connected:

Straight
Smooth
Straight Blend Attribute
Smooth Blend Attribute
uc
a
Experimenting with Parallel Blend Attributes
Ed
When the sections of a parallel blend are projected normal to the sketching
plane, you can connect the sections by two methods:
Fo
r
Straight The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown
in the left figure. This is the default option.
Smooth The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as
shown in the right figure.
Module 11 | Page 18
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Experimenting with Parallel Blend

Attributes
Scenario
Edit the blend shape of a parallel blend.
Blend_Attributes
na
lU
se
2. In the Protrusion dialog box,

select Attributes and click
Define.
nl
1. Edit the definition of Protrusion

id 23.
Edit the blend shape of a parallel blend.
Task 1:
blend_attributes.prt
3. In the menu manager, click

Smooth > Done.
tio

dialog box.
5. Edit the definition of Cut id 153.
uc
a
6. In the Cut dialog box, select

Attributes and click Define.
Smooth > Done.
Fo
r
Ed
8. Click OK from the Cut dialog box.
9. Resume feature CUT to view the inside of the model.
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 19
Analyzing Parallel Blend Section Tools

Blend section tools help you achieve the desired blend result.
na
lU
se
nl
Tools include:
Blend vertex
Start point
Blending to a point
tio
Different Section Start Points
Ed
uc
a
Blend using Blend Vertices
Blending to a Point
Analyzing Parallel Blend Section Tools
Fo
r
The blend feature includes three different tools that are beneficial when you
create blend feature sections:
Blend vertex Each section of a blend must always contain the same
number of entities. For sections that do not have enough geometric entities,
you can add blend vertices. Blend vertices allow vertices to converge or
diverge. In the lower-left figure, the first blend section has six vertices,
while the second blend section has only four vertices. Consequently, two
blend vertices have been added to the section with only four vertices.
Start point As a general rule of thumb, the start points between sections
should correspond to the same vertex location. Typically, the start point
is created on the first location that is selected when creating a section.
For example, if sketching a rectangle, the start point will be placed at the
first corner of rectangle creation, although it can be relocated. If the start
points do not line up between sections, the resulting blend feature will have
a twist in it, as shown in the upper-right figure.
Module 11 | Page 20
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Blending to a point A blend can start or end as a single point, as shown

in the lower-right figure. This is the one exception where blend sections do
not have to contain the same number of entities.
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 21
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Parallel Blend Section Tools

Scenario
Create blends using available section tools.
Blend_Tools
na
lU
se
2. Select the front surface of the

model and click Okay > Default
from the menu manager.
nl
1. Click Insert > Blend >

menu and click Done > Done
Create a 3-section blend using a blend vertex and a sketcher point.
Task 1:
blend_section-tools.prt
tio
4. Click Use Edge , select Loop

from the Type dialog box, select
the model, and click Close.
uc
a
5. Select the lower-left vertex,

right-click, and select Start
Point.
Ed

Section.
7. Click Centerline
and sketch a
vertical centerline.
Fo
r
8. Click Rectangle
and sketch
a rectangle, starting at the
upper-left and ending at the
lower-right. Dimension it as
shown.
9. Select the lower-left vertex,

right-click, and select Start
Point.
10. Select the upper-right vertex and
click Sketch > Feature Tools
> Blend Vertex from the main
menu.
11. Select the upper-left vertex and
click Sketch > Feature Tools >
Blend Vertex.
Module 11 | Page 22
2009 PTC

Section.
nl
O
na
lU
se

and click
Blind > Done from the from the
menu manager.
Type 150 as the first depth and
press ENTER.
Type 75 as the second depth
and press ENTER.
13. Click Point

and create the
point, snapping to the midpoint
of the lower horizontal line.
tio

Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
2009 PTC
Module 11 | Page 23
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 11 | Page 24
2009 PTC
12
O
nl
Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
In addition to creating features that begin with 2-D sketches and proceeding
to solid features, you can also create features that are applied directly to
a model.
In this module, you learn how to create various types of holes on a model,
how to shell a model, and how to apply basic draft to features.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Create coaxial, linear, radial, and diameter holes, as well as understand
the different depth options available.
Know the different hole profile options.
Create draft features.
Create basic split drafts.
Analyze draft hinges and pull direction.
Create shell features.
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 1
Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth
nl
O
Hole Depth Options
na
lU
se
Hole depth options:

Blind
Symmetric
To Next
Through Until
To Selected
Through All
Side 1/Side 2
Set using
dashboard or
right-clicking drag
handle
You can drill a hole to many different depth options.
Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth
tio
When you create a hole, the depth at which the hole drills into a model
can be set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish
to capture. You can specify the desired depth option using the dashboard
or by right-clicking on the drag handle in the graphics window. Hole depth
options include:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Blind (Variable) This is the default depth option. You can edit this depth
value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or
using the dashboard.
Symmetric The hole will bore equally on both sides of the placement
plane. You can edit the total depth at which the hole bores just as you
can with the Blind depth option. The Symmetric depth is actually a Blind
Symmetric depth.
To Next This option causes the hole depth to stop at the next surface
encountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surface
controls the hole depth.
Through Until This option causes the hole to stop at the selected
surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls
the hole depth. Note that the hole must pass through the selected surface.
To Selected This option causes the hole to stop at the selected surface.
A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the hole
depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the hole does not have to
pass through the selected surface.
Through All This option causes the hole to drill through the entire
model. A depth dimension is not required, as the model itself controls
the hole depth.
Side 1/Side 2 You can independently control the hole depth on each
side of the placement plane. By default, the hole drills on Side 1; however,
you can cause the hole to also drill on Side 2 as well. Any of the previous
hole depth options, except Symmetric, can be used for either side.
Module 12 | Page 2
2009 PTC
The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry present at the
time (in the feature order) when the hole is created. Features created after
the hole is created do not cause the hole to change its depth.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can also switch depth options by right-clicking the drag handle
in the graphics window.
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Common Dashboard Options: Hole

Depth
Scenario
Redefine hole features to edit their depths using different options.
hole_depths.prt
Hole_Depth
1. Edit the definition of BLIND_1.
2. Edit the depth value to 0.5.

.
na
lU
se
Redefine the depth options of the six holes.
nl
Task 1:
4. Edit the definition of BLIND_2.

Ed
uc
a
tio
7. Edit the definition of TO_NEXT.

.
8. Edit the depth to To Next
Fo
r

TO_SELECTED.
and select the surface.
Module 12 | Page 4
2009 PTC
13. Edit the definition of THRU_ALL.

.
nl
na
lU
se

SYMMETRIC. Notice the
hole placement plane is a datum
plane in space.
to

18. Edit the depth to Symmetric

.
tio

Shape tab and edit the Side 2
depth to Through All
.
uc
a

to
Fo
r
Ed
23. Resume the suppressed feature

CUT to view the holes.
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 5
Creating Coaxial Holes

A coaxial hole is placed at the intersection of an axis and a
surface.
nl
Placement references:
Datum axis
Surface or datum plane
Offset references:
None
Coaxial Holes
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Selecting Placement References
Hole Creation Theory
Fo
r
Ed
When creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selecting

placement (primary) and offset (secondary) references. The first piece of
geometry selected to place the hole is the placement reference. Next, you
either select additional placement references or offset references to further
dimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected as
the placement reference determines the type of hole being created.
Creating Coaxial Holes
To create a coaxial hole, you only select placement references. An axis is

selected as the first placement reference. This axis identifies the location of
the hole. A second placement reference, of either a surface or datum plane,
is then selected to specify the surface where the hole starts drilling into the
model. In the figures on this slide, datum axis A_1 and the front surface are
the placement references.
You can also view your selected references in the Placement tab
of the dashboard.
Once the hole references are satisfied, the hole preview appears with a
default diameter dimension and depth value, which can be modified by using
the drag handles or dashboard, or by editing the dimensions on the model.
Module 12 | Page 6
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Coaxial Holes

Scenario
Create two coaxial holes, one through all and the other of blind depth.
holes_coaxial.prt
Holes_Coaxial
from the
3. Edit the diameter to 1.
na
lU
se

axis A_1 and the front surface.
nl
1. Start the Hole Tool

feature toolbar.
Create two coaxial holes in the model, one through all and the
other of blind depth.
Task 1:

.
tio

axis A_2 and the front surface.
uc
a

Placement tab. Notice that your
selected references are added to
the collector.
Ed
9. Edit the diameter to 1.5.
Fo
r

2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 7
Creating Linear Holes

A linear hole is created by selecting one placement reference
and two offset references.
nl
Placement references:
Datum plane or surface
Offset references:
Datum plane or surface
Edge
Datum axis
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Selecting Placement Reference
Completed Hole
Selecting Offset References
Ed
Fo
r

Creating Linear Holes

To create a linear hole, a planar surface is selected as the placement
reference. This surface identifies where the hole starts 'drilling' into the
model. Two offset references are then selected to dimensionally constrain
the hole feature. In the upper figure on this slide, the front surface of the
model is the placement reference. In the lower-right figure, the top surface
and datum plane DTM1 are the offset references. You can select offset
references directly from the model or you can drag the green reference
handles to the desired reference.
You can view your selected references in the reference collectors in the
Placement tab of the dashboard. Within this tab, you can edit offset reference
Module 12 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
values as well as modify whether the hole is offset or aligned to an offset

reference. In the lower-right figure, the hole is aligned to datum plane DTM1.
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 9
PROCEDURE - Creating Linear Holes

Scenario
Create two different linear holes on a model.
holes_linear.prt
Holes_Linear
Create two different linear holes on a model.
2. Select the front surface.
na
lU
se

References Collector.
from the
nl

feature toolbar.
Task 1:
tio
4. Press CTRL and select the top

surface and datum plane DTM1.
uc
a
5. Edit the offset values to 3.5 from

the top surface and 3.0 from
datum plane DTM1.
Fo
r
Ed
6. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50

and the depth value to 2.
Module 12 | Page 10
2009 PTC
nl
na
lU
se

surface and datum plane DTM1.

uc
a
tio

Placement tab.
In the Offset References
collector, select Align from the
DTM1 drop-down list.
Edit the offset value to 3.5
from the top surface.
Fo
r
Ed

and the depth value to 2.
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 11
Creating Radial and Diameter Holes
nl
Radial and Diameter Holes
na
lU
se
On a cylindrical surface:
Create radial holes only.
One offset reference for offset.
One offset reference for angle.
On a planar surface:
Create either radial or diameter
holes.
One datum axis.
One surface or datum plane for
angle.
Angle value based on quadrant of
pick point from axis.
Radial and diameter holes are created by selecting one

placement reference and two offset references.
uc
a
tio
Cylindrical Surface Radial Hole
Ed
Diameter Hole
Planar Surface Radial Hole
Fo
r

Creating Radial Holes on a Cylindrical Placement Surface

You can create a radial hole on a cylindrical surface by selecting the cylindrical
surface as the placement reference. Furthermore, if the placement reference
is a cylindrical surface, you can only create a radial hole. This cylindrical
surface identifies where the hole starts drilling into the model. For a radial
hole, the specific location chosen on this surface determines the direction
from which the angle is measured. For example, in the middle-right figure, if
the surface was chosen below datum TOP, the measured angle would be
45 clockwise from TOP, instead of measuring 315 counter-clockwise. To
Module 12 | Page 12
2009 PTC
flip the hole to the same angle on the opposite side of the datum plane you
can simply specify a negative value.
Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole.
You can select references directly from the model or you can drag the green
reference handles to the desired reference. The first offset reference is a
planar reference from which to offset the hole, and the second is a planar
reference to determine the angle. In the middle-right figure, the offset
references are the front surface of the model and datum plane TOP.
Creating Radial or Diameter Holes on a Planar Placement Surface
na
lU
se
nl
You can select a planar surface as the placement reference to create both a
radial or diameter hole. This placement reference identifies where the hole
starts drilling into the model. For a radial hole, the specific location chosen
on this surface determines the location from which the angle is measured.
For example, in the lower-right figure, if the surface was chosen above datum
TOP but to the right instead of the left, the measured angle would be 65
counter-clockwise from datum TOP, instead of measuring 115 clockwise. To
flip the hole to the same angle on the opposite side of the datum plane you
can simply specify a negative value.
tio
Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole.
The first offset reference is an axis from which to locate the hole radially,
and the second is a planar reference to determine the angle. For the planar
placement radial hole in the lower-right figure, the secondary references are
datum axis A_2 and datum plane TOP. For the diameter hole in the lower-left
figure, the secondary references are datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
If a planar surface is selected as the placement reference, you can switch

the hole type between Linear, Radial, and Diameter. When you switch the
hole type, the offset references will automatically switch between radius,
diameter, angle, or offsets.
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 13
PROCEDURE - Creating Radial and Diameter Holes

Scenario
Create radial and diameter holes on a model.
holes_radial_diameter.prt
Holes_Rad_Dia
Create radial and diameter holes on a model.

from the

feature toolbar.
nl
Task 1:
na
lU
se
2. Select the cylindrical surface.
3. Right-click and select Offset References Collector.
4. Press CTRL and select datum plane TOP and the front surface.
uc
a
tio

Placement tab.
Edit the offset angle to 45 from
datum plane TOP.
Edit the offset axial value to
0.40 from the front surface.
Ed
6. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and the

hole depth to To Next
.
Fo
r

11. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane TOP.
Module 12 | Page 14
2009 PTC
na
lU
se
nl
13. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and the

.
hole depth to To Next

Placement tab.
Edit the hole Type from Linear
to Radial.
Edit the radius to 0.5 from
datum axis A_2.
Edit the angle to either 65
or -65 to attain the proper
direction above datum plane
TOP.
tio

18. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Placement tab.
Edit the hole Type from Linear
to Diameter.
Edit the diameter to 1.5 from
datum axis A_2.
Edit the angle to either 60
or -60 to attain the proper
direction from datum plane
RIGHT.

and the hole depth to Through
.
All

2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 15
Exploring Hole Profile Options
nl
O
na
lU
se
Hole Profile Options
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Hole profile options include:

Rectangle hole profile
Drill point profile
Add counterbore
Add countersink
Exit countersink
Lightweight hole display
Dimension drill point profile
to:
Shoulder
Tip
You can add a drill point to your hole as well as add countersinks
or counterbores.
The Shape Tab
Drill Point Dimensioning Schemes
Exploring Hole Profile Options

When you create a hole in Pro/ENGINEER, the default profile is a rectangular
shape, as shown in the top hole in the upper figure. This is the rectangle hole
profile. Other hole profiles and options available include, and are shown in
the upper figure, respectively:
Drill point profile Adds the drill tip to the hole profile. You can edit the
drill tip angle.
Add counterbore Creates a counterbore on the hole. You can edit the
counterbore diameter and depth.
Add countersink Creates a countersink on the hole. You can edit the
countersink angle and diameter. You can also create an exit countersink
on a Through All hole.
Module 12 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Lightweight hole display Creates a hole that displays as a ring on the

placement surface. Switching a hole feature to lightweight hole display
affects the model's mass properties.
Dimensioning the Hole Depth for the Drill Point Profile

When you select the drill point profile, you can dimension the hole depth
using two different methods:
Shoulder You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the end
of the shoulder. This is shown in the left image of the bottom-right figure.
Tip You are able to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the tip of the
hole. This is shown in the right image of the bottom-right figure.
nl
The Dashboard Shape Tab
tio
Edit hole diameter and depth.

Edit drill tip angle.
Edit counterbore diameter and depth.
Edit countersink diameter and angle.
Enable an exit countersink on a through all hole.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
na
lU
se
At any time during the hole creation process, you can select the Shape tab
in the dashboard to see the hole profile you are creating. This hole profile
image updates automatically as you modify hole profile options, enabling
you to preview the final result. Within the Shape tab you can perform the
following operations:
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 17
PROCEDURE - Exploring Hole Profile Options

Scenario
Redefine hole features to modify their profile options.
hole_profiles.prt
Hole_Profiles
Task 1:
Redefine four holes to modify their profiles.
na
lU
se
nl
2. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole

Profile
.
1. Edit the definition of HOLE_1.
tio
uc
a

Profile
.
Select the Shape tab to view
the profile.
.
Ed
Click Tip Depth
Fo
r

Profile
.
the profile.
Click Counterbore
Module 12 | Page 18
.
.
2009 PTC

Profile
.
the profile.
nl
Click Countersink
.
Edit the hole depth to Through
.
All
Select the Exit Countersink
check box.
tio
na
lU
se
13. Resume EXTRUDE_CUT to

compare holes.
uc
a

15. In the dashboard, click
Ed
Rectangle Hole Profile
Click Lightweight Hole
.
.
Fo
r
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 19
Creating Shell Features

The Shell feature hollows out the inside of a solid model, leaving
a shell of a specified wall thickness.
nl
To create a basic shell feature:

Select surfaces for removal.
Specify thickness.
tio
na
lU
se
Original Model
Hollowed Out Model
uc
a
Shelled Model with Surfaces

Removed
Creating Shell Features
Ed
Shell features remove surfaces to hollow out a design model, leaving walls
with specified thickness values. There are two parts to the creation of a basic
shell feature:
Fo
r
Select Surfaces for Removal Select the surface or surfaces you want
to remove from the model. You may decide not to remove any surfaces
from the shell, which results in the creation of a closed shell, with the whole
inside of the part hollowed out and no access to the hollow.
Thickness Specify the thickness of the model walls that remain.
You create shells in the design process to support your design intent.
However, be aware that several features could reference a shell created
early in the design process.
Shells can be created using the Lead or Follow workflow. You can use drag
handles or the dashboard to modify the thickness of the shell feature. The
Flip icon in the dashboard is equivalent to specifying a negative shell value.
Module 12 | Page 20
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Shell Features

Scenario
Create a shell feature in a model.
shell.prt
Shell
Create a shell feature in a model.

from the
to
na
lU
se

create a hollow shell.
1. Start the Shell Tool

feature toolbar.
nl
Task 1:
3. Edit the definition of Shell 1.
4. Select the top surface to remove

it.
5. Edit the thickness to 20.
tio
uc
a
7. Edit the definition of Shell 1.
Ed
8. Press CTRL and select the left

and right surfaces to remove
them, also.
.
Fo
r
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 21
Creating Draft Features

Draft features are typically used as finishing features in molded
and cast parts.
nl
Draft features consist of:

Draft surfaces
Draft hinges
Pull direction
Draft angles
tio
na
lU
se
Draft One or Multiple Surfaces
uc
a
Same Model, Same Draft Angle, Different Draft Hinges
Creating Draft Features Theory
Fo
r
Ed
You can use draft features as finishing features in molded and cast parts, or
anywhere sloped or angled surfaces need to be created. You can define
several types of draft features by selecting different combinations of curves,
edges, surfaces, and planes for the draft surfaces, draft hinges, pull direction,
and split plane (optional). Drafts can add or remove material from a model.
A basic draft feature consists of the following four items:
Draft surfaces These are the surfaces that are to be drafted. You can
select a single surface, multiple individual surfaces, or loop surfaces as the
draft surfaces. In the upper-right figure, the left image has one surface
drafted, while the right image has four surfaces drafted.
Draft hinge Determines the location on the model that remains the
same size after the draft is created. The draft surfaces pivot about
their intersection with this plane. There does not have to be a physical
intersection. Rather, the intersection can be extrapolated. You can select
a datum plane, solid model surface, curve chain, or surface quilt as the
draft hinge. In the lower figure, the same model was drafted at the same
angle, but with the specified draft hinge progressively lower in the model,
as highlighted.
Pull direction Direction that is used to measure the draft angle. The pull
direction is also called the reference plane. By default, the pull direction
Module 12 | Page 22
2009 PTC
is the same as the draft hinge. The direction reference is used to define
the draft angle direction, and the draft angle is measured normal to this
reference. You can select a datum plane, planar model surface, linear
reference such as an edge or two points, or a coordinate system axis. The
mold opening, or pull direction, is usually normal to this plane.
Draft angle Values range from -30 degree to +30 degrees. When you
specify the draft angle, you can reverse the direction that material is added
or removed by entering a negative value or clicking the Reverse Angle
icon in the dashboard, or by right-clicking on the angle drag handle and
selecting Flip Angle.
You can also switch to the different collectors for draft surfaces, draft hinges,
and pull direction by right-clicking in the graphics window.
nl
Best Practices
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
If possible, create draft features as some of the last features of your model.
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 23
PROCEDURE - Creating Draft Features

Scenario
Draft three different features.
draft.prt
Draft_Features
Draft three features using three different methods.
2. Select the cylinder surface to

draft.
Click Reverse Angle
tio

.
uc
a
5. Start the Draft Tool
na
lU
se

References tab.
Click in the Draft hinges
collector and select the top
cylinder surface.
Edit the draft angle to 10.
from the
nl

feature toolbar.
Task 1:

vertical surfaces to draft.
Fo
r
Ed
7. In the dashboard, click in the

Draft hinges collector and select
datum plane DTM2.
Edit the draft angle to -10.
Module 12 | Page 24
2009 PTC

vertical surfaces to draft.
11. Right-click and select Draft
Hinges.
12. Select the top surface of the
main protrusion.
13. Edit the draft angle to -10.
.
na
lU
se
15. Orient to the FRONT view and

compare the differences in
the results of the rectangular
protrusions.
nl
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 25
Creating Basic Split Drafts
nl
O
Drafting First Side Only
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Split options include:

No split
Split by split object
Select a plane
Split by draft hinge
Side options:
Independently
Dependently
First/Second side only
Draft tangent surfaces check box
Split draft enables you to apply different draft angles to different

portions of a surface.
Drafting Sides Independently
Ed
Drafting Sides Dependently
Creating Draft Splits Theory
Fo
r
You can create draft features with or without split. Splitting a draft enables
you to apply different draft angles to different portions of a surface.
Splitting the Draft

You can split a draft feature in two different ways:
Split by Split Object Split the draft using a specified datum plane or
surface.
Split by Draft Hinge Split the draft using the specified draft hinge.
Side Options
Once you split the draft, there are four different options available to control
how the draft is handled on either side of the split:
Draft sides independently Enables you to specify two independent draft
angles for each side of the drafted surface. If you use this option, the
system adds a second draft angle to the dashboard. In the lower-right
figure, both sides are drafted independently with different draft angles.
Module 12 | Page 26
2009 PTC
Draft sides dependently Enables you to specify a single draft angle, with
the second side drafted in the opposite direction at the same draft angle. In
the lower-left figure, both sides are drafted dependently.
Draft first side only Drafts only the first side of the surface, with the
second side remaining in the neutral, undrafted position. In the upper-right
figure, only the first side is drafted.
Draft second side only Drafts only the second side of the surface, with
the first side remaining in the neutral, undrafted position.
Draft Tangent Surfaces
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
By default, the system automatically drafts any surfaces tangent to those

selected for drafting. For example, you can select half of a cylinder, and
the system drafts the entire 360 degrees around the cylinder. You can
disable this behavior by clearing the Draft tangent surfaces check box in
the Options tab of the dashboard.
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 27
PROCEDURE - Creating Basic Split Drafts

Scenario
Redefine three draft features and add split to them.
draft_split.prt
Basic_Draft_Split
Task 1:
Redefine three draft features and add split to them.
nl
O
na
lU
se
1. Edit the definition of Draft 1.

Split tab.
Edit the Split option to Split by
draft hinge.
Select Side option Draft first
side only.
.
uc
a
tio

Split tab.
draft hinge.
Select Side option Draft sides
independently.
Ed
6. Edit Angle 2 to -10.
Fo
r

Split tab.
draft hinge.
Select Side option Draft sides
dependently.
Module 12 | Page 28
2009 PTC
Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction

You can select different references for the draft hinge and pull
direction.
The draft hinge and pull direction
can be different.
You can reverse, or flip, the angle
about the draft hinge.
You can reverse, or flip, the pull
direction.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
References Tab
Ed
Pull Direction and Draft Hinge Same,

Different
Pull Direction Reversed
Fo
r
Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction

By default, the pull direction is the same as the draft hinge. That is, the
same reference is used for both the pull direction and the draft hinge, as
shown in the upper image of the left figure. However, you can select different
references for the draft hinge and pull direction. In the lower image of the left
figure, the pull direction has been switched to datum plane TOP. The resulting
geometry is therefore different even though the draft hinge is the same.
You can further manipulate the draft hinge and pull direction in either of the
following ways:
You can reverse the angle about the draft hinge to add or remove material.
You can reverse the pull direction by flipping it 180 degrees. In the
lower-right figure, the pull direction has been reversed, as shown by the
yellow arrow. Because it is measured normal to the pull direction, the draft
angle effectively reverses.
2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 29
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction

Scenario
Experiment with draft hinges and pull direction in a part model.
draft_pull-hinge_dir.prt
Pull_Hinge_Dir
Experiment with draft hinges and pull direction in a part model.
na
lU
se
2. Select the top surface of the

small rectangle.
from the
nl

feature toolbar.
Task 1:
3. Press SHIFT and select the top

edge of the small rectangle.
4. Release SHIFT and notice the
loop surfaces selected.
tio
5. Right-click and select Draft

Hinges.
uc
a
6. Select the large, angled surface

on which the small rectangle lies.
Ed
7. Drag the draft angle inwards to

10.
and
Fo
r

select FRONT.

References tab.
10. Notice the Draft surface, Draft
hinge, and Pull direction. The
Draft hinge and Pull direction are
the same surface.
Module 12 | Page 30
2009 PTC

to
12. Right-click and select Pull

Direction.
13. Select datum plane TOP.
to
nl
na
lU
se
17. Click Reverse Pull Direction

again.
16. In the dashboard, click Reverse

Pull Direction
.
15. Notice the difference in draft.
tio
18. In the dashboard, click Reverse

Angle
.
again.
Ed
uc
a
19. Click Reverse Angle
Fo
r
20. Press CTRL + D to orient to the

2009 PTC
Module 12 | Page 31
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 12 | Page 32
2009 PTC
13
O
nl
Creating Rounds and Chamfers
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Once you have created the bulk of your part model, it can be further refined
by adding finishing features such as rounds and chamfers.
In this module, you learn how to create rounds and chamfers.
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio

Create rounds by selecting edges, a surface and an edge, and two surfaces.
Create full rounds.
Create round sets.
Create chamfers by selecting edges and learn about the different chamfer
dimensioning schemes.
Create chamfer sets.
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 1
Creating Rounds Theory

Rounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitions
between existing geometry.
na
lU
se
nl
Rounds can add or remove

material.
You can select edges or
surfaces.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Round Preview Adding Material
Round Preview Removing

Material
Completed Rounds
Fo
r
Creating Rounds Theory
Rounds add or remove material by creating smooth transitions between

existing geometry. In the lower-right figure, one round adds material and
the other removes material. When creating round features on a model,
Pro/ENGINEER awaits the selection of edges and/or surfaces to be used
as references. The round tool adapts according to the references that you
select to create the round feature.
After the references are selected, the round preview appears with a default
radius dimension, which can be modified by using the radius drag handle, by
editing the dimension on the model, or by using the dashboard. In the upper
figure, the round preview is displayed.
Module 13 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges

The rounds created by selecting edges are constructed tangent
to the surfaces adjacent to the selected edges.
nl
You can select one or

more edge.
Rounds propagate
around tangent
edges.
tio
na
lU
se
Rounds Created by Selecting Two Edges
uc
a
Rounds Created by Selecting Two Edges
Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges
Fo
r
Ed
You can create rounds by selecting an edge or a combination of edges. Each

edge that you select is rounded. If you select an edge that has adjacent
tangent edges, by default the round automatically propagates around those
tangent edges. The rounds are constructed tangent to the surfaces adjacent
to the selected edges.
In the figures, the edges selected for rounding are highlighted on the left.
The resulting rounds are shown on the right. Note that because the bottom
figure's edges are tangent to other edges, the round feature is automatically
created on the tangent edges.
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges

Scenario
Create rounds on an L-Block and an Oval block by selecting edges.
round_edge_1.prt
Rounds_Edges
Create rounds on an L-Block.

edges.
na
lU
se
3. Edit the radius value to 2.
from
nl
1. Start the Round Tool

Task 1:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
5. Notice that the left round adds

material, while the right round
removes material.
Task 2:
Create tangent rounds on an oval block.
1. Click Open
, select
ROUND_EDGE_2.PRT, and
click Open.

edges.
4. Edit the radius value to .25.
Module 13 | Page 4
2009 PTC
6. Notice that the left round adds

material, while the right round
removes material.
7. Also notice that even though

just two edges were selected, all
edges tangent to the selected
edges were also rounded.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 5
Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and

Edge
Rounds created by selecting a surface and edge are constructed
tangent to the surface and pass through the edge.
nl
You can select a

surface and an edge.
Rounds propagate
around tangent
edges.
tio
na
lU
se
Round Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge
uc
a
Round Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge
Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge
Fo
r
Ed
You can create rounds by selecting a surface first and then an edge. These
round features are constructed tangent to the selected surface and pass
through the selected edge. If the selected edge has adjacent tangent edges,
by default, the round automatically propagates around those tangent edges.
In the figures above, the surfaces and edges selected are highlighted on the
left, and the resulting rounds are shown on the right.
Module 13 | Page 6
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface

and Edge
Scenario
Create rounds on a stepped block and an oval block by selecting a surface
and edge.
Rounds_Surf-Edge
Create rounds on a stepped block.
from

nl
Task 1:
surf-edge_1.prt
na
lU
se

surface and edge.
.
Notice that the round adds
material.
.
tio
uc
a

surface and edge.
Ed

.
Notice that the round removes
material.
Create tangent rounds on an oval block.
Fo
r
Task 2:
1. Click Open
, select
SURF-EDGE_2.PRT, and
click Open.

surface and edge.
4. Edit the radius value to 0.60.
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 7
6. Notice that the round adds

material. Also notice that even
though just the one edge was
selected, the round follows all
edge.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Module 13 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces

Rounds created by selecting two surfaces can span gaps or
engulf existing geometry.
nl
You can select two

surfaces.
Rounds can span
gaps.
Rounds can engulf
existing geometry.
You can manage
round pieces.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Round that Spans a Gap
Round that Engulfs Existing Geometry
Ed
Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces
Fo
r
You can create rounds by selecting two surfaces. The rounds are constructed
tangent to the selected surfaces. If the selected references have adjacent
tangent geometry, by default the round automatically propagates around
that geometry.
For rounds created by selecting two surfaces, the system creates the round
between the selected surfaces, and therefore has the ability to span gaps
or engulf existing geometry. In addition, rounds created by selecting two
surfaces can also provide more robust round geometry in cases where
rounds created by selecting edges may fail or create undesired geometry.
In the figures, the surfaces selected are highlighted on the left, and the
resulting rounds are shown on the right.
Managing Round Pieces

When a round traverses a gap, as shown in the upper figure, it is comprised
of two different pieces. You can manage the round pieces individually in the
dashboard by specifying their display.
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 9
PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Selecting Two

Surfaces
Scenario
Create rounds on two blocks by selecting two surfaces.
surf-surf_1.prt
Rounds_Surf-Surf
from

surfaces.
na
lU
se
nl

Create rounds on a block with a hole in it.
Task 1:
.
Notice that the round spans the
gap.
tio
5. Edit the definition of Round 1.
uc
a

Pieces tab.
Edit Piece 2 to be Excluded
in the drop-down list.
Fo
r
Ed
.
Notice that the round no longer
spans the gap.
Task 2:
Create rounds on another block.
1. Click Open
, select
SURF-SURF_2.PRT, and
click Open.

surfaces.
Module 13 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
6. Notice that the round engulfs the

existing material.
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 11
Creating Full Rounds

Full rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent to
the surface it replaces.
nl
You can select two

edges.
You can select three
surfaces.
tio
na
lU
se
Full Round Created by Selecting Two Edges
uc
a
Full Round Created by Selecting Three Surfaces
Creating Full Rounds
Fo
r
Ed
Full rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent to the surface it
replaces. You can create full rounds either by selecting a pair of edges or
a pair of surfaces. If a pair of edges is selected, the system initially creates
individual rounds on each edge, and can be quickly converted to a full round
either from the dashboard or by right-clicking. If a pair of surfaces is selected,
a third surface must also be selected as the surface to remove with the
creation of the round.
In either case, the full round is constructed with a rounding surface forming
a tangent connection between the selected references. If the selected
references have adjacent tangent geometry, the round automatically
propagates around that geometry.
In the upper figure, the full round was created by selection of two edges.
The edges selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting round is
shown on the right. This round is removing material. In the lower figure, the
full round was created by selecting three surfaces. The surfaces selected
are highlighted on the left, and the resulting round is shown on the right.
This round is adding material.
Module 13 | Page 12
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Full Rounds

Scenario
Create full rounds on two blocks.
round_full_1.prt
Full_Rounds
Create rounds on a block by selecting edges.

edges.
na
lU
se
3. Right-click and select Full

round.
from
nl

Task 1:
.
Notice that the round removes
material.
tio

edges.
uc
a
7. In the dashboard, select the Sets

tab and click Full round.
Ed
.
Notice that the round adds
material.
Create rounds on a block by selecting surfaces.
Fo
r
Task 2:
1. Click Open
, select
ROUND_FULL_2.PRT, and
click Open.

surfaces.
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 13

bottom cut surface.
.
tio
na
lU
se

surfaces.
nl
uc
a

outer surface.
.
Fo
r
Ed
Module 13 | Page 14
2009 PTC
Creating Round Sets

Round sets enable you to create rounds of different radii in
a single round feature.
na
lU
se
nl
Create multiple round sets in a single round feature.

Each round set can have a different radius value.
Each set may be created by selecting different entities.
Three Round Sets in a Single Round Feature
Creating Round Sets
uc
a
tio
Round features can contain multiple sets of references within a single round
feature. When references for a round are selected, they can be selected
as being in the same set, or in additional sets. Each round set can have
different radius values or have been created differently, for example, a full
round versus a round created by selecting surfaces. You can add new sets
to a round using the dashboard, by right-clicking in the graphics window, or
simply by selecting a new reference on the model. When you create a new
round set, you can see the rounds from the other sets in the same feature in
their previewed state.
Fo
r
Ed
In the figure, all three rounds are created within the same round feature.
Each round is from a different set. The round in the left image was created by
selecting a surface and edge. The round in the middle image was created by
selecting an edge, and the round on the right is a full round. Notice also that
the rounds are different radius values.
Round sets are important for two reasons:
1.
2.
Simplification Round sets enable you to decrease the number of

features in the model tree.
Transitions Round sets enable you to manually specify the
appearance of the transitional surface where the round sets intersect.
Round Set Selection Guidelines

When an edge is selected for rounding, the following two guidelines
determine which set a round belongs to:
Selecting edges with CTRL pressed causes rounds to be added to the
same set.
Selecting edges without CTRL pressed causes a round to be created in a
new set.
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 15
PROCEDURE - Creating Round Sets

Scenario
Create different round sets in a round feature.
round-sets.prt
Round_Sets
Create three round sets in a single round feature.
from

nl
Task 1:
2. Select the edge.
na
lU
se
4. Right-click and select Add

set. Notice that the first round
remains previewed.
tio

surface and edge.
uc
a
6. Edit the radius value to 6.5.
Fo
r
Ed

tab.
Click *New set. Notice that
the previous two rounds are
still previewed.
Press CTRL and select the
two edges.
8. Click Full round from the

dashboard.
9. In the Sets tab, select Set 2.
10. Edit the Radius value from 6.5 to

5.
Module 13 | Page 16
2009 PTC
12. Notice the single round feature

created in the model tree.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 17
Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges

Chamfers add or remove material by creating a beveled surface
between adjacent surfaces and edges.
nl
You can select one or

more edge.
Chamfers can add or
remove material.
Chamfers propagate
around tangent
edges.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Chamfers Created by Selecting Two Edges
Chamfers Created by Selecting Two Edges
Ed
Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges
Fo
r
Similar to round features, chamfers add or remove material by creating

a beveled surface between adjacent surfaces and edges selected as
references. You can create chamfers by selecting an edge or a combination
of edges. Each edge that you select will be chamfered. Like rounds, if the
selected edge for chamfering has adjacent tangent edges, by default, the
chamfer automatically propagates around those tangent edges.
In the figures, the edges selected for chamfering are highlighted on the
left. The resulting chamfers are shown on the right. Note that because the
bottom figure's edges are tangent to other edges, the chamfer feature is
automatically created on the tangent edges.
Module 13 | Page 18
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges

Scenario
Create chamfers on an L-Block and an Oval block by selecting edges.
chamfer-edge_1.prt
Chamfers_Edges
Task 1:
Create chamfers on an L-Block.
1. Start the Edge Chamfer Tool
na
lU
se
3. Edit the D value to 1.75.
nl

edges.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
5. Notice that the left chamfer adds

material, while the right chamfer
removes material.
Task 2:
Create tangent chamfers on an oval block.
1. Click Open
, select
CHAMFER-EDGE_2.PRT,
and click Open.
2. Click Edge Chamfer Tool
3. Select the edge.

4. Drag the D value to 3.
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 19

.
7. Select the edge.
8. Edit the D value to 1.
.
tio
na
lU
se
11. Also notice that even though

just two edges were selected, all
edges were also chamfered.
10. Notice that the inner chamfer

adds material, while the outer
chamfer removes material.
nl
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Module 13 | Page 20
2009 PTC
Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

There are several different ways to dimension a chamfer to
capture desired design intent.
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Dimensioning
schemes
include:
DxD
D1 x D2
Angle x D
45 x D
uc
a
Four Different Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

with the Same Geometry
Ed
Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes
Fo
r
There are several different dimensioning schemes available when creating

chamfers:
D x D Size of chamfer is defined by one dimension, as shown by the
upper-right chamfer.
D1 x D2 Size of chamfer is defined by two dimensions, as shown by
the upper-left chamfer.
Angle x D Size of chamfer is defined by a linear and angular dimension,
as shown by the lower-left chamfer.
45 x D Size of chamfer is defined by a linear dimension at a 45-degree
angle, as shown by the lower-right chamfer. This type is only valid for
perpendicular surfaces.
You can edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme either by using the dashboard
or by right-clicking in the graphics window and then selecting the new scheme.
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 21
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning

Schemes
Scenario
Create different chamfer dimensioning schemes on a block.
Cham_Dim-Schemes
Task 1:
dim-schemes.prt
tio
na
lU
se
2. Select the edge.

nl
Create four chamfer dimensioning schemes on a block.
uc
a
.
6. Select the edge.
Ed
7. In the dashboard, edit the

dimensioning scheme to D1 x
D2.
Fo
r
8. Edit the D1 value to 7 and the D2

value to 7.

.
11. Select the edge.
dimensioning scheme to Angle
x D.
13. Edit the Angle value to 45 and
the D value to 7.
Module 13 | Page 22
2009 PTC

.
16. Select the edge.
dimensioning scheme to 45 x D.
18. Edit the D value to 7.
.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
21. Select all four Chamfer features,

right-click, and select Edit.
Notice that all four chamfers are
the same geometry, but different
dimensioning schemes.
20. Orient to the FRONT view

orientation.
nl
Fo
r
Ed
2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 23
Creating Chamfer Sets

Chamfer sets enable you to create chamfers of different
dimensioning schemes or D values in a single chamfer feature.
na
lU
se
nl
Create multiple chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature.

Each chamfer set can have a different D value.
Each set may be created with a different dimensioning scheme.
Three Chamfer Sets in a Single Chamfer Feature
Creating Chamfer Sets
uc
a
tio
Chamfer features can contain multiple sets of references within a single

chamfer feature. When references for a chamfer are selected, they can be
selected as being in the same set, or in additional sets. Each chamfer set
can have different D values or could be created with a different dimensioning
scheme, for example, a D x D chamfer versus an Angle x D chamfer. You
can add new sets to a chamfer using the dashboard by right-clicking in the
graphics window, or simply by selecting a new reference on the model. When
you create a new chamfer set, you can see the chamfers from the other sets
in the same feature in their previewed state.
Fo
r
Ed
In the figure above, all three chamfers are created within the same chamfer
feature but with different dimensioning schemes. Each chamfer is from a
different set. The D x D chamfer in the left image was created by selecting an
edge. In the middle image, the Angle x D chamfer was created by selecting
an edge, and the D1 x D2 chamfer on the right was created by selecting a
different edge. Notice also that the chamfers are different D values.
Chamfer sets are important for two reasons:
1.
2.
Simplification Chamfer sets enable you to decrease the number of

features in the model tree.
Transitions Chamfer sets enable you to manually specify the
appearance of the transitional surface where the chamfer sets intersect.
Chamfer Set Selection Guidelines

When an edge is selected for chamfering, the following two guidelines
determine which set a chamfer belongs to:
Selecting edges with CTRL pressed causes chamfers to be added to the
same set.
Selecting edges without CTRL pressed causes a chamfer to be created
in a new set.
Module 13 | Page 24
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Chamfer Sets

Scenario
Create different chamfer sets in a chamfer feature.
chamfer-sets.prt
Chamfer_Sets
Task 1:
Create three chamfer sets in a single chamfer feature.
nl

2. Select the edge.
na
lU
se
4. Select the next edge. Notice

that the first chamfer remains
previewed.
tio
5. Edit the chamfer dimensioning

scheme to Angle x D.
uc
a
6. Edit the Angle value to 19 and

the D value to 6.5.
Fo
r
Ed

tab.
Click *New set. Notice that
the previous two chamfers are
still previewed.
Select the edge.
Edit the chamfer dimensioning
scheme to D1 x D2.
Edit the D1 value to 3 and the
D2 value to 1.75.

2009 PTC
Module 13 | Page 25
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 13 | Page 26
2009 PTC
Module
14
O
nl
Project I
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Using Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire and the skills learned thus far in this course,
complete the following project design tasks.
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio

Create the PISTON_PIN.PRT, PISTON.PRT, CONNECTING_ROD.PRT,
CRANKSHAFT.PRT, ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT,
IMPELLER.PRT, FRAME.PRT, and BOLT.PRT models.
2009 PTC
Module 14 | Page 1
The Air Circulator

In this project, you will create components of the Air Circulator.
nl
Create from scratch:

Part models
Minimal Instructions
Completed Models for
Reference
Project Scenario
na
lU
se
Air Circulator
tio
ACME Incorporated develops and markets several consumer, industrial, and

defense goods. The Light Industrial Division of ACME creates a number of
products, including industrial fans, heating, air conditioning, and pumps. You
work for the Light Industrial Division of ACME Inc., which has just started to
use Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire for its product designs.
uc
a
Upon returning from Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire training, you are assigned to

create the AC-40 Air Circulator.
Fo
r
Ed
Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned up
to this point in the course, instructions for each project step will be minimal.
There will be no step-by-step "picks and clicks" given. This provides you with
a chance to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed though
the project.
Completed Models for Reference
Be sure to save all project models within the working subfolder of the
Project_I classroom folder structure. The project folder also contains a
sub-folder named completed. Here you will find a completed version of each
model in the project. These completed models can be used as reference, if
required.
Module 14 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Piston Assembly Components
nl
This slide illustrates the components you will create in this

project for the piston assembly.
PISTON.PRT
na
lU
se
PISTON_PIN.PRT
CONNECTING_ROD.PRT
Creating the Piston Pin, Piston, and Connecting Rod Components
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
This slide illustrates the piston pin, piston, and connecting rod components to
be created in the beginning of this project.
2009 PTC
Module 14 | Page 3
Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and Impeller

Housing
CRANKSHAFT.PRT
na
lU
se
nl
This slide illustrates the crankshaft, engine block, impeller, and

impeller housing to be created in this project.
Ed
uc
a
tio
ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT
IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT
Fo
r
IMPELLER.PRT
Creating the Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and Impeller

Housing Components
This slide illustrates the crankshaft, engine block, impeller, and impeller
housing components to be created in this project. These models are slightly
more complicated than the previously created piston assembly components.
You will complete the crankshaft model in this project, but the engine block,
impeller, and impeller housing will be completed in a subsequent project.
Module 14 | Page 4
2009 PTC
The Frame and Bolt
na
lU
se
nl
This slide illustrates the frame and bolt components you will
create in this project.
FRAME.PRT
BOLT.PRT
tio
Creating the Frame and Bolt Components
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
This slide illustrates the frame and bolt components to be created in this
project. The frame will be completed in a subsequent project.
2009 PTC
Module 14 | Page 5
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 14 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools
15
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Pro/ENGINEER offers many tools to duplicate features and parts to increase

efficiency.
In this module, you learn how to create local groups of features. You also
learn how to use the Copy tool to create a single instance of multiple features
or groups. Finally, you learn how to use the Mirror tool to mirror features and
parts to create symmetrical models.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Create local groups.
Copy and paste features, as well as move and rotate those copied features.
Mirror selected features, all features, and parts.
2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 1
Creating Local Groups

A local group enables you to perform an operation on multiple
features at once.
nl
Reasons for grouping include:

Copy/pattern multiple features
as one.
Select as one.
When editing, view dims from
all features in the group.
Organize/collapse the model
tree.
tio
na
lU
se
Model Tree Before and After

Local Group
uc
a
Viewing Dimensions of All

Grouped Features
Selecting All Grouped Entities

as One
Ed
Creating Local Groups
Fo
r
In Pro/ENGINEER, you can collect features together into a local group. A

local group enables you to perform an operation on multiple features at once.
You can group features either by clicking Edit > Group from the main menu
or by selecting features, right-clicking, and selecting Group. You can also
ungroup features by right-clicking. Some facts about local groups are:
The features that you group must be sequential in the model tree.
When you group features, they nest under the name of the group in the
model tree.
You can delete or suppress features individually within a group.
You can drag and drop features into or out of a group.
Reasons for Creating Local Groups

There are numerous reasons for creating local groups:
You can copy or pattern multiple features as one by patterning or copying
the local group.
You can select all features within the local group as one.
Module 15 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
When editing, you can view the dimensions of all features in the local
group at one time.
You can use local groups to organize or collapse the model tree.
2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Creating Local Groups

Scenario
Group and ungroup features in a part model.
group.prt
Local_Groups
Task 1:
Group and ungroup features in a part model.
nl
na
lU
se
3. Expand Group LOCAL_GROUP

in the model tree. Notice both
features in the group.
2. Right-click and select Group.
1. Press CTRL and select Extrude

2 and Hole 1.
4. Right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP and select Ungroup.

2, Hole 1, Hole 2, and Round 1.
uc
a
tio
7. Right-click and select Edit.

Notice that you see the
dimensions from all features
in the group.
Ed

graphics window to de-select all
features.
Fo
r
9. Select the round feature from the

model as shown.
10. Right-click and select Select
Group. Notice all features in the
group are selected.
Module 15 | Page 4
2009 PTC
. Notice
nl
tio
na
lU
se

the axis remains.
12. Right-click on Hole 2 and select

Delete.
In the Delete dialog box,
ensure that the Keep
embedded datum features
check box is selected.
Click OK to delete the hole but
keep the datum axis.
11. In the model tree, expand Group

LOCAL_GROUP and expand
feature Hole 2. Notice the
embedded datum axis A_2.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 5
Copying and Pasting Features
nl
O
na
lU
se
Copy
Select features or groups of
features.
Paste
Pastes feature with same
reference types, dimension
scheme, and options as
original.
Select new references.
Independent of original feature.
The copy and paste functionality enables you to quickly

duplicate a feature.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Copying and Pasting a Hole
Copying and Pasting an Extrude
Fo
r
Sketch Placed on the Cursor
Copying and Pasting Features
Copy and paste enable you to quickly duplicate a feature or group of features.
Each copy and paste operation creates a single copy of the selected feature
or features. When the new feature is placed with paste, the primary reference
is cleared and the system awaits selection of a new reference. However,
depending on the feature type, the system maintains the reference type,
dimensioning scheme, and the same options as the original. The copied
feature is independent of the original.
In the upper figure, a hole is copied and pasted. Once the placement
surface is selected, you can place the new hole in a new location on the
new placement surface. Notice that the hole diameter and depth options
are carried over to the copy.
In the lower figures, an extrude feature is copied and pasted. You must
specify a new sketch and reference plane and enter Sketcher mode. The
system places the copied sketch on the cursor, as shown in the lower-left
Module 15 | Page 6
2009 PTC
figure, and you can drop it into location and edit dimensions appropriately.
The copied extrude feature maintains feature type, options, and depth.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can also copy and paste rounds. When doing so, the round reference
types, size, and options, are maintained. You must select new corresponding
references.
2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 7
PROCEDURE - Copying and Pasting Features

Scenario
Copy and paste features in a part model.
copy_paste.prt
Copy_Paste
2. Click Paste
nl
1. Select Hole 1 and click Copy
Copy and paste a hole feature in a part model.
Task 1:
na
lU
se
3. Select the approximate hole

location on the front surface.
tio

uc
a

and right surfaces.
Ed
6. Edit the offset from the top

surface to 1.5 and edit the offset
from the right surface to 3.
.
Fo
r
Task 2:
Copy and paste an extrude feature in a part model.
1. Select Extrude 2 and click Copy

2. Click Paste
Module 15 | Page 8
2009 PTC
3. Right-click and select Edit

Internal Sketch.
4. Select the right surface as the
Sketch Plane.
5. In the Sketch dialog box, edit the
Orientation to Bottom and click
Sketch.
nl
6. The sketch is attached to your

mouse. Select the approximate
placement.
7. Edit the dimensions.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se

Orientation.
Fo
r
Ed
2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 9
Moving and Rotating Copied Features

You can use the Paste Special option to apply move and rotate
options to the resulting copied feature.
Copy:
Select features or
groups of features.
Paste Special:
Make copies dependent
or independent.
Move/rotate.
Edit the dependence.
Dim Indep
Sec Indep
na
lU
se
nl
Moving a Copied Feature
Ed
uc
a
tio
Rotating a Copied Feature
Moving and Rotating a Copied Feature
Fo
r
Moving and Rotating Copied Features

When copying features in a part model, you can use the Paste Special option
to apply move and rotate options to the resulting copied feature.
Move the copied feature Linearly translate the copied feature. Specify
a direction reference such as a surface, datum plane, edge, or axis, and
enter the translation distance value. The copied feature moves normal to a
plane or surface, and along an edge or axis. In the upper figure, the oval
copied protrusion moves normal to datum plane DTM1 a distance of 3.
Rotate copied feature Angularly rotate the copied feature. Specify a
direction reference such as an edge or axis, and enter the angular rotation
value. The copied feature rotates around the edge or axis. In the middle
figure, the oval copied protrusion rotates around datum axis AXIS at an
angle of 45.
You can also apply multiple move and rotate operations to the same copied
feature. For example, you may choose to move the feature in one direction
and rotate it about an axis, as shown in the lower figure. Or you may choose
Module 15 | Page 10
2009 PTC
to move the feature in one direction and then move it further in another
direction.
Creating Dependent Copies

When you copy a feature, the default dependent copy option is to make the
copied feature's dimensions and section sketch dependent on those of the
original. That is, all the dimensions of the original feature become shared
between the original feature and copied feature. Therefore, when you edit the
value of a shared dimension, both features update simultaneously.
Editing the Dependence of Copies
nl
There are two different ways you can edit the dependency of a dependently
copied feature:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Break the dependence of one of the copied feature dimensions by selecting

the dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Make Dim Indep. All other
aspects of the copied feature remain dependent on the original.
Break the dependence of the copied feature section by selecting the copied
feature, right-clicking, and selecting Make Sec Indep. The copied feature
depth is still dependent on the original.
2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 11
PROCEDURE - Moving and Rotating Copied Features

Scenario
Move and rotate copied features in a part.
move_rotate.prt
Move_Rotate
Task 1:
Move and rotate copied features.
3. Click Paste Special
nl
2. Click Copy
1. Select Extrude 2.
na
lU
se
4. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Apply Move/Rotate

transformations to copies check box and click OK.
5. Select datum plane DTM1 and
edit the offset value to 3.
.
uc
a
tio
and click Paste
Ed
7. With Moved Copy 1 still selected, click Copy

Special
Fo
r
8. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear the Make copies dependent
on dimensions of originals, select the Apply Move/Rotate
transformations to copies check box, and click OK.
9. In the dashboard, click Rotate

.
10. Select datum axis AXIS and edit

the offset angle to 45.
Module 15 | Page 12
2009 PTC
12. With Moved Copy 2 still selected, click Copy

Special
and click Paste
13. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear the Make copies dependent
on dimensions of originals, select the Apply Move/Rotate
transformations to copies check box, and click OK.
Task 2:
na
lU
se
nl
16. Edit the move type to Rotate,

select datum axis AXIS, and edit
the offset angle to 45.

Transformations tab and click
New Move.
14. Select datum plane RIGHT and

edit the offset to 1.
Edit dimensions and dependency of moved and rotated features.
1. Select Extrude 2, right-click, and

select Edit.
tio
2. Edit the feature height from 1 to

.
Ed
uc
a
2 and click Regenerate
3. Expand Moved Copy 1 and

select Extrude 2 (2).
Fo
r
4. Right-click and select Edit.
5. Select the 1 width value,

right-click, and select Make Dim
Indep.
6. In the dialog box, click Yes to

make an independent dimension.
7. Click in the background twice to
de-select all features.
8. Right-click Extrude 2 (2) and
select Edit.
9. Edit the feature width from 1 to
1.5 and click Regenerate

2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 13
Mirroring Selected Features
nl
Mirroring Features About Datum Plane RIGHT
na
lU
se
Mirror Features:
Mirror features
or groups of
features.
Select mirror
plane.
Mirror features
dependent or
independent.
You can mirror selected features about a plane.
tio
Mirroring Features About Datum Plane FRONT
uc
a
Mirroring Selected Features
Fo
r
Ed
You can mirror selected features or a group of features about a plane, and
have the mirrored features be independent or dependent on the original
features. In the example on the slide, we have three oval protrusions in a
group, as shown in the left image of the upper figure. The group is selected
and mirrored dependently about datum plane RIGHT, as shown in the right
image of the upper figure. Next, the original group and the mirrored group are
selected, and both are mirrored about datum plane FRONT independently, as
shown in the right image of the bottom figure. Because this second mirror
was done independently, the original geometry height can be modified, and
only the dependently mirrored geometry height updates.
Module 15 | Page 14
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Mirroring Selected Features

Scenario
Mirror selected features both independently and dependently.
mirror_sel_features.prt
Mirror_Selected
2. Start the Mirror Tool

from
nl

2, Moved Copy 1, and Moved
Copy 2.
Mirror selected features and edit the extrude height.
Task 1:
na
lU
se
3. Select datum plane RIGHT.

Options tab and notice the
mirror will be dependent.
.
uc
a
tio
6. With the mirror feature still

selected, press CTRL and also
select Extrude 2, Moved Copy
1, and Moved Copy 2.
8. Select datum plane FRONT.
Ed

Options tab and clear the Copy
as dependent check box.
Fo
r

Extrude 2 and select Edit.
12. Edit the height from 1 to 2.

2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 15
Mirroring All Features

Mirroring all features enables you to create half a model and
then mirror it to complete the entire part.
Mirror All Features Result
uc
a
tio
Mirror All Features Before
na
lU
se
nl
Mirror the entire model:

Select the part node in the model tree.
Mirror is dependent on original side.
Mirrors all features that are before the mirror feature in the model tree.
Mirroring All Features
Fo
r
Ed
To mirror all features, you simply select the part node in the model tree (the
name of the model at the top of the tree) and then mirror all the features in
the model at one time. This enables you to create one half of a model and
then mirror it to complete the entire part. A single mirror feature is created,
which is dependent on the original side of the model.
The mirror feature mirrors all features that come before it in the model tree.
Features that change on the original side of the model update on the mirror
side. Features inserted before the mirror feature are mirrored to the opposite
side. Features created after the mirror are not mirrored.
When you mirror all features, this includes all datum planes. The
resulting mirrored datum planes retain the same name as their
originals, except that the mirrored datum planes have an "_1" suffix
added to their names. For example, if you mirror all features, which
includes datum plane TOP, the corresponding mirrored datum
plane name is TOP_1.
Module 15 | Page 16
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Mirroring All Features

Scenario
Mirror all part features about a datum plane.
mirror_all_features.prt
Mirror_All
Task 1:
Mirror all part features about a datum plane.
nl
O
na
lU
se
2. Expand the Mirror 1 feature.

Notice it contains a hole and
extrude feature.
1. In the model tree, select the

Mirror 1 feature.
3. In the model tree, select the part

node MIRROR_ALL_FEATURES.PRT.
from
tio

uc
a
5. Select datum plane RIGHT.

Ed
7. In the model tree, right-click on

Hole 1 and select Edit.
Fo
r
8. Edit the hole diameter from 16 to

20.
9. In the model tree, select Extrude
3, right-click, and select Edit.
10. Edit the width from 35 to 40.

. Notice
that all four hole and extrude
features have updated.
2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 17

select 3D.
and

and
select the right vertical edge.
14. Edit the radius to 8 and click
Complete Feature .
15. Notice that the round feature is
not mirrored.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Module 15 | Page 18
2009 PTC
Creating Mirrored Parts

You can create a duplicate, mirrored copy of a part.
tio
Original Part
na
lU
se
nl
Mirror types:
Mirror geometry only.
Mirror geometry with features.
Dependency control:
Geometry dependent.
Mirrored Part
uc
a
Creating Mirrored Parts
Ed
You can create a mirrored copy of a part directly within Pro/ENGINEER.

There are two different types of mirrored parts that can be created:
Fo
r
Mirror geometry only Mirrors geometry

without the structure of the original part. The
model tree contains one mirrored feature in the
resulting mirrored part.
Mirror geometry with features Mirrors

geometry with the original part feature structure.
The geometry of the resulting mirrored part is
not dependent on the geometry of the original
model.
When creating a new mirrored part, you must specify the part name for the
new part. If you mirror a part using the Mirror geometry only type, you must
also specify whether the resulting mirrored part is dependent on the original
2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 19
or not. This option is only available for the Mirror geometry only mirror type.
You can also preview the mirrored part before it is actually created.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can also mirror an entire assembly using File > Mirror
Assembly.
Module 15 | Page 20
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Parts

Scenario
Mirror a part within Pro/ENGINEER.
Mirrored_Parts
na
lU
se
1. Notice that the part is

asymmetric. You need to
create an equivalent left-handed
part.
Mirror a part.
nl
Task 1:
mirror-part-rh.prt
2. Click File > Mirror Part from the

main menu.
Ed
uc
a
tio
3. In the Mirror part dialog box,

accept the defaults for Mirror
type and Dependency control,
and type MIRROR_PART_LH as
the New Name.
Fo
r
4. In the Mirror part dialog box,

check
select the Preview
box.
2009 PTC
Module 15 | Page 21
5. Click OK from the Mirror part

dialog box. Notice that the
system determines the mirror
plane, as you were never
prompted for it.
6. Spin the new model as shown.
7. Arrange the two Pro/ENGINEER

windows on your desktop to
compare parts.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Module 15 | Page 22
2009 PTC
Creating Patterns
16
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Patterning features and components is yet another way to quickly duplicate

features to increase efficiency.
In this module, you learn how to pattern features linearly and angularly, as
well as learn how to increment dimensions while patterning. You also learn
how to Reference pattern features and components. Finally, you learn how to
delete patterns and pattern members.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Direction Pattern in the First and Second Directions.
Direction Pattern with multiple direction types.
Axis Pattern in the First and Second Directions.
Create Reference patterns of features and components.
Delete patterns and pattern members.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 1
Direction Patterning in the First Direction

The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given
direction.
nl
Direction and increments based

on selected reference.
Select a first direction reference.
Specify number of members and
increment.
Specify additional, optional
dimensions to increment.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Direction Patterning an Extrude

in One Direction
Ed
Editing the Direction Pattern and Pattern Leader
Fo
r
Patterning Features Theory

The Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features,
or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of the
selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selected
for patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances are
called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original
feature, or pattern leader. The pattern leader is always the first member in
an expanded pattern feature in the model tree. In the graphics window, the
pattern leader's instance dot border is always bolder than the other pattern
members, as shown in the upper figure. In the lower figure, the width of the
pattern leader has been modified between the images third from the left and
fourth from the left. Consequently, all pattern members' widths have been
updated as well.
Direction Patterning in the First Direction Theory

The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given direction. The
following items are required to create a direction pattern in one direction:
Module 16 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Incrementing Additional Dimensions
nl
Specify a First Direction reference The pattern extends in a direction

based on the reference selected. If you select a plane or surface, the
pattern extends normal to the reference, and if you select a linear curve,
edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. You can also flip
the direction the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In the figures, the first
direction reference specified is datum plane FRONT.
Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction Type the
number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The
number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In the lower
figure, the left-most image has four pattern members, while in the image
second-from-left, the number of pattern members is six.
Specify the increment in the first direction The increment is the spacing
between pattern members. You can edit the increment in the dashboard,
the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle.
na
lU
se
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the
same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to
increment additional dimensions in the first direction:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader The

pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.
Specify the increment value In the lower figure, the extrude feature
height was incremented 0.5. Consequently, each pattern member's height
increases 0.5 over the previous pattern member.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the First Direction

Scenario
Direction pattern an extrude feature in one direction.
dir_pattern_1st.prt
Dir_Pattern_1st
Task 1:
Direction pattern an extrude feature.
2. In the dashboard, edit the pattern

type to Direction.
nl
from the
the Pattern Tool

feature toolbar.
1. Select Extrude 2 and start
na
lU
se
3. Select datum plane FRONT and

click Flip First Direction
.
4. Edit the number of members to 4

and edit the spacing to 2.
.
tio
uc
a
6. With the Pattern feature still

selected, right-click and select
Edit.
Ed
7. Edit the number of patterned

extrudes from 4 to 6.
.
Fo
r
8. Click Regenerate
Module 16 | Page 4
2009 PTC
9. Edit the definition of Pattern 1.

Dimensions tab.
Click in the Direction 1
Dimension collector.
Select the 1 height dimension
and edit the increment to 0.5.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se

12. De-select all features.
nl
You can also drag the

increment handle to edit the
increment.
Ed

pattern feature.
14. Select the pattern leader,
Fo
r
15. Edit the width from 2 to 3.

2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 5
Direction Patterning in the Second Direction
nl
Direction and increments based

on selected references.
Select a first and second direction
reference.
increments in first and second
directions.
The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in a given

direction.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Direction Patterning a Group

in Two Directions
Direction Pattern, Two Directions,

Two Additional Dimensions
Ed
Direction Patterning a Group in

Two Directions Result
Fo
r
feature, or pattern leader.
Direction Patterning in the Second Direction Theory

The direction pattern enables you to pattern features in two directions. The
following items are required to create a direction pattern in two directions:
Specify the First and Second Direction references The pattern extends
in the directions based on the references selected. If you select a plane or
surface, the pattern extends normal to the reference, and if you select a
linear curve, edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. You
can also flip the direction the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In the
figures, the first direction reference specified is datum plane RIGHT, and
the second direction reference specified is datum plane FRONT.
Module 16 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions
Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics
window. The number of pattern members can be different for each
direction. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In
the figures, the first direction has four pattern members, while the second
direction has five pattern members.
Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions The increment
is the spacing between pattern members. You can edit the increment in the
dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. Again,
the increment can be different between the first and second directions. In
the figures, the first direction increment is 2.5, while the second direction
increment is 2.0.
nl
na
lU
se
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,
or both, at the same time to create a 'varying' pattern. The following items are
required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader The

pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. The
dimension selected can be different for each direction. Note also that you
can select multiple dimensions for each direction if desired.
Specify the increment value Again, the increment value for each
direction can be different. In the lower-right figure, the extrude feature width
was incremented by -0.2 in the first direction, and the extrude feature height
was incremented 0.5 in the second direction. Consequently, each pattern
member's width decreases by 0.20 in the first direction and the height
increases 0.5 in the second direction over the previous pattern member.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 7
PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning in the Second

Direction
Scenario
Direction pattern an extrude feature in two directions.
dir_pattern_2nd.prt
Dir_Pattern_2nd
na
lU
se
3. Rename the group to OVAL.
nl
1. Press CTRL, and select Extrude

2 and Round 1.
Direction pattern an extrude feature.
Task 1:
4. Select Group OVAL and start

the Pattern Tool
feature toolbar.
from the

type to Direction.
tio
6. Select datum plane RIGHT as

the first direction reference.
uc
a

and edit the spacing to 2.50.
Fo
r
Ed

Direction 2 Reference collector.
Select datum plane FRONT as
the second direction reference.
Click Flip Second Direction
.
Edit the second direction
number of members to 5
and edit the second direction
spacing to 2.
Module 16 | Page 8
2009 PTC
nl
O
12. In the Dimensions tab of the

dashboard, click in the Direction
2 Dimension collector.

Dimensions tab.
Select the 2 extrude width
dimension and edit the
increment to -0.20.
Press CTRL and select the
R0.1 radius dimension and
edit the increment to 0.075.
na
lU
se
13. Select the 1 extrude height

dimension and edit the increment
to 0.50.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Fo
r

pattern feature.
16. Select the pattern leader,

17. Edit the width from 1 to 0.75.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 9
Axis Patterning in the First Direction

The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a
specified axis.
nl
Direction based on selected axis.

angular spacing.
Set angular extent.
Specify member orientation.
tio
na
lU
se
Axis Patterning an Extrude in

One Direction
uc
a
Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing a Dimension
Ed
Fo
r
Axis Patterning in the First Direction Theory
The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a specified
axis. The following items are required to create an axis pattern in one
direction:
Specify the axis reference The pattern extends angularly about the
selected reference axis. You can flip the angular direction the pattern
extends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the figures, the axis
reference specified is datum axis AXIS.
Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction Type the
number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The
number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In the lower
figures, there are six pattern members.
Module 16 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Specify the angular spacing Specified in degrees, you can edit the
angular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging
the drag handle.
There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creating
axis patterns:
na
lU
se
nl
Set Angular Extent This option automatically spaces the pattern

members equally about the axis reference. You can also select values
of 90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or type in the
desired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular
extent value will supercede the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular
extent has been set to 360 degrees.
Member orientation Determines how the pattern members are to be
oriented about the axis reference. With the check box Follow axis rotation
selected by default, pattern members are oriented such that the relationship
between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern member.
In the lower figure, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation. With the
check box for this option cleared, all pattern members have a constant
orientation that is the same as the pattern leader. In the lower figure, the
left-most image shows all members having a constant orientation.
tio
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the
same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to
increment additional dimensions in the first direction:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. The

pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature.
Specify the increment value In the lower figure, the extrude feature
length was incremented 0.3 in the right-most image. Consequently, each
pattern member's length increases 0.3 over the previous pattern member.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 11
PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the First Direction

Scenario
Axis pattern an extrude feature in one direction.
axis_pattern_1st.prt
Axis_Pattern_1st
Task 1:
Axis pattern an extrude feature.
3. Select datum axis AXIS.
na
lU
se

type to Axis.
nl
from the
the Pattern Tool

feature toolbar.
1. Select Extrude 2 and start

and edit the angle increment to
45.
5. In the dashboard, click Set
Angular Extent
.
Ed
uc
a
tio
6. Edit the Angular Extent value

from 360 to 90.
Fo
r
7. Edit the Angular Extent value

back to 360.
Module 16 | Page 12
2009 PTC

Options tab.
Clear the Follow axis rotation
check box.
nl
O
tio
na
lU
se

Dimensions tab.
Select the 2 length dimension
and edit the increment to 0.3.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

16. In the dashboard, click Flip
.
Pattern Direction
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 13
Axis Patterning in the Second Direction

The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially about a
specified axis.
nl
Direction based on selected axis.

angular spacing in first and second
directions.
Set angular extent.
Specify member orientation.
tio
na
lU
se
Axis Patterning a Group in

Two Directions
uc
a
Editing the Axis Pattern and Incrementing Dimensions
Fo
r
Ed
Axis Patterning in the Second Direction Theory

The axis pattern enables you to pattern features radially and outward from a
specified axis. The following items are required to create an axis pattern in
those two directions:
Specify the axis reference The pattern extends angularly about the
selected axis reference in the first direction and radially outward from
the axis in the second direction. You can flip the angular direction the
pattern extends from clockwise to counterclockwise. In the figures, the axis
reference specified is datum axis AXIS.
Specify the number of pattern members in the first and second directions
Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics
window. The number of pattern members can be different for each
direction. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In
Module 16 | Page 14
2009 PTC
the figures, the first direction has eight pattern members, while second
direction has three pattern members.
Specify the angular spacing in the first direction Specified in degrees,
you can edit the angular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or
by dragging the drag handle.
Specify the radial spacing in the second direction This increment is the
spacing between pattern members outward from the axis reference. Again,
you can edit the increment in the dashboard, in the graphics window, or by
dragging the drag handle. In the figures, the spacing increment is 2.5.
There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creating
axis patterns:
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Set Angular Extent This option automatically spaces the pattern

members equally about the axis reference. You can also select values of
90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or you can type the
desired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular
extent value will supercede the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular
extent has been set to 360 degrees.
Member orientation Determines how the pattern members are to be
oriented about the axis reference. With the check box Follow axis rotation
selected by default, pattern members are oriented such that the relationship
between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern member.
In the lower figure, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation. With the
check box for this option cleared, all pattern members have a constant
orientation that is the same as the pattern leader. In the lower figure, the
left-most image shows all members having a constant orientation.
uc
a
Ed
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction,
or both, at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are
required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:
Fo
r
Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. The

pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. The
dimension selected can be different for each direction. Note also that you
can select multiple dimensions for each direction if desired.
Specify the increment value Again, the increment value for each
direction can be different. In the lower figure, right-most image, the left
hole diameter was incremented by 0.075 in the first direction, and the right
hole diameter was incremented 0.25 in the second direction along with the
extrude height incremented by 1. Consequently, each pattern member's
left hole diameter increases by 0.075 in the first direction and the right hole
diameter increases 0.25 in the second direction with the extrude height
increasing 1 over the previous pattern member.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 15
PROCEDURE - Axis Patterning in the Second Direction

Scenario
Axis pattern an extrude feature in two directions.
axis_pattern_2nd.prt
Axis_Pattern_2nd
Task 1:
Axis pattern an extrude feature.
nl
1. Press CTRL, and select Extrude

2, Hole 1, and Hole 2.
3. Rename the group to OVAL.
the Pattern Tool

feature toolbar.
na
lU
se
4. Select Group OVAL and start

from the

type to Axis.
tio
6. Select datum axis AXIS as the

pattern center.
uc
a
7. Edit the number of members in

the first direction to 8.
8. Click Set Angular Extent
the dashboard.
in
Ed
9. Edit the number of members in

the second direction to 3, and
edit the spacing value to 2.5.
Fo
r
11. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

OVAL.
Options tab.
Clear the Follow axis rotation
check box.
Module 16 | Page 16
2009 PTC
14. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of

OVAL.
nl
tio
na
lU
se
17. In the Dimensions tab of the

dashboard, click in the Direction
2 Dimension collector.
Select the 0.25 right hole
diameter dimension and edit
the increment to 0.25.
Press CTRL, select the 1
height dimension, and edit the
increment to 1.

Dimensions tab.
Zoom in on the pattern leader.
Select the 0.25 left hole
diameter dimension and edit
the increment to 0.075.

Options tab and select the
Follow axis rotation check box.
uc
a
Fo
r
Ed

Orientation.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 17
Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types

The Direction pattern also enables you to pattern with different
direction types.
nl
First and Second Direction types:

Translate
Rotate
Coordinate System
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Original Model
Completed Pattern
Ed
Translation and Rotation Directions
Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types Theory
Fo
r
The Direction Pattern option enables you to pattern using different direction
types for the first and second directions. By default, both first and second
directions are set to translate. However, you may specify either Translate,
Rotate, or Coordinate System for the first and second directions
independently.
This capability enables you to capture translation and rotation within in
a single pattern. Alternatively, you can create a pattern of a pattern to
accomplish similar results.
In the figures, a translation is used as the first direction, and a rotation is
used for the second direction.
Module 16 | Page 18
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Direction Patterning with Multiple

Direction Types
Scenario
Direction pattern a group in two directions, using different direction types.
Pattern_Mult_Dir
Direction pattern a group, translating in the first direction, and

rotating in the second direction.
1. Select Group OVAL and start the

.
Pattern Tool
nl
Task 1:
pattern_mult_dir.prt
na
lU
se
2. Select Direction as the type.
tio
3. Select Translate
, if
necessary, for the first direction.
uc
a
4. Select datum plane DTM1 as the

first direction reference.
Fo
r
Ed


second direction reference
collector.
7. Click Rotate
8. Select datum axis A_1 as the

second direction reference.
9. Click Flip Second Direction
10. Edit the second direction number

of members to 3 and edit the
second direction spacing to 30
degrees.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 19
Similar results could be

created by first creating a
direction pattern, and then
creating an axis pattern of
the first pattern.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Module 16 | Page 20
2009 PTC
Creating Reference Patterns of Features
nl
O
You can reference pattern:

Features.
Groups.
Patterns along an existing
pattern.
Reference pattern types:
Feature
Group
Both
A Reference pattern patterns a feature 'on top of' any other

patterned feature.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Reference Patterning a Group
Ed
Editing Reference Pattern Reference Types
Creating Reference Patterns of Features Theory
Fo
r
A Reference pattern patterns a feature "on top of" any other patterned
feature. If you create a new feature on the pattern leader of another pattern,
you can Reference pattern that new feature. In the upper-right figure, an
extrude feature was created and patterned. A cut and round feature were
then created on the pattern leader extrude feature. Consequently, the cut
and round feature can be Reference patterned. If the quantity or spacing of
the underlying pattern is updated, the quantity or spacing of the reference
pattern is automatically updated, too.
Depending on how the features were created, there are three different
Reference pattern types that can be created:
Feature The Reference pattern references an existing feature pattern. In
the lower figure, left image, the round feature is being Reference patterned
based on the existing axis pattern.
Group The Reference pattern references either a group or existing
pattern of a pattern. In the lower figure, middle image, an axis pattern is
then direction patterned, resulting in a pattern of a pattern. The round
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 21
feature is Reference patterned based on the axis pattern that was

patterned.
Both The Reference pattern references both an existing feature pattern
and a group pattern. In the lower figure, right image, the round is Reference
patterned around both the feature pattern (axis pattern) and the group
pattern (the pattern of the axis pattern).
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
When creating a Reference pattern of a sketch-based feature (such

as extrude), you must either Reference pattern the sketch first,
group the sketch and sketch-based feature together, or use an
internal (unlinked) sketch. To simplify Reference pattern creation,
an internal (unlinked) sketch is recommended. Reference patterns
of other feature types, such as rounds or holes, are not an issue.
Module 16 | Page 22
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns of Features

Scenario
Create Reference patterns of features in a part model.
Ref_Pattern_Feature
na
lU
se
3. With the group still selected,
nl
1. In the model tree, press CTRL

and select OVAL_CUT and
ROUND_2.
Reference pattern a group.
Task 1:
ref-pattern.prt
start the Pattern Tool

from
the feature toolbar. Notice the
default pattern type is Reference
pattern.
.
Direction pattern AXIS_PATTERN and Reference pattern a round

feature.
Ed
Task 2:
uc
a
tio
Fo
r

Orientation.
AXIS_PATTERN and start the
Pattern Tool

type to Direction.
4. Select datum plane FRONT and
click Flip First Direction
.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 23
7. Select ROUND_1.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se

Reference type to Group. Notice
that the round only patterns once
per direction pattern group.
nl
8. Start the Pattern Tool

.
Notice the default pattern type
is Reference pattern and that
the default Reference type is
Feature. Also notice that the
reference pattern only occurs on
the axis pattern.
Fo
r
Ed

Reference type to Both. Notice
that the round patterns on each
member of the axis pattern as
well as each member of the
direction pattern of the axis
pattern.
Module 16 | Page 24
2009 PTC
Creating Reference Patterns of Components

You can use a Reference pattern to quickly assemble multiple
instances of a component.
nl
Assemble component to pattern

leader.
Reference pattern the component.
Number of Reference
patterned components updates
automatically.
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Reference Patterning a Bolt
Reference Patterning a Bolt
Updating the Number of Bosses

and Holes
Fo
r
Creating Reference Patterns of Components
Reference patterns can also be used at the assembly level. For example,
if a bolt is assembled into a hole which is a pattern leader of a pattern of
holes, the bolt can be Reference patterned, as shown in the upper-right and
lower-left figures. To do this, a component is placed into each member of the
underlying pattern. If the number of patterned holes changes, the number of
patterned bolts updates accordingly, as shown in the lower-right figure.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 25
PROCEDURE - Creating Reference Patterns of

Components
Scenario
Reference pattern the bolts in the assembly.
Ref_Pattern_Comps
na
lU
se
2. Select the last BOLT_8.PRT in

the model tree.
nl
1. In the model tree, select each

component to highlight it in the
graphics window.
Reference pattern the bolts in the assembly.
Task 1:
ref_pat_comp.asm
from

tio
uc
a
5. Select the upper BOLT_8.PRT

Fo
r
Ed
Module 16 | Page 26
2009 PTC

BASE.PRT.
9. Right-click Pattern 4 of EAR and
select Edit.
10. Edit the number of pattern
members from 6 LOCAL
GROUPS to 8 LOCAL GROUPS.
COVER.PRT.
nl
O
13. Edit the number of pattern

members from 6 EXTRUDES to
8 EXTRUDES.
12. Right-click Pattern 1 of Extrude

4 and select Edit.
na
lU
se

. Notice
that the number of Reference
patterned bolts also increases to
8.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 27
Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members

You can either delete an entire pattern or disable individual
members of a pattern.
na
lU
se
nl
Delete Deletes the pattern and

the feature used to create the
pattern.
Delete pattern Deletes the
pattern but keeps the original
feature.
Click the black dots to disable
that pattern member.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Using the Delete Function
Using the Delete Pattern Function
Disabling Individual Pattern

Members
Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members

You have three options available when it comes to deleting patterns or
members of a pattern:
Delete the pattern and the original feature You can select the pattern,
right-click, and select the Delete option to delete the pattern in addition
to the original feature used to create the pattern. Note also that any
other patterns that reference this feature will be deleted as well. In the
upper-right figure, the extrude feature and pattern are to be deleted. The
system is showing that the reference pattern that consists of the cut and
round will also be deleted.
Delete the pattern You can select the pattern, right-click, and select the
Delete Pattern option to delete the pattern, leaving the original feature
Module 16 | Page 28
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
intact, as shown in the lower-left figure. Note that the reference pattern that
consists of the cut and round is also updated automatically.
Disable individual members of a pattern or reference pattern When
previewing a pattern or Reference pattern, each pattern instance is
represented by a black "dot." If any of the pattern preview "dots" are
selected, their display changes to white, which disables that particular
member of the pattern. To restore the pattern member, click the white
dot at any time while redefining the pattern. In the lower-right figure, the
second and fourth pattern members have been disabled. Notice that the
reference pattern has updated automatically.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 29
PROCEDURE - Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members

Scenario
Delete patterns and pattern members.
delete_pattern.prt
Delete_Pattern
3. Click Undo
tio

REF_PATTERN.
na
lU
se
2. Notice that all features are

deleted in addition to all features
of the REF_PATTERN Reference
pattern.
nl

OVAL_PATTERN select Delete,
and click OK from the Delete
dialog box.
Delete patterns and disable pattern members.
Task 1:
uc
a
5. Click on the black dots for

members 2 and 4 to disable
those members.
.
Fo
r
Ed

REF_PATTERN and select
Delete Pattern.
OVAL_PATTERN and select
Delete Pattern. The original
instance is still intact.
Module 16 | Page 30
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Delete and disable more patterns and pattern members.

Orientation.
ROUND_REF_PATTERN.
3. Click on the top black dot for
each patterned cluster to disable
them.
na
lU
se
6. Right-click on ROUND_1, select

Delete, and click OK from the
Delete dialog box.
nl

ROUND_REF_PATTERN and
select Delete Pattern.
7. In the model tree, expand PATTERN_OF_AXIS_PATTERN.
tio

AXIS_PATTERN.
uc
a
9. Click on the top black dot to

disable that member.
.
Ed
Fo
r
11. Edit the definition of PATTERN_

OF_AXIS_PATTERN.
12. Click on the top, bottom, left, and
right center black dots to disable
those cluster members.
2009 PTC
Module 16 | Page 31
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 16 | Page 32
2009 PTC
17
O
nl
Measuring and Inspecting Models
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
You can set up your models with a system of units and a density value for
the material type. Then you can create various types of analyses, such as
measuring distances, angles, and surface areas. You can also calculate
mass properties and perform interference checks on assemblies. These
analyses can be useful to extract data from a model, or to determine whether
the model meets the required design intent.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

View and edit model properties.
Investigate model units.
Analyze mass properties.
Measure models and global interferences.
Create planar cross-sections.
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 1
Viewing and Editing Model Properties
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
There is a consolidated dialog box for all model properties.
Model Properties Dialog Box
Ed
Viewing and Editing Model Properties Theory
Fo
r
The Model Properties dialog box provides common locations for viewing and
editing model properties in several categories. Each line item in the dialog
box provides basic information at a glance.
Some properties can be expanded by clicking Expand

additional information.
Clicking Info
information.
to display
produces a separate information window with more detailed
To create or edit any of the properties, click the change link in the dialog box.
The appropriate dialog box for that property then appears.
Several of the model properties listed in this dialog box can be
accessed through other menus or dialogs.
The following is a list of the properties contained in the Model Properties
dialog box, which is accessed by clicking File > Properties.
Materials
Module 17 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
nl
na
lU
se
Material
Units
Accuracy
Mass Properties
Relations, Parameters, and Instances
Relations
Parameters
Instance
Features and Geometry
Tolerance
Names
Tools
Flexible
Shrinkage
Simplified Representation
Pro/Program
Interchange
Model Interfaces
Reference Control
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 3
Investigating Model Units

You can specify a model's units.
nl
Analyses are reported in current

model units.
Units come from templates.
You can change them if desired.
Convert dimensions
Interpret dimensions
tio
na
lU
se
Units Manager
Converting Model Dimensions
Interpreting Model Dimensions
uc
a
Investigating Model Units
Ed
A model's units are typically derived from a specific model template that was
chosen when you first began creating a part model. Pro/ENGINEER's default
system of units is English, specifically in_lbm_sec. For all new models
created in PTC courses, the units are mm_kg_sec.
There are several unit systems available, including:
Fo
r
Centimeter Gram Second (CGS)

Foot Pound Second (FPS)
Inch Pound (mass) Second (IPS)
Inch Pound (force) Second (IPS)
Meter Kilogram Second (MKS)
Millimeter Kilogram Second (mmKs)
Millimeter Newton (force) Second (mmNs)
If none of these default unit systems are desirable, you can customize your
own unit system using any combination of units. Any analyses performed on
a model are reported in the current model units.
You can change the units for a model by using the Units Manager dialog box,
which you can access by clicking change in the Units row of the Materials
section of the Model Properties dialog box. When you switch from one set
of units to another, you must specify how the dimensions are to be handled.
There are two different methods that you can choose from:
Module 17 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Convert dimensions Causes the model to retain its same size when the
system of units is modified. The dimension values update accordingly
based on your decision. In the lower-left figure the diameter of the socket
is 25.4mm. The system of units is converted from Metric to English, and
therefore the English diameter is now 1in (the same size).
Interpret dimensions Causes the model change size based on the
system of units specified. The dimension values remain the same. In the
lower-right figure, the diameter of the socket is 1 in. The system of units
is interpreted from English to Metric, and therefore the Metric diameter is
now 1mm (the same value).
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
The same systems of units are available for assemblies, also.
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 5
PROCEDURE - Investigating Model Units

Scenario
Investigate the model units in a model.
model-units.prt
Model_Units
tio
na
lU
se
1. Double-click the outer cylindrical

model surface. Notice the main
outer diameter is 25.4.
Investigate the model units of a model.
nl
Task 1:
uc
a

Ed
3. Notice the current unit system for

the model.
Fo
r
4. In the Materials section, click

change in the Units row.
5. Again, notice the current unit
system in the Units Manager
dialog box and view the
Description.
Module 17 | Page 6
2009 PTC
nl
na
lU
se

outer diameter is now 1.
7. Click Refit
if necessary and
click in the background.
6. In the Units Manager dialog box,

select the Inch lbm Second
system of units and click Set.
In the Changing Model
Units dialog box, select the
Convert dimensions option,
if necessary.
Click OK > Close > Close.
The model is the same size.

The diameter changed from
25.4 millimeters to 1 inch.
9. Click File > Properties.
tio

change in the Units row.
Ed
uc
a
11. In the Units Manager dialog box,

select the millimeter Kilogram
Sec system of units and click
Set.
Fo
r
12. In the Changing Model Units

dialog box, select the Interpret
dimensions option and click OK
> Close > Close.
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 7
13. Click Refit

background.
and click in the

outer diameter is still 1.
nl
The model is now much

smaller. The diameter
changed from 1 inch to 1
millimeter.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Module 17 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Analyzing Mass Properties
nl
O
Mass properties include:

Volume
Surface area
Density
Mass
COG
Analyses require model density.
Density units are the same as
model units.
For assemblies, a density for each
component is required.
You can calculate a model's mass properties.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Viewing Mass Properties
Ed
Performing a Mass Properties Analysis
Analyzing Mass Properties
Fo
r
You can view a model's mass properties within the Materials section of the
Model Properties dialog box. You can also calculate the mass properties
by clicking Analysis > Model > Mass Properties from the main menu.
Before you can calculate accurate mass properties for a model, however, its
density must be defined. A mass properties calculation is dependent upon
the density entered for a given model. If the density is updated for a model
and its mass properties are recalculated, the results update.
When the system performs a mass properties analysis, the following mass
property information is calculated:
Volume
Surface Area
Density
Mass
Center of Gravity The center of gravity (COG) is displayed on the model
as a coordinate system with axes 1, 2, and 3, as shown in the lower figure.
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 9
You can also perform mass properties analyses on assemblies. However,

you must first configure the density of each part model.
Mass Properties Analysis Options

There are three options available when performing a mass properties
analysis:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Quick Enables you to compute mass properties without saving the

analysis or creating a mass properties feature in the model tree.
Saved Enables you to save the mass properties analysis for future use.
You can specify a unique name for the analysis so it means something
to you at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses by clicking
Analysis > Saved Analysis from the main menu.
Feature Enables you to save the mass properties analysis as a feature
in the model tree.
Module 17 | Page 10
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mass Properties

Scenario
Analyze the mass properties in models.
Model_Mass-Props
Task 1:
mass-props.prt
Analyze the mass properties of a model.
nl
O
2. In the Model Properties dialog

box, click Expand
in the
Mass Properties row in the
Materials section.

main menu.
na
lU
se
3. Notice that the density is

specified as 3.613e+4.

change in the Mass Properties
row.
Ed
uc
a
tio
5. In the Setup Mass Properties

dialog box, edit the Density to
.285, the density of steel, and
click OK.
Fo
r
6. Notice the updated density value

in the Model Properties dialog
box.
Info
in the Mass Properties
row.
8. Notice the values for volume,
surface area, density, mass, and
center of gravity in the Mass
Properties Report.
9. Close the Mass Properties
Report dialog box.
10. Click Close from the Model

2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 11
Task 2:
Analyze the mass properties in an assembly.
2. Click Analysis > Model > Mass

Properties.
nl
1. Click Open
, select
VALVE.ASM, and click Open.
na
lU
se
3. Click Preview Analysis

from the Mass Properties dialog
box.
4. Notice the values for volume,

surface area, density, mass, and
center of gravity.
tio
5. Notice the center of gravity 1-2-3

coordinate system location.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
6. Click Accept
from the Mass
Module 17 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Measuring Models
nl
O
Measurements include:
Diameter
Area
Length
Angles
Distances
Measurements can be saved for
quick reuse.
Measurement units are the same
as current model units.
Several types of measurements can be made on models.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Measuring an Angle
Ed
Viewing Different Measurements on a Model
Measuring Diameters
Fo
r
You can measure the diameter of a cylindrical surface. Surfaces can include
those created by revolving a sketched entity, extruding a sketched arc,
extruding a sketched circle, or round features. When measuring a diameter,
you select the surface you wish to measure, and Pro/ENGINEER displays the
measurement. The entity you select is called the surface reference. In the
lower figure, the diameter of the cylindrical surface is 14.
You can also measure the diameter at a selected point on a surface. This
measurement is good for surfaces with non-constant diameter.
Measuring Area
You can measure the area of a surface, quilt, facet, or the entire model. The
entity you select is called the geometry reference. You can also select a
direction reference to project the area onto a two-dimensional plane.
Measuring Length
You can measure the length of curves or edges on a model. Simply select
an edge or curve to display its length. You can also measure an edge chain.
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 13
Pro/ENGINEER will report the total length of all selected edges, as shown
by the red highlighted edges in the lower figure.
Measuring Angles
nl
You can measure the angle between two entities. These two entities are
called the From reference and the To reference, and can consist of
surfaces, planes, or edges. You can also specify the direction reference,
which projects the angle of the entities onto a two-dimensional plane. When
measuring angles, you can optionally modify the Plot Scale and Plot Range
that Pro/ENGINEER uses to display the measurement. Scale enables you to
adjust the scale of the arrows using the wheel button, specifying the required
scale, or by dragging the scale handle. Range enables you to display the
angle from 0360 degrees or from +/180 degrees.
Measuring Distances
na
lU
se
You can measure the distance between two references. These two
references are called the From reference and the To reference. You can
select points and vertices, edges and curves, surfaces and planes, and axes
and coordinate systems.
You can also measure the distance in a projected direction. There are two
types of projected distances that can be measured:
uc
a
tio
Direction Reference Enables you to measure a distance projected in the

direction of a selected reference. In the lower figure, the distance between
two vertices, 24.9280, is projected along the model's side planar surface
for a value of 21. Measuring projected distances is beneficial because
it enables you to easily select a direction reference instead of having to
create specific geometry in order to create the measurement.
View Plane Enables you to measure the projected distance based upon
the orientation of the part in the graphics window.
Ed
Measurement Options
Fo
r
There are three options available when measuring geometry on models:

Quick Enables you to compute measurements without saving the
analysis or creating a measurement feature in the model tree.
Saved Enables you to save the measurement for future use. You
can specify a unique name for the measurement analysis so it means
something to you at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses by
clicking Analysis > Saved Analysis from the main menu.
Feature Enables you to save the measurement as a feature in the
model tree.
Module 17 | Page 14
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Measuring Models

Scenario
Measure different parts of a model.
measure.prt
Measuring
Task 1:
Measure different parts of a model.
nl
O
na
lU
se
2. Under the Materials section of

the Model Properties dialog box,
notice the units that are set.
Click Close.

main menu.
3. Click Analysis > Measure >

Diameter from the main menu.
tio
4. In the Diameter dialog box,

edit the measurement type to
Quick from the drop-down list if
necessary.
5. Select the curved model surface.

Notice the diameter is 14 mm.
uc
a
from the
6. Click Accept
Diameter dialog box.
Ed

Area from the main menu.
Fo
r
8. Select the flat model surface.

Notice the surface area is
478.819 mm2.
9. Click Accept
dialog box.
from the Area

Length from the main menu.
11. Select the left-most edge. Then
press SHIFT and select two
other edges. Notice the length
is 35.2539 mm.
12. Click Accept
dialog box.
2009 PTC
from the Length
Module 17 | Page 15

Angle from the main menu.
14. Select the left surface, then
select the right surface. Notice
the angle is 27.5268 degrees.
15. In the Angle dialog box, activate
the Direction collector and select
the top surface. Notice the
projected angle is now 332.473
degrees.
nl
from the Angle
na
lU
se
16. Click Accept

dialog box.

Distance from the main menu.
18. Select the two vertices. Notice

the distance is 24.9280 mm.
uc
a
tio
19. Right-click and select Direction

Collector and select the right
surface. Notice the projected
distance is now 21 mm.
Ed
20. Click Accept

from the
Distance dialog box.
Fo
r
Module 17 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections
nl
Cross-Section with Visibility On
tio
na
lU
se
Use Xsec tab in view manager

Display options
Visibility
Set Active
Flip
Redefine cross-sections
Hatching
Rename
Description
You can create planar cross-sections in a 3-D model.
The Active Cross-Section
Active Cross-Section with

Visibility On
uc
a
Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections Theory
Ed
You can create new planar part cross-sections using the Xsec tab of the view
manager. Simply select a datum plane or planar surface on a model and the
cross-section is created on that plane.
Cross-Section Display Options
Fo
r
There are three different display options for cross-sections:

Visibility Toggles the cross-section display on or off. In the upper-right
figure, the cross-section display is enabled.
Set Active Sets the active cross-section, with the default selection as No
Cross Section. When a cross-section is set as active, the model geometry
is clipped at that section location. In the lower-left figure, a cross-section
is set as the active section.
Flip Flips the geometry side that is clipped about the active section.
Editing Cross-Sections
There are numerous editing operations that you can perform on
cross-sections, including the following:
Redefine Enables you to redefine a cross-section's hatching spacing
and angle. Spacing options include Half, which halves the spacing, Double,
which doubles the spacing, and Value, which enables you to specify a
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 17
spacing value. Angle values range from 0 to 150 degrees at intervals of

30 and 45 degrees.
Remove Enables you to delete a cross-section from a model.
Rename Enables you to rename the cross-section name.
Copy Enables you to copy a cross-section from another model and
specify a new reference.
Description Enables you to add a text description to a cross-section.
Performing a Cross-Section Mass Properties Analysis
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can analyze a model's mass properties at a cross-section. Results

include area, center of gravity, and inertia.
Module 17 | Page 18
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections

Scenario
Create a planar cross-section in a model.
x-sec.prt
Cross-Sections
Create a planar cross-section in a model.
nl
na
lU
se
2. In the View Manager, select the

Xsec tab.
Click New and press ENTER
to accept the default name.
Accept the default options
and click Done from the menu
manager.
Select datum plane FRONT.
Task 1:
uc
a
tio

Xsec0001 to make it the active
section.
Fo
r
Ed

Xsec0001 and select Visibility.
Notice the eyeball icon.
5. In the view manager, click

Options > Flip to flip the side
that is displayed.
6. Click Options > Flip to flip the
display back.
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 19
7. In the view manager, click Edit >

Redefine and select Hatching
Click Spacing > Half from the
menu manager.
Click Angle > 60.
Click Done > Done/Return.
na
lU
se
nl

No Cross Section. Notice that
the section is still visible but the
clipping has been toggled off.

Xsec0001 and select Visibility
to toggle it off. Notice the eyeball
icon disappears.
uc
a
tio
10. Click Close.
Ed
11. Click Analysis > Model >

X-Section Mass Properties
from the main menu.
Fo
r
12. In the Cross Section Properties

dialog box, edit the Name to
XSEC0001. The analysis is
performed at the cross-section
location.
13. Click Accept
Module 17 | Page 20
2009 PTC
Measuring Global Interference
nl
Viewing Exact Global Interference

Computation
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Setup:
Parts only
Sub-assembly only
Computation type:
Exact
Quick
Interference pairs:
Highlighted in the model
Volume can be
calculated
You can calculate interferences between components in an

assembly.
Viewing Quick Global Interference

Computation
Ed
Measuring Global Interference

You can calculate interferences between components in an assembly. There
are two different setup options available when computing global interference:
Fo
r
Parts only Interference is checked between all parts, regardless of which

sub-assembly, if any, they belong to.
Sub-assembly only Interference is checked between all sub-assemblies
in the top level assembly without determining whether individual parts
within the sub-assembly interfere.
When components interfere, the geometry of one part is embedded in another

part. The system displays the interference between these two components
as a pair in the Global Interference dialog box. Selecting the interfering pair
in the dialog box causes the components to be highlighted in the graphics
window, as shown in the figures. There are two different computational
methods available for computing interferences:
Exact When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting
the interfering components, the system also highlights the interfering
volume shared between the two components. In addition, the volume of
interference is calculated and displayed in the dialog box, as shown in
the upper figure.
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 21
Quick When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting the

interfering components, the system highlights the approximate interfering
volume with a plus symbol in the graphics window, as shown in the lower
figure. The volume of interference is not calculated.
Analysis Options
There are three options available when computing global interference on
models:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Quick Enables you to compute global interference without saving the

analysis or creating a feature in the model tree.
Saved Enables you to save the analysis for future use. You can specify
a unique name for the global interference analysis so it means something
to you at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses by clicking
Analysis > Saved Analysis from the main menu.
Feature Enables you to save the global interference analysis as a
feature in the model tree.
Module 17 | Page 22
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Measuring Global Interference

Scenario
Measure global interferences in an assembly.
Global-Interference
Task 1:
interference.asm
nl
na
lU
se

from the Global Interference
dialog box.
Notice the four interfering
pairs. Select each pair to see
the highlighting, and notice the
volume of interference.
Click Accept .
1. Click Analysis > Model >

Global Interference from the
main menu.
Measure global interferences in an assembly.
Ed
uc
a
tio

BODY.PRT and select Activate.
Expand BODY.PRT and
expand the second Pattern
(Hole).
Edit the diameter of Hole
id 299 from 3 to 4 and click
Regenerate
Fo
r

INTERFERENCE.ASM and
select Activate.
5. Click Analysis > Model > Global

Interference.
.
Notice that there is only one
interference pair.
Click Accept .
2009 PTC
Module 17 | Page 23

BODY.PRT and select Activate.
Edit the diameter of Hole id
37 from 49 to 51 and click
.

INTERFERENCE.ASM and
select Activate.
nl
Regenerate
na
lU
se
9. Click Analysis > Model > Global

Interference.
tio

.
Notice that there are now no
interfering parts, as shown in
the message window.
Click Accept .
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Module 17 | Page 24
2009 PTC
Assembling with Constraints
18
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Most commercial product designs consist of numerous components.

Pro/ENGINEER enables you to create an assembly, into which you can
assemble multiple components. Constraints locate the components within
the assembly, both manually and automatically.
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio

Understand assembly and constraint theory and create new assembly
models.
Understand assembly constraint status and analyze basic component
orientation.
Assemble components using the Default constraint and Automatic option.
Constrain components using Insert, Mate, and Align along with various
offsets.
Use the accessory window to assemble components.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 1
Understanding Assembly Theory

An assembly is a collection of parts and other sub-assemblies
that you bring together using constraints.
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Create assembly models from standardized templates.

Capture assembly design intent using constraints.
Create assembly constraints.
uc
a
An Assembly Model that is Comprised of Parts
Understanding Assembly Theory
Ed
There are multiple methods to assemble components using Pro/ENGINEER.

Assembling components with constraints is one of the primary methods used
to create Pro/ENGINEER assemblies.
Fo
r
Like part models, all new assembly models share several characteristics in
common. By creating your assembly models from standardized templates,
you can save time by not repeatedly defining company standard information.
This standard template enables all engineers to have a consistent starting
point. After you create and name the new assembly, you can begin adding
parts to the assembly. Similar to part models having design intent, assemblies
also contain design intent. Assembly design intent is based upon which
component is assembled first, and the constraints that you use during the
assembly process. Design intent is important because it means that your
assembly updates in a predictable manner when edited and regenerated.
All characteristics that hold true for assemblies also hold true for
sub-assemblies. In fact, a sub-assembly is nothing more than an assembly
that is assembled into another assembly.
Pro/ENGINEER has several types of constraints, such as Mate, Align, and
Insert. Use of these constraints is made easier by using the Automatic option,
which enables Pro/ENGINEER to automatically determine the constraint
Module 18 | Page 2
2009 PTC
type based upon the orientation and position of the component and the
references you select.
Every assembled component has a Placement node in the model
tree that can be expanded to view the constraints used in that
component's placement.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Assembling with component interfaces is a second method when assembling

components. This method is especially useful when assembling common
components because it can significantly cut the number of selections that you
make when constraining a component. By using component interfaces, you
save the referenced interfaces on the common part. Then, when you place
the common part, you only need to select the assembly references.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 3
Creating New Assembly Models

Your company can create customized templates that can be
used to create new assembly models.
nl
na
lU
se
New Assembly Created using Template
Layers Created from Assembly

Template
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Examples of Parameters
Create new assemblies using

the New dialog box.
Use customized assembly
templates.
Assembly templates include:
Datums
Layers
Units
Parameters
View Orientations
Creating New Assemblies

Assemblies are composed of parts and other sub-assemblies that you bring
together. You can create new assembly models within Pro/ENGINEER either
by using File > New, or by clicking New . You can type the name of the
assembly and choose whether you want to use a default template or a
template at all. Unless you choose the Empty template, the new assembly
displays in the graphics window with some sort of default datum features.
Using Templates
New assemblies should be created using a template. Assembly templates
are similar to part templates in that they enable you to create a new assembly
with predefined general information. Your company will likely have created
customized templates to be used, as they contain your company's standards.
Module 18 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Using a template to create a new assembly is beneficial because it means

that regardless of who created it, the assembly contains the same consistent
set of information, including:
nl
Datums Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and

default coordinate system, all named appropriately.
Layers When every assembly contains the same layers, management of
both the layers and items on the layer is easier.
Units Most companies have a company standard for units in their
assemblies . Creating every assembly with the same set of units ensures
that no mistakes are made.
Parameters Every assembly can have the same standard meta data
information.
View Orientations Having every assembly contain the same standard
view orientations aids the modeling process.
Creating Parameters
na
lU
se
Parameters are meta data information that can be included in an assembly

template or created by a user in his or her own part or assembly. Parameters
are important because they enable you to add additional information into part
and assembly models. Parameters can have several uses:
uc
a
tio
Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be driven

by relations.
Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, the
parameter Cost might have a different value for each instance.
Parameter values can be reported in Drawings, or viewed with data
management tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions.
User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, or
component) or to a feature or pattern.
Ed
You can create parameters that accept the following types of values:
Fo
r
Real Number Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667,

10.5E3, and PI.
Integer Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257.
String Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (letters
or numbers).
Yes/No Accepts either the YES or NO value.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 5
PROCEDURE - Creating New Assembly Models

Scenario
Create new assembly models.
Create New
New_Assy
Task 1:
Create a new assembly using the default template.
na
lU
se
nl
1. Click File > New from the main

menu.
Select Assembly as the Type
and Design as the Sub-type.
Edit the Name to
new_assembly.
Notice that Use default
template is selected.
Click OK.
tio
2. Explore the default datum

features created in the graphics
window and model tree.
and select Layer Tree. Notice
uc
a
3. In the model tree, click Show

the default layers.
Ed

Fo
r
6. Click Close.
7. Click Tools > Parameters from the main menu.
8. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter

Value field.
Edit the value to NEW ASSEMBLY and press ENTER.
Click New Parameter
and edit the Name to PURCHASED.
Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default Value of NO.
Click New Parameter

and edit the Name to ASSY_NUMBER.
Edit the parameter type to Integer.
Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289.
Click OK.
Module 18 | Page 6
2009 PTC

. Notice the default view
orientations.
again to close it.
nl
na
lU
se
1. Click New
from the main
toolbar.
Select Assembly as the Type
and Design as the Sub-type.
Edit the Name to
select_template.
template check box.
Click OK.
Create a new assembly by selecting a different template.
Task 2:
uc
a
tio
2. In the New File Options

dialog box, select the
inlbs_asm_design template.
Click OK.
3. Again, notice the datum features.

4. Click File > Properties.
Ed
Fo
r
6. Click Close.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 7
Understanding Constraint Theory
nl
O
Most constraints are applied

between parts within an assembly.
Select component reference.
Select assembly reference.
Constraints are added one at a
time.
The active constraint is highlighted
in a light orange box.
Double-click a constraint's tag to
modify it.
Constraints determine how a part is located in an assembly.
tio
na
lU
se
Viewing the Active Constraint
uc
a
Selecting Placement References
Modifying a Constraint
Ed
Understanding Constraint Theory
Fo
r
You can assemble components using constraints. Constraints determine

how a part is located within an assembly. There are many different types of
constraints that you can use to assemble components.
Most constraints are applied between parts within an assembly. They specify
the relative position of a pair of references. The system adds constraints
one at a time. Use placement constraints in combinations to specify both
placement and orientation. It is important to choose your constraints based
on the design intent of your assembly, so that when you edit a dimension on
a part, the assembly reacts as predicted.
When you create a constraint, its references are highlighted on the models
and the Constraint Type is displayed. For most constraints it is necessary that
you select two references, a component reference on the component being
placed, and an assembly reference from an item in the assembly. When
the first reference has been selected, a red, dashed line connects the first
selected reference to your cursor until you select the second reference, as
shown in the lower-left figure.
When multiple constraints are created, the active constraint is highlighted
in a light orange box. For example, in the upper-right figure the top Insert
Module 18 | Page 8
2009 PTC
constraint is the active constraint. To activate a different constraint, simply

select the displayed name or select it from the Placement tab in the
dashboard. You can then right-click to perform a desired action.
You can also double-click a constraint's tag in the graphics window to edit
the constraint, as shown in the lower-right figure. Editing options include
switching the constraint type, changing the constraint orientation, and viewing
as well as deleting the constraint's placement references.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can toggle Constraints To Connections

in the dashboard to convert
existing connections to constraints within an assembly.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 9
Understanding Assembly Constraint Status
nl
O
na
lU
se
Range of assembly constraint status:

No Constraints
Partially Constrained
Packaged
Fully Constrained
Constraints Invalid
The system can also Allow
Assumptions to facilitate component
placement.
Ideally, when you complete a component's placement, it should

be at a Fully Constrained status.
Ed
uc
a
tio
No Constraints
Fo
r
Range of Assembly Constraint Status
Understanding Assembly Constraint Status
You can assemble a component into an assembly by using placement

constraints. Constraints determine how a part is located within an assembly.
As constraints are added, a component becomes further and further
constrained and goes through a range of constraint status, which is displayed
in the dashboard. The constraint status range includes:
No Constraints No constraints have been added to the component being
assembled, as shown in the upper-right figure.
Partially Constrained At least one constraint has been applied to the
component being assembled, but not enough constraints have been added
to render the component fully constrained. That is, the orientation of the
component can still be changed, so its position is open to interpretation.
The left-most image in the lower figure shows the component Partially
Constrained. The preview color of partially constrained components is
light yellow.
Module 18 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Fully Constrained Enough constraints have been applied to the

component being assembled that it cannot move. Ideally, when you
complete the component placement, the component should be fully
constrained. The right-most image in the lower figure is Fully Constrained.
The preview color of fully constrained components changes from a lighter
yellow to a darker yellow.
Constraints Invalid Two constraints conflict with how they are trying to
place the component in the assembly. If this condition arises you must edit
or delete one or more constraints to eliminate the conflict.
Allowing Assumptions
na
lU
se
nl
The Allow Assumptions option can become available when placing a

component in an assembly. When this option is selected, the system makes
additional constraint assumptions to help fully constrain the component. If you
clear this check box, the system returns the status to Partially Constrained. If
you properly further constrain a component that is fully constrained with Allow
assumptions enabled, the Allow Assumptions option will disappear and just
be Fully Constrained, as there is no longer a need for the system to make
assumptions. The middle image of the lower figure is Fully Constrained as
long as the Allow Assumptions option is enabled. If the Allow Assumptions
check box is cleared, the component is no longer Fully Constrained, as it can
rotate. Either an additional constraint would need to be added or the Allow
Assumptions check box would need to be selected.
tio
Leaving Components Packaged
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
If you complete the component placement when the status reads Partially
Constrained, the system will leave the component packaged only, and the
message window will alert you to this. An open square symbol also displays
in the model tree next to the packaged component. You can drag components
that are packaged based on their partial constraints.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 11
Assembling Components using the Default

Constraint
It is standard practice to assemble the first component of an
assembly using the Default constraint.
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Benefits of using the Default constraint:

No references are specified.
No parent/child relationships are created.
Completed Component Placement
uc
a
Assembling Component using

Default Constraint
Assembling Components using the Default Constraint
Fo
r
Ed
The Default constraint enables you to align the internal system-created

coordinate system of the component to the internal system-created
coordinate system of the assembly. The system places the component at the
assembly origin, as shown in the left figure. Because the internal system
coordinate system is used, no references are specified, and no parent-child
references are created. It is a standard practice to assemble the initial
assembly component using a Default constraint, as shown in the right figure.
Module 18 | Page 12
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using the

Default Constraint
Scenario
Assemble a component using the Default constraint.
Default_Const
Assemble BODY.PRT using the Default constraint.
from the
na
lU
se
2. In the Open dialog box, select

component BODY.PRT and click
Open.
1. Click Assemble
feature toolbar.
nl
Task 1:
default_const.asm
3. Notice the component is light

yellow. Notice also in the
dashboard that the constraint
STATUS says No Constraints.
tio
4. In the dashboard, select Default

from the drop-down list.
uc
a
5. Notice that the constraint

STATUS now says Fully
Constrained.
Ed
6. Notice the component is now

dark yellow.
7. Click Complete Component
Fo
r
8. Notice that the color is now the

actual component color.
9. View the model tree and notice
the assembled component.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 13
Analyzing Basic Component Orientation

You can reorient a component with respect to the assembly
during placement.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Component Orientation Controls:

Drag
Spin
Pan
Spinning a Component
Ed
Panning a Component
Analyzing Basic Component Orientation
Fo
r
When assembling a component, you can reorient it with respect to the

assembly. Reorienting the component closer to its assembly location aids
in its assembly by making it easier to select references. When you use
the Automatic option, the system is better able to determine the correct
placement constraints to use.
You can reorient the component according to the constraints that have been
applied to it. As constraints are applied the degrees of freedom are reduced,
further limiting how the component can be moved.
The following types of component reorientation operations are available:
Module 18 | Page 14
2009 PTC
Operation
Component Drag
+
Spin
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Pan
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 15
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Basic Component Orientation

Scenario
Use component orientation controls on a component in an assembly.
comp_orient.asm
Comp_Orient
Use component placement controls on the SHAFT.PRT.
na
lU
se

component SHAFT.PRT and
click Open.
from the
nl
1. Click Assemble
feature toolbar.
Task 1:
3. Notice the component is

light yellow. Also notice the
component orientation and
location in the assembly.
uc
a
tio
4. Press CTRL + ALT and

middle-click to spin the
component and orient it vertically.
Fo
r
Ed
5. Press CTRL + ALT and right-click

to pan the component and move
it to the position above the top
hole in BODY.PRT.
Module 18 | Page 16
2009 PTC
7. Notice that the color is now the

actual component color.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
8. Notice also the symbol next

to SHAFT.PRT in the model
tree. This symbol is an indicator
that the component has been
packaged only.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 17
Constraining Components using Insert

Use the Insert constraint to position two revolved surfaces
coaxial.
na
lU
se
nl
References you can select include:

Cylindrical surfaces
Conical surfaces
tio
The Insert Constraint
uc
a
Constraining Components using Insert
Fo
r
Ed
The Insert constraint enables you to insert one revolved surface into another
revolved surface, making their respective axes coaxial. For example, you
can create an Insert constraint to match a shaft to the hole, as shown in
the figure. This constraint is especially useful when axes are unavailable or
inconvenient for selection. Keep in mind the Insert constraint only constrains
surfaces coaxial, and does not "slide" one component into another.
Module 18 | Page 18
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Insert

Scenario
Assemble components using the Insert constraint.
insert_const.asm
Insert_Const
1. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT.

Notice the constraint STATUS is
No Constraints.
2. In the dashboard, select Insert

from the drop-down list.
Assemble the SHAFT.PRT using Insert constraints.
nl
Task 1:
na
lU
se
3. Select the shaft on SHAFT.PRT

and the hole on BODY.PRT.
uc
a
tio
4. Notice that the component snaps

to its new location. Also notice
the constraint STATUS is now
Partially Constrained.
.
Ed
Assemble the COVER.PRT using Insert constraints.
Fo
r
Task 2:
1. Unhide COVER.PRT.

COVER.PRT. The constraint
STATUS is Partially Constrained.

Placement tab.
Click New Constraint.
Select Insert
as the
Constraint Type.
4. Select one set of matching
inner hole surfaces, one on
COVER.PRT and one on
BODY.PRT.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 19
Normally you would not edit the component definition and add
additional constraints. This Procedure is performed like this so
you can fully understand the Insert constraint.
5. Press CTRL + ALT + middle-drag
to spin the component out of the
way.
na
lU
se
nl
6. In the Placement tab, click New

Constraint and select Insert
.
7. Select the second set of

matching inner hole surfaces,
one on COVER.PRT and one on
BODY.PRT.
Ed
uc
a
tio

Fully Constrained.
Fo
r
Module 18 | Page 20
2009 PTC
Constraining Components using Mate Coincident

Use the Mate Coincident constraint to position two surfaces or
datum planes coplanar and facing each other with an equivalent
offset value of zero.
nl
References you can Mate

Coincident include:
Planar surfaces
Datum planes
Conical surfaces
The Mate Coincident Constraint

Selecting Two Conical Surfaces
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
The Mate Coincident Constraint

Selecting Two Surfaces
Constraining Components using Mate Coincident
Fo
r
The Mate Coincident constraint enables you to position two planar surfaces
or datum planes to lie in the same plane (coplanar), and to face each other,
as shown in the upper-right figure. If datum planes are mated Coincident,
their brown (positive) sides face each other. Using the Mate Coincident
constraint, you can also select pairs of conical surfaces, which makes the
surfaces coincident and coaxial in one step, as shown in the lower-right
figure. When components are mated Coincident to one another, it is the
same as assigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is not
created for editing. The components can be positioned in any location as
long as their normals face each other.
Datum planes have positive and negative sides designated by color.
If you rotate a model with datum planes displayed, look closely to
see that the colors are brown and gray.
If two planar surfaces are mated Coincident, you can use the Change
Constraint Orientation
option in the dashboard to convert the Mate
Coincident constraint into an Align Coincident constraint. You can also
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 21
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
double-click the Mate constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the
constraint type to an Align constraint.
Module 18 | Page 22
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Mate

Coincident
Scenario
Assemble components using the Mate coincident constraint.
Mate-Coincident
Task 1:
mate-coincident.asm
nl
na
lU
se

Placement tab.

Assemble the SHAFT.PRT using a Mate coincident constraint.
Select Mate
as the
Constraint Type.
Verify the offset is set to
.
Coincident
tio
3. Select the flat surfaces on

SHAFT.PRT and BODY.PRT.
Ed
uc
a

Fully Constrained with Allow
Assumptions enabled.
.
Fo
r
you can fully understand the Mate Coincident constraint.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 23
Task 2:
Assemble ARM.PRT using a Mate coincident constraint.
1. Unhide ARM.PRT.
2. Edit the definition of ARM.PRT.
The constraint STATUS is No
Constraints.
3. Reorient ARM.PRT.
4. In the dashboard, select Mate

as the Constraint Type.
nl
5. Verify that the Offset is

Coincident
.
na
lU
se
6. Select the inner conical surface

on ARM.PRT and the conical
surface on SHAFT.PRT.
7. The resulting ARM.PRT
orientation may vary based
on how it was reoriented.
tio

Fully Constrained.
.
Ed
uc
a
Fo
r
Module 18 | Page 24
2009 PTC
Constraining Components using Align

Coincident
nl
O
na
lU
se
References you can Align

Coincident include:
Planar surfaces
Datum axes
Datum planes
Edges
Points/Vertices
Use the Align Coincident constraint to position two surfaces or

datum planes coplanar and facing in the same direction with an
equivalent offset value of zero.
uc
a
tio
The Align Coincident Constraint

Selecting Two Surfaces

Selecting Two Datum Planes
Fo
r
Ed

Selecting Two Datum Axes
Constraining Components using Align Coincident
The Align Coincident constraint enables you to make two planar surfaces
or datum planes lie in the same plane (coplanar) and face in the same
direction. Align can also be used to make two axes coaxial, or two points or
edges coincident, but the selected references must be of the same type, for
example, plane-to-plane, axis-to-axis, and so on. With Align constraints, the
surfaces or the brown sides of datum planes, face the same direction instead
of facing each other as when mated.
When components are aligned coincident to one another, it is the same as
assigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is not created for
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 25
editing. The components can be positioned in any location as long as their

normals face in the same direction.
Datum planes have positive and negative sides designated by color.
If you rotate a model with datum planes displayed, look closely to
see that the colors are brown and gray.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
If two planar surfaces are aligned coincident, you can use the Change
option in the dashboard to convert the Align
constraint into a Mate constraint. You can also double-click the Align
constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Mate
constraint.
Module 18 | Page 26
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Align

Coincident
Scenario
Assemble components using the Align coincident constraint.
Align-Coincident
Task 1:
align-coincident.asm
na
lU
se
3. Right-click in the graphics

window and select Clear.
nl
2. Double-click the Mate constraint

to activate it.
Select surfaces with an Align coincident constraint.
4. Edit the constraint from Mate

to Align in the dialog box and
verify the Offset is Coincident
.
tio
5. Select the flat surfaces on

SHAFT.PRT and BODY.PRT.
uc
a

to a new location.
.
Fo
r
Ed
you can fully understand the Align Coincident constraint.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 27
Task 2:
Select datum planes with an Align coincident constraint.
1. Unhide ARM.PRT.
2. Edit the definition of ARM.PRT.
The constraint STATUS is Fully
Constrained.
Placement tab and click New
Constraint.
nl
Select Align
as the
Constraint Type and verify
the Offset is Coincident
.
na
lU
se

4. Reorient ARM.PRT to face

approximately toward the front.
to
6. Select datum plane TOP in

ARM.PRT and datum plane
RIGHT in SHAFT.PRT.
Ed
uc
a
tio
7. Click Change Constraint

.
Orientation
Fo
r

Orientation
again.
Module 18 | Page 28
2009 PTC
Task 3:
Select axes with an Align coincident constraint.
1. Unhide PLATE.PRT and click

Axis Display
2. Edit the definition of PLATE.PRT.

The constraint STATUS is
na
lU
se
4. Select datum axis A_1 in

PLATE.PRT and datum axis A_5
in SHAFT.PRT.
Select Align , and verify the

.
Offset is Coincident
nl

Placement tab and click New
Constraint.
5. In the dashboard, click New

Constraint, select Align , and
verify the Offset is Coincident
.
uc
a
tio
6. Select datum axis A_2 in

PLATE.PRT and datum axis A_4
in SHAFT.PRT. The constraint
STATUS is Fully Constrained.
Ed
9. Select BODY.PRT and click View

> Display Style > Transparent
from the main menu.
Fo
r
10. Spin the model and inspect the

assembly.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 29
Constraining Components using Align and Mate

Offset
Use Align and Mate Offset constraints to specify an offset value
between selected surfaces or datum planes.
The Align Offset Constraint
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
References you can Align or Mate

Offset include:
Planar surfaces
Datum planes
Ed
The Mate Offset Constraint
Constraining Components using Align and Mate Offset
Fo
r
The Align and Mate Offset constraints enable you to specify an offset value
between selected surfaces or datum planes. The Align and Mate Offset
constraints are the same as the Align and Mate Coincident constraints,
respectively, except that the selected references can be offset from one
another versus coplanar.
When you use Align and Mate Offset, the system sets the current offset
direction as the positive offset direction. To offset in the opposite direction,
either drag the location handle to the other side of the selected Mate/Align
assembly reference or edit the offset to a negative value. The component
moves to the opposite side, and this offset direction is now set as the positive
offset direction. If components are Align or Mate Offset to one another with
an offset value of zero, it is the same as aligning or mating Coincident,
respectively, except that an offset value is available for editing. You can
manually edit the Offset option from Offset to Coincident to Oriented.
If two planar surfaces are Align or Mate Offset, you can use the Change
option in the dashboard to convert the Align
Offset constraint into a Mate Offset constraint and vice versa. You can also
Module 18 | Page 30
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
double-click the Align constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the
constraint type to a Mate constraint, and vice versa.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 31

and Mate Offset
Scenario
Redefine component constraints from coincident to offset.
Align_Mate-Offset
2. Select the Align constraint

and view the currently selected
references.
nl
Edit Mate and Align Coincident constraints to Offset.
Task 1:
offset.asm
na
lU
se
3. In the dashboard, edit the Offset

from Coincident
to Offset
.
4. Drag the drag handle down to an

offset value of 3, and notice the
Offset value in the dashboard.
tio
5. Edit the Offset value from 3 to -7.
Ed
uc
a

to change the Align Offset
constraint to a Mate Offset
constraint.
Fo
r

Orientation
again.
Module 18 | Page 32
2009 PTC
nl
O
9. Orient the assembly to the

Standard Orientation and select
the surfaces on SHAFT.PRT and
BODY.PRT.

Placement tab.
Right-click the Align constraint
and select Delete.
Edit the constraint to Mate
and verify the Offset is
Coincident
.
na
lU
se
10. Edit the Offset to Offset

and
drag the drag handle upwards to
an offset value of 2.
Ed
uc
a
tio

to change the Mate Offset
constraint to an Align Offset
constraint.
Fo
r

again.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 33

Oriented
Use Align and Mate Oriented constraints to force selected
component surfaces or datum planes into a particular
orientation.
na
lU
se
nl

Oriented include:
Planar surfaces
Datum planes
uc
a
tio
The Align Oriented Constraint
Ed
The Mate Oriented Constraint
Constraining Components using Align and Mate Oriented
Fo
r
The Align and Mate Oriented constraints enable you to force a selected
datum plane or surface into a particular orientation without regard to an offset
value. The Align Oriented constraint forces selected surfaces or datum
planes to face in the same direction, as shown in the right figure. The Mate
Oriented constraint forces selected surfaces or datum planes to face each
other, as shown in the left figure. The Align and Mate Oriented constraints
are similar to the Align and Mate Coincident constraints, respectively, except
that the selected references do not have to be coplanar.
You can use the Change Constraint Orientation
option in the dashboard
to convert the Align Oriented constraint into a Mate Oriented constraint and
vice versa. You can also double-click the Align constraint tag in the graphics
window and edit the constraint type to a Mate constraint, and vice versa.
Module 18 | Page 34
2009 PTC

and Mate Oriented
Scenario
Add an Align Oriented constraint to properly orient a component.
Align_Mate-Oriented
Task 1:
oriented.asm
nl
na
lU
se
2. Notice also the current shaft

orientation.

Fully Constrained.
Add an Align Oriented constraint to the SHAFT.PRT.
tio

Placement tab and clear the
Allow Assumptions check box.
The constraint STATUS is now
Edit the Constraint Type to
uc
a
Align and edit the Offset to

Oriented
.
Fo
r
Ed
4. Select the flat surface on

SHAFT.PRT and select the flat
front surface on BODY.PRT.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 35
nl
5. Notice that the SHAFT.PRT has

changed orientation and that the
constraint STATUS is again Fully
Constrained.
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
6. In the Placement tab, click Flip

to switch the Align Oriented
constraint to a Mate Oriented
constraint. Notice that the
shaft has flipped its orientation
direction.
Fo
r
7. In the Placement tab, edit the

Mate constraint back to Align
9. Notice that since ARM.PRT is

assembled to SHAFT.PRT, its
orientation updates accordingly.
Module 18 | Page 36
2009 PTC

Angle
Use Align and Mate Angle constraints to specify a rotation angle
between planes.
na
lU
se
nl

Angle include:
Planar surfaces
Datum planes
tio
The Align Angle Constraint
uc
a
The Mate Angle Constraint
Ed
Constraining Components using Align and Mate Angle
Fo
r
The Align and Mate Angle constraints enable you to specify a rotation angle
between planes. The Align Angle and Mate Angle constraints are only
available after a constraint that aligns axes or edges is created, or an Insert
constraint is created. The component then rotates about those aligned axes
or edges at an Angle Offset value that you specify.
option in the dashboard

You can use the Change Constraint Orientation
to convert the Align Angle constraint into a Mate Angle constraint and vice
versa. You can also double-click the Align constraint tag in the graphics
window and edit the constraint type to a Mate constraint, and vice versa.
Depending upon where you look in the interface, the Align Angle
and Mate Angle constraints are also displayed as Align and Mate
constraints with an Angle Offset specified as the Offset.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 37

and Mate Angle
Scenario
Add an Align Angle constraint to properly orient a component.
angle.asm
Align_Mate-Angle
Add an Align Angle constraint to the SHAFT.PRT.
Task 1:
nl
1. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT. Notice the constraint STATUS is

Fully Constrained.
na
lU
se
2. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and clear the Allow
Assumptions check box. The constraint STATUS is now Partially
Constrained.
Edit the Constraint Type to Align
.
Coincident
and edit the Offset to
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio

SHAFT.PRT and select the flat
front surface on BODY.PRT.
4. Notice the Offset has changed

automatically to Angle Offset,
there is now an angle value, and
that the constraint STATUS is
again Fully Constrained.
5. Edit the angle value to -30.
Module 18 | Page 38
2009 PTC
6. In the Placement tab, click Flip to

switch the Align Angle constraint
to a Mate Angle constraint.
Notice that the shaft has flipped
its orientation direction.
tio
na
lU
se
nl
7. In the Placement tab, edit the

Mate constraint back to Align
uc
a
9. Select SHAFT.PRT, right-click,

and select Edit. Notice the angle
value is an assembly dimension.
10. Edit the angle value to 45 and
.
Fo
r
Ed
click Regenerate
11. Select SHAFT.PRT, right-click,

and select Edit.
12. Edit the angle value to -45 and

click Regenerate
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 39
Constraining Components using the Automatic

Option
nl
O
na
lU
se
The system creates constraints

based on selections and
component location/orientation.
You can manually change the
constraint type or offset options.
You can drag partially
constrained components
between each constraint.
Use the Automatic option to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine

the constraint type based on selections and component
location/orientation.
Ed
uc
a
tio
Orientation Can Determine

Constraint Type Created
Automatically Creating a Mate

Constraint
Fo
r
Automatically Creating an
Align Constraint
Constraining Components using the Automatic Option

When you assemble a component, the default Constraint Type is the
Automatic option. With the Automatic option, the system automatically
determines the constraint type and offset that is created when you select a
reference pair. The following items influence the constraint type and offset
created:
The references selected The references you select can automatically
eliminate a particular constraint type that can be created.
The component's location In the upper figure, if the component is
located above the area it is to be assembled to when references are
selected, a Mate Offset constraint is created. If the component is located
along the side at approximately the same height as its desired final
placement location when references are selected, the system creates a
Mate Coincident constraint.
Module 18 | Page 40
2009 PTC
The component's orientation In the lower figures, when the component

is oriented in such a way that the selected references face the same
direction, the system automatically creates an Align constraint. When the
selected references face each other the system creates a Mate constraint.
For example, you can always go back and manually edit the constraint type,
from Mate to Align, or you can manually edit the offset option from Offset to
Coincident.
In between the creation of constraints, you can further reorient the component
to refine its position. This can help the system more accurately determine
the next constraint type and offset, or it may help you select the next set
of references easier. Of course, the created constraints dictate how the
component moves.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
When you select a reference pair, the system automatically creates a

constraint. At this point, the system waits for you to select a second reference
pair to create a second constraint. The system automatically keeps creating
new constraints until the component is Fully Constrained.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 41
PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using the

Automatic Option
Scenario
Use the Automatic option to assemble components.
automatic.asm
Automatic
from the
na
lU
se

component BODY.PRT and click
Open.
nl
1. Click Assemble
feature toolbar.
Use the Automatic option to assemble components.
Task 1:
3. Right-click and select Default

Constraint.
5. Click Assemble
uc
a
tio

component SHAFT.PRT and
click Open.
Fo
r
Ed
7. Reorient SHAFT.PRT
approximately. Notice the
Constraint Type is set to
Automatic.
8. Select the two surfaces to create

an Insert constraint.
Module 18 | Page 42
2009 PTC
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
11. Right-click the drag handle and

select Coincident.

a Mate constraint.
nl
9. Reorient SHAFT.PRT by pulling

it up and out of BODY.PRT if
necessary.
Ed

Placement tab and notice the
Insert and Mate constraints, as
well as the Fully Constrained
STATUS and Allow Assumptions.
.
Fo
r
14. Click Assemble

, select
COVER.PRT, and click Open.
15. Reorient COVER.PRT

approximately. Notice the
Constraint Type is set to
Automatic.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 43

a Mate constraint.
17. If necessary, right-click on
the drag handle and select
Coincident.

an Insert constraint.
20. Right-click and select New

Constraint.
na
lU
se
nl
19. Notice the constraint STATUS

is Fully Constrained but the
component orientation is not
correct.

another Insert constraint.
Ed
uc
a
tio
22. Notice the constraint STATUS

is Fully Constrained and the
orientation is correct.
Fo
r
Module 18 | Page 44
2009 PTC
Utilizing the Accessory Window

The accessory window enables you to manipulate the incoming
component individually to facilitate reference selection.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Accessory window uses:

Component placement
Data sharing
Sheetmetal forms
Toggle the accessory window on or off.
The accessory window can be docked
or undocked.
Docked Accessory Window

Model Tree
Fo
r
Ed
Viewing the Accessory Window
Utilizing the Accessory Window
When assembling components, you can use the accessory window. The
accessory window displays only the incoming model, enabling you to
manipulate the component individually to facilitate reference selection. You
can toggle the accessory window on or off using the Show In Separate
Window
instances:
icon. The accessory window can be used in the following
Component placement The accessory window can be particularly

beneficial if you are assembling a very small component into a very large
assembly.
Data sharing
Sheetmetal forms
When the accessory window is toggled on, you can choose whether or not
to display the incoming model in the graphics window by toggling the Show
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 45
In Assembly Window
icon. Of course, you can select references on
the incoming model in either the accessory window or the graphics window,
depending on where it is displayed.
The accessory window can be docked or undocked. If docked, it appears
within the Pro/ENGINEER graphics window, and always in front, preventing
lost windows. You can drag the window to a different location within the
graphics window or resize it like any other conventional window. When the
accessory window is docked, the model tree pane splits and displays the
incoming model's model tree at the lower portion. The accessory window
model tree supports layer tree functionality.
Accessory Window Config Options
nl
If the accessory window is undocked, the incoming model's model tree will
display in that window. The undocked accessory window model tree supports
layer tree functionality, also. You can undock the accessory window using a
configuration option.
na
lU
se
The following configuration options determine the accessory window

behavior:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
accessory_window_display Controls the display of the accessory

window. Options include:
docked Places the accessory window as a separate window within
undocked Places the accessory window as a separate window in
addition to the Pro/ENGINEER window. This option is equivalent to
the old separate window.
comp_assemble_start Sets the initial assembly placement behavior
when assembling a new component. Options include, but are not limited to:
default Displays the incoming model in the main graphics window
only.
constrain_in_window Displays the incoming model in the accessory
window only.
Module 18 | Page 46
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Utilizing the Accessory Window

Scenario
Use the accessory window to assemble the BOLT.PRT components.
Accessory_Window
Use the accessory window to assemble the BOLT.PRT

components.
na
lU
se
3. Notice the component is in the

main graphics window.
2. In the Open dialog box,

double-click BOLT.PRT.
nl
1. Click Assemble
Task 1:
accessory.asm
4. In the dashboard, click Show In

Separate Window
tio
5. Notice that BOLT.PRT is now in

both the graphics window and
the docked accessory window.
uc
a
6. Notice that the BOLT.PRT model

tree displays at the bottom of the
existing model tree pane.
Ed
7. In the accessory window, zoom

in on BOLT.PRT.
Fo
r
8. Reorient BOLT.PRT and select

the flat surface.
9. Select the flat PLATE.PRT

surface to create the Mate
constraint.
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 47
10. Select the shaft on BOLT.PRT.

11. Select the upper hole surface on
SHAFT.PRT to create the Insert
constraint.
nl
14. In the Open dialog box,

double-click BOLT.PRT.
na
lU
se
15. Notice that BOLT.PRT displays

in both the graphics window and
the docked accessory window.
13. Click Assemble
16. In the dashboard, click Show

to
In Assembly Window
toggle it off.
tio
17. Notice that BOLT.PRT now

only displays in the accessory
window.
uc
a

BOLT.PRT.
Fo
r
Ed
19. Select the flat PLATE.PRT

surface to create the Mate
constraint.
20. Select the shaft on BOLT.PRT.

21. Select the lower hole surface on
SHAFT.PRT to create the Insert
constraint.
Module 18 | Page 48
2009 PTC
22. In the dashboard, click Show

In Assembly Window
to
toggle it on.
23. In the dashboard, click Show In
to toggle
Separate Window
it off.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
2009 PTC
Module 18 | Page 49
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 18 | Page 50
2009 PTC
Assembling with Connections
19
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Many product designs include both static and dynamic components.

Pro/ENGINEER enables you to assemble dynamic components using several
connection types.
In this module, you learn how to assemble components using connections
and how to simulate motion.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Understand connection theory.
Drag connected components.
Assemble components using Slider, Pin, and Cylinder connections.
Analyze collision detection settings.
2009 PTC
Module 19 | Page 1
Understanding Connection Theory

A mechanical connection is a method of constraining
components so they form a joint. Joint connections determine
how a component can move within an assembly.
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Create mechanism connections that enable motion between components

in an assembly.
Joint connection examples:
Slider
Pin
Cylinder
uc
a
Assembly with Connections
Understanding Connection Theory
Fo
r
Ed
A mechanical connection is a method of constraining components so they

form a joint. Joint connection examples include Sliders, Pins, and Cylinders.
Creating a Joint connection is similar to creating Assembly constraints
between components. Joint connections enable you to create true-to-life
connections between components so you can simulate motion between
moving parts. For example, you can create a slider joint between an engine
cylinder and the piston head so the piston head can translate within the
cylinder.
Creating Connections
The procedure to create a Joint constraint is similar to the procedure to create
constraints between fixed assembled components. Use the following method
to create a Joint constraint.
Assemble a component into the assembly.

Click the Connections list in the dashboard.
Select the connection type.
Select the appropriate references.
You can use Constraints To Connections

existing constraints to connections.
Module 19 | Page 2
in the dashboard to convert
2009 PTC
Dragging Connected Components

You can drag assembly components through their range of
motion based on the current connections and constraints
applied.
nl
Drag components using Point

Drag.
You can create snapshots to
capture components' positions.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Dragging Assembly Components
Viewing a Snapshot
Viewing a Second Snapshot
Ed
Dragging Connected Components

One method of testing your assembly connections is to drag the assembly
through its range of motion. To drag an assembly, click Drag Components
Fo
r
and then click a part model. You can select edges, points, axes, datum
planes, or surfaces to initiate the dragging movement.
The components move according to the connections that have been applied.
The selected entity is always positioned as close as possible to the cursor
location while the rest of the components stay connected to each other.
To quit dragging, you can either middle-click to return the components to their
original position before dragging, or you can click to leave the components at
their current position. The default option when dragging components is Point
Drag, shown in the upper figure, although you can also Body Drag.
Creating Snapshots
After you move connected components to a desired position, you can create
snapshots of that particular location in the graphics window. Snapshots
enable you to return the assembly components to a particular position. You
can create multiple snapshots and quickly move the assembly to specific
positions by activating each snapshot.
2009 PTC
Module 19 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Dragging Connected Components

Scenario
Drag connected components and take snapshots.
Drag_Comps
3. Click to stop the motion.

Task 2:
na
lU
se
2. Move the cursor in a circular

motion to see the motion created
by the connections.
nl
1. Click Drag Components

from the main toolbar and
select the lower-right corner of
CRANK_4.PRT.
Drag connected components.
Task 1:
dragging_comps.asm
Create snapshots while dragging components.
tio
1. In the Drag dialog box, expand

the Snapshots area.
Ed
uc
a
2. Click the corner of

CRANK_4.PRT and move
the connected components until
ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended
to the left. Click again to stop the
motion.
3. In the Drag dialog box, click Take
Fo
r
Snapshot
4. Click the corner of

CRANK_4.PRT again and move
the connected components until
ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended
to the right. Click again to stop
the motion.
5. In the Drag dialog box, click Take
Snapshot
Module 19 | Page 4
2009 PTC
6. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot1 to activate it. Notice

that ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the left.
7. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot2 to activate it. Notice
that ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the right.
8. Click Close from the Drag dialog box.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
2009 PTC
Module 19 | Page 5
Assembling Components using the Slider

Connection
nl
O
na
lU
se
Axis Alignment
tio
References (constraint rules):

Axis Alignment to enable
translation along a single
axis.
Use axes or cylindrical
surfaces.
Rotation Reference to
constrain rotation around
the axis.
Use planes or planar
surfaces.
Examples include:
Elevator doors
Piston in a cylinder
Slider connections are used to enable translation along a single

axis.
Rotation Reference
uc
a
Assembling Components using the Slider Connection
Fo
r
Ed
Slider connections are used to enable translation along a single axis. For
example, an elevator door is representative of a Slider connection, as it slides
back and forth in one direction and is unable to rotate about any axis. A
piston in an engine is another example of a Slider connection. In the figures,
the hedge trimmer blade is yet another example of a Slider connection.
Slider connections require two constraint rules that limit their degrees of
freedom in a single direction. These two constraint rules are:
Axis Alignment The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as references

determine the axis of free translation.
Rotation Reference The datum planes or planar surfaces you select with
the axis alignment restrict all rotational movement.
Module 19 | Page 6
2009 PTC

Slider Connection
Scenario
Assemble components using the Slider connection.
slider_connection.asm
Slide_Connect
Assemble BLADE_2.PRT using a Slider connection.
1. Orient to the 3D orientation.

2. Click Assemble
nl
Task 1:
na
lU
se
3. In the Open dialog box, select BLADE_2.PRT, and click Open.

Connection from User Defined
to Slider
.
uc
a
tio
5. Select datum axis A_2 on

BLADE_2.PRT and datum axis
A_3 on HOUSING.PRT as the
Axis alignment of the Slider
connection.
Fo
r
Ed
6. Select datum plane RIGHT

on BLADE_2.PRT and datum
plane RIGHT on HOUSING.PRT
for the Rotation of the Slider
connection.

to
flip the component.
2009 PTC
Module 19 | Page 7

Axis Display
display.
and
to disable their
nl
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
12. Click Close from the Drag dialog

box.
11. Move the cursor to notice the

range of motion created by the
Slider connection. Click to place
BLADE_2.PRT.

BLADE_2.PRT.
Module 19 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Assembling Components using the Pin

Connection
nl
O
na
lU
se

Axis Alignment to enable
rotation about a single axis.
Use axes or cylindrical
surfaces
Translation Reference to
constrain translation along the
axis.
Use planes or planar surfaces
Examples include:
Door hinge
Crankshaft in an engine
Pin connections are used to enable rotation along a single axis

while constraining axial translation.
Translation Reference
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Axis Alignment
Assembling Components using the Pin Connection

Pin connections are used to enable rotation about a single axis. For example,
a hinge on a door uses a Pin connection. A crankshaft in an engine is
another example.
Pin connections require two constraints (rules) that limit their degrees of
freedom about a single axis. These two constraint rules are:
determine the axis of free rotation.
Translation Reference The datum planes or planar surfaces you select
with the axis alignment restrict translational movement in the axis direction.
2009 PTC
Module 19 | Page 9
PROCEDURE - Assembling Components using the Pin

Connection
Scenario
Assemble components using the Pin connection.
Pin_Connect
Assemble ROD_2_2.PRT using a Pin connection.
1. Click Assemble
nl
Task 1:
pin_connection.asm
na
lU
se

Connection from User Defined
.
to Pin
2. In the Open dialog box, select ROD_2_2.PRT, and click Open.
uc
a
tio
4. Select the small hole surface

on ROD_2_2.PRT and
the cylindrical surface on
BLADE_2_2.PRT as the Axis
alignment of the Pin connection.
Ed
5. Select the back side surface of

ROD_2_2.PRT and the front
surface of BLADE_2_2.PRT
for the Translation of the Pin
connection.
Fo
r
Module 19 | Page 10
2009 PTC

ROD_2_2.PRT.
8. Move the cursor to notice the
range of motion created by the
Pin connection. Also notice the
motion of BLADE_2_2.PRT due
to the Slider connection. Click to
place ROD_2_2.PRT.
nl
O
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
9. Click Close from the Drag dialog

box.
2009 PTC
Module 19 | Page 11
Assembling Components using the Cylinder

Connection
nl
O
Axis Alignment
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se

Axis Alignment to enable rotation
about a single axis.
Use axes or cylindrical surfaces.
Examples include:
Aligning a pen cap over a pen.
Connecting rod.
Assuming one end is defined
with a Pin connection.
Avoids overconstraining.
Cylinder connections are used to enable rotation along a single

axis with unconstrained axial translation.
Assembling Components using the Cylinder Connection
Fo
r
Cylinder connections are used to enable both rotation and translation about
a specific axis. For example, aligning a pen cap over a pen is a Cylinder
connection. While holding the pen cap aligned with the pen, you can rotate
the pen cap and slide it along the axis of the pen.
Cylinder connections require only one constraint rule that limits their degrees
of freedom about a specific axis. The constraint rule is:
determine the axis of free rotation and translation.
Cylinder connections are often used in situations in which you do not want to
overconstrain a component. In the hedge trimmer example, a Pin connection
between the connecting rod and the blade keeps the connecting rod from
sliding in and out of the journal. As a result, a Cylinder connection is suitable
to constrain the other end of the connecting rod to the crankshaft.
Module 19 | Page 12
2009 PTC

Cylinder Connection
Scenario
Assemble a component using the Cylinder connection.
cylinder_connect.asm
Cyl_Connect

ROD_2_3.PRT.
na
lU
se

Placement tab.
Click New Set.
Select the new Pin connection,
and edit its type to Cylinder
nl
Redefine ROD_2_3.PRT and add a Cylinder connection.
Task 1:
uc
a
tio
3. Select the large hole surface

on ROD_2_3.PRT and the
cylindrical journal surface on
CRANK_3.PRT as the Axis
alignment of the Cylinder
connection.
Fo
r
Ed
2009 PTC
Module 19 | Page 13
Analyzing Collision Detection Settings

Collision Detection enables you to check for interferences
between parts while dragging them.
nl
Global Collision Detection

Partial Collision Detection
Areas of interference display
reddish-pink
Ring message bell when colliding
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Areas of Interference While

Dragging
Interference Fixed
Ed
Analyzing Collision Detection Settings
Fo
r
Pro/ENGINEER has real-time collision detection, enabling you to check for

interferences between parts as you drag a mechanism assembly through
its range of motion. Collision detection, by default, is turned off when you
drag components in a mechanism assembly. However, you can enable two
different types of collision detection:
Global Collision Detection Checks for any kind of collision in the entire
assembly.
Partial Collision Detection You specify the components between which
to check for interference.
There is also an option to ring the Message Bell when a collision occurs
between components. The component areas that interfere with each other
display in reddish-pink, as shown in the upper figure. You can then fix the
interferences by modifying the models. In the lower figure, the housing has
been modified so the connecting rod no longer interferes.
To enable stop when colliding or push objects on
collision functionality, you must set the config.pro option
enable_advance_collision to yes.
Module 19 | Page 14
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Collision Detection Settings

Scenario
Analyze collision detection settings.
Collision_Detect
2. Orient to the 3D2 view

orientation.
na
lU
se
3. Zoom in on HOUSING_5.PRT.
nl
1. Select HOUSING_5.PRT and

click View > Display Style >
Transparent.
Analyze an assembly for interference by dragging its components.
Task 1:
collision_detect.asm
4. Click Tools > Assembly Settings > Collision Detection Settings

from the main menu.
uc
a
tio
5. In the Collision Detection Settings dialog box, select the Global

Collision Detection option and verify that the Ring Message Bell
when Colliding check box is selected.
Click OK.
Ed

and drag the components
by selecting the hex-shaped
geometry.
Fo
r
7. Notice the highlighted

interfering geometry. The
HOUSING_5.PRT is too short.
Click Close from the Drag dialog
box.
8. Select HOUSING_5.PRT, right-click, and select Activate.
9. In the graphics window, right-click to query and select Extrude 1.

Right-click and select Edit.
10. Edit the 51 dimension to 56 and click Regenerate
11. Activate COLLISION_DETECT.ASM.
2009 PTC
Module 19 | Page 15

and drag the components
by selecting the hex-shaped
geometry again. There is
no longer a collision, as the
interference has been fixed.
Click Close.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Module 19 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Exploding Assemblies
20
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Explode states enable you to capture assembly parts in various states of

assembly/disassembly. These states can be easily referenced when creating
drawings and assembly/disassembly procedures.
In this module, you learn how to create assembly explode states and create
explode lines between exploded components. You also learn how to animate
explode states.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Create and manage explode states.
Create explode lines between exploded components.
Animate explode states.
2009 PTC
Module 20 | Page 1
Creating and Managing Explode States
tio
nl
O
na
lU
se
Explode states can be used in

drawings.
Position components into desired
location.
Select motion type
Select movement reference
Move one component, many, or
with children
Toggle between exploded and
unexploded states.
Explode states enable you to easily save assembly/disassembly

views.
uc
a
Unexploded Assembly
Exploded Assembly
Creating and Managing Explode States
Fo
r
Ed
You can use explode states to quickly reposition components in 3-D space,
and save these assembly/disassembly views using the view manager
Explode tab. Explode states can be selected when placing a drawing view
or they can be used to create assembly/disassembly procedures. You can
toggle an explode state on or off, and you can create multiple explode states.
Specifying the Motion Type and Movement Reference
Before you can explode components from an assembly, you must specify the
Motion type and Movement Reference.
Motion type Specify the type of motion that a selected component will
follow. Motion types include:
Linearly moves the selected component.
Translate Component
This is the default motion type.
Rotate Component
Rotates the selected component about a
specified Movement Reference.
Copy Position Copies the exploded position from the selected
component to other components. This option is available in the Options
tab of the dashboard.
Module 20 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Toggle Explode Location

Toggles the placement location of
the selected component between its original location and its current
location. You can use this option to reset a component's position.
Movement Reference Specifies the reference to define the direction of
movement of the selected component. This reference is required when
rotating components, but it is optional for translating components if you
require a different direction than the three default directions. Available
reference types include all datum features, planar surfaces, edges, and
vertices.
You can also click View Plane

from the dashboard, which enables you
to explode components parallel to the screen in the assembly's current
orientation.
nl
Exploding Components
na
lU
se
Once the Motion type and Movement Reference have been defined, you
can select the components you wish to explode. There are three methods
available:
tio
Move one component Move a single component in an assembly or

sub-assembly by selecting it.
Move many components Press CTRL and select multiple components
to move them all at once.
Move with Children In the Options tab of the dashboard, you can select
the Move with Children check box. This option enables you to select a
component to explode, and move its children along with it.
uc
a
When you select a component, a coordinate system displays at that location.

You can cursor over any of the three axes and drag to explode the component
in that direction.
Fo
r
Ed
You can also specify the Motion increment of the component you are
exploding. The default Motion increment value is Smooth, meaning that the
components will explode smoothly and you can drop them at any relative
position. You can also increment values of 1, 5, or 10 from the drop-down
list, or you can type in your own increment value. The increment value is
in the same units as the assembly. For example, if the assembly units are
millimeters, then for an increment value of 10, the component will explode in
10 millimeter increments, snapping to each increment.
Additional Explode State Facts
When using the explode functionality, keep in mind the following:

If you explode a sub-assembly in the context of a higher-level assembly,
the system does not explode the components in the sub-assembly.
You do not lose the explode state when you unexplode an assembly. The
system retains the information so the components have the same explode
position if you explode again.
All assemblies have a Default Explode state, which the system creates
automatically from the defined component placement constraints.
Multiple occurrences of the same sub-assembly can have different explode
states.
2009 PTC
Module 20 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Creating and Managing Explode States

Scenario
Create and manage explode states.
explode.asm
Explode_States
Create explode state Exp0001.
na
lU
se
2. In the View Manager dialog box,

select the Explode tab.
Click New and press ENTER
to accept the default name.
Click Close.
nl

Task 1:
3. Notice the note in the graphics

window.
tio
4. Click View > Explode > Edit

Position from the main menu.
5. In the dashboard, verify that
is
uc
a
Translate Component
selected.
6. Select SHAFT.PRT.
Fo
r
Ed
7. Cursor over the X-axis and

drag upwards to explode the
component.
8. Select ARM.PRT.
9. Cursor over the Y-axis and
drag upwards to explode the
component.
Module 20 | Page 4
2009 PTC

Options tab and select the
Move with Children check box.
11. Select COVER.PRT, cursor over
the X-axis, and drag upwards.
Notice that the bolts explode with
it.
nl
na
lU
se
14. Select the front, planar surface

of BODY.PRT.

right-click and select Motion
Reference.
12. Select the pattern leader

BOLT.PRT, cursor over the
X-axis, and drag upwards to
explode all three bolt members.
15. Select PLATE.PRT, cursor over

the X-axis, and drag to the left.
16. In the Options tab, clear the

Move with Children check box.
tio
17. Select the References tab.
uc
a
18. Right-click the Movement

Reference and select Remove.
19. Click in the Components to
Move collector.
Ed
20. Select one BOLT.PRT, press

CTRL, and select the second
BOLT.PRT member.
Fo
r
21. Cursor over the X-axis, and drag

the bolts to the left.
2009 PTC
Module 20 | Page 5

the dashboard.
from

,
right-click Exp0001, and select
Save.
24. Click OK from the Save Display
Elements dialog box.
nl
25. Click Close from the view

manager.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Module 20 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Creating Explode Lines

Explode lines are used to denote how exploded components
align when the assembly is unexploded.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Create explode lines by specifying

references on two components.
Edit explode lines:
Extend or shorten lines
Add/Remove Jogs
Modify line style, font, or color.
Unexploded Assembly
Explode Lines in Exploded

Assembly
Ed
Creating Explode Lines
Fo
r
You can create cosmetic explode lines to show how exploded components
align when the assembly is unexploded. Explode lines automatically update
to changes in position made to the exploded components they reference.
Creating new explode lines or editing existing explode lines causes the
explode state to be modified, and you can save the modified explode state in
the view manager Explode tab.
You can create an explode line in an explode state by specifying a reference
on two different components. You can select surfaces, edges, or curves as
references on the components. The explode line is then created between the
two selected references and displays in the model tree as an Offset Line.
Explode lines are also known as Offset lines.
Editing Explode Lines

You can edit existing explode lines by selecting the explode line and clicking
Edit Explode Line
2009 PTC
from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard. You can

Module 20 | Page 7
also right-click and select Edit Explode Line. You can perform the following
edit operations on an explode line:
Edit the explode line length You can extend or shorten the ends of an
explode line by dragging the handle at the desired end.
Add Jogs Select the explode line location where you want to create
the jog, right-click, and select Add Jog. You can then drag the jog to its
desired location. You can delete the jog by right-clicking its handle and
selecting Remove Jog.
Modifying Explode Line Style
Removing Explode Lines
na
lU
se
nl
You can modify the style of existing explode lines by selecting the explode
line and either clicking Edit Line Styles from the Explode Lines tab in the
dashboard, or by right-clicking in the graphics window and selecting Modify
Line Style. You can modify the line style to be Hidden, Geometry, Leader,
Cut Plane, Phantom, or centerline. You can also modify the Line Font and
Line Color. You can always restore the default line style by selecting the
explode line and clicking Default Line Style from the Explode Lines tab
in the dashboard.
You can remove explode lines by selecting the explode line and then clicking
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Remove Explode Line

from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard.
You can also right-click and select Remove Explode Line. You can press
CTRL and select multiple explode lines at once.
Module 20 | Page 8
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Explode Lines

Scenario
Create explode lines between exploded components.
explode_lines.asm
Explode_Lines
Task 1:
Create offset lines between exploded components.
tio
na
lU
se

select the Explode tab.
Right-click Exp0001 and
select Explode.
Notice the note in the graphics
window.
Leave the view manager open.
nl

uc
a
3. Right-click Exp0001 and select

Edit Position.
4. Click Create Explode Line
Ed

Surface.
Fo
r
6. Zoom in and select the

surfaces on COVER_2.PRT
and ARM_2.PRT.
7. Click Apply from the Cosmetic

Offset Line dialog box to create
the explode line.
8. Select the inner hole surface on
COVER_2.PRT and the outer
surface on the corresponding
BOLT_2.PRT, and click Apply to
create the explode line.
9. Create explode lines for the other

two BOLT_2.PRT components.
2009 PTC
Module 20 | Page 9
nl
O
na
lU
se
11. Select the inner hole surface

on BODY_2.PRT and the outer
surface on SHAFT_2.PRT and
click Apply to create the explode
line.
10. Select the inner hole surface on

COVER_2.PRT and the outer
surface on the SHAFT_2.PRT
tip and click Apply to create the
explode line.
12. Select the upper bolt hole

surface on PLATE_2.PRT and
the corresponding outer surface
on BOLT_2.PRT, and click
Apply to create the explode line.
tio
13. Create another explode line for

the second plate bolt.
uc
a
14. Select the inner surface of

BODY_2.PRT.
Ed
15. Query select the back surface of

PLATE_2.PRT in approximately
the center and click Apply.
Fo
r
16. Click Close from the Cosmetic

Offset Line dialog box and click
from the
Complete Feature
dashboard.
Module 20 | Page 10
2009 PTC

Exp0001, select Save, and click
OK.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
18. Click Close.
2009 PTC
Module 20 | Page 11
Animating Explode States

You have the option of animating your explode states for both
exploding and unexploding operations.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Toggle animation on or off.

Options include:
Maximum seconds
Follow explode sequence
You can set default behavior.
Following the Explode Sequence
Ed
Not Following the Explode Sequence
Animating Explode States
Fo
r
You have the option of animating your explode states for both exploding and
unexploding operations. The system animates the movement of components
from their start to end positions in the explode state. To enable animation,
click View > Display Settings > Model Display from the main menu and
select the Enable check box under the Animation while exploding section.
You can also control the following options:
Maximum seconds Sets the duration of time the system takes to explode
or unexplode the assembly.
Follow explode sequence If enabled, this option causes the components
to explode or unexplode in the order they were moved when creating
the explode state, and following the drag motions you used. If this
option is de-selected, the system uses the shortest distance to move the
components, and all components are moved at once, regardless of the
order they were moved when creating the explode state.
Explode lines appear at the end of the animation when exploding, and display
until the end of the animation while unexploding.
Module 20 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Animated Explode State Config Options

The following configuration options determine the default animated explode
state behavior:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
animate_explode_states Controls whether explode states are animated.

This option is set to yes by default.
explode_animation_max_time Sets the default duration of time the
system takes to explode or unexplode the assembly.
2009 PTC
Module 20 | Page 13
PROCEDURE - Animating Explode States

Scenario
Animate an explode state in an assembly.
Explode_Animate
Task 1:
animate.asm
Animate an explode state in an assembly.
nl
O
na
lU
se
2. In the Animation while exploding

section of the Model Display
dialog box, notice that the
Enable check box is selected.
Type 10 as the value for
Maximum seconds.
Click Apply > OK.
1. Click View > Display Settings

> Model Display from the main
menu.
uc
a
tio

the Explode tab.
Right-click explode state
Exp0001 and select Explode.
4. Notice that all components begin

exploding at once.
Ed
5. Notice that the explode lines

appear at the end of the
sequence.
Fo
r
6. In the View Manager dialog

box, right-click Exp0001 and
select Explode to unexplode the
assembly.
7. Notice that all components

unexplode at once.
8. Notice that the explode lines
display until the end of the
sequence.
Module 20 | Page 14
2009 PTC
9. Click View > Display Settings >

Model Display.
10. In the Animation while exploding
section of the Model Display
dialog box, select the Follow
explode sequence check box.
Click Apply > OK.
nl
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
12. Notice that the components

explode in order.

right-click Exp0001 and select
Explode.
Ed
13. In the View Manager dialog

box, right-click Exp0001 and
select Explode to unexplode the
assembly.
14. Notice that all components
unexplode in order.
Fo
r
15. Click Close from the View

Manager dialog box.
2009 PTC
Module 20 | Page 15
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 20 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Drawing Layout and Views
21
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Drawings are used for documenting the production design of parts

and assembly models. They typically contain two-dimensional and
three-dimensional model views, as well as dimensions, notes, and Bills
of Materials. Drawings are frequently used in the manufacture of product
designs. This module focuses on the creation of drawings and the layout
of drawing views.
Objectives
uc
a
tio
There are two methods for creating drawings. In the first method, you
manually place views onto a drawing. In the second method, you use a
drawing template to automatically populate the drawing with predefined
information. Typically, a combination of these methods is used: manually
placing views on drawings that were started using a drawing template.
Fo
r
Ed

Analyze drawing concepts and theory, as well as basic 2-D orientation skills.
Understand the drawing ribbon user interface.
Create new drawings manually and apply formats.
Use the drawing tree.
Create new drawings using drawing templates.
Add drawing models and drawing sheets to a drawing.
Create, orient, and modify drawing views including general, projection,
detailed, and auxiliary.
Create assembly and exploded views as well as cross-section views.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 1
Analyzing Drawing Concepts and Theory

A drawing is often the final deliverable at a company and
contains parametric 2-D or 3-D views of a 3-D model.
nl
A drawing usually contains at

least:
Model views
Dimensions
Title block
A drawing is bi-directional.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Example of a Model
Example of a Drawing
Analyzing Drawing Concepts and Theory
Once a part or assembly has been modeled, it is usually necessary to

document that part or assembly by creating a 2-D drawing of it. Often,
a 2-D drawing is the final deliverable at a company. The 2-D drawing
usually contains parametric 2-D or 3-D views of the 3-D part or assembly,
dimensions, and a title block. The drawing may also contain notes, tables,
and further design information. Not every company requires that a drawing
be created of a model.
A drawing is bi-directional. If a change is made to a model, a drawing that
displays that model automatically updates to reflect that change. Conversely,
if a change is made to a model in the drawing, the model automatically
updates as well.
Module 21 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Analyzing Basic 2-D Orientation

Manipulate the 2-D orientation of your drawings in the
Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire graphics window.
nl
Keyboard/Mouse
Orientation:
Pan
Zoom
Wheel Zoom
Additional Orientation
options:
Refit
Change sheets
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Viewing a Drawing Sheet
Zooming in on a Drawing View
Zooming in on the Title Block
Ed
Orientation using Keyboard and Mouse Combinations
Fo
r
To view specific areas of a drawing, you can pan and zoom the drawing using
a combination of keyboard and mouse functions, as shown in the following
table.
Orientation
Pan
Zoom
+
Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function uses
the cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scroll
wheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using the
scroll wheel, as shown in the following table:
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 3
Zoom Level
Zoom
Fine Zoom
+
Additional Orientation Options
nl
Coarse Zoom
na
lU
se
In addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the following

additional drawing 2-D orientation options are available:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Refit
Refits the entire drawing sheet in the graphics window.
Change sheets You can change drawing sheets in a multi-sheet drawing.
The sheet numbers display under the graphics window as individual tabs.
To change sheets you can select the tab corresponding to the sheet you
wish to navigate to. You can also select the desired sheet number in the
drawing tree. Often your company's title block will display the drawing
sheet number in a multi-sheet drawing, as shown in the lower-right figure.
Module 21 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Understanding the Drawing Ribbon User Interface

The Drawing mode was reorganized with a ribbon-style user
interface.
nl
na
lU
se
Ribbon structure
Tabs contain groups of commands.
Can be customized.
The ribbon organizes and configures user-interface.

Tabs based on the current task.
Sets up selection scope.
Appropriate right-click options.
Drawing Ribbon
tio
Understanding the Drawing Ribbon User Interface Theory
uc
a
The Drawing mode has been reorganized into a ribbon-style user interface.
A cross between a tabbed dialog box and a toolbar, the ribbon appears
above the graphics window. The ribbon organizes and configures the user
interface by:
Fo
r
Ed
Organizing the current task into a series of tabs.

The tabs represent a task in the typical drawing creation workflow.
Each tab contains groups of icon commands.
Setting up the selection scope.
By default, you can only select items that pertain to the selected tab. For
example, you cannot select an annotation (detail item) when the Layout
tab (for drawing views) is active.
You can select out-of-context items by pressing the ALT key.
However, the available actions will be limited compared to what is
available within the appropriate tab.
The available selection filters correspond to the active tab.
The Drawing Tree updates to display only items that pertain to the
active tab.
Ribbon User Interface Structure

Within each tab in the ribbon, icon commands are organized into groups.
Depending on the available screen space, less common options may be
accessed by clicking a down arrow to reveal additional commands.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 5
Customizing the Ribbon User Interface
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
The ribbon user interface can be customized to control icon display and
placement. When in the Customize Screen function, right-click on ribbon
icons for the following options:
Icon display size Icons can be set to display as large or small.
Icon and text Commands can be displayed as a large or small icon with
text, icon only, or text only.
Command priority Commands can be reordered within their group to
place frequently used options in easy reach. However, you cannot move
commands between groups.
Module 21 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Creating New Drawings and Applying Formats
nl
O
Empty Drawing
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Create new drawings using

the New dialog box.
Specify the Default
Model.
Specify orientation.
Specify size.
Specify format
(optional).
A Format:
Contains 2-D items.
Is created in Format
mode.
Is applied to a drawing.
Add or change formats
.
using Sheet Setup
Your company can create customized formats that can be used

in new drawings.
Drawing with Format
Creating New Drawings Theory
Fo
r
Ed
You can create new drawings within Pro/ENGINEER either by clicking File >
New, or by clicking New , selecting the Drawing option, and then editing
the drawing Name. You must also specify whether to use a default template.
This topic focuses on drawing creation when a default template is not used.
You must specify the Default Model to be used in the drawing. The Default
Model is the model that is used in your drawing when you start placing views.
You can add additional models to the drawing at a later time. If you have
models open in Pro/ENGINEER when a new drawing is created, the model
that is in the active window at the time of drawing creation is automatically set
as the Default Model.
You must also specify the drawing Orientation, whether Portrait, Landscape,
or Variable. If you select Portrait or Landscape, you can choose between
numerous standard, predefined drawing sizes. If you select Variable, you
must specify the desired drawing size width and height, in units of either
inches or millimeters. A C size drawing is shown in the upper figure.
Using Drawing Formats

When creating a new drawing you must also decide whether a format is to be
used in the new drawing. A drawing format contains 2-D items that typically
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 7
include boundary lines, referencing marks, tables, and text. A format has an
extension of *.frm, and is created in Format mode. A format is then applied
to a drawing. Your company will likely have created customized formats
to be used, as they typically contain your company's logo, title block, and
tolerancing standards. In the lower figure, a C size drawing is shown with a
format having been applied.
If you specify a format during drawing creation you do not specify
an orientation or size, as these parameters are determined during
format creation and carry into the drawing.
Adding and Changing Formats
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can decide whether to add a format at the time of drawing creation or
at a later time. To add a format to a drawing after the drawing has been
created, you can either click Sheet Setup
from the Document group in
the Layout tab, or you can click File > Sheet Setup from the main menu. You
can also double-click the drawing size that is displayed along the bottom of
the graphics window. You can then select your desired format, or replace an
existing format with a different format.
Module 21 | Page 8
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating New Drawings and Applying

Formats
Scenario
Create a new drawing and apply different formats to it.
Applying_Formats
Create a new drawing and apply different formats to it.
Task 1:
Create New
na
lU
se
nl
1. Click New
In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type.
Edit the Name to new_drawing.
Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
2. In the New Drawing dialog box,

click Browse to specify the
Default Model.
Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT
and click Open.
Edit the Standard Size to A in
the drop-down list.
Click OK.
3. Notice the text below the sheet that displays the drawing scale, type,
name, and drawing size.
4. Click Sheet Setup
from the Document group in the Layout tab.
5. In the Sheet Setup dialog box, edit the Format from A Size to C Size
Click OK.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 9
6. Click File > Sheet Setup.
10. Zoom in on the title block.

.
11. Click Refit
nl
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
9. Notice that the text at the bottom

has updated again. Also notice
the new format which contains a
border and title block.
8. In the input window, type your

first initial, followed by your
surname, and press ENTER.
7. In the Sheet Setup dialog box,

click the C Size format to activate
the field. Click Browse from the
drop-down list.
In the Open dialog box, click
Working Directory.
Select c_format_generic.frm
and click Open.
Click OK.
Module 21 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Creating and Orienting General Views

A general view is usually the first view of a series to be created.
na
lU
se
nl
You can edit the following attributes

when creating or editing general
views:
View name
View type
View orientation
Model view name
uc
a
tio
General View Type
Another General View Type
Ed
Creating and Orienting General Views
Fo
r
When you create a drawing, the first view added to a drawing is a general
view. A general view is usually the first of a series of views to be created.
When you create or edit a general view in a drawing, the Drawing View dialog
box appears displaying the View Type category.
You can edit the following attributes of a general view in the View Type
category:
View name The view name displays in the drawing tree and when you
cursor over the view in the graphics window. It also displays in the Layer
tree when selecting the active layer object.
View type If there is more than one general view on the drawing, you
can edit the view type from general to a different view type. This option is
only available when editing an existing general drawing view.
View orientation Determines the orientation of the view in the drawing.
You can set the view orientation using model view names that are created
in the model itself. These are the same model views that are found in the
model's saved view list and view manager. A general view can be placed in
any orientation.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 11
PROCEDURE - Creating and Orienting General Views

Scenario
Create and orient general views.
general_views.drw
General_Views
Task 1:
Create a 2-D general view.
nl
na
lU
se
3. In the Drawing View dialog box,

edit the name to SHAFT_SIDE.
2. Click in the middle of the drawing

to place the view.
1. Click General
from the Model
Views group in the Layout tab.
tio
4. Notice the default view of the

model. Also notice the model
views available in the Drawing
View dialog box. These came
from the model.
uc
a

select Model view name FRONT,
and click Apply.
Fo
r
Ed
Click Repaint
.
Select Model view name LEFT
and click Apply.
Select Model view name
RIGHT and click OK.
6. De-select the SHAFT_SIDE
view.
Module 21 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Create a 3-D general view.
1. Right-click in the drawing and

select Insert General View.
2. Click in the upper-right of the
drawing to place the view.
3. In the Drawing View dialog
box, edit the name to
SHAFT_DEFAULT.
nl
4. Notice the model views available

in the Drawing View dialog box.
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se

select Model view name 3D, and
click Apply.
Fo
r

select Model view name Default
Orientation, and click OK.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 13
Utilizing the Drawing Tree

The drawing tree enables you to visualize and manipulate
drawing elements.
nl
Drawing Tree
Changes with Ribbon Tab
Select items
Right-click options
tio
na
lU
se
Drawing Tree Layout Tab
Drawing Tree Annotations Tab
uc
a
Drawing Tree Table Tab
Utilizing the Drawing Tree Theory
Fo
r
Ed
Drawing elements are shown in a hierarchical tree similar to the model tree.
The drawing tree changes its display to match the current drawing task,
based on the tab selected in the drawing ribbon. The drawing tree enables
you to visualize the items in the drawing, and also enables you to right-click
them for access to additional various options.
Keep in mind the following when working with the drawing tree:
The drawing tree appears above the model tree. Each can be
independently resized or collapsed.
The drawing tree or the model tree can be toggled to display the layer tree.
Module 21 | Page 14
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Utilizing the Drawing Tree

Scenario
Explore ways to utilize the drawing tree.
drawing_tree.drw
Drw_Tree
nl
na
lU
se
1. Select the Layout tab from the

drawing ribbon if necessary.
Notice that in the drawing tree
the active sheet is shown.
Also notice the views are
shown in the tree.
Navigate through the drawing, exploring the drawing tree.
Task 1:
The views in this drawing have been renamed for easy

recognition in the drawing tree.
2. Right-click FRONT and view the
available options.
Ed
uc
a
tio
3. Select Auxiliary to locate this

view.
Fo
r
4. Select the Table tab from the

drawing ribbon.
Notice the drawing tree
updates.
5. Select Table 3 to locate it.

Right-click Table 3 and view
the available options.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 15
6. Select the Annotate tab from the

drawing ribbon.
Notice the drawing tree
updates.
nl
O
na
lU
se
8. Select the HOLE_DIA dimension

to locate it.
Right-click and view the
available options for this
shown dimension.
7. Expand the FRONT node and

the Annotations node in the
drawing tree.
Notice the various shown and
erased dimensions.
uc
a
tio
9. Select the d21 dimension to

locate it.
available options for this
erased dimension.
Fo
r
Ed
10. Expand the RIGHT node and

the Datums node in the drawing
tree.
Notice the various shown and
erased axes.
11. Select the CYL axis to locate it.

available options for this axis.

Module 21 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Managing Drawing Sheets
nl
Move or Copy Sheet Dialog Box
na
lU
se
Move or Copy Sheet dialog box

Move sheets with the
option to copy
Sheet Setup dialog box
Specify Format
Change Size/Orientation
Sheet tabs
Located below drawing status
text
Select to activate sheet
Create/Delete
Reorder
Rename
You manipulate Sheets using sheet tabs and dialog boxes.
uc
a
tio
Sheet Setup Dialog Box
Sheet Tabs
Ed
Managing Drawing Sheets Theory
Fo
r
Drawings have at least one sheet. When additional sheets are created, you
use the sheet tabs and sheet dialog boxes to manage multiple sheets.
The most common sheet functions can be accessed using the sheet tabs
area, located below the drawing status text. Using the sheet tabs, you can:
Preview a sheet by placing the cursor over the tab.

Select a sheet tab to activate the desired sheet.
Create and Delete sheets.
Reorder the sheets by dragging a sheet tab.
Rename a sheet.
Right-click a sheet for additional options.
Within the Layout tab of the drawing ribbon, you can click Move/Copy
from the document group. The move or copy sheets dialog box
Sheets
enables you to:
Move the current sheet to the selected location.
Insert a copy of the current sheet to the selected location.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 17
Within the Layout tab of the drawing ribbon, you can click Sheet Setup
from the document group. The Sheet Setup dialog box enables you to:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Specify the drawing Format.

Change sheet Size.
Change sheet Orientation.
Module 21 | Page 18
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Managing Drawing Sheets

Scenario
Manipulate sheets in a drawing.
drawing_sheets.drw
Drw_Sheets
Task 1:
Use different tools to manipulate sheets in a drawing.
nl
na
lU
se
2. Notice the drawing tree updates

for this sheet.
1. Select the Sheet 1 sheet tab to

activate it if necessary.
3. Place the cursor over the Sheet

2 tab to view the thumbnail
preview.
tio

activate it.
Ed
uc
a
5. Notice the drawing tree updates

for this sheet.
Fo
r
6. Click New Sheet

.
Press ENTER to leave the
name blank.
Double-click the Sheet 3 sheet
tab, type NEW, and press
ENTER.
Drag the NEW sheet tab to
reorder it as sheet 2 of 3.
7. Double-click the Sheet 1 sheet
tab, type CYL, and press
ENTER.
8. Right-click the Sheet 2 sheet tab

and view the available options.
Select Rename, type ANG
and press ENTER.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 19
9. Select the NEW sheet tab to

activate it.
nl
O
na
lU
se

activate it.
Right-click and select Delete.
Click Yes.
10. From the Document Group in the

ribbon, click Move/Copy Sheets
.
Select ANG if necessary.
Select the Create a Copy
check box.
Click OK and press ENTER to
create Sheet 4.
12. Select the NEW sheet tab to

activate it.
Ed
uc
a
tio
13. From the Document Group in the

ribbon, click Sheet Setup
.
Select the current format to
activate the drop-down list.
Select Browse from the
drop-down list.
Select a.frm then click Open
and OK.
Click Remove All and Yes.
Fo
r
Module 21 | Page 20
2009 PTC
Adding Drawing Models

A drawing can contain views and other information of multiple
drawing models.
nl
Add or delete drawing models from

the drawing.
Set/Switch the active model.
The system adds information to the
drawing from the active model only.
tio
na
lU
se
Switching the Active Model
uc
a
Menu Manager
Different Models on Different

Drawing Sheets
Ed
Adding Drawing Models
Fo
r
When you create a drawing you typically specify the drawing model to
be used in the drawing. Views placed in the drawing are of this specified
drawing model. However, you can add additional drawing models to the
drawing. This enables drawing views and information from multiple models
to be captured in a single drawing.
The system adds information to the drawing from the active model. The active
model is displayed at the bottom of the graphics window and in the model tree.
You can switch between drawing models and set the active one using the
Set Active Model/Rep
icon from the model tree, by clicking Drawing
Models
from the Document group of the Layout tab in the drawing ribbon,
or by right-clicking a view of a drawing model that is not the active model and
selecting Set/Add Drawing Model. You can also double-click the active
component name at the bottom of the graphics window.
icon and subsequent menu manager

You must use the Drawing Models
to add new models, however. The lower-left figure displays the menu
manager. You must also delete drawing models from the drawing through the
view manager. You can only delete a drawing model if there are no views
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 21
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
using it, however, and each drawing must contain minimum one drawing
model.
Module 21 | Page 22
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Adding Drawing Models

Scenario
Add drawing models and sheets to a drawing.
drawing_models.drw
Drw_Models
2. Notice that the model tree

displays SHAFT.PRT.
na
lU
se
3. Click Drawing Models

from
the Document group of the
Layout tab.
nl
1. At the bottom of the graphics

window, notice that SHAFT is the
active model.
Add the CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT to the drawing.
Task 1:
4. In the menu manager, click Add

Model.
uc
a
tio
5. Select
CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT and
click Open. At the bottom of
the graphics window notice that
CYLINDER_BRACKET is now
the active model.
Ed
6. Notice that the

model tree displays
CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT.
7. Click New Sheet
Fo
r

Sheet number 2 is added to the
drawing. Notice the model name
in the title block.
9. Click General
from the Model
Views group in the Layout tab.
10. Click in the drawing to place the

general view.
select FRONT as the Model view
name and click OK.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 23
Task 2:
Add the ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT to the drawing.
2. In the menu manager, click Add Model.

3. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT and click Open. At the bottom of the
graphics window notice that ANGLE_GUIDE is now the active model
and that ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT displays in the model tree.
nl
na
lU
se
6. Click General
4. Click New Sheet

Sheet number 3 is added to the
drawing. Notice the model name
in the title block.
.
Task 3:
uc
a
tio
7. Click in the drawing to place the

general view and click OK.
Set a different active drawing model.
Fo
r
Ed
1. In the model tree, click Set

Active Model/Rep
and
select SHAFT.PRT > Master
Rep.
2. The SHAFT is now the active

model.
3. Click General
, click in the
drawing to place the general
view, and click OK.
5. In the menu manager, click Set Model > CYLINDER_BRACKET >

Done/Return.
Module 21 | Page 24
2009 PTC
Creating Projection Views

A Projection view Is an orthographic projection of another view's
geometry along a horizontal or vertical direction from the parent
view.
na
lU
se
nl
Projected view characteristics:

Child of view it is projected from
Orientation is 90 from parent view
Third angle or First angle
uc
a
tio
Example 3rd Angle Projected

Top View
Ed
Example 3rd Angle Projected Left View
Example General View
Creating Projection Views
Fo
r
A Projection view is an orthographic projection of another view's geometry

along a horizontal or vertical direction from the parent view. The orientation
of the projection view is always 90 from the parent view, and its scale is
dependent on the parent view. If the orientation of the parent view is updated,
the orientation of the child projection views also updates.
You can either insert projection views by clicking Projection

from the
Model Views group in the Layout tab, or by selecting a drawing view,
right-clicking, and selecting Insert Projection View. In either case, you
must specify the parent view from which the projection view projects. When
you create a projection view it is given a default name that is based on the
direction of projection.
The default projection type for projection views is third angle. If desired, the
projection type can be changed to first angle.
You can also project 3-D general views.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 25
PROCEDURE - Creating Projection Views

Scenario
Create projection views in a drawing.
projection_views.drw
Projection_Views
na
lU
se
2. Select the front view, move the

cursor up, and click to place
the new projection view. Notice
the yellow rectangle that snaps
to your cursor until you click to
place the view.
nl
1. Click Projection
from the
Model Views group of the Layout
tab.
Create two projection views on sheet 1.
Task 1:
3. Select the front view, right-click,

and select Insert Projection
View.
Task 2:
uc
a
tio
4. Move the cursor to the right and

click to place the new projection
view.
Create three projection views on sheet 3.
Ed

activate it.
Fo
r
2. Select the shaft_side drawing

view, right-click, and select
Insert Projection View.
3. Move the cursor up and click to
place the new projection view.
Module 21 | Page 26
2009 PTC
4. Select the shaft_side drawing

view, right-click, and select
Insert Projection View.
5. Move the cursor to the left and
click to place the second new
projection view.
nl
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
7. Move the cursor to the right

and click to place the third new
projection view.
6. Select the shaft_side view,

right-click, and select Insert
Projection View.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 27
Creating Cross-Section Views

You can add cross-sections to drawing views and edit their
Xhatching.
na
lU
se
nl
Cross-section views:
Use cross-sections from
the 3-D model.
Have Xhatching that can
be edited.
Enable you to add arrows
to a perpendicular view.
Flip material direction
Ed
uc
a
tio
Cross-Section Views Use 3-D Model

Cross Sections
Add Arrows to Perpendicular

View
Edit Xhatching
Fo
r
Creating Cross-Section Views
You can add cross-sections to drawing views using the Sections category of
the Drawing View dialog box. When you specify that you want to add a section
to a drawing view, a list of available cross-sections displays in a drop-down
list. This list of available cross-sections comes from the 3-D model itself.
You can only select valid cross-sections for a given drawing view. A valid
cross-section is one that is parallel to the screen when placed in the view.
A cross-section displays in a drawing view with a set of Xhatching. You can

edit the following attributes of the Xhatching lines.
Spacing For spacing, you can select either Half or Double from the
menu manger. Each time you select half or double the spacing between
Xhatching lines halves or doubles, respectively. You can also type a
spacing value for the Xhatching lines. In the upper image of the lower-right
figure, the spacing has been changed to a value of 0.15. In the lower
image, the spacing has been changed to a value of 0.6.
Module 21 | Page 28
2009 PTC
Angle For angle, you can select a Xhatching line angle in 30 or 45

degree increments between 0 and 150 degrees. You can also type an
angle value. In the lower image of the lower-right figure, the Xhatching line
angle has been modified from 45 degrees to 120 degrees.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
In addition to creating a section view, you can optionally add section arrows
to any view that is perpendicular to the section view. In the lower-left figure,
the arrows were added to the drawing view. The direction that the arrows
point indicates the direction of material to keep in the section view. You can
flip this material direction if desired.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 29
PROCEDURE - Creating Cross-Section Views

Scenario
Add a cross-section view to a drawing.
section_views.drw
Section_Views
Task 1:
Add cross-section A to a view in a drawing.
4. Click Close from the View

Manager.
to
tio

return to the drawing.
na
lU
se
3. Right-click section A and

select Visibility. Notice the
cross-section.
nl
and

select the Xsec tab.
1. In the model tree, right-click on

SHAFT.PRT and select Open.
uc
a
6. Select the lower, center,

shaft_side view. Right-click and
select Properties.
Ed

select the Sections category
and select the 2D cross-section
option.
Fo
r
Click Add Section

and
select A from the drop-down
list.
Click OK.
8. Click in the background to

de-select the view.
9. In the section view, select the
Xhatching, right-click, and select
Properties.

Spacing > Half > Done.
Module 21 | Page 30
2009 PTC
11. De-select the X-hatching.
12. Select the cross-section view,

right-click, and select Add
Arrows.
nl
na
lU
se
14. Select the arrows, right-click, and

select Flip Material Removal
Side.
13. Select the top projection view to

place the arrows.
tio
15. Right-click and select Flip Material Removal Side to flip the material
removal direction back.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 31
Creating Detailed Views

A Detailed view is a small portion of a model shown enlarged in
another view.
nl
Detailed view components:

Location on drawing
Sketched spline
View name
Scale
Xhatching (if applicable)
na
lU
se
Sketching the Spline
Resulting Spline Boundary
tio
Placed Detailed View
uc
a
Creating Detailed Views
Ed
A detailed view is a small portion of a model shown enlarged in another view.

A reference note and border is included on the parent view as part of the
detailed view setup. The orientation of the detailed view is the same as its
parent, but the detail view is typically assigned a much larger scale than
the parent view.
Fo
r
You must define the following when creating a detailed view:

Location Select a location on the drawing where the resulting detailed
view is to be placed. Like any other view, you can always move the drawing
view at a later time.
Spline Select a center point in an existing drawing view that you want
to enlarge in the detailed view. You must then sketch a spline around the
area of the view that you want enlarged in the resulting detailed view. You
do not have to worry about sketching a perfect shape because the spline
is automatically converted into a boundary shape. The default boundary
shape is a circle, although you can change the boundary to an ellipse,
Horizontal/Vertical ellipse, an ASME 94 Circle, or leave it as a spline. In the
lower-right figure, the boundary shape is a circle.
You may also define the following optional items when creating a detailed
view:
View name Provide a different detailed view name. The View name of
the detailed view is displayed in the detail note, as shown in the lower-right
Module 21 | Page 32
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
figure. The View name is also displayed under the detailed view, as shown
in the lower-left figure.
Scale You can specify the scale of the resulting detailed view.
Xhatching (if applicable) If you create a detailed view for a drawing view
that contains a cross-section, you can edit the Xhatching to something
different than the parent cross-section view if desired by selecting Det
Indep from the menu manager when editing the Xhatching properties. The
default detailed view Xhatching is governed by the parent.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 33
PROCEDURE - Creating Detailed Views

Scenario
Create a detailed view in a drawing.
detailed_views.drw
Detailed_Views
na
lU
se
2. In the section view, select the

center point for the detailed view.
nl
1. Click Detailed
from the
Model Views group in the Layout
tab.
Create a detailed view in a drawing.
Task 1:
Ed
uc
a
tio
3. Click points to create a spline

curve around the SHAFT.PRT
end. Do NOT close the spline
curve when sketching it. Instead,
leave a gap.
Fo
r
4. Middle-click to complete the

spline curve.
Module 21 | Page 34
2009 PTC
5. Select a point in the top left of the

drawing to place the detail view.
na
lU
se
8. Still pressing ALT, double-click

the 3.000 scale on the view, type
4, and press ENTER.
7. Press ALT and select the detailed

view note.
nl
6. Click in the background to

de-select the view.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
9. Click in an empty area of the

graphics window to de-select the
scale value.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 35
Creating Auxiliary Views
nl
O
na
lU
se
You can select the following

references:
Planar reference
Datum plane
Linear reference
Datum axis
Edge
Edit the View name.
Add optional arrows.
Single
Double
An auxiliary view is projected perpendicular to a selected planar

reference or projected along the direction of an axis.
An Auxiliary View
tio
Creating Auxiliary Views
Ed
uc
a
An Auxiliary view is a special type of projection view. Instead of being

projected orthogonal, the auxiliary view is projected perpendicular to a
selected planar reference (a datum plane), or projected along the direction
of an axis. The resulting auxiliary view can be moved only along its angle
of projection. In the figure, the datum plane is selected as the projection
reference.
Fo
r
You may also edit the View name to a more meaningful name, as well as
add projection arrows, as shown in the figure. The View name is displayed
when projection arrows are created. The projection arrows can also be
moved individually with respect to the auxiliary view. Projection arrows can
be displayed as either single or double arrows.
Module 21 | Page 36
2009 PTC
Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates
nl
O
Example of a Drawing Template
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Drawing Templates are

customizable:
Create templates that
complete a majority of the
initial drawing.
Additional items can be
added to drawing templates.
Other views
View options
Drawing formats
Drawing options
Drawing templates work in conjunction with the model's saved

views to automatically populate default drawing views.
Drawing Created using Template
Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates
Fo
r
Like part and assembly templates, a drawing template provides you with a
starting point to create your drawings. You use drawing templates when you
want to create a standardized drawing. Drawing templates can automatically
create views, set the desired view display and view options, display formats,
and show model dimensions based on the template. You can configure
Pro/ENGINEER to use a default drawing template when creating a new
drawing, or you can select a different one. A drawing template is shown
in the upper figure, while a drawing created using the drawing template
is shown in the lower figure.
The views created within a drawing that uses a template are determined from
the model's view orientations. You should consider drawing view orientations
when creating your models.
Drawing templates contain three basic types of information for creating new
drawings:
1.
The first type is basic information that makes up a drawing but is not
dependent on the drawing model, such as sheet size, notes, symbols,
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 37
formats, and so forth. This information is copied from the template into
the new drawing.
2. The second type is representative view symbols, which contain the
options used to configure drawing views and the actions that are
performed on that view. The instructions in the template are used to
build a new drawing that references a model to place various views in
specific orientations and view states.
3. The third type is a parametric note. Parametric notes are notes that
update to new drawing model parameters and dimension values. When
a drawing is created from a template, the parametric notes update with
the proper information from the models used in the drawing.
Drawing Template Uses
na
lU
se
nl
You can use drawing templates to define the layout of views, set view display,
define tables, place symbols and notes, show dimensions, and create snap
lines. A drawing template can also be customized with your company formats
and standards. This enables you to automatically create drawings in a
fraction of the time it would take to sketch them.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
For example, you can create a template for a machined part versus a cast
part. The machined part template could define the views that are typically
placed for machined part drawings, set the view display of each view (for
example, show hidden lines), place company standard machining notes, and
automatically create snap lines for placing dimensions.
Module 21 | Page 38
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating New Drawings using Drawing

Templates
Scenario
Create a new drawing using a drawing template.
cylinder_bracket.prt
Templates
Create a new drawing using the DRAWING_TEMPLATE.DRW

template.
na
lU
se
1. Rotate
CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT
to familiarize yourself with its
shape.
nl
Task 1:
uc
a
tio
3. Click New
In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type.
Edit the Name to new_drawing.
Verify that the Use default template check box is selected.
Click OK.
Fo
r
Ed
4. In the New Drawing dialog box,

notice that the Default Model
is CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT
because it is still in session.
You could browse and specify a
different Default Model.
5. Notice the Template specified is
drawing_template, as this is the
configured default template.
6. Click OK from the New Drawing
dialog box.
8. Zoom in on the title block.
9. Pan to the different drawing
views, zooming in and out as
desired.
10. Click Refit
2009 PTC
.
Module 21 | Page 39
11. Notice the three template view

names in the drawing tree.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Module 21 | Page 40
2009 PTC
Modifying Drawing Views
nl
O
na
lU
se
Operations include:
Move the view.
Lock view movement
Delete views.
Child views
Modify properties.
Scale
View display
Edit the sheet scale.
You can perform many operations on a drawing view to change

its display.
uc
a
tio
Modifying View Properties
Deleting Child Views
Ed
Editing the Sheet Scale
Modifying Drawing Views Theory
Fo
r
When a view is placed on a drawing, there are a variety of operations that

can be performed to change how the view displays. In most cases, you can
modify a view that has already been placed on a drawing. The following are
different types of operations that can be performed on views in a drawing.
Moving Views
By default, when views are placed on a drawing they cannot be moved. They
are locked to the drawing. You can unlock drawing views for movement in
the drawing by selecting a view, right-clicking, and toggling the Lock View
Movement option. The toggle for locking view movement is a system setting
rather than an individual drawing view setting. If one view is unlocked, all
views are unlocked.
Once views are unlocked, a drawing view can be moved according to any
parent/child relationships that exist between views. Since a general view has
no parent views, it can be moved anywhere on the drawing. When a general
view is moved, any child views move accordingly. A child view, on the other
hand, can only move according to the angle of projection from the parent view.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 41
Deleting Views
You can delete views from a drawing. All items associated with the deleted
drawing view including child views are also deleted. For example, if you
delete a general view that has three child projection views, the child projection
views must also be deleted. The system highlights child views that are to be
deleted, as shown in the lower-right figure.
Modifying Drawing View Properties

The following are two types of drawing view properties that can be modified:
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Scale Is modified in the Scale category of the Drawing View dialog box.
In most cases, the scale of a placed view is specified as the default scale
for the sheet, or the sheet scale. You can also define a custom scale for a
drawing view that makes it larger or smaller than the defined sheet scale. If
a custom scale is defined, it is listed under the drawing view, as shown in
the upper figure. Note that for some drawing views, such as a projection
view, you cannot specify a custom scale because the drawing view scale
is dependent upon its parent view.
View Display Is modified in the View Display category of the Drawing
View dialog box. Three view display options that can be modified include:
Display style Controls the display of the entire view. Options include
Follow Environment, Wireframe, Hidden, No Hidden, and Shading. The
Follow Environment display style may vary from company to company
depending upon how the default display style is defined. In the upper
figure, the display style was edited from No Hidden to Shading.
Tangent edges display style You can define how tangent edges
display within the drawing. Options include Default, None, Solid,
Dimmed, Centerline, and Phantom.
Colors come from For display styles other than shading, you can
define where the colors for the drawing view geometry lines come from.
The default option is that the colors are defined based on the drawing.
You can specify that the colors come from how they are defined in the
model.
Fo
r
Editing the Sheet Scale

You can also edit the sheet scale at the bottom of the graphics window. The
sheet scale value edits the scale of the active model only. When you edit the
sheet scale of the active model, any drawing views of that active model on
that sheet update their scale based on the new value. In the lower-left figure,
the sheet scale was increased from 1 to 1.75.
Module 21 | Page 42
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Modifying Drawing Views

Scenario
Modify views in a drawing.
Modifying_Views
Task 1:
modifying_views.drw
Modify the views on sheet 1 of the drawing.
nl
1. Select the front general view,

right-click, and de-select Lock
View Movement.
na
lU
se
2. With the front view still selected,

click and drag down and to
the left. Notice that the two
projection view children move
along with the general view
parent.
3. With the general front view still

selected, press CTRL and select
the two projection views.
tio
4. Right-click and select

Properties.
Ed
Task 2:
uc
a

edit the Display style to Hidden
and click OK.
Fo
r
1. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.

2. Click Set Active Model/Rep
> Master Rep.
and select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT
3. In the bottom left of the graphics window, double-click the scale, edit it
to 1.25, and press ENTER.
4. Click in the background to de-select the scale.
2-D views.
6. Right-click and select

Properties.
edit the Tangent edges display
style to Phantom and click OK.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 43
Task 3:

activate it.
nl
2. Select the top view and move it

further up in the drawing.
na
lU
se
3. Select the lower, center

shaft_side view, right-click,
and select Delete. The three
child projection views highlight in
purple boxes.
5. Click Undo
tio
4. Click Yes from the Confirmation

dialog box.
uc
a
6. Select the 3-D general

shaft_default view, right-click,
and select Properties.
Ed

select the Scale category, select
the Custom scale option, edit
the value to 2, and click Apply.
Fo
r
8. In the Drawing View dialog

box, select the View Display
category, edit the Display style to
Shading and click OK.
Module 21 | Page 44
2009 PTC
Creating Assembly and Exploded Views
uc
a
nl
O
tio
na
lU
se
Make an assembly the active

model to create assembly views.
All components included.
Display an assembly view in an
exploded state.
Views reference 3-D model
explode states.
Explode states can be edited
from the drawing.
Explode lines can be shown.
You can create a drawing that displays assembly views. You can
further modify an assembly view to display it in an exploded
state.
Exploded Assembly View
Ed
Assembly View
Creating Assembly Views
Fo
r
Similar to creating part drawings, you can also create assembly drawings
that display assembly views. When creating a new drawing, simply make
an assembly the default model or add it as a drawing model to an existing
drawing. With an assembly set as the active model you can add views of the
entire assembly without having to add each of its individual components.
If your company requires that assembly drawings display individual
components on different sheets, you must add each component as
a drawing model.
When placing an assembly view, you are prompted to select a combined
state. A combined state is a combination of various state representations
created in the 3-D model using the All tab of the view manager. For
example, you can create a combined state in the 3-D model that consists of
a specific orientation, a specific explode state, and a specific style state.
When the combined state is selected, the view displays with all three state
representations enabled. For this topic, you should specify no combined
state.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 45
Creating Assembly Exploded Views

Exploded views are used to illustrate assembly and disassembly (taking a
product apart). With exploded views, you can create customized drawings
based on 3-D models; these views can display information needed by
manufacturing personnel to produce your product, or they can be used as
a general reference.
nl
To display an assembly view in an exploded state, select the Explode

components in view check box in the View States category of the Drawing
View dialog box. You must then select the desired saved explode state or the
default exploded state previously created in the 3-D assembly model. You
can add an exploded view of an assembly without having to explode it in
Assembly mode. If an exploded view is edited on the drawing, the explode
state in the 3-D model is not affected. However, if the explode state is edited
in the 3-D model, the associated exploded drawing view updates.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Exploded views also typically contain explode lines, created in the 3-D
model. In addition, BOM Balloons and a table indexing the parts can also be
added to the drawing; this enables people to easily reference the component
information.
Module 21 | Page 46
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly and Exploded Views

Scenario
Create assembly and exploded views in a drawing.
Assembly_Exploded_Views
Create a new drawing from template and add an assembly view.

, select Drawing, edit the name to explode_view, and
1. Click New
click OK.
nl
Task 1:
Create New
na
lU
se
2. In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse, select VALVE.ASM,

and click Open.
Verify that Use template is specified, and that the template to be
used is drawing_template.
Click OK.
uc
a
tio
4. If necessary, double-click the

sheet scale value, edit it to 1,
and press ENTER.
Ed
5. Right-click and select Insert

General View.
Fo
r
6. Select No Combined State and

click OK.
7. Click near the upper-right corner
to place the view.
select Default Orientation as
the Model view name, and click
OK.
Task 2:
Insert a drawing sheet and add an exploded assembly view.
1. Click New Sheet
2. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname,
and press ENTER.
2009 PTC
Module 21 | Page 47
3. Right-click and select Insert

General View.
4. Select No Combined State and
click OK.
5. Click near the middle of the
drawing to place the view.
nl
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se

select the View States category.
Select the Explode
components in view check
box, and select Assembly
explode state EXP0001 from
the drop-down list.
Click OK.
7. Click Repaint

select 3D as the Model view
name, and click Apply.
Fo
r
Ed
Module 21 | Page 48
2009 PTC
Creating Drawing Annotations
22
nl
Module
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Drawing views alone are typically not sufficient to convey all the information
needed to manufacture a given model. In this module, you learn how to show
all the necessary detail that manufacturing needs to create production parts.
This information includes dimensions, axes, notes, Bill of Materials (BOM)
tables, and BOM Balloons.
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio

Analyze annotation concepts and types.
Show, erase, and delete annotations.
Clean up and manipulate dimensions.
Create driven dimensions, notes, and Bill of Materials.
Analyze drawing associativity.
Publish drawings.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 1
Analyzing Annotation Concepts and Types

You can add additional detail to drawing views to convey
information needed to manufacture the part or components of
the assembly.
na
lU
se
nl
Add the following

annotations to drawings:
Dimensions
Driving
Driven (Created)
Axes
Notes
Tables
Bills of Material
Ed
uc
a
tio
Viewing a BOM on a Drawing
Viewing Annotation Items on a Drawing
Fo
r
Analyzing Annotation Concepts and Types

You can add additional detail to drawing views in the form of annotations
to convey information needed to manufacture the part or components of
the assembly. There are numerous annotations you can add to a drawing,
including, but not limited to:
Dimensions Used to display measurements, distances, and depths
between specific geometric entities on a drawing view. You can add both
driving dimensions from the model, or create your own dimensions.
Axes Used to show the centers of holes or bolt circles.
Notes Add additional information to a drawing that may not be found in
dimensions.
Tables Used to show additional drawing information in tabular format.
Examples include names of optional components in an assembly, specific
dimension values for part numbers in a common drawing, and cam lift
values per degree.
BOM Used to show components in an assembly and their quantities.
Module 22 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Inserting a Bill of Materials Table

Bill of Materials tables can be used to detail the location and
number of parts included in the assembly for manufacturers.
BOM Table and Balloons
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
BOM tables are

associative.
Methods of creation:
Manually
Imported from file
BOM tables use repeat
regions.
You can show BOM
Balloons from a BOM
Table.
Inserting a Bill of Materials Table
Ed
Bill of Materials (BOM) tables can be used to detail the location and number
of parts included in the assembly for manufacturers.
Fo
r
BOM tables are typically created to be associative, so the table automatically

updates whenever you add or delete a part to the assembly. You can
create the tables manually or you can import them from a table file that was
previously created and saved. BOM tables are created with repeat regions. A
repeat region is a group of smart user-designated table cells that expand
or contract to accommodate the amount of data that the model currently
contains.
Showing BOM Balloons

You can also detail parts and assemblies with BOM balloons, which are
circular callouts in an assembly drawing that display components listed in
the BOM Table. As components are selected, the corresponding row in the
table highlights for easy identification. The BOM balloons are tied to the
bill of material table.
There are three different types of BOM balloons:
Simple Balloons that show only one report symbol, usually the index
number from the table.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 3
With Qty Balloons that are split to show the index number in one half
of the balloon circle and the quantity of the part used in the assembly in
the other half of the balloon circle.
Custom Enables you to specify a custom drawn symbol that you have
created and stored.
Once BOM balloons have been added to the drawing, you can move them to
their desired location. You can also automatically set the position and spacing
of the balloons using snap lines or stagger increment values by selecting a
balloon and either clicking Cleanup Balloons
from the Balloons group in
the Table tab, or right-clicking and selecting Cleanup BOM Balloons.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can also edit the balloon leader so it attaches to a different location on
the component it points to.
Module 22 | Page 4
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Inserting a Bill of Materials Table

Scenario
Insert a bill of materials table in a drawing and display the BOM balloons.
bom.drw
BOM
2. Click Table From File

the Table group.
from
nl
1. Select the Table tab from the

drawing ribbon.
Insert a bill of materials table in a drawing and display the BOM

balloons.
Task 1:
na
lU
se

bom_table.tbl and click Open.
tio
4. Click in the upper-right of the

drawing to place the table. Notice
that the assembly components
and their quantities are displayed
in the table.
from
uc
a
5. Click BOM Balloons

the Balloons group.
6. Select any numbered row in the

table.
Ed
7. Click Create Balloon > Show All

> Done from the menu manager.
Fo
r
8. Move the balloons as desired.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 5
Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations

Dimensions and other detail items created in a 3-D model can
be shown in drawings.
na
lU
se
nl
Show various types, based on tab

Context sensitive, based on
selection
Erase/Unerase
Delete
Show Model Annotations

Dialog Box
tio
Showing Axes and Dimensions
Showing Annotations Theory
uc
a
When you create a 3-D model, you simultaneously create various items
useful for annotating the model in a drawing, such as dimensions and axes.
Ed
When creating a 2-D drawing you can select which information from the
3-D model to show in the drawing:
Fo
r
Dimensions
Driving Dimension Annotation Elements
All Driving Dimensions or Strong Driving Dimensions
Driven Dimensions, Reference Dimensions, or Ordinate Dimensions
Geometric Tolerances
Notes
Surface Finishes
Symbols
Datums
Set Datum Planes, Set Datum Axes, or Set Datum Targets
Axes
The Show Model Annotations dialog box is context sensitive. You can control
which annotations display on the drawing and where they display based
on how items are selected:
Select a model from the model tree Indicates all the selected item types
for the model on the drawing. The items may appear in multiple views.
Module 22 | Page 6
2009 PTC
nl
Select features from the model tree Indicates the selected item types for
the selected features on the drawing. The items may appear in multiple
views.
Select a drawing view Indicates all the selected item types within a
particular drawing view.
Select features from a particular drawing view Indicates the selected
item types for the selected features on the drawing, within the view in
which the feature was selected. If an item is not appropriate to that view, it
does not display.
Select a component in a particular drawing view (Assembly Drawings only)
Indicates the selected item types for the selected component on the
drawing, within the view in which the component was selected. If an item is
not appropriate to that view, it does not display.
na
lU
se
All of the possible items that can be shown based on the selected tab and
selected items display in the drawing in a preview color. You can then select
or de-select items to show by using the dialog box or by selecting from the
drawing.
When dimensions are shown, the system automatically arranges
and spaces them apart. You can then adjust them further manually
or by using the Cleanup Dimensions dialog box.
Erasing and Deleting Annotations Theory
tio
If, at any point during drawing creation you decide that you no longer want
certain shown items, you can erase or delete them. The differences between
these two options are as follows:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Erase Temporarily removes the items from the display. The items are
shown grayed out in the drawing tree.
Erased items can be returned to the display by right-clicking and
selecting Unerase.
Delete Removes the items from the drawing.
Any item originating in the model is retained in the model, and can be
shown again.
Any item created in the drawing, such as dimensions or notes are
deleted and will need to be re-created.
To erase/delete items, you select them in the drawing, then right-click and
select Erase or Delete. You can select items to erase or delete using the
following methods:
Select an individual item.

Press CTRL and select multiple items.
Use a selection filter to quickly select desired items.
Select items from the drawing tree.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 7
PROCEDURE - Showing, Erasing, and Deleting

Annotations
Scenario
Show and erase detail items in a drawing.
Show_Erase
na
lU
se
2. Click Show Annotations

from the Insert group.
Select the Dimensions Tab
.
nl

drawing ribbon.
Show dimensions using different methods.
Task 1:
show_erase.drw
3. Select HOLE 2 from the model

tree.
Notice dimensions appear in
different views.
uc
a
tio
4. Select HOLE 2 from the top view.

Notice the dimensions now
only appear in this view.
Fo
r
Ed
5. Click Select All

and then
click Apply from the dialog box.
6. Select the front view.

To select a view, click within
the view boundary, but not
on model geometry.
Module 22 | Page 8
2009 PTC
7. Click Select All

.
Click OK from the dialog box.
Notice the dimensions from
both views are now shown.
Click the background to
de-select all selected items.
nl
na
lU
se

from the Insert group.
9. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT
from the model tree.
8. Select the Sheet 2 tab to view

sheet 2.
Erase, unerase, and delete dimensions.
uc
a
Task 2:
tio
Click Select All

.
De-select the d22 and d35
options from the dialog box
Fo
r
Ed
1. Press CTRL and select the 65

and 32.5 dimensions in the front
view.
Right-click and select Erase.
2. Specify Dimension as the

selection filter.
Drag to select all dimensions
in the top view.
Right-click and select Erase.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 9
4. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT
from the model tree.
Task 3:
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se

.
Notice the deleted dimensions
may be shown again.
Select d25 to show it again.
nl
3. Expand the Front view

Annotations branch in the
drawing tree.
Select d5 then right-click and
select Unerase.
select Delete.
select Delete.
Show datum axes using different methods.
Ed
1. Click the Sheet 3 tab to view

sheet 3.
.
Fo
r

Select the Datums Tab
3. Select the Front view.

Select axes A_4, A_5, and
A_6 from the dialog box.
Click Apply from the dialog
box.
4. Select the top view and click
Select All
Click OK.
Module 22 | Page 10
2009 PTC
Cleaning Up Dimensions
nl
na
lU
se
Functions include:
Offset dimensions in evenly
spaced increments.
Create breaks in witness lines.
Flip dimension arrows that do
not fit between witness lines.
Center dimensions between
witness lines.
Create snap lines.
Pro/ENGINEER can automatically arrange the display of selected

dimensions based on controls that you set.
Ed
uc
a
tio
The Clean Dimensions Dialog Box
Dimensions Before Cleanup
Dimensions After Cleanup
Fo
r
Cleaning Up Dimensions
You can use Pro/ENGINEER's clean dimensions functionality to automatically
perform the following tasks:
Clean dimensions by view, or by selecting individual dimensions. You

cannot clean angle or diameter dimensions.
Offset dimensions from edges or view boundaries.
Space dimensions in even increments.
Create breaks in witness lines where they intersect other witness lines
or draft entities.
Automatically flip arrows on dimensions when they do not fit between
witness lines.
Center dimensions between witness lines.
The lower-left figure displays dimensions before the cleanup process has
been performed, while the lower-right figure displays dimensions after the
cleanup process has been performed.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 11
Creating Snap Lines

When cleaning dimensions you have the option of creating snap lines with
the offset dimensions. Objects snap to these lines, which are created at
the specified offset value. The lower-right figure displays snap lines that
were created during the dimension cleanup process. Even after the cleanup
process has been performed, you can manipulate dimensions and snap
them to the displayed snap lines. There are two important points to know
about snap lines:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Snap lines do not display in a printed drawing.

You can delete snap lines after use.
Module 22 | Page 12
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Cleaning Up Dimensions

Scenario
Clean up dimensions in a drawing.
dim_clean-up.drw
Clean_Up
Task 1:
Clean up dimensions on sheet 1.
nl
na
lU
se
3. Accept all default options.

4. Click Apply > Close.
2. Select the front view,

right-click, and select Cleanup
Dimensions.

drawing ribbon.
5. Notice the snap lines that were

created, and that the dimensions
have snapped to these lines.
Task 2:
Clean up dimensions on sheet 2.
tio

activate it.
uc
a

and front views.
Ed
3. Click Cleanup Dimensions

from the Arrange group in the
Annotate tab.
Fo
r
4. In the Clean Dimensions dialog

box, edit the Offset to 0.625.
Edit the Increment to 0.5.
Clear the Create Snap Lines
check box.
Click Apply > Close.
5. Notice that angle and diameter

dimensions are not affected by
the dimension cleanup process.

2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 13
Manipulating Dimensions
When dimensions are placed on a drawing, they typically must
be modified in some way either for clarity or so they adhere to
your company's drawing standards.
nl
Dimensions can be
manipulated in the following
ways:
Move (handles)
Align Dimensions
Flip Arrows
Move Item to View
Edit Attachment
tio
na
lU
se
Flipping Arrows
uc
a
Dimension Move Handles
Manipulating Dimensions
Ed
You can manually manipulate a dimension or dimensions to display them in

the desired location. The following operations can be manually performed
on dimensions:
Fo
r
Move dimensions Select a dimension and move it to a different location

of the drawing view. Each dimension, when selected, displays a series of
move handles, as shown in the lower figure. Clicking and dragging the
different move handles yields different move results. The following move
options are available:
Move Dimension and Text Use the handle circled in blue in the lower
figure to move both the dimension and the dimension text.
Move Text Use either handle circled in green in the lower figure to
move just the dimension text.
Move Dimension Use the handle circled in yellow in the lower figure
at either arrow tip to move the dimension.
Move Witness Line Use the handle circled in orange in the lower
figure to move the witness line. This handle is the one at the end of the
witness line side that touches the model geometry.
Align Dimensions You can select multiple dimensions including
linear, radial, and angular, and align them to one another. The selected
Module 22 | Page 14
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
dimensions align to the first dimension selected. Once the dimensions are
selected, you can either right-click and select Align Dimensions, or you
can click Align Dimensions
from the Arrange group in the Annotate
tab.
Flip Arrows You can flip arrows by right-clicking and selecting Flip
Arrows, or you can right-click while dragging a dimension to toggle through
the different arrow flipping options. For radius dimensions there are four
different flip options available, for diameter dimensions there are three
different flip options available, and for linear dimensions there are two
different flip options available. In the upper figure you can view all the
available arrow flipping options for radius dimensions.
Move Item to View Move dimensions from one drawing view to another.
You can select the item to move, then either right-click and select Move
from the Arrange group in the
Item to View, or click Move to View
Annotate tab.
Edit Attachment Specify a new attachment position for certain
dimensions, a radius dimension, for example. The available new
attachment positions highlight in all drawing views and enable you to select
a new surface or edge. To edit the attachment, select the dimension, then
right-click and select Edit Attachment.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 15
PROCEDURE - Manipulating Dimensions

Scenario
Experiment with the different dimension manipulation options.
manipulate_dims.drw
Manipulate_Dims
Task 1:
Manipulate dimensions in a drawing.
nl
O
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
2. In the top view, select the 51

dimension.
Click and drag the handle at
the center of the dimension
text shown in the top figure to
move both the dimension and
text.
Click and drag either the left
or right handle around the
text shown in the top figure to
move the text up or down.
Click and drag either handle at
the arrow head tips shown in
the middle and lower figures to
move the entire dimension left
or right.
Click and drag the left handle
at the end of the bottom
witness line shown in the lower
figure to move the witness line
until it no longer touches the
model.

drawing ribbon.
3. With the 51 dimension still

selected, right-click and select
Flip Arrows as shown.
4. Right-click and select Flip
Arrows to flip them back.
Module 22 | Page 16
2009 PTC
5. With the 51 dimension still

selected, press CTRL and select
the 33 dimension.
6. Right-click and select Align
Dimensions.
nl
na
lU
se
9. Click and drag the far left handle

to move the dimension and text.
You can also click and drag the
dimension itself.
8. In the top view, select the 12.65

diameter dimension.
7. Move the dimensions so they are

properly centered between the
other two dimensions.
10. Click and drag either of the

handles around the text to move
just the text left or right.
tio

Arrows.
uc
a
12. In the front view, select the 12.65

diameter dimension.
Ed
13. Click Move to View

from the
Arrange group in the Annotate
tab.
14. Select the top view.
Fo
r
15. In the front view, select the R22

dimension.
Arrows.

Arrows two more times.
18. Move the dimension and text
upward until it snaps to the snap
line.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 17
Creating Driven Dimensions
nl
O
Created Dimensions versus
Shown Dimensions
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Driven dimension types include:

Linear
Angular
Radial/Diameter
Point-Point
Add additional text:
Prefix
Postfix
You can create additional dimensions within a drawing as

needed if a dimension is not available to be shown or as
company standards dictate.
Ed
Viewing Created Dimension Types
Fo
r
Creating Driven Dimensions

A driven dimension is created by the user. This type of dimension reports a
value based upon the references selected when the dimension is created.
That is, the dimension value is driven by the geometry selected, and therefore
it is not possible to modify the value of a driven dimension. A driven dimension
does not pass back to the model; it appears only within the drawing. A
created dimension displays in the drawing tree differently than that of a shown
dimension. In the right figure, the dimensions in the front view are created
dimensions, while the dimensions in the top view are shown dimensions.
You can create a Standard driven dimension using Dimension New

References
from the Insert group in the Annotate tab, or by right-clicking
and selecting Dimension - New References. The system creates a
dimension based upon one or two selected references similar to how you
create dimensions in Sketcher. The dimension's witness lines automatically
clip to their selected references.
Module 22 | Page 18
2009 PTC
Driven Dimension Types

Standard driven dimension types include linear, angular, radial, diameter, or
point-point dimensions.
When creating a driven dimension, you can select an edge, edge and point,
two points, or a vertex. You can further filter what entities the dimension
attaches to using the following attach type menu commands in the menu
manager:
na
lU
se
nl
On Entity Attaches the dimension to the entity at the pick point,

according to the rules of creating regular dimensions.
On Surface Attaches the dimension to the location selected on a surface.
Midpoint Attaches the dimension to the midpoint of the selected entity.
Center Attaches the dimension to the center of a circular edge. Circular
edges include circular geometry such as holes, rounds, curves, and
surfaces, and circular draft entities.
Intersect Attaches the dimension to the closest intersection point of
two selected entities.
Make Line References the current X and Y-axes in the orientation of
the model view.
tio
Depending upon the selected references, you may have to further specify the
type of dimension to be created. For example, you may be asked to specify
whether the dimension you create is to be Horizontal, Vertical, Slanted,
Parallel, or Normal to the selected references. If your selected references
are arcs or circles, you must specify whether the dimension is to be created
between the arc Centers, Tangent, or Concentric.
uc
a
Adding Prefix and Postfix Text
Fo
r
Ed
You can add additional text to a dimension. Text can be added as a prefix or
a postfix to the dimension value. For example, if a radius dimension is typical
of all radii on the part, you can add the postfix TYP to the dimension.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 19
PROCEDURE - Creating Driven Dimensions

Scenario
Create a driven dimension in a drawing.
driven_dims.drw
Driven_Dims
Task 1:
Create a driven dimension in a drawing.
nl
tio
4. Select the unwanted 14

dimension, right-click, and
select Properties.
na
lU
se
3. Notice the 14 dimension that

locates the holes from the center
of the model. Manufacturing
requires a dimension from the
model edge.
2. Navigate to the top view in sheet

1.

drawing ribbon.
Ed
uc
a
5. In the Dimension Properties

dialog box, select the Display
tab.
In the Postfix field, type REF.
Click OK.
Fo
r
You could also erase or

delete the dimension rather
than making it a reference
dimension.
6. Click Dimension New

References
from the Insert
group.
7. Select the right edge of the block

and select the hole edge.
Module 22 | Page 20
2009 PTC
8. Middle-click to place the 19

dimension.
9. Click Center from the menu
manager.
nl
O
tio
na
lU
se
11. In the drawing tree, expand the

Annotations node of the top
drawing view.
Select dimension ad55 if
necessary.
Notice that both the dimension
format and symbol are
different.
10. Click Return from the menu

manager.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 21
Inserting Notes
nl
Note with No Leader
na
lU
se
Note types include:

No Leader
With Leader
ISO Leader
On Item
Offset
Specify Attach Type:
On Entity
On Surface
Free Point
Midpoint
Intersect
You can insert notes on a drawing with or without leaders that

can contain dimensions.
Inserting Notes
tio
Note with a Leader
uc
a
You can insert notes on a drawing to convey additional information. For

example, you can insert a note stating that all sharp edges must be broken,
as shown in the upper-right figure.
No Leader Creates a free note.
With Leader Creates a note with a leader.
ISO Leader Creates a note with an ISO leader.
On Item Creates a note directly attached to an edge, surface, or datum
point.
Offset Creates a note relative to a detail entity. If the detail entity is
moved, the note moves with it.
Notes can be created horizontally, vertically, or at an angle, and you can
specify the justification as Left, Center, or Right.
Fo
r
Ed
The following types of notes can be inserted:
When you specify that the note has a leader, the following leader attach
types are available:
On Entity Attaches the leader to selected geometry in a drawing view.
On Surface Attaches the leader to a selected location on the surface of
a drawing view.
Free Point Attaches the leader to a location on the screen that you select.
Midpoint Attaches the leader to the midpoint of a specified entity.
Module 22 | Page 22
2009 PTC
Intersect Attaches the leader to the intersection of two entities.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can also specify what the attach point of the leader looks like. Options
include arrow head, dot, filled dot, no arrow, slash, integral, box, filled box,
double arrow, and target. In the lower-right figure, the note was created with
an arrow head leader.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 23
PROCEDURE - Inserting Notes

Scenario
Insert notes in a drawing.
notes.drw
Insert_Notes
Task 1:
Insert notes in a drawing.
na
lU
se
3. In the menu manager, click With

Leader > Make Note > On
Surface.
nl
from the Insert
2. Click Note
group.

drawing ribbon.
4. Select the cylindrical cut on the

3-D view.
tio
5. Click Done from the menu

manager.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
6. Click on the drawing to specify

the location for the note.
7. In the input window, type

CYLINDER SURFACE.
8. Press ENTER twice to complete

the note.
Module 22 | Page 24
2009 PTC

activate it.
10. In the menu manager, click No
Leader > Make Note.
11. Click below the 3-D view to
specify the note location.
12. In the input window, type BREAK
ALL SHARP EDGES.
nl
O
14. Click Done/Return from the

menu manager.
13. Press ENTER twice to complete

the note.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 25
Analyzing Drawing Associativity
nl
O
na
lU
se
Examples of drawing associativity

include:
BOM tables update based
on added/removed assembly
components.
Drawing views and shown
dimensions update based on
model modifications.
A modified shown drawing
dimension automatically
updates in the model.
Due to Pro/ENGINEER's bi-directional associativity, a change

made to a model automatically updates in a drawing and vice
versa.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
BOM and Drawing View

Associativity
Model and Drawing Associativity
Analyzing Drawing Associativity

Due to Pro/ENGINEER's bi-directional associativity, a change made to a
model automatically updates in a drawing and vice versa. Examples of
drawing associativity include the following:
If components are added or removed from an assembly, the BOM table in
the assembly drawing automatically updates to reflect the new quantities.
If a dimension is modified in a model, the matching shown drawing
dimension is automatically updated along with the drawing view geometry.
If a shown drawing dimension is modified, the dimension in the model as
well as its geometry updates automatically.
Depending on your Pro/ENGINEER settings, it may be necessary to use
from the Update group of the Review tab to refresh the
Update Sheets
display of all views in the active drawing sheet in order to see a change made
Module 22 | Page 26
2009 PTC
at the model level. You can press CTRL and select multiple tabs across the
then causes all
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
bottom of the graphics window. Clicking Update Sheets

selected drawing sheets' views to refresh.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 27
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Drawing Associativity

Scenario
Experiment with drawing associativity.
Drw_Associativity
Update the pattern member quantity in VALVE.ASM to view the

drawing associativity.
nl
1. Notice in the BOM table that the BOLT.PRT quantity is 6.
Task 1:
associativity.drw
2. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1 of BOLT.PRT and notice that

there are 4 pattern members.
na
lU
se
3. In the model tree, right-click VALVE.ASM and select Open.
Click Regenerate
tio

COVER.PRT.
Right-click Pattern (Hole) and
select Edit.
Zoom in and edit the number
of pattern members from 4 to
3.
.
uc
a
5. Click Window >

ASSOCIATIVITY.DRW to
Ed
6. Select the Review tab from the

drawing ribbon.
Fo
r
7. Press CTRL and select Sheet 1,

Sheet 2, and Sheet 3 from the
sheet tabs area.
8. Click Update Sheets

the Update group.
from
9. Notice that the BOM quantity of

BOLT.PRT has updated and that
the view has changed as well.
Module 22 | Page 28
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Edit the dimension length to view the associativity in the drawing

geometry and model.

activate it.
2. In the front view, select the 76
dimension.
3. Double-click the 76 dimension
and edit it to 102.
nl
O
5. Notice that the drawing view

geometry has updated.
4. Click Regenerate Model

from the Update group.
na
lU
se

ARM.PRT and select Open.
7. Right-click Protrusion id 21 and

select Edit.
8. Edit the length from 102 to 84.
.
tio
9. Click Regenerate
uc
a
10. Click Window >

ASSOCIATIVITY.DRW to
Fo
r
Ed
11. Notice that the dimension and

drawing view geometry have
updated to the new length value.
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 29
Publishing Drawings
You can select the Publish tab in the drawing ribbon to create
a hard copy deliverable of your drawing.
na
lU
se
nl
Send the drawing to a

printer or plotter.
Export the drawing to a
different electronic format.
You can print preview the
drawing.
uc
a
tio
Previewing the Drawing
Ed
Publish Group in the Drawing Ribbon
Publishing Drawings
Fo
r
To create a hard copy deliverable of your drawing, you can select the Publish
tab in the drawing ribbon. When the Publish tab is selected, the Navigator
pane is automatically closed. You can then select the Print/Plot option to
send the drawing to a printer or plotter.
When you select another tab in the drawing ribbon, the Navigator
pane is automatically opened.
You can also export the drawing to one of the following electronic file formats:
DXF
PDF
Medusa
IGES
STEP
DWG
Stheno
SET
CGM
TIFF
Module 22 | Page 30
2009 PTC
Of course, any of these exported file formats can also be sent to a printer to
generate a hard copy.
Regardless of the publish method specified for output, you can preview what
the result will look like. Print Preview creates an accurate preview of the
selected output type. It takes into account pen table mapping, line styles, line
priorities, printer margins, and other settings. To preview the output you can
click Preview
from the Publish group.
You can also modify the default settings for the publish option specified using
icon in the Publish group.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
the Settings
2009 PTC
Module 22 | Page 31
PROCEDURE - Publishing Drawings

Scenario
Experiment with publishing drawings.
Publish_Drawings
Task 1:
publish.drw
Experiment with publishing drawings.
4. Click Close Preview

the Publish group.
from the
na
lU
se
3. Click Preview
Publish group.
nl
2. Notice that the Navigator pane

automatically collapsed.
1. Select the Publish tab in the

drawing ribbon.
from
5. Select the PDF publish option.

.
6. Click Settings
uc
a
tio
7. In the PDF Export Settings dialog box, select Current for the Sheets
to be exported.
Clear the Open file in Acrobat Reader check box.
Click OK.
8. Click Export
from the Publish group.
Ed
9. In the Save a Copy dialog box, accept the defaults and click OK.
10. Select the TIFF publish option.
Fo
r
11. Click Export
12. In the Save a Copy dialog box, accept the defaults and click OK.
13. Click Yes from the Confirmation dialog box.
Module 22 | Page 32
2009 PTC
Module
23
O
nl
Using Layers
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Layers provide a means of organizing model items, such as features,

datum planes, parts in an assembly, and even other layers, enabling you to
perform operations on those items collectively. Layers enable you to simplify
geometry selection by temporarily hiding or displaying specific model features
or assembly components in the graphics window. Layers can also be used to
perform actions, such as suppressing all the items in a layer at once.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Understand layers.
Create and manage layers.
Create layer states.
Utilize layers in part models and assembly models.
2009 PTC
Module 23 | Page 1
Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize
features, components, and even other layers.
na
lU
se
nl
Managed in layer tree

Uses include:
Collectively perform operations
Hide/Unhide
Select
Model management
Layer types include:
Default
Automatic
User-created
uc
a
tio
Viewing the Layer Tree
Ed
Hiding Items using Layers
What is a Layer?
Fo
r
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, parts in

an assembly, and even other layers. You can create as many layers as you
need and associate items with more than one layer.
Layer Uses
A layer enables you to collectively perform operations on items in a layer.

Layers are most often used from a model management standpoint to control
the amount of information displayed in the graphics window. This helps you
to more easily perform the desired task at hand.
The two most common operations performed to items on a layer include:
Hiding and Unhiding Layers You can hide and unhide layers in parts
and assemblies. This in turn hides or unhides the items on the layer. In
the bottom figure the datum axes layer has just been hidden, and thus you
cannot see any datum axes on the model.
Hiding items on a layer may appear to be similar to suppressing those
same items. However, there are significant differences:
Module 23 | Page 2
2009 PTC
nl
When you suppress an item it is removed from the regeneration cycle

of the model, whereas hiding an item just removes it from the graphics
window.
A hidden item is still included in Pro/ENGINEER calculations such
as mass properties analyses. A suppressed item is not included in
calculations.
Selecting Items on the Layer Layers provide you with a means to easily
select multiple items, instead of having to select them individually. While
individual selection may appeal to you, if you need to select 82 out of 100
part axes, then you can understand that mass selection is beneficial and
saves time.
Once the items in a layer are selected you can perform operations on them.
Typical operations include deleting those items or suppressing/resuming
them. However, you could also edit their display or add them to a simplified
representation.
The Layer Tree
na
lU
se
You use the layer tree to add items to layers and perform operations on
layers. You can access the layer tree by clicking Layers
from the main
toolbar. This turns the layer tree on. Clicking the icon again turns the layer
Layer Types
tio
tree off. You can also click Show

from the top of the model tree and
select Layer Tree, or you can click View > Layers from the main menu to
toggle the layer tree on and off. The top figure shows the layer tree.
uc
a
There are three different types of layers that can be created in a model:
Fo
r
Ed
Default Layers can be included in part and assembly templates. If

you use part and assembly templates containing default layers at your
company, Pro/ENGINEER automatically associates different features of
a model to specific default layers. Using default layers also causes all
parts to have the same initial set of default layers. This enables you to use
cascading layer control at the assembly level because each model has
layers of the same name.
Automatic When you hide items in the model tree, those hidden items
are automatically added to the Hidden Items Layer.
User-Created You can create your own layers in a model and add items
manually to them.
2009 PTC
Module 23 | Page 3
Creating and Managing Layers
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
Layer Properties:
Name
Contents
Rules
Different icons for layers
with/without rules
Set the Active Layer
Status
Save
Reset
Warning
You can create layers manually by naming the layer and picking
geometry items or components to add from the model tree or the
graphics window.
uc
a
Layer with No Rule
Layer Properties Dialog Box
Layer Created with Rule
Creating and Managing Layers
Fo
r
Ed
You can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometry
items or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window. This
type of layer is useful for specific tasks. As a best practice, you should name
the layer so other designers recognize the task.
When you create a layer the Layer Properties dialog box displays, as shown
in the top figure. The dialog box displays the following information:
Name This is the name of the layer.
Contents The Contents tab displays the items that are included or
excluded from the layer. Items that are included on the layer are displayed
with a green + symbol in the Status column, while items that are excluded
from the layer are displayed with a red symbol in the Status column.
Items, when selected, are included on the layer if the Include button is
turned on, while items are excluded from the layer if the Exclude button
is turned on.
Rules The Rules tab displays the rules, if any, that are defined for the
layer. Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria. To
create a layer based on a rule, you simply need to create a layer, name
it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the Layer
Properties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool. In
Module 23 | Page 4
2009 PTC
addition to being useful in specific tasks, this type of layer is excellent when
creating templates.
Layers that are created with rules display with a different icon than those
layers that were created with no rules. In the lower-left figure, the layer
does not contain any rules, while in the lower-right figure, the layer was
created with a rule.
The Layer Properties dialog box also displays if you look at the layer
properties of any existing layer by selecting the layer, right-clicking, and
selecting Layer Properties.
Understanding Layer Status
nl
You may also decide to make a layer the active layer. When a layer is made
the active layer, all subsequently created features are automatically placed
on the active layer. Note that a layer containing rules cannot be set as the
active layer.
na
lU
se
Whenever you hide or unhide any layer, you are modifying the layer status for
that model. This new layer status is not automatically saved, even when the
model is saved. Thus, it is necessary for you to save the layer status if you
want it to be retained the next time the model is opened. You can save the
layer status by clicking View > Visibility > Save Status from the main menu.
You can also right-click in the layer tree and select Save Status.
tio
If you save a model and forgot to save the layer status, the
message window alerts you with a warning message, as shown here:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
You can also reset the layer status to the last saved status by clicking View
> Visibility > Reset Status from the main menu or by right-clicking in the
layer tree and selecting Reset Status.
2009 PTC
Module 23 | Page 5
Utilizing Layers in Part Models

When you hide a layer, only the non-solid geometry from the
feature items added to the layer is hidden in the graphics
window.
na
lU
se
nl
Add most any feature to

a layer
Only non-solid geometry
is hidden
Datum features
Surfaces
Ed
uc
a
tio
Hiding a Layer with Default Datums
Hiding a Layer with Holes
Fo
r
Utilizing Layers in Part Models

You can add most any feature item in a part to a layer. However, when you
hide the layer, only the non-solid geometry from the feature items added to
the layer, such as datum features and surfaces, is hidden. For example, if
you add a hole feature to a layer and hide the layer, as shown in the lower
figure, the hole geometry still displays in the graphics window, but the hole
axes associated with the hole feature are hidden.
Module 23 | Page 6
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Utilizing Layers in Part Models

Scenario
Use layers within part models.
Utilize_Part_Layers
nl
na
lU
se

Extrude 4.
Press CTRL, select the five
internal datum features,
right-click, and select Hide.
Use layers within a part model.
Task 1:
layer.prt
2. At the top of the model tree, click

and select Layer
Show
Tree.
tio
3. Expand the Hidden Items layer.

Notice that the five internal
datum features you hid are now
on this layer.
Ed
uc
a
4. Select the
01__PRT_DEF_DTM_PLN
layer, right-click, and select
Hide.
5. Click Repaint
Fo
r
6. Right-click in the layer tree and

select New Layer.
Type OTHER_DATUMS as
the Name.
Select DTM1 and A_1 as items
to add and click OK.
Right-click on the new layer
and select Hide.
Click Repaint
2009 PTC
Module 23 | Page 7

select New Layer.
Type TOP_HOLES as the
Name.
Select the four holes on top of
the model and click OK.
and select Hide.
na
lU
se

window and select Suppress.
nl
8. In the layer tree, right-click on

layer TOP_HOLES and select
Select Items.
Click Repaint

dialog box.
11. Click Edit > Resume > Resume

All.
12. Click Save
and click OK.
tio
13. Notice the warning in the

message window.
15. Click Save
uc
a
and click OK.
Ed
16. Notice that there was no warming this time.
Fo
r
Module 23 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Creating Layer States

Layer states can be used to toggle between different layer
displays.
Layer States Example
na
lU
se
nl
Create a Layer State in View

Manager
Hide/Unhide Layers
Save updated Layer State
uc
a
tio
View Manager
Layer_State001
Layer_State003
Ed
Creating Layer States Theory
Fo
r
You create Layer States in the view manager to record the hide/unhide status
for all layers in a model. You can create an initial layer state upon opening a
model, and then create different states to quickly toggle between.
Remember, the action of hiding a feature or component actually places the

item on the Hidden Items layer. Therefore, layer states can be used with
hidden items, without having to access the layer tree.
Layer states apply to any item that may be placed on a layer, such as:
Features
Components
Drawing Views and Detail Items
2009 PTC
Module 23 | Page 9
PROCEDURE - Creating Layer States

Scenario
Create layer states in assembly and part models.
layer_states.asm
layer_states
Create layer states in an assembly.
na
lU
se
3. Click New and press ENTER to

create Layer_State001.
2. Select the Layers tab.
nl
Task 1:
tio
4. Click New from the View

Manager, and press ENTER to
Ed
uc
a

PISTON.PRT and
PISTON_PIN.PRT from the
model tree.
Fo
r
7. Right-click Layer_State002 and

select Save.
8. Click OK.
9. Double-click Layer_State001 to enable it.
Task 2:
Create layer states in a part.
1. Select
CONNECTING_ROD.PRT from
the model tree.
Module 23 | Page 10
2009 PTC
5. Select the Layers tab.

6. Click New and press ENTER to create Layer_State001.
Manager and press ENTER to
8. Select DTM3 from the model
tree.
nl
na
lU
se
11. Click OK.

select Save.

Manager and press ENTER to
13. Click Layers
tio
14. Select the

01__PRT_DEF_DTM_PLN
layer.
uc
a

select Save.
17. Click OK.
Ed
18. Click Repaint
Fo
r
2009 PTC
Module 23 | Page 11
Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models
nl
Cascading Layer Control
na
lU
se
Add most any feature to a layer

Only non-solid geometry is
hidden
Add assembly components
Solid geometry is hidden
Cascading layer control
available for layers of same
name
Placing external items options
Unlike parts, you can also add components to layers in an

assembly and hide the geometry of those components.
tio
Hiding a Layer with Assembly Components
Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models
Ed
uc
a
Similar to parts, you can hide non-solid geometry of assembly features

including assembly datum features and surfaces. For example, if you
create an assembly level hole, add it to a layer, then hide the layer, the hole
geometry still displays, while the hole axis is hidden.
Fo
r
Unlike parts, you can also add components to layers in an assembly. If you
add components to a layer and then hide the layer, the component geometry
hides. In the bottom figure, the nut and bolt components were added to the
HARDWARE layer and hidden. Notice that the components are removed
from the display in the graphics window.
Cascading Layer Control in Assemblies

Layers in assemblies can provide you with cascading control. You can control
a part level layer from an assembly if the part and assembly both contain a
layer of the same name. When this circumstance occurs, you can edit the
layer properties and layer display of each component individually, as shown
in the upper-right figure.
The layer tree also displays a different layer icon for the common
layer.
Module 23 | Page 12
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models

Scenario
Use layers in assemblies.
Utilize_Assy_Layers
na
lU
se
2. Expand the Hidden Items layer.

Notice that there are three
components in this layer that
contain hidden items.
nl
1. Click Show
from the model
tree and select Layer Tree.
Use layers in assemblies.
Task 1:
layer.asm
tio
3. Expand each of these component

layers.
Ed
uc
a
4. Expand the
01___PRT_DEF_DTM_PLN
layer.
Press CTRL and select the in
BOLT.PRT and in NUT.PRT
layers, right-click and select
Hide.
.
Fo
r
5. Click Repaint
6. In the layer tree, select the

01__ASM_DEF_DTM_PLN
layer, right-click, and select
Hide.
7. Click Repaint
2009 PTC
Module 23 | Page 13

select New Layer.
Type HARDWARE as the
Name.
Select the NUT.PRT and
BOLT.PRT components and
click OK.
and select Hide.
nl
na
lU
se
10. Click Repaint
9. Right-click the HARDWARE

layer and select Unhide.
Click Repaint
11. In the layer tree, right-click on

layer HARDWARE and select
Select Items.
13. Click Save
uc
a
tio
12. Click View > Display Style >

Transparent.
and click OK.
Ed
14. Notice the warning in the

message window.
Fo
r
16. Click Save
and click OK.
17. Notice that there was no warning this time.
Module 23 | Page 14
2009 PTC
Module
24
O
nl
Investigating Parent/Child Relationships

Module Overview
na
lU
se
In a model, the order in which features are created and the references
that they are provided creates hierarchical relationships. These are called
parent/child relationships and they determine feature interaction.
In this module, you learn about parent/child relationships and how to view
information about your models.
tio
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a

Understand parent/child relationships.
View part and assembly parent/child information.
View model, feature, and component information.
2009 PTC
Module 24 | Page 1
Understanding Parent/Child Relationships

The parent/child relationship is one of the most powerful aspects
of Pro/ENGINEER and parametric modeling in general.
Viewing KEY_HANDLE.PRT
na
lU
se
nl
Defining parent/child relationship

Effects of parent/child
relationships when editing
How parent/child relationships are
created
Parent/Child Relationship Flowchart
tio
Defining Parent/Child Relationships
uc
a
You can use various types of Pro/ENGINEER features as building blocks

in the progressive creation of solid parts. Certain features, by necessity,
precede other more dependent features in the design process. Those
dependent features rely on the previously defined features for dimensional
and geometric references. This is known as a parent/child relationship.
Fo
r
Ed
The parent/child relationship is one of the most powerful aspects of

Pro/ENGINEER and parametric modeling in general. This relationship plays
an important role in propagating changes across the model to maintain
the design intent. After a parent feature in a part is changed, all children
are dynamically altered to reflect the changes in the parent feature. If you
suppress or delete a parent feature, Pro/ENGINEER prompts you for an
action pertaining to the related children. You can also minimize the cases of
unnecessary or unintended parent/child relationships.
It is therefore essential to reference the desired geometry when creating
feature dimensions so Pro/ENGINEER can correctly propagate design
changes throughout the model. When working with parent/child relationships,
it can be helpful to remember that parent features can exist without child
features. However, child features cannot exist without their parents.
Effects of Parent/Child Relationships When Editing

Consider how the following editing functionality is affected by parent/child
relationships:
Edit Children of the feature or component update as edits are
regenerated.
Module 24 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Dynamic Edit Children of the dynamically edited feature automatically

update as edits are made.
Edit Definition Enables you to change the parent of the feature or
component.
Suppress/Resume Enables you to remove a feature or component and
its children from the graphics window and the regeneration cycle.
Delete Deletes all children of the selected feature or component by
default. You can also choose to suspend the children, and then redefine
each in turn.
Hide/Unhide Does not affect parent/child relationships.
How Parent/Child Relationships are Created
nl
Consider how the following sketching functionality is affected by parent/child

relationships:
na
lU
se
Sketch Plane and Orientation Reference Plane Are parents to the

sketch feature.
Sketcher References Additional sketcher references, including selected
references, dimension references, and constraint references, are parents
to the sketch feature. Constraints and dimensions can create relationships
between the constrained entity and its reference. Hence, the constrained
entity becomes a child of the referenced feature.
tio
Consider how the following feature and tools functionality is affected by

parent/child relationships:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Selected References The edges or surfaces selected for rounds and

chamfers become parents to the rounds and chamfers. A depth reference
selected for a sketch-based feature becomes a parent to the sketch-based
feature. Similarly, an axis of revolution specified for a Revolve feature
becomes a parent to the revolve feature.
Selected Sketch An external sketch selected for a sketch-based feature
such as an Extrude feature becomes a parent to the Extrude feature.
A sketch-based feature that has an internal sketch inherits all sketch
references as its own, including sketch plane, reference plane, references,
constraints, and dimensions. A sketch-based feature that contains
embedded datum features inherits all datum references as its own.
Consider how the following assembly functionality is affected by parent/child
relationships:
Templates Like part templates, assembly templates do not create

parent/child relationships between the template and the assembly file.
Constraint References Existing models that are referenced when
assembling components with constraints or connections become parents to
the components being assembled. Assembly models can also be children
if they are assembled to other assembly models.
Consider how the following drawings functionality is affected by parent/child
relationships:
Templates Are similar to part and assembly templates because they
do not create a parent/child relationship between the template and the
drawing file.
2009 PTC
Module 24 | Page 3
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Views Are children to either the saved views in the part or to the
reference orientations selected. Also, drawing views are children to other
views. For example, a projection view is a child to the general view from
which it was projected. Finally, a drawing view is a child to the source
model.
Details Are generally children to their respective models. Examples of
drawing details include dimensions, parametric notes, and BOM tables.
Module 24 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Viewing Part Parent/Child Information

You can use the Reference Viewer to view parent/child
relationships between features in a part model.
nl
Current Object
Parents
Children
Highlight entities in
model:
Features
References
na
lU
se
Reference Viewer Graph
tio
Full Path Between

Features
Viewing Part Parent/Child Information
Ed
uc
a
You can view parent/child relationships of features in a part model by using

the Reference viewer. You can launch the Reference Viewer by selecting the
desired feature and then either clicking Info > Reference Viewer from the
main menu or right-clicking and selecting Info > Reference Viewer.
The Reference Viewer displays a graph of parent/child relationships for a
given feature. This graph is broken down into three columns from left to right:
Fo
r
Parents Displays the Parents for the currently selected feature.

Current Object Displays the currently selected feature for which you
wish to view parent/child relationships.
Children Displays the Children of the currently selected feature.
The graph of parent/child relationships in the Reference Viewer is interactive
with the model in the graphics window:
You can cursor over the feature node to highlight it on the model.
You can expand the feature nodes to see the list of references that creates
the parent/child relationships. You can also select the reference to see it
highlight in the model. You can also see which feature the reference is a
parent to, as it highlights the Reference Type arrow to the proper child
feature node in the graph. In the right figure, datum axis A_7 creates
a parent/child relationship between the Hole_2 feature and the Hole_3
feature.
2009 PTC
Module 24 | Page 5
Obtaining Full Path Information Between Features

You can display the full parent/child relationship path between two features in
tree representation by selecting the Reference Type arrow, then right-clicking
and selecting Display Full Path. For example, the graph in the left figure
displays the full chain of parent/child relationships between the Hole 2 and
Hole 3 features. It shows that datum axis A_7 is a child to Hole 2, which is a
child back to the part. It also shows that datum axis A_7 is a parent to Hole 3.
Switching the Current Object
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
You can switch which feature is the current object either by double-clicking
the desired feature node in the graph, right-clicking it and selecting Set as
current, or by clicking Actions > Set as current from the Reference Viewer
dialog box menu. You can also revert back to the previously selected Current
Object by clicking Use Previous at the top of the graph or clicking the down
arrow next to it to view the history of Current Objects and selecting an earlier
one.
Module 24 | Page 6
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Viewing Part Parent/Child Information

Scenario
View Parent and Child information for features in a part using the Reference
Viewer.
part_pc.prt
Part_PC
2. Click Info > Reference Viewer

from the main menu.
tio
na
lU
se
3. Notice that the reference graph

displays the current object, Hole
2, in the middle, that object's
Parents on the left, and that
object's Children on the right.
nl
1. Select Hole 2 from the model.
View Parent and Child information for features using the Reference
Viewer.
Task 1:
uc
a
4. Cursor over each node in the

Reference Viewer to highlight the
respective feature on the model.
Ed
5. Click the down arrows on each

Parent node to view its entities.
Fo
r
6. Select each of these entities to

highlight them on the model.
7. Click the down arrows on the

Current Object to see its entities.
2009 PTC
Module 24 | Page 7
8. In the Reference Viewer, select

the arrow leading to the Hole
3 node, right-click, and select
Display Full Path.
9. Notice that Hole 3 refers to
datum axis A_7 in Hole 2.
na
lU
se
11. In the Reference Viewer,

right-click on the Hole 3 node
and select Set as current.
Notice that the graph has now
updated.
Notice the Parents specified
for the Hole 3 feature.
Notice the Children specified
for the Hole 3 feature.
nl
10. Click Close from the Full Path

Display dialog box.
tio
12. Click Close from the Reference

Viewer dialog box.
uc
a
13. Edit the definition of Hole 3.
Ed
14. Notice the 14 dimension going

to datum axis A_7 in Hole 2.
This dimension established the
parent/child relationship.
.
Fo
r
Module 24 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information

You can use the Reference Viewer to view parent/child
relationships between components in an assembly.
na
lU
se
nl
Reference Viewer Model as Current Object
uc
a
tio
Current Object
Parents
Children
Highlight entities in
model:
Components
Features
References
Set Current:
Model
Component
Placement
Both
Reference Viewer Component Placement

as Current Object
Ed
Full Path Between

Components
Fo
r
Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information

You can view parent/child relationships of components or their features in
an assembly using the Reference viewer. You can launch the Reference
Viewer by selecting the desired component and then either clicking Info >
Reference Viewer from the main menu or right-clicking and selecting Info
> Reference Viewer.
Reference Viewer Sections

The Reference Viewer displays a graph of parent/child relationships for a
given component or that component's features. This graph is broken down
into three columns from left to right:
Parents Displays the Parents of the currently selected component.
Current Object Displays the currently selected component for which you
wish to view parent/child relationships.
Children Displays the Children of the currently selected component.
2009 PTC
Module 24 | Page 9
The features or components displayed in the Reference Viewer depend upon

the Reference Types specified. By default, the Regular, Placement, Relation,
and System reference types are displayed. The Reference Type to display
Components in path is not displayed by default.
Reference Viewer Functionality

The Reference Viewer can be utilized in one of three ways, depending upon
the type of information you wish to view:
na
lU
se
nl
Model as Current Object Displays parent/child relationships for

references in the context of the solid model. In the upper-right figure, the
parent/child relationships are displayed in the context of the model. As
such, the assembly is a child to the part because if the assembly cannot
find that part it will fail.
Component Placement as Current Object Displays parent/child
relationships for assembly level or placement references. These
relationships are described in the context of the assembly, as shown in the
lower-right figure. Note that not only are the components shown as parents
and children, but the components' features that create the parent/child
relationships are shown as well.
Both as Current Object Displays parent/child relationships for references
in the context of both the solid model and the assembly level.
The graph of parent/child relationships in the Reference Viewer is interactive
with the assembly in the graphics window:
uc
a
tio
You can cursor over the component or feature node to highlight it on the
model.
You can expand the component or feature nodes to see the list of
references that creates the parent/child relationships shown. You can also
select these references to see them highlight in the model.
Ed
Obtaining Full Path Information Between Components
Fo
r
You can display the full parent/child relationship path between two
components in tree representation by selecting the Reference Type arrow
between two components, then right-clicking and selecting Display Full
Path, as shown in the left figure. For example, the graph in the left figure
displays the full chain of parent/child relationships between the BOLT.PRT
and PLATE.PRT components. It shows that Surface id 55 is a child to Extrude
1 in PLATE.PRT, which is a child of assembly ASSY_PC.ASM. It also shows
that the BOLT.PRT is assembled to Surface id 55 in PLATE.PRT.
Switching the Current Object

You can switch which feature or component is the current object either
by double-clicking the desired feature node or component in the graph,
right-clicking it and selecting Set as current, or by clicking Actions > Set as
current from the Reference Viewer dialog box menu. You can also revert
back to the previously selected Current Object by clicking Use Previous at
the top of the graph or by clicking the down arrow next to it to view the history
of Current Objects and selecting an earlier one.
Module 24 | Page 10
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Viewing Assembly Parent/Child

Information
Scenario
View Parent and Child information for components in an assembly using
the Reference Viewer.
assy_pc.asm
Assy_PC
View Parent and Child information for components using the

Reference Viewer.
na
lU
se
2. Click Info > Reference Viewer

from the main menu.
1. Select PLATE.PRT from the

assembly.
nl
Task 1:
3. Select the Components in

path check box as an additional
Reference Type.
tio
4. If necessary, widen both the

Reference Viewer dialog box
and the Parents column.
uc
a
5. Click Model As Current Object

from the Reference Viewer
dialog box.
Ed
6. Click the down arrows on the

Children assembly node to view
the components.
Fo
r
7. Notice the two BOLT.PRT

components.
8. Cursor over each of the

BOLT.PRT models to highlight
them in the model.
9. Click Component Placement
Current
from the Reference
Viewer dialog box.
10. Notice that the graph updates

to now show PLATE.PRT as a
component in the assembly, as
well as its Parents and Children.
11. Cursor over each node to
highlight the respective features
and components on the model.
2009 PTC
Module 24 | Page 11
12. Click the down arrows on each

Parent node to expand it and
view its referenced entities.
nl
O
na
lU
se
14. In the Reference Viewer, select

the arrow leading to the Comp id
47 (BOLT.PRT) node, right-click,
and select Display Full Path.
If necessary, edit the Displayed
Full Path to Surface id 55.
Notice that BOLT.PRT is
assembled to a surface in
Extrude 1.
Click Close.
13. Select each of these entities to

highlight them on the model.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
15. In the Reference Viewer,

right-click on the Comp id 47
(BOLT.PRT) node and select Set
as Current.
Notice that the graph has now
updated.
Notice the Parents specified for
the Comp id 47 (BOLT.PRT)
component.
Cursor over Hole 2 in
PLATE.PRT to highlight it.
The BOLT.PRT is assembled
into this hole. Hence, the
component is a child to the
hole.
Module 24 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Viewing Model, Feature, and Component

Information
You can view the following
information:
Feature
Model
Component
Bill of Materials
na
lU
se
nl
Viewing Model Information
Viewing BOM Information
Viewing Feature Information
tio
Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information Theory
uc
a
You can access the menu selections to view model, feature, and component
information either through the Info menu on the main menu or by right-clicking
on the appropriate item in the model tree or graphics window.
Ed
When information is displayed about the item you have selected, the system
helps you identify that item by displaying the following:
Fo
r
Name Either the model, component, or feature name of the item you
have selected.
Feature Number/Component Number Displays the feature number or
component number in the model tree as it is found in the model tree.
ID The internal identification number that the system has assigned to
the item you select.
Understanding the Browser Information Window's Contents

The information for the item you have selected is displayed in the Browser
window. The information is categorized, depending upon its type, for
example, Parents, Children, Feature List, and Dimensions.
Because information is displayed in the Browser window, there are many
clickable items that can be selected to yield even more information. The
following items can be clicked on in the Browser information window:
Blue Links Call out the name of something, such as a Feature Name or
Model name. Clicking these blue links highlights the item in the model. An
item that's name is a series of three dashes simply means that no name is
given for that particular item.
2009 PTC
Module 24 | Page 13
Dimensions Dimensions are listed by their internal identification number.

Clicking the dimension link highlights the dimension in the model.
Highlight Feature
Feature Info
component.
Highlights the feature in the model.
Enables you to jump to information for that feature or
Viewing Model and Feature Information in Parts

When you view the model information for a part, the Browser window displays
the following information:
nl
Part Name Displays the name of the model.

Unit Information Displays the units that the model was created in,
including Length, Mass, Force, Time, and Temperature.
Feature List Provides a list of features, similar to the model tree.
When you view the feature information for a given feature in a model, the
Browser window displays the following information:
na
lU
se
Part Name, Feature Number, and Feature ID.

Parents, if any.
Children, if any.
Feature Elements Displays the elements that comprise the feature.
Layers Displays any layers that the feature is on, and the layer status.
Feature Dimensions Displays all dimensions found in the feature.
tio
Viewing Model, Component, and BOM Information in Assemblies
Ed
uc
a
When you view the model information for a component in an assembly, you
must select whether you want the information for the top level assembly or
a component in the assembly. The Browser window displays the following
information:
Fo
r
Part Name Displays the name of the model.

Component Information Displays a list of the assembled components,
only displays when model information is displayed for the top level
assembly.
Feature List Provides a list of feature, similar to the model tree.
When you view the component information for a component in an assembly,
the Component Constraints dialog box displays the assembly constraints
used to assemble the component. You can highlight each constraint pair on
the model by selecting it from the dialog box. The Browser window then
displays the following:
Component Name, Parent Assembly, Component Number in Parent
assembly, Feature Number, and Feature ID.
Parents List Any components in the assembly which are parents.
Children List Any components in the assembly which are children.
When you view the Bill of Materials information for an assembly, the Browser
window displays the components found in the assembly, and their quantities.
You must specify whether the BOM is to be created for the Top Level
assembly or a Sub-assembly.
Module 24 | Page 14
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Viewing Model, Feature, and Component

Information
Scenario
View information about assemblies and parts.
assy_info.asm
View_Info
2. Click Apply > Close from the

Model Info dialog box.
4. Close the Browser.
na
lU
se
3. View the information that

displays in the Browser.
nl
1. Click Info > Model from the main

menu.
View assembly information using Pro/ENGINEER's tools.
Task 1:
5. Click Info > Component from

the main menu.
tio
6. Select PLATE.PRT from the

model tree.
Ed
uc
a
7. Notice the component

constraints used to assemble
this component. Select the
constraints in the dialog box and
notice that the pair highlights in
the model.
Fo
r
8. Click Apply > Close from the

Component Constraints dialog
box to display the component
info for PLATE.PRT.
9. Click Info > Bill of Materials

from the main menu.
10. Verify that Top Level is selected
in the BOM dialog box and click
OK.
11. Notice that there are two
BOLT.PRT components in the
assembly.
2009 PTC
Module 24 | Page 15
Task 2:
View part information using Pro/ENGINEER's tools.

PART_INFO.PRT and select
Open.
2. Click Info > Model from the main
menu.
na
lU
se
5. Select Hole 2 from the model

tree.
4. Click Info > Feature from the

main menu.
nl
3. Notice the model information for

the model.
6. Collapse the model tree and

leave the Feature info window
open.
7. Arrange the model and Browser

window so both can be seen.
tio
8. Scroll the Feature info window

up to the Parents section.
uc
a
9. Click the link for Extrude 3.

.
Ed
10. Click Repaint
Fo
r
11. In the Children section of the

Feature info, click the Hole 3
link.
12. Click Repaint
13. Click Feature Info

Chamfer 1.
next to
14. Notice that the Feature info for

the chamfer now displays. Also
notice that Hole 3 is a parent to
the chamfer.
15. Click Hole 3 to highlight it.
16. Expand the model tree window.
Module 24 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Module
25
O
nl
Capturing and Managing Design Intent

Module Overview
na
lU
se
Now that you understand parent/child relationships, you can learn how to
properly capture and manage design intent in models. In this module, you
learn the tools available for modifying and capturing your design intent within
all aspects of the modeling process. You also become more knowledgeable
about selecting references that capture your design intent.
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio

Handle the children of deleted and suppressed items.
Reorder and insert features.
Redefine features and Sketches.
Capture design intent in Sketches, features, parts, and assemblies.
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 1
Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed

Items
In Pro/ENGINEER, you have three options available for how to
handle the children of suppressed or deleted items.
nl
Child handling options include:

Suppress/Delete
Suspend
Freeze
na
lU
se
Suspending Child Rounds
uc
a
tio
Children Handling Dialog Box
Handling a Frozen Child Component
Ed
Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items
Fo
r
If you try to suppress or delete an item that has children, the system highlights
these child items in magenta. In the upper-left figure, the piston component
is being suppressed, and the system highlights the piston pin and piston
ring in magenta because they are children of the piston. In the upper-right
figure, the two rounds highlighted in magenta are children of the round that
is being suppressed.
The system also displays a Delete or Suppress dialog box. When you click
Options within this dialog box, the system displays the Children Handling
dialog box, as shown in the upper-left figure. The Children Handling dialog
box displays each of the child items highlighted in magenta. You have three
different options available for how to handle these children, and each child
can be handled independently:
Suppress/Delete When suppressing a parent you can choose to also
suppress a child item, and when deleting a parent you can choose to also
delete a child item. If this is the desired option for all child items, you can
click OK from the original Suppress or Delete dialog box without having to
consider the options available in the Children Handling dialog box.
Suspend Suppresses or deletes the parent anyway, thus suspending
the child item's regeneration temporarily. Once the parent is suppressed or
Module 25 | Page 2
2009 PTC
tio
na
lU
se
nl
deleted, the suspended child item regenerates. At this point, one of two
things will happen to the child item:
The child item may regenerate successfully. However, if the child
item is a feature, it may have different geometry; if the child item is a
component, it may be in a different position. In the upper-right figure,
the two round children were suspended. After the parent round was
suppressed, these two child rounds successfully regenerated, although
their geometry is different.
The child item may not regenerate successfully. If this occurs
Pro/ENGINEER indicates the failure. You can then acknowledge and
accept the failure or undo the changes. If you acknowledge the failure
you can continue to work normally, but you should ultimately fix the
failure. You can fix the failure by modifying the child item, suppressing
the child item, deleting the child item, or modifying another feature or
part.
Freeze The Freeze option is available only for assembly components.
Once the parent component is suppressed or deleted, the child component
is frozen, or locked in 3-D space. Frozen components display in the
model tree with a special icon preceding their name. In the left image of the
lower figure, the PISTON_PIN.PRT component is frozen. In addition, any
child components of the frozen component display in the model tree with a
slightly different icon that includes a small square.
Frozen components must be redefined and the missing assembly
placement references must be replaced with valid references from
components that still remain in the assembly. Once this is done, the
component will thaw, meaning that it will no longer be frozen in the
assembly, as shown in the lower figure.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
Another method to unthaw frozen components temporarily is to

delete the placement constraint that is missing references and
add a Fix constraint, which fixes the component in its current
orientation but keeps it fully constrained.
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Handling Children of Deleted and

Suppressed Items
Scenario
Handle the children of deleted and suppressed items.
child_handling.asm
Child_Del-Supp
Suppress PISTON.PRT and redefine PISTON_PIN.PRT after

it becomes frozen.
na
lU
se
2. Notice that PISTON_PIN.PRT

and PISTON_RING.PRT will
also be deleted because they
are children.
1. Select PISTON.PRT, right-click,

and select Delete.
nl
Task 1:

box.
.
tio
4. Click Undo
5. Select the PISTON.PRT, right-click, and select Suppress.
uc
a
6. Again, notice that the PISTON_PIN.PRT and PISTON_RING.PRT are

children and will therefore also be suppressed.
Fo
r
Ed
7. In the Suppress dialog box, click

Options.
Edit the Status of
PISTON_PIN.PRT to Freeze,
leaving PISTON_RING.PRT to
be suppressed.
Click OK.
8. Notice the suppressed
components and the freeze
symbol on PISTON_PIN.PRT.
Module 25 | Page 4
2009 PTC

PISTON_PIN.PRT.
10. If necessary, select the Insert
constraint to activate it.
Select the inner hole surface
on CONNECTING_ROD.PRT
to insert the pin into. The pin
was formerly inserted into the
piston.
nl
na
lU
se
Task 2:
12. Notice that PISTON_PIN.PRT

has thawed. That is, the
component is no longer frozen in
the assembly.
Suppress SIDE_ROUND and suspend the resulting child rounds.
1. Select
CONNECTING_ROD.PRT,
right-click, and select Open.
tio
2. Right-click on SIDE_ROUND
and select Delete.
uc
a
3. Notice the two child round

features.

box.
.
Ed
5. Click Undo
Fo
r
6. Select SIDE_ROUND, right-click,

and select Suppress.
7. Again, notice that the child
rounds will also be suppressed.
8. In the Suppress dialog box, click

Options.
Edit the Status of both Round
ids to Suspend .
Click OK.
9. Notice the geometry changes
to the model because
SIDE_ROUND is no longer
present.

2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 5
Reordering Features
You can reorder features in the model tree by dragging them
to a new location.
2) Protrusion Added
3) Hole Reordered
uc
a
Reordering Features
tio
1) Original Model
na
lU
se
3.
2.
Original model
Through All hole
Protrusion added
Hole no longer
meets design intent
Hole reordered
Hole again meets
design intent
nl
1.
Ed
When regenerating a model, Pro/ENGINEER regenerates features one at a

time, following the order in which they are displayed in the model tree. As you
create new features, they are added to the bottom of the list in the model tree.
Fo
r
The order of features is the sequence in which features are displayed in

the model tree. You can drag a feature within the model tree to place it just
after its parent, even though you may have added several features to it after
the parent was created. Since you must regenerate a parent before you
regenerate its children, you cannot reorder a parent to be after its children;
nor can you reorder a child to be before its parents.
Feature order can affect the geometry of a model. When a feature is created
it can only add or remove material from the model as the model exists at that
point in time. For example, in the lower-left figure the hole feature's depth is
Through All, which drills the hole through the unseen side of the block. If you
add an additional protrusion to the block, you would need to reorder the hole
after this new protrusion if you want to retain its Through All design intent.
Then the Through All depth would include the new protrusion and drill the
hole through the entire block.
Module 25 | Page 6
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Reordering Features

Scenario
Reorder features in a part model.
reorder.prt
Reorder
Task 1:
Reorder features in a part model.
na
lU
se
nl
1. Locate Hole 1 in the model tree.

2. Notice its position in the feature
order.
uc
a
tio

Select the Shape tab.
Notice the hole depth is
Through All.
Fo
r
Ed

and
select Sketch 2.
Edit the depth to 6.
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 7
5. Select Hole 1.
6. Notice that the hole does not
appear to have a depth of
Through All, but recall that it
does have a depth of Through
All at the time of creation.
nl
na
lU
se
8. Select Hole 1.
7. In the model tree, click and drag

Hole 1 to reorder it after Extrude
2.
A feature can only

add/remove material from
the model as the model
exists at the point in time in
which the feature is created.
uc
a
10. Start the Shell Tool
tio
9. Just as before, the hole still

removes material Through All
from the model, but because
the extrude feature now occurs
before the hole feature, the
Through All depth has the
desired effect.
11. Select the front face to remove it.

12. Edit the thickness to 0.50.
Ed
Fo
r
14. Notice the boss around the

hole feature.

Shell 1 to reorder it before Hole
1.
16. Reorient the model and notice
that the shell feature now hollows
out the entire model.
Module 25 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Inserting Features
You can insert new features or components in the model tree
where desired.
na
lU
se
nl
1) Original Model
2) Insert Mode Activated
3) Insert Mode Cancelled
Ed
uc
a
tio
Original model
One protrusion
Shell has square
edge
2. Insert mode activated
Protrusion mirrored,
rounds created
before shell
3. Insert mode cancelled
Hole on left goes
through mirrored
protrusion
Shell hollows out
mirrored protrusion
and rounds
1.
Inserting Features
Fo
r
The model tree insertion indicator, shown in the model tree as Insert
Indicator , indicates where features are inserted upon creation. By default,
its position is always after all items listed in the model tree. You may drag it
higher or lower in the model tree to insert features between other features in
the tree. When you move the insert indicator, you enter Insert Mode and the
model is rolled backward or forward in its regeneration in response to its new
position, and all features update in the graphics window. If a feature is located
before the indicator, then it is displayed in the graphics window and processed
during regeneration. If a feature lies after the indicator, then it is temporarily
suppressed. Thus, it is not regenerated or shown in the graphics window.
In addition to dragging the Insert Indicator up into the model tree, you can
specify an insert location in the tree. To do this you select a feature, then
right-click and select Insert Here. The insert indicator is then placed directly
below the selected item.
You can exit Insert Mode and return the insert indicator to its default
location at the bottom of the model tree by cursoring over it, right-clicking,
and selecting Cancel. You are then prompted to resume the features you
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 9
suppressed when you activated Insert mode. When you choose to resume
them, Pro/ENGINEER places them after the inserted features.
For example, the model in the figures is a cast metal cover. However, a
design change is needed to make another protrusion with a rounded notch in
the middle. Hence, we need to mirror the existing protrusion and round the
edges of the resulting notch. Additionally, these rounded edges should also
be on the inside of the part to enable easier extraction from the cast.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Insert Mode works the same way

when you are in an assembly.
You may drag the Insert Indicator
higher or lower in the model tree to
insert components between other
components in the tree, or you may
select a component, right-click, and
select Insert Here. Again, when
you move the insert indicator, you
enter Insert Mode and the assembly
is rolled backward or forward in its
regeneration in response to its new
position, and all components update
in the graphics window.
nl
As shown in the part's model tree, you can delete and recreate the shell
and hole features after creating the necessary protrusion and rounds.
Alternatively, you can use Insert mode to add the protrusion and round
features before the Shell feature. Notice that this includes the round feature
in the shell, which accomplishes the task of having round edges on the
inside of the part.
Module 25 | Page 10
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Inserting Features

Scenario
Insert new features in a part model.
insert.prt
Insert
na
lU
se

to before
the Insert Indicator
Shell 1.
nl
1. Select each of the five solid

features in the model tree to
highlight them in the graphics
window.
Insert new features in a part model.
Task 1:
3. Notice the features that are

suppressed and therefore not
currently regenerated.
uc
a
tio
4. Select Extrude 2 and start the

.
Mirror Tool
Select datum plane RIGHT.
and
Ed

select 3D-2.
Fo
r

, press
CTRL, and select both edges of
the notch bottom.
Right-click and select Full
round.
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 11

select 3D-1.
nl
na
lU
se
9. Click Yes from the Confirmation

dialog box.
8. In the model tree, select the

Insert Indicator , right-click,
and select Cancel.

, press
CTRL, and select a vertical edge
on the front and back of the
notch.
Edit the radius to 1.
and
tio
11. Notice the hole on the left

that goes through the mirrored
protrusion.
Ed
uc
a
12. Also notice that the shell now

hollows out both the mirrored
protrusion and the newly inserted
rounds.
Fo
r
Module 25 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Redefining Features and Sketches
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
Edit Definition
Datum Features
Feature Tools
Sketch Features
Pre-Wildfire
Features
Complete control of
a feature
Feature Type
Size
Shape
Location
Options
References
Edit Definition provides you with complete control of a feature.
Ed
uc
a
Various Edit Definition Options
Feature Dashboard
Fo
r
Redefining Features and Sketches

In Pro/ENGINEER, altering the parents of a feature or sketch can drastically
affect the outcome of the resulting geometry. To change a parent/child
relationship, the easiest method is to use the Edit Definition option. This
option enables you to reselect your references using dialog boxes, the
dashboard, or menu options depending on the feature you are redefining. You
can redefine a feature or sketch by selecting it, and then either right-clicking
and selecting Edit Definition, or clicking Edit > Definition from the main
menu.
For example, if you redefine a datum feature, you can select new references
using a dialog box. If you redefine a Sketch feature, you can use the Sketch
dialog box to change its placement. You can also use the References dialog
box to change references internal to the sketch. For most solid features, you
can use the dashboard to edit references; for example, selecting a different
sketch for an extrude, or selecting different edges for a round.
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 13
Controlling Features By Using Edit Definition

The Edit Definition functionality provides you with complete control over a
feature within its tool. Consider the control that Edit Definition provides in the
following areas:
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Feature Type You can switch the feature type for many features. For
example, you can edit a feature to change it from a solid feature to a
surface feature.
Size You can increase or decrease the size of many features. For
example, you can edit the radius value of a round feature.
Shape You can edit the resulting geometry shape of a model. For
example, you can edit a feature's Sketch, depth or angle value, or switch
the external sketch used.
Location You can edit the location of a feature. For example, you can
edit the sketching plane specified for a Sketch feature which changes the
location of the resulting sketch feature and therefore any features using
that Sketch.
Options You can edit numerous options of a feature. For example, you
can edit the depth of a hole from Blind to Through All, or you can add an
additional side for material to be removed.
References (Parents) You can edit the parent references to a feature.
For example, you can switch which external sketch is used in the creation
of a feature, or you can specify different references to different features
within the Sketch References dialog box.
Following the Edit Definition Workflow
uc
a
When you redefine, or edit the definition of, a feature or sketch, the following
occurs:
Fo
r
Ed
The model regenerates back to the feature being redefined. The model
tree reflects that this has happened by removing all features that occur
after the feature being redefined. In addition, the feature being redefined
displays a yellow icon preceding its name in the model tree, as shown
here:
Most features being redefined display in their yellow dynamic preview color.
In this state, the feature's drag handles are displayed, enabling you to edit
their respective values. Plus the on-screen flip arrows are displayed.
The feature's GUI is presented. Depending upon the feature being
redefined, this could be either a dialog box or the dashboard. The GUI or
dialog boxes enable you to make changes to the feature.
Most features, once changes have been made, can be previewed solid if
desired. This option regenerates the feature to determine whether the
changes you have made are valid.
Once you have completed the feature, it regenerates. After this occurs, the
child features also regenerate to reflect the changes made to their parent.
Module 25 | Page 14
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Redefining Features and Sketches

Scenario
Redefine features and sketches in a part model.
redefine.prt
Redefine
Task 1:
Redefine features and sketches in a part model.
nl
na
lU
se
3. Edit the 1.5 dimension to -1.5.
1. Edit the definition of RING_CUT.

2. Select the Placement tab, and
notice that the Sketch is Internal.
Click Edit.

Orientation.
to
tio

toggle it off.
uc
a
7. Drag the handle from 360 to 75.

.
Ed
9. Click Undo
and
Fo
r

select FRONT.
11. Edit the definition of SKIRT_CUT.
12. Select the Placement tab, and

notice that the Sketch is external
to the extrude feature.
Select an alternate external
sketch Sketch 2, from the
model tree.
14. Notice the new skirt shape.

15. Click Undo
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 15


right-click and select Placement.
na
lU
se
20. Select datum plane RIGHT

from the model tree as the new
sketching plane.
nl

sketch in the model.

Orientation and again notice the
sketch in the model.
22. Click Sketch from the Sketch
dialog box.
uc
a
tio
Ed

Orientation.
Fo
r
25. The SKIRT_CUT has been

rotated 90 degrees.
Module 25 | Page 16
2009 PTC
Capturing Design Intent in Sketches
nl
Closed Sketch Design Intent

Examples
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Considerations include:
Sketch/Reference plane
selection
Reference selection
Dimension scheme
Constraints
Sketched geometry type
Open sketch results may differ
from closed sketch results
You must carefully consider how to define a sketch because so

many other features use sketches in their creation.
Captured Design Intent
Open Sketch Design Intent

Examples
Ed
Capturing Design Intent in Sketches
Fo
r
Design intent is captured in Sketcher by selecting references and by

sketching, constraining, and dimensioning entities. It is important to capture
design intent in sketches because so many other features build up from
sketches. Consequently, you must carefully consider how to define a sketch
and then capture it. You can always modify the sketch's design intent, but
it is much easier to do so when you have planned for what changes may
occur later on.
Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in Sketches

When you create a new sketch in Pro/ENGINEER consider the options
available for capturing design intent in each of the following areas, and some
of the examples listed. The decisions you make in these areas at the time of
sketch creation can affect the overall model downstream when you want to
make a change to it.
Sketch/Reference Plane Should these selected references be default
datum planes or a construction plane created with an adjustable offset or
angle? Perhaps the sketch plane should be on a surface created from
another feature.
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 17
tio
na
lU
se
nl
References Remember that when you select additional sketching

references or dimension to existing geometry you are selecting the parents
for your sketch. If the references you select update, so does the sketch.
Consider whether you want your sketcher references to be default datums
or another feature. In the lower-left figure, the sketch feature references
the angled surface of existing geometry, so if that angled surface updates,
so will the sketch. Additionally, the sketch references the existing hole.
Therefore, if the hole location updates, the sketch's location must update.
Dimensioning scheme When dimensioning circles and arcs, should the
dimension be a radius or diameter? Should the sketch be dimensioned with
an X-Y scheme or a radius-angle scheme? Deciding whether the sketch
must pivot can help you determine which scheme to use. Consider which
dimensions you might want to modify at a later time if the design changes.
Constraints You must decide which constraints to use, and which
reference to constrain to because you are again creating parents when
selecting constraint references. How should the sketch entities react to
each other? Should they be parallel, perpendicular, or tangent? Should the
sketch be symmetrical? If so, you will need a centerline. Do you want arc
and circle centers to remain lined up? In the lower-left figure, the sketch's
construction line between each arc center is constrained to be parallel to
the angled surface. Therefore, if the angle of the existing surface changes,
so too must the angle of the sketch. Similarly, if the existing hole diameter
is changed, this sketch's upper arc diameter will also change because it is
constrained to be of equal radius.
Sketched geometry type When sketching arcs, for example, you should
use the arc type that gets you your desired design intent. Remember to
use construction geometry or sketched datum points to your advantage.
uc
a
Open Sketches Versus Closed Sketches

There are two different techniques of creating sketch features:
Ed
Closed-section sketch The sketched geometry forms a closed loop.

Open-section sketch The sketch geometry does not form a closed loop.
Fo
r
Closed-section sketches are the more robust of the two options and should
therefore be used whenever possible. However, your desired design intent
should ultimately dictate which type of sketch section is created. The
yellow extrude features shown in the upper-right figure are created from
closed-section sketches, whereas the yellow extrude features created in the
lower-right figure are created from open-section sketches. The geometry
created by using an open-section sketch causes the resulting geometry to
follow the 3-D contour of a surface. The endpoints of the open-section sketch
must be constrained to the surface edge. The geometry created by using the
closed-section sketches ignores the 3-D contour of the surface and simply
extends the geometry upward.
There are two specific rules regarding open-section versus closed-section
sketches when it comes to feature requirements:
Rib features require an open-section sketch.
You must create the first extrude or revolve feature by using a
closed-section sketch.
Module 25 | Page 18
2009 PTC
Capturing Design Intent in Features
nl
O
na
lU
se
Internal Versus External Sketches
uc
a
tio
Option Considerations
include:
Depth
Solid/Thicken
Round/Chamfer
type
Hole type
Sketch or select
sweep trajectory
Internal versus
external sketches
Embedded datum
features
Capture design intent in your model's features by deciding

which feature options to use.
Embedded Datum Features
Ed
Capturing Design Intent in Features
Fo
r
Design intent is captured in Features by specifying the correct feature and

its options. As a result, you must carefully consider which feature options to
specify to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify the
feature's design intent, but it is much easier to do so when you have planned
for what changes may occur later on.
Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in Features
When you create a new feature in Pro/ENGINEER, consider the options

available for capturing design intent in each of the following areas. The
decisions you make in these areas at the time of feature creation can affect
the overall model downstream when you want to make a change to it.
Depth When creating an extrude feature, determine whether the depth
should be symmetric or defined with 2-side blind depth values. Determine
whether the depth be defined to a reference. If so, remember that the
reference you select becomes a parent to the feature. Or should the depth
be Through All?
Solid or Thicken Determine whether the feature you create should be a
solid feature in which you create a cut through, or should it be a thickened
feature with a defined thickness? If so, which side?
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 19
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Round/Chamfer type Determine which type of chamfer best captures

your design intent. Is it better to use a 45 x D or a D x D? Again,
considering how the design may change in the future helps you decide.
Should the round be created by selecting the edge or by selecting the two
surfaces in your model? If you think the design may change so the edge
disappears, then use the two surfaces.
Hole type Determine which dimensioning scheme works better in your
design. To the tip or to the shoulder of the hole?
Sketch trajectory or select trajectory When creating a sweep feature, you
must decide whether to select the sweep trajectory from existing geometry
or to sketch it. Deciding whether you want the trajectory to be independent
from the feature or built-in can help you decide.
Internal versus external sketches In the upper figure, notice that feature
Extrude 2 was created using an external sketch, but feature Extrude 3
was created using an internal sketch. Which sketch you ultimately use for
feature creation depends upon these factors:
You must use an internal sketch to create Geometry Points in the sketch.
Internal sketches reduce the clutter in the model tree. As you can see in
the upper figure, there are two additional model tree entries for Sketches
1 and 2 due to the fact that these were external sketches. Had Extrude
1 and Extrude 2 been created with internal sketches, neither of these
entities would reside in the model tree.
External sketches come in handy if you want to try multiple design
alternatives for a feature. You can select alternate external sketches to
try these design alternatives.
Embedded datum features Embedded datum features work well if you
want to edit the feature as all one feature. This also simplifies the tree and
reduces the display clutter. In the lower figure Extrude 4 was created using
five embedded datum features. However, embedded datum features do
not work so well if you want to reuse those datums for other features.
Module 25 | Page 20
2009 PTC
Capturing Design Intent in Parts

Capture design intent in parts with proper planning, feature
selection, and feature order.
nl
Planning model design

80/20 Rule
Feature type
Feature order
Parent/child effects
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Following the 80/20 Rule
Feature Order Example 1
Feature Order Example 2
Fo
r
Capturing Design Intent in Parts

Design intent is captured in Parts by properly planning your model design
and specifying which features to use, as well as their order. Often the
same geometry result can be achieved by creating many different types or
combinations of features. As a result, you must carefully consider which
features to use to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify
the part's design intent, but it is much easier to do so when you have planned
for what changes may occur later on.
Planning Your Model Design

Before you begin your new part model you should plan its design. As a
general guideline, you should follow the 80/20 rule, which states that 80
percent of the overall shape of the model should typically be created in
the initial 20 percent of the model's features. The upper-right figure is an
illustration of the 80/20 rule. The left image shows only the first four extrude
features of the muffler, while the right image displays the completed model.
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 21
Even though only the first four features are displayed, roughly 80 percent
of the overall model shape is there.
Here are some guidelines that you can follow when planning your part model
design.
na
lU
se
nl
Start with the feature that determines the overall size and shape of the
model. This is your base feature. The left image of the upper-right figure
shows the first four extrude features of a muffler model. The first feature is
an extruded rectangle, which is the base feature of this model.
Create major geometry features that add or remove material from your
model. In the left image of the upper-right figure, the extruded cut along
the front face of the muffler is an example of this type of major geometry
feature.
Create minor geometry features that add or remove material. These
include smaller features such as protrusions, cuts, bosses, ribs, or holes.
In the upper-right figure, the smaller extruded cuts are an example of
this type of feature in the left image, and the holes in the right image are
another example.
Finally, add finishing features such as rounds and chamfers. In the right
image of the upper-right figure, the rounds and shell are both finishing
features.
Deciding Upon Feature Type and Order
uc
a
tio
Often the same geometry result can be achieved by creating many different
types or combinations of features. It is up to you to decide how best to
create the geometry so when the design is modified later on it updates in a
predictable manner. For example, an extrude is common, but what if any of
the following situations arise:
Fo
r
Ed
You need the profile to change along the extrude length later in the design
In this case, a blend feature may be the better option. You could initially
create the blend straight back, and edit the individual blend sections at
a later time.
The path of extrusion may change In this case, a sweep may be the
better option. You could initially create a straight sweep trajectory, and
modify it at a later time.
You need the feature to rotate In this case, a revolve may be the better
option.
The feature order also has an impact later on if the design is modified. In the
bottom figures, the resulting geometry is identical, but was created differently.
In the left figure, the first feature extrudes the entire length, with subsequent
features adding or removing material. In the right figure, three extrudes were
stacked up in series, with the overall length being created as the sum of the
three features. If the length must be modified later, it is easier to modify the
length of the design in the left figure.
Thinking About Parent/Child Effects

It is important that you do not tie too many features together with parent/child
relationships if not necessary. Rather, use default datum planes. These are
common references and you don't have to worry about them being deleted.
Using default datums also minimizes unwanted parent/child relationships.
Module 25 | Page 22
2009 PTC
Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies
nl
O
na
lU
se
Considerations include:
Assembly type
Static
Dynamic
Mixture
Assembly/Subassembly structure
Choice of base model
Assembly references
Fit/Interference issues
Capture design intent in assemblies by deciding which assembly

type to use, which component is assembled first, and which
constraints are used during the assembly process.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Assembly Structure Examples
Vice Assembly
Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies

Design intent is captured in assemblies by specifying which assembly type to
use, the assembly/sub-assembly structure, choice of base model, assembly
references used, and any fit or interference issues. As a result, you must
carefully consider how to create your assembly to properly capture your
design intent. You can always modify the assembly's design intent, but it is
much easier to do so when you have planned for what changes may occur
later on.
Considerations When Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies

When you create a new assembly in Pro/ENGINEER, consider the options
available for capturing design intent in each of the following areas. The
decisions you make in these areas at the time of feature creation can affect
the overall assembly model later on when you want to make a change.
2009 PTC
Module 25 | Page 23
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Assembly type There are three different types of assemblies that you
can create in Pro/ENGINEER. Create the assembly type that will best fit
your needs:
Static Assemblies are created using constraints. If you choose to
create this type of assembly, determine whether some components
need angular or linear offsets. If so, remember to create the proper
constraint types.
Dynamic Assemblies are created using connections. Determine
whether your assembly needs to contain components that can be
dynamically moved. If so, a dynamic assembly with pin, slider, and
cylinder connections may be your best option.
Mixture Assemblies are created with both static and dynamic
components.
Assembly/Sub-assembly Structure There are usually multiple ways
to assemble components and still achieve the same assembly result.
In the upper figure, notice that in one assembly example component D
is assembled into the sub-assembly SUB, while in the other example it
is assembled directly to the top level. The end result may appear the
same, but may cause the assemblies to behave differently should another
component's placement be modified.
Choice of base model The base model is the first component assembled
into the assembly. It is important to consider which component you choose
as the base model because if all other models reference this component
it becomes difficult to remove the base model.
Assembly references used Remember that the assembly references you
select for placing components creates parent/child relationships between
these components. Make sure to select references that are more robust if
possible, such as selecting surfaces over edges.
Fit or interference issues Determine what happens when you assemble
all your components into the assembly and you find you have interference
or fit issues. Remember that you can always activate components to edit
them within the context of the assembly. Once the top level assembly
is activated and regenerated, the other components update. Be careful
when creating features in components in an assembly because you may
inadvertently select a reference from a different component, and this
creates a parent/child relationship both between the two components and
between the component and the assembly.
Module 25 | Page 24
2009 PTC
Module
26
O
nl
Resolving Failures and Seeking Help

Module Overview
na
lU
se
When using features as the "building blocks" of design models, you

create several references and parent/child relationships between them.
Regeneration failures occur when Pro/ENGINEER cannot successfully
resolve a parent/child relationship, geometric situation, or a missing reference
in a part or assembly model. Because the failure can occur for different
reasons, you need to be able to diagnose the problem in order to correct it.
uc
a
Objectives
tio
In this module, you learn the different reasons why models fail and the tools
and diagnostics available in order to fix those failing models.
Fo
r
Ed

Understand and identify failures.
Analyze geometry, open-section, and missing part references failures.
Analyze missing component failures, missing component reference failures,
and invalid assembly constraint failures.
Understand resolve mode tools.
Learn how to recover models.
Learn to use Pro/ENGINEER's help system.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 1
Understanding and Identifying Failures

When a model fails regeneration the system indicates the failing
features or components.
Failures occur due to:
Invalid/Impossible geometry
Missing/Broken references
Missing models
nl
na
lU
se
Regeneration Caption
uc
a
tio
Regeneration Manager:
Regeneration Caption
Red Highlighting
Model Tree
Model geometry
Failure Indications:
Regeneration Manager
Feature Highlighting
Ed
Understanding and Identifying Failures Theory
Fo
r
When Pro/ENGINEER regenerates a model, it recreates the model feature

by feature, in the order in which each feature was created, and according to
the hierarchy of the parent/child relationship between features. Occasionally
during the model regeneration a problem occurs that causes the model to fail
regeneration. Regeneration can fail for any of the following reasons:
Invalid or impossible geometry.
Missing or broken references between parent/child relationships.
Missing models for an assembly.
The fact that a model fails regeneration is beneficial, as you would not want
to hand off or continue working with a problematic model.
Failure Indications
When a failure occurs, the system alerts you using several methods.
The Regeneration Manager icon in the status bar appears red:
The Regeneration 'Caption' appears. Before you can continue working,
you must acknowledge the failure by clicking OK to accept the failure or
Module 26 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Cancel to undo the changes. Note that there are situations in both part
and assembly modes where the Cancel option is not available.
The system will highlight the failed features or components in the model
tree. The failed items are shown in bold red text and any children of the
failed item are shown in standard red text. In the lower-left figure, the
Chamfer feature is the failing item, and the Round is a child of the failed
Chamfer.
If possible, the system will also highlight failed geometry on the model
in red, with child geometry highlighted in blue.
Using the Regeneration Manager
nl
The Regeneration Manager can be used any time changes are made to a
model to selectively regenerate certain features or components.
na
lU
se
However, the Regeneration Manager is particularly useful during a failure to

identify failed features/components. Once activated in a failure situation,
the Regeneration Manager lists the failed items and any children of the
failed items.
You can then select any of the listed items and right-click to obtain feature
information or reference information for that item. This information can be
useful in determining the cause of the failure, so you can intelligently resolve
the failure.
You can activate the Regeneration Manager in several ways:
tio
By clicking Edit > Regeneration Manager from the main menu.
uc
a
By clicking Regeneration Manager

from main toolbar.
By clicking the icon from the status bar:
Ed
You can click Regeneration Manager

when it appears 'green',
indicating a model is successfully regenerated. When the status bar
icon is green, the Regeneration Manager dialog box does not launch.
Fo
r

when it appears 'yellow',
indicating a model is modified and some features or components need
to be regenerated.
when it appears 'red',
indicating the model has failed regeneration.
Locating Failed Features / Components

Failed features or components are not always immediately identifiable. You
can use these additional methods to locate failed features / components:
Adding a status column in the model tree for Failed or Child of Failed.
.
Search in the model by clicking Find
You can look for features or components that have the status of Failed
or Child of Failed.
Once the failed items are found and selected, you can click Filter Tree
to display only the failed items in the model tree.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 3
Working on Failed Models

Once the failure is acknowledged by clicking OK from the Regeneration
Caption, you can continue working normally, or Save / Erase the model to
resolve at a later time. However, it is recommended that you resolve the
failure as soon as possible by following these three basic steps:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Investigate the failure by obtaining feature information or reference

information.
Resolve the failure by using tools such as Edit or Edit Definition on the
failed feature(s), parent features, or any feature in the model.
You can also use Suppress to remove failing feature(s) from the current
regeneration, or Delete to remove them from the model.
Regenerate the model to obtain a successful regeneration.
Module 26 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Analyzing Geometry Failures

Geometry failures are caused either by geometry that has been
made invalid, or geometry that is impossible to create.
Invalid geometry examples:
Round radii too small or too
large
Blend start points mismatch
Sweep Radii Rule
Extrude Through Until
na
lU
se
nl
Round Radius Too Large
tio
Sweep Radius Section Radius

Comparison
Blend Start Points Mismatch
uc
a
Analyzing Geometry Failures
Ed
When a feature fails due to invalid or impossible geometry, the system

highlights the failing feature and its children in the model tree. A message
such as could not construct feature geometry can then be found in the
feature information. Some examples of invalid or impossible geometry
include:
Fo
r
Round radii too small or too large If a round radius becomes too big for
the geometry that is being rounded then it will fail. In the upper-right figure,
the round in the left image previews properly because it is small enough
to fit on the geometry. In the right image, the round becomes too large for
the size of the geometry and cannot be created. Hence, the yellow round
preview is no longer available.
Blend start points mismatch If the start points between blend sections
become mismatched by too high an angle, the resulting geometry twists
upon itself, which cannot occur. In the lower-right figure, the blend section
start points are mismatched by 90 degrees and the resulting geometry
twists. If the start points are mismatched by 180 degrees, the feature fails.
Sweep radii If a circular section of radius T is swept along a curved
trajectory of radius R, the radius R must be greater than or equal to radius
T or else the resulting geometry will overlap, resulting in invalid geometry.
In the lower-left figure, the circular section is swept along the curved
trajectory, resulting in the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, the
red cross-section lines in the FRONT view show that the geometry does
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 5
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
not overlap. Hence, it is valid and RT. In the right image, however, the
cross-section radius T has grown, as shown by the red cross-section lines.
As a result, the cross-section lines overlap, and thus the geometry overlaps.
So the rule of RT is not valid, and the geometry cannot be created.
Extrude Through Until If a feature is extruded to a depth of Through
Until, the feature must actually pass through the selected reference. If it
does not, the feature fails because the geometry cannot be created.
Module 26 | Page 6
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Geometry Failures

Scenario
Resolve geometry failures in a part model.
Part_Invalid-Geom
Task 1:
geom-failure.prt
Resolve geometry failures using Undo.
4. Click Regenerate
nl
na
lU
se
3. Edit the chamfer D value to 2.

Chamfer 1 and select Edit.
1. Orient to the named view 3D.
tio
5. Notice the failed chamfer and

its children are indicated on the
model and in the model tree.
uc
a
6. Click Cancel to undo the

changes.
Task 2:
Ed
Resolve geometry failures by fixing the failing feature.
1. Orient to the named view

FRONT.
Fo
r

TRAJ_2 and select Edit.
The smallest trajectory radius (R) is 2. The sweep diameter is

currently 3, therefore T=1.5, and RT.
3. Edit the R2 dimension to 1, and click Regenerate
Editing the trajectory radius to 1 violates the RT rule.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 7
4. Click OK to accept the changes.

5. Click Regeneration Manager
from the status bar.
6. Notice the failed sweep feature
and its children, then click
Cancel.
na
lU
se
nl
9. Edit the diameter from 3 to 2.
8. Click Section > Define from the

Protrusion dialog box.
7. Select SWEEP_1 from the model

tree, then right-click and select
Edit Definition.
11. Click OK from the dialog box.

12. Orient to the named view
FRONT.
Resolve geometry failures by fixing a non-failing feature.
uc
a
Task 3:
tio
13. Notice the model has

regenerated successfully.
1. Press CTRL + D.
Ed

SWEEP_1 and select Edit.
Fo
r
3. Edit the diameter from 2 to 3 and

press CTRL + G.
4. Click OK to accept the result.
5. Select TRAJ_2 from the model
tree. Right-click and select Edit.
6. Edit the radius to 2 and press

CTRL + G.
7. Notice the model has
regenerated successfully.
Module 26 | Page 8
2009 PTC
Analyzing Open Section Failures

Open section failures occur when the open section extends
beyond the solid geometry that bounds it.
nl
Open section features must be

bounded by other solids.
Could not intersect part with
feature failure.
tio
na
lU
se
Open Section Sketch Failure
uc
a
Open Section Versus Closed

Section
Open Section Sketch Feature
Ed
Analyzing Open Section Failures
Fo
r
Most sketches for solid features should be closed sketches. However, when
the design intent dictates that the sketch be an open section, the resulting
feature must be bounded by other solid geometry. In the lower-right figure,
the highlighted feature was extruded from an open-section sketch.
However, if the depth is extended further than the bounding solid geometry,
the feature fails because it is no longer bounded entirely by solid geometry,
as shown in the upper figure.
When a feature fails due to an open section, the system highlights the failing
feature and its children in the model tree. A message such as could not
intersect part with feature can then be found in the feature information.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 9
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Open Section Failures

Scenario
Resolve an open-section failure in a part model.
open-sec_fail.prt
Part_Open-Section
Task 1:
Resolve an open-section failure in a part model.
nl

LEFT_TOOTH and select Edit.
3. Click Regenerate
na
lU
se
2. Edit the height from 9 to 11.
tio
4. Notice the failed feature and its

children are highlighted.
uc
a
6. From the status bar, click
Ed
Fo
r
7. Select the failing LEFT_TOOTH

feature, right-click and select
Feature Info.
8. Notice the system could not
intersect the part with the
feature, and the feature is
unattached.
9. In the Browser, scroll down to

Section Data and notice that
the feature was created with an
open section.
Module 26 | Page 10
2009 PTC
10. Scroll back up to the Children

section for RIGHT_TOOTH and
click Feature Info
11. Scroll down to Section Data and

notice that this feature does not
indicate an open section.
12. Minimize the Browser.
nl
na
lU
se
15. Notice that the open section is

visible in the feature preview.
The system cannot create the
open section protrusion past the
existing solid material.
14. Right-click LEFT_TOOTH from

the model tree and select Edit
Definition.
13. Click Cancel from the

Regeneration Manager.
tio

window and select Edit Internal
Sketch.
uc
a
18. Click Concentric Arc , select

the existing arc, and sketch an
arc to close the section.
.
Ed
Fo
r

Orientation.
22. Notice the model regenerates

successfully.
Alternatively, this failure
could have been resolved
by increasing the height of
the main cylinder, so the
open section would not fall
off the edge of the cylinder.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 11
Analyzing Missing Part References Failures

Missing part reference failures occur when a parent feature is
changed, and the child feature can no longer find the parent's
reference.
na
lU
se
nl
Missing part reference failure

examples include:
Missing axes
Missing references for
rounds/chamfers
Editing a sketch
Replace sketched entities
Replace Sketcher
dimensions
Ed
uc
a
tio
Sketch Feature Referencing

Hole Axis
Editing a Sketch
Fo
r
Round Edges
Analyzing Missing Part References Failures
When a change is made to a parent feature it automatically updates

any children. This is beneficial functionality and shows the power of
Pro/ENGINEER. However, if a change to a parent feature results in a child
not being able to find a particular parent's reference, a failure occurs.
When a feature fails due to a missing reference, the system highlights the
failing feature and its children in the model tree. A message such as feature
references are missing can then be found in the feature information.
The following are common examples of why missing part reference failures
occur:
Missing axes In the upper-right figure, the slot sketch is dimensioned off
of the hole axis. If the hole is deleted, its axis is deleted, and therefore the
dimensioning reference for the slot is deleted. Thus, the slot feature will
now fail due to missing part references.
Module 26 | Page 12
2009 PTC
Using the Replace Function
nl
Missing references for rounds or chamfers Occurs if you delete or

redefine a feature and remove the edge that a round or chamfer uses. In
the lower-left figure, the edges where the boss intersects the remainder
of the part are rounded. If the boss is deleted, the edges are therefore
deleted, and the rounds will fail. Missing references can also occur if
you insert a feature before the round or chamfer that causes the edge to
be removed. For example, if you cut material off of an extrude feature,
consequently cutting the edge off that a round references, the round will fail.
Editing a sketch Can result in changed or removed edges and surfaces
in a model. If those changed or removed edges and surfaces are parents
to other features, failures can occur. In the lower-right figure, the sketched
entity is being deleted because you want to modify the sketch. However,
Pro/ENGINEER informs you that this entity is referenced by other entities.
If you choose to continue and delete this entity, the child features will fail
due to this reference being removed.
na
lU
se
One way to help mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketches
is to use the Replace function. The Replace function transfers references
from an old entity to the new entity you have created. You can click Edit >
Replace from the main menu while in Sketcher to access Replace. You then
select the original entity that contains the references, then select the new
entity you want references transferred to.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
You can also replace dimensions within Sketcher. When you select a
dimension to replace you must create the new dimension. The new
dimension will maintain the original dimension's sd#, enabling any relations
using the sketcher dimension to remain valid.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 13
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Part References

Failures
Scenario
Resolve missing references part failures.
missing-ref_fail.prt
Part_Missing-Ref
Resolve a failure caused by missing part references.
Task 1:
O
na
lU
se

right-click and select Edit
Internal Sketch.
nl

BASE_PROTRUSION.
4. Select the right side angled line,

right-click, and select Delete.
5. Read the warning message and
click Yes.
uc
a
tio
6. Click 3-Point / Tangent End

Arc and sketch an arc in its
place
Ed
9. Notice SIDE_ROUND and its

children fail.
Fo
r

SIDE_ROUND and select Info >
Feature.
12. Notice that SIDE_ROUND
is failing because feature
references are missing.
13. Close the Browser.
Module 26 | Page 14
2009 PTC

SIDE_ROUND.
tab, select Set 2, and click in the
Driving surface collector.
16. Spin the model and select the
surface shown to satisfy the
missing reference.
nl

successfully.
Task 2:
na
lU
se
Transfer references using Replace to avoid a missing references

failure.

BASE_PROTRUSION.

right-click and select Edit
Internal Sketch.
3. Select the right arc and click
uc
a
tio
Mirror
.
Select the vertical centerline.
Fo
r
Ed
4. Select the left angled line.

Click Edit > Replace.
Select the newly mirrored arc.
Click Yes from the Replace
Entity dialog box.
By using the Replace

functionality, you have
transferred references to
the arc entity, thus avoiding
a failure.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 15
Analyzing Missing Component Failures

Missing component failures occur when Pro/ENGINEER cannot
find all the components it needs to properly open an assembly.
nl
Reasons include:
Component renamed on
operating system.
Component renamed in
Pro/ENGINEER without
assembly in session.
Component located in a
different folder on operating
system.
tio
na
lU
se
Folder View of Components
uc
a
Assembly and Model Tree
Analyzing Missing Component Failures
Fo
r
Ed
If an assembly fails regeneration due to a missing component, the system

highlights the failing component and its children in the model tree. A
message such as Component model missing can then be found in the
feature information for that component. Reasons for missing components
in assemblies include:
The component was renamed in the operating system Pro/ENGINEER
does not know that the component was renamed if it was done on the
operating system. Consequently, the assembly containing this renamed
component fails because it is looking for the component with the old name.
The component was renamed in Pro/ENGINEER without the assembly
in session Again, if the assembly containing the component is not in
session at the time one of its components is renamed, the assembly
continues to look for the original name, and thus the assembly fails.
The component was moved to a different folder. If a component is
moved from its original location, Pro/ENGINEER continues to look for the
component in its old location. Because the component has been moved,
the assembly fails. In the upper figure, component HANDLE.PRT has
been moved out of the Assy_Missing-Comp folder and placed in the
Handle_Folder. Because the assembly requires this component (it can be
seen in the model tree in the lower figure), it fails when opened.
Module 26 | Page 16
2009 PTC
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component Failures

Scenario
Resolve a missing component failure in an assembly.
missing-comp_fail.asm
Assy_Missing-Comp
Task 1:
Resolve a missing component failure in an assembly.
1. Notice a failure occurs when

opening the assembly.
na
lU
se
nl
2. Also notice the message window

states that the system Can not
retrieve model HANDLE.
, Erase Not Displayed
, and click OK.
tio

from the Navigator.
Double-click Handle_Folder.
Notice that this sub-folder
contains HANDLE.PRT, which
is the cause of the failure.
uc
a
again.
6. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to open it.
Ed
7. The assembly fails for the same reason.

Fo
r
.
Notice the HANDLE
component within the
JAW_SUB assembly has
failed.
9. In the Regeneration Manager,

right-click the HANDLE.PRT and
select Feature Info.
Notice the handle is failing
because the model is missing.
Close the browser.
10. Click Cancel from the
Regeneration Manager.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 17
11. Click Find

.
Select Component as the
Look For option.
Select the Status tab, and
select Failed as the Value.
Click Find Now and then click
Close.
nl
O
na
lU
se
13. Right-click HANDLE.PRT

and select Retrieve Missing
Component.
Double-click Handle_Folder if
necessary.
Select HANDLE.PRT, and
click Open.
12. Notice the HANDLE.PRT is

located in the model tree, and
then select the JAW_SUB.ASM
to highlight it.
tio
14. Press CTRL+ G to regenerate

the model. Notice it regenerates
successfully.
and click OK.
uc
a
15. Click Save
, Erase Not Displayed

.
Ed
, and click OK.
18. Double-click Handle_Folder.
Fo
r
19. Right-click HANDLE.PRT and

select Cut.
from the Navigator, and click in
the Browser to de-select any
files.
21. Right-click in the Browser and

select Paste.
22. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to verify the failure has
been fixed.
Module 26 | Page 18
2009 PTC
Analyzing Missing Component Reference

Failures
Missing Component Reference failures occur because a
component feature is modified that removes the reference used
for its placement or its children's placement in an assembly.
na
lU
se
nl
Failure displays as:

Failed to regenerate
component
placement.
Feature references
are missing.
uc
a
tio
Parent/Child Relationship Graph
Model Tree and Assembly
Ed
Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures
Fo
r
If a component's placement cannot be resolved in an assembly,

Pro/ENGINEER reports the failure in the message window as Some features
failed to regenerate. Remember, this message is within assembly mode,
so the feature is actually a failing component in this context. Feature
information on the failing component will reveal messages such as Failed
to regenerate component placement or Feature references are missing.
This type of failure occurs when features in a component are modified that
have parents or children in an assembly. If the feature modification removes
the reference used in the assembly, this causes either the component or the
component's children to fail placement.
In the upper figure, the Reference Viewer displays the parent/child
relationships for the JAW_SLIDE.PRT component in the assembly.
Component LEADSCREW.PRT is a child to the jaw slide component. In
looking at the Reference Graph, LEADSCREW.PRT is assembled to surface
id 238 of JAW_SLIDE.PRT. As such, if the feature containing surface id 238
in JAW_SLIDE.PRT were modified, it could cause the leadscrew to fail.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 19
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Missing Component Reference

Failures
Scenario
Resolve a missing component reference failure.
jaw_slide.prt
Assy_Missing-Ref
1. Select Hole 2.
na
lU
se
2. A leadscrew in the assembly

mates to the flat base surface of
this hole.
nl
Resolve a missing component reference failure.
Task 1:

Click Drill Hole Profile
uc
a
tio

Shape tab.
Notice that the flat base
surface of the hole has been
replaced by a drill point.
Ed
Fo
r

from the Navigator.
Double-click
MISSING-REFS.ASM to
open it.
8. Notice that the assembly fails to
regenerate, but still displays all
components.
Module 26 | Page 20
2009 PTC

10. Notice that LEADSCREW.PRT

within JAW_SUB.ASM is failing.
nl
na
lU
se
13. Close the browser, and click

Cancel from the Regeneration
Manager.
12. Notice that LEADSCREW.PRT is

failing due to missing placement
references.
11. Right-click LEADSCREW.PRT

and select Feature Info.
14. Expand JAW_SUB.ASM in the

model tree.
tio
15. Notice the failed

LEADSCREW.PRT and its
failing child component are
highlighted.
uc
a
Remember, you can click

start the Search
Find
tool to search for failing
components and features.
Ed
16. Right-click JAW_SLIDE.PRT and

select Activate.
Fo
r
17. Select Hole 2.

18. Click Edit > Definition from the
main menu.
19. In the dashboard, click

Rectangle Hole Profile
remove the drill point.
to
21. Click Window > Activate.


successfully.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 21
Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures
nl
O
Invalid Assembly Constraints
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Reasons include:
Parent components modified or
deleted
Features in parent components
modified or deleted
Fix the failure:
Modify features to satisfy
constraints
Change constraints
Suppress or freeze component
Invalid assembly constraint failures occur when constraints

from one set conflict with constraints from another set for a
given component.
Ed
Features Modified to Satisfy

Constraints
Insert Constraints Disabled
Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures
Fo
r
Assembly constraints are based on component references. A component's

references can change, and therefore become invalid. This can occur if
parent assembly components are modified or deleted, or if the features in
parent components are modified or deleted. In the upper figure, the ends of
a rod are inserted into holes on each block using Insert constraints. The
holes in the transparent block were then moved outward, without modifying
the holes on the other block. Consequently the holes do not line up, and it
becomes impossible for the rod ends to be inserted into both holes given
the misalignment. The result is that the rod constraints become invalid.
Pro/ENGINEER then issues a failure and reports it as Failed to regenerate
component placement in the feature information for the failed component.
Fixing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures

When assembly constraints become invalid, you can do one of three things:
Modify features to satisfy constraints You can modify either the features
in the failing component or in the other components. In the lower-left
Module 26 | Page 22
2009 PTC
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
figure, the holes in the other two components were moved outward so
all constraints are again satisfied.
Change constraints You can constrain the component differently so
all constraints are satisfied, or you can disable constraints. Disabling
constraints maintains the original references, but makes the constraint
inactive for regeneration purposes. In the lower-right figure, the Insert
constraints for the rods were disabled. Notice that the components are still
misaligned with respect to the holes. The disabled constraints can always
be re-enabled at a later time. You can also disable constraints to test out
different assembly scenarios.
Suppress or freeze the failing component You can then either modify the
part or delete it from the assembly at a later time.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 23
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint

Failures
Scenario
Resolve invalid assembly constraint failures.
Assy_Invalid-Const
Resolve invalid assembly constraint failures.
Task 1:
invalid-const.asm
nl
Our goal is to modify the rod spacing by modifying the hole

spacing from 10 to 8 for the three block-shaped components.
na
lU
se

JAW_FIXED.PRT and select
Activate.
Select the hole on the right.
Right-click and select Edit.
tio
2. Edit the offset value from 10 to 8.
uc
a

4. Click Regenerate
Ed
5. Failures occur. Click OK.
Fo
r
6. Notice that the two ROD.PRT

components and their child
assembly fails.
7. Right-click the first ROD.PRT in
the model tree and select Info >
Feature.
8. Notice that ROD.PRT failed to
regenerate due to component
placement.
9. Close the browser.
Module 26 | Page 24
2009 PTC
10. Right-click the first ROD.PRT

and select Edit Definition.
na
lU
se
13. The first ROD.PRT now

regenerates successfully.
nl
11. In the dashboard, notice that

the constraint STATUS is
Constraints Invalid.
Select the Placement tab.
Placement has failed due to
conflicting Insert constraints.
Select the second Insert
constraint and clear the
Constraint Enabled check
box for testing purposes.
tio
14. Right-click the second ROD.PRT

and select Edit Definition.
Ed
uc
a
15. Notice the dashboard constraint

status.
Select the Placement tab.
Select the second Insert
constraint and clear the
Constraint Enabled check
box.
.
Fo
r

17. The second ROD.PRT now
regenerates successfully
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 25
18. The JAW_SUB.ASM fails

because its hole spacing still
needs to be modified.
19. Expand JAW_SUB.ASM.
20. Right-click JAW_SLIDE.PRT and
select Activate.
21. Select the lower right hole,
22. Edit the offset value from 10 to 8.
nl
26. Notice the model now

regenerates successfully.
na
lU
se
25. Collapse JAW_SUB.ASM.
tio
27. Zoom in and notice the rod

misalignment. Recall that the
Insert constraints were disabled
at this end.
uc
a

HEAD_BLOCK.PRT and select
Activate.
Fo
r
Ed
29. Double-click the bottom right

hole and edit its offset from 10 to
8.

32. The hole spacing has been

resolved for all three block
components.
The Insert constraints
for this end could now
be re-enabled to detect
misalignment in the future.
Module 26 | Page 26
2009 PTC
Understanding Resolve Mode Tools

You can activate Resolve Mode if desired to deal with failures.
nl
O
Resolve Menu
tio
na
lU
se
preferences
Feature Handling
No Resolve Mode (default)
Resolve Mode
Config.pro option
regen_failure_handling
no_resolve_mode (default)
resolve_mode
Activate Resolve Mode using:
Failure Diagnostics Window
uc
a
Understanding Resolve Mode
Ed
If desired, you can activate Pro/ENGINEER's traditional Resolve Mode upon

a regeneration failure. Resolve mode is a menu-manager driven system that
provides tools and diagnostics to resolve the current failure. You can activate
Resolve Mode by changing preferences in the Regeneration Manager, or by
using the regen_failure_handling config.pro option.
Fo
r
The Resolve Mode Environment
When you activate Resolve Mode, the following occurs:
The message window displays a message about the failure.

The failing feature and all subsequent features remain unregenerated and
therefore are not displayed.
The Failure Diagnostics window appears, providing you with information
about the failing feature. The Failure Diagnostics window is shown in the
lower figure.
The Resolve menu appears which uses the traditional menu manager
interface. The Resolve menu is shown in the upper figure. When using
Resolve Mode, you must specify your intended action first such as Modify
(Edit) or Redefine (Edit Definition), and then select an object such as a
feature or component.
The option to Save is disabled until the failure is resolved.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 27
Failure Diagnostics Window

The Failure Diagnostics window prominently displays above the graphics
window upon entering Resolve Mode, and is one of the tools available
for resolving or preventing the regeneration problem that has occurred. It
displays the following options:
Overview Displays help information on the various Resolve mode tools.
Feature Info Displays the Feature Information for the failing feature
in the Browser.
Resolve Hints If a resolve hint exists, the system displays this link. Click
the link for a suggestion on how to fix the problem.
nl
Resolve Menu
The Resolve menu is the other tool available for resolving or preventing the
regeneration problem that has occurred, and contains these main options:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Undo Changes Undo all the changes that caused the failure.
Current Model/Backup Model For both Investigating and fixing
the problem, you can choose to work on the current (failed) model
or the backup model. The backup model shows all features in their
pre-regenerated state, and can be used to modify or restore dimensions of
the features that are not displayed in the current (failed) model. You can
toggle back and forth between the current and backup model.
Investigate Enables you to investigate the cause of the model failure.
You can list the changes made to items, show every object referenced by
the failed feature, report geometrical misalignments found during the last
regeneration, and roll the model back to a specified feature.
Quick Fix Enables you to fix the failing feature by performing standard
operations including Redefine, Reroute, Suppress, Clip Suppress, and
Delete. Reroute enables you to reroute the failing feature's references to
prevent failures in subsequent features. Clip Suppress suppresses not only
the failing feature, but all subsequent features, too. Depending upon the
operation selected, the Undo Changes option may become unavailable.
Fix Model Enables you to fix other features in the model to fix the
failing feature. Using fix model enables you to create, delete, suppress, or
redefine other features. It also enables you to modify the dimensions of
the other non-failing features in the model, as well as restore all modified
dimensions to their previous values. Again, depending upon the operation
selected the Undo Changes option becomes unavailable.
You must click Regenerate in the menu manager after a change
is made to the model. While in Resolve Mode, the regenerate
icon is disabled since the resolve menu contains Regenerate in
the menu manager.
Yes / No When you have fixed the regeneration failure using Resolve
Mode, you can click Yes to exit Resolve Mode and return to normal
operation. You can also click No to remain in Resolve Mode if desired .
Module 26 | Page 28
2009 PTC
Recovering Models
You can recover models in the event of a system crash.
Dialog appears automatically upon restart:
na
lU
se
nl
Retrieve
Opens previous model
Continue
Starts fresh Pro/ENGINEER session
tio
Retrieval Dialog Box
uc
a
Recovering Models
Ed
In the event of a system crash, Pro/ENGINEER captures a snapshot of the

models in session, as well as any applied configuration settings.
Upon restarting Pro/ENGINEER, you are prompted to either Retrieve the
previous model or Continue onto a fresh Pro/ENGINEER session.
Fo
r
Using the Retrieve option is very useful to avoid lost work on your models.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 29
Using Pro/ENGINEER Help

There are numerous types of help that you can obtain, either
from Pro/ENGINEER or from links on PTC's Online Resources.
You can get help from any
of the following locations in
Pro/ENGINEER:
Help Center
nl
icon
What's This?
Online Resources
System Information
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
Online Resource Center
Using the Index Tab
Using the Search Tab
Ed
Using the Help Center
Fo
r
The Help Center provides access to Pro/ENGINEER's help system. Within

the Help Center you can find information on specific modeling topics, as well
as tutorials, books, and quick links. You can open the Help Center by clicking
Help > Help Center from the main menu.
The Help Center is subdivided into various Functional Areas to help narrow
down your search regarding a given question. Once the Functional Area has
been selected, you can further drill down within specific Books.
The Functional Areas and Books, respectively, pertaining to the Introduction

to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 5.0 are:
Functional Area
Book
Fundamentals
Pro/ENGINEER Fundamentals
Part Modeling
Part Modeling, Sketcher
Assembly Design
Pro/ENGINEER Assembly
Detailed Drawings
Detailed Drawings
Module 26 | Page 30
2009 PTC
Once the desired Functional Area and Book has been selected, you further
narrow your search for information by browsing in sub-books.
You may also use the Search tab to type specific keywords and return a list of
topics that satisfy those keywords. You can also use the Index tab to either
browse for index terms or type in a keyword to find.
Using the What's This Icon
nl
You can use the What's This?

icon to interactively get context-sensitive
information on a specific topic by selecting the icon or menu item in the
Pro/ENGINEER interface that you want more information on. Clicking the
icon or menu item in the Pro/ENGINEER interface launches the Help Center,
which displays information about the item you selected.
Using Online Resources
na
lU
se
You can click Help > Online Resources from the main menu to launch the
Pro/ENGINEER Help dialog box and display links to various information
found online at PTC's Web site, as shown in the upper figure. Links to online
resources include:
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
Support Get links to contacting technical support and logging calls

online.
Getting Started with Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire A tutorial-based
introduction to creating parts, assemblies, and drawings.
Quick Reference Card Provides a handy quick reference for toolbars,
selection, and controls.
Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Menu Mapper Enables you to learn the
new location of menu selections from older versions of Pro/ENGINEER
software.
Personal Productivity Tools Provides you tips to become more
productive with Pro/ENGINEER.
Demos, Tools & Tutorials Gives you access to additional demos and
tutorials that were developed by product experts.
What's New in Pro/ENGINEER Enables you to find out what is new in
the latest release of Pro/ENGINEER.
Discussion Forums Enables you to view posts and replies from other
customers to their questions, as well as make posts of your own.
Getting System Information

Clicking Help > System Information from the main menu launches the
System Information dialog box. This dialog box provides the following
information:
License Information Provides important licensing information if you ever
need to log a call with Technical Support.
Configured Modules Displays which Pro/ENGINEER optional license
extensions are being used.
Machine Information Provides information about the machine that
Pro/ENGINEER is running on.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 31
PROCEDURE - Using Pro/ENGINEER Help

Scenario
Use Pro/ENGINEER's various help options.
Create New
Help
Use the Help Center.
na
lU
se
3. In the Pro/ENGINEER Help

dialog box, click
next to
Pro/ENGINEER Functional
Areas to expand it.
, select Part, type help as the Name, and click OK.
nl
1. Click New
2. Click Help > Help Center from the main menu.
Task 1:
Ed
uc
a
tio
Click
next to Part Modeling
to expand it.
Select Part Modeling to
expand it.
Select Engineering Features
to expand it.
Select Rib to expand it.
Select Profile Rib to expand
it.
Click About the Profile Rib
Feature.
Fo
r
4. Scroll through the information on

the Rib feature.
5. In the Help Center Search field,
type line tangent and click
Search.
6. Notice that the system switches
to the Search tab automatically
and displays a list of results
based on the search criteria
entered.
7. In the list of results, click

To Create a Line Segment
Tangent to Two Entities and
read the associated information.
8. Close the Pro/ENGINEER Help
dialog box.
Module 26 | Page 32
2009 PTC
Task 2:
Use the What's This? Help Functionality.
1. Click Help > What's This? from

the main menu.
2. Click the grayed out Shell Tool
.
3. The Help Center appears.
Task 3:
na
lU
se
6. Click Insert > Sweep >

menu and notice that the Help
Center appears.
nl
from the
5. Click What's This?

main toolbar.
4. Close the Pro/ENGINEER Help

dialog box.
Use the Help Online Resources.
1. Click Help > Online Resources

from the main menu. Note that
tio
you can also click Home

from the Browser.
Ed
uc
a
2. Notice the various links for

Tutorials, the Quick Reference
Card, Demos, Discussion
Forum, and What's New in
Pro/ENGINEER.
Fo
r
3. Click Support from the menu

bar at the top of the page.
Click Contact via Phone along
the left side. If prompted, type
your PTC username and
password.
Locate the number for your
location in the PDF file.
Task 4:
Use System Information Help.
1. Click Help > System Information from the main menu. Notice the
information available under the License Information, Configured
Option Modules, and Machine Information.
2009 PTC
Module 26 | Page 33
y
nl
O
na
lU
se
tio
uc
a
Ed
Fo
r
Module 26 | Page 34
2009 PTC
Module
27
O
nl
Project II
Module Overview
na
lU
se
Using Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire and the remainder of the skills learned in this
course, complete the following project design tasks.
Objectives
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio

Create the FLANGE.PRT model.
Complete the ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT, and
FRAME.PRT models.
Create the PISTON_ASSY.ASM, BLOWER.ASM, ENGINE.ASM., and
ENGINE_BLOWER.ASM assemblies.
Create the ENGINE-BLOWER_MODELS.DRW drawing.
Analyze and Resolve Interferences.
2009 PTC
Module 27 | Page 1
The Air Circulator

In this project, you will create, assemble, and document
components of the Air Circulator.
nl
Create from scratch:

Part
Assembly
Drawing
Completed Models for
Reference
Project Scenario
na
lU
se
Air Circulator
tio
ACME Incorporated develops and markets several consumer, industrial, and

defense goods. The Light Industrial Division of ACME creates a number of
products, including industrial fans, heating, air conditioning, and pumps. You
work for the Light Industrial Division of ACME Inc., which has just started to
use Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire for its product designs.
uc
a
Upon returning from Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire training, you are assigned to

create the AC-40 Air Circulator.
Ed
Fo
r
Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned in
the course, instructions for each project step will be minimal. There will be no
step-by-step "picks and clicks" given. This provides you with a chance to test
your knowledge of the materials as you proceed though the project.
Completed Models for Reference
Be sure to save all project models within the working subfolder of the
Project_II classroom folder structure. The project folder also contains a
sub-folder named completed. Here you will find a completed version of each
model in the project. These completed models can be used as reference if
required.
Module 27 | Page 2
2009 PTC
Piston Assembly
nl
This slide illustrates the final piston assembly you will create
from the previously created components in this project.
PISTON.PRT
na
lU
se
PISTON_PIN.PRT
PISTON_ASSY.ASM
uc
a
tio
CONNECTING_ROD.PRT
Creating the Piston Assembly
Fo
r
Ed
This slide illustrates the final piston assembly to be created in this project.
This assembly is created using the components that were created in the
previous project.
2009 PTC
Module 27 | Page 3
Engine Block and Drawing
CRANKSHAFT.PRT
nl
This slide illustrates the final engine block and drawing to be

completed in this project.
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT
Ed
ENGINE-BLOWER_MODELS.DRW
Fo
r
Completing the Engine Block and Engine-Blower Models Drawing

This slide illustrates the final engine block and drawing to be completed in this
project. The engine block was started in the previous project. The drawing
will be a two sheet drawing referencing both the crankshaft and completed
engine_block models.
Module 27 | Page 4
2009 PTC
Blower Assembly
FLANGE.PRT
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT
nl
This slide illustrates the components and final blower assembly

you will complete in this project.
BLOWER.ASM
Ed
IMPELLER.PRT
Fo
r
Completing the Flange, Impeller, Impeller Housing, and Blower

Assembly
This slide illustrates the flange, impeller, impeller housing, and blower
assembly to be completed in this project. The impeller and impeller housing
were started in the previous project.
2009 PTC
Module 27 | Page 5
Engine Blower Assembly
ENGINE.ASM
ENGINE_BLOWER.ASM
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
FRAME.PRT
na
lU
se
nl
This slide illustrates the final frame component, engine

assembly, and final engine blower assembly you will create in
this project.
Creating the Frame, Engine Assembly, and Engine Blower

Assembly
This slide illustrates the final frame, engine assembly, and engine blower
assembly to be created in this project. The frame was started in the previous
project.
Module 27 | Page 6
2009 PTC
Completing the Design
Assembling the BOLT.PRT
uc
a
tio
BOLT.PRT
na
lU
se
nl
This slide illustrates the bolts assembled in this project. The

assembly will then be evaluated for interferences and then
modified as required.
Ed
Assembling the BOLT.PRT
Viewing Interference
Fo
r
Inserting the Bolt
In the previous project, you created bolts of various lengths. In this project,
they will be inserted throughout the assembly. Cut and paste functionality will
be used to quickly assemble every bolt.
Interference and Collision Detection

Before the design is completed, you will check for interferences between the
components. Design modifications will be made to remove the interferences
and finalize the design.
2009 PTC
Module 27 | Page 7
Copyright
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Copyright 2009 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its
subsidiary companies (collectively PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and
other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use
of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in
printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use
and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any
copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC.
Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation
may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or
transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no
authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without
notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains
valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the
United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium,
disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL
DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is,
and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and
we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including
public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and
scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This
data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized
distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection
and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and
contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.
For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information:
For Windchill products, select About Windchill at the bottom of the product page. For InterComm
products, on the Help main page, click the link for Copyright 20xx. For other products, click Help >
About on the main menu of the product.
Registered Trademarks of PTC
Advanced Surface Design, Advent, Arbortext, Behavioral Modeling, CADDS, Calculation
Management Suite, CoCreate, Computervision, CounterPart, Create Collaborate Control, Designate,
EPD, EPD.Connect, Epic Editor, Expert Machinist, GRANITE, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine,
InPart, InterComm, IsoCompose, IsoDraw, IsoView, ITEDO, Mathcad, Mathsoft, MECHANICA,
NetRegulus, NetRM, the NetRegulus logo, Optegra, OneSpace, Parametric Technology, Parametric
Technology Corporation, PartSpeak, PHOTORENDER, ProductPoint, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/E,
Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, Product First,
Product Development Means Business, Product Makes the Company, PTC, the PTC logo,
PT/Products, Shaping Innovation, Simple Powerful Connected, StudyWorks, The Product
Development Company, The Way to Product First, Wildfire, Windchill, Windchill DynamicDesignLink,
Windchill MPMLink, Windchill PartsLink, Windchill PDMLink..
Trademarks of PTC
3B2, 3DPAINT, Arbortext Editor, Arbortext Content Manager, Arbortext Contributor, Arbortext
Companion for Word, Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher, Arbortext Publishing Engine, Arbortext
Dynamic Link Manager, Arbortext Styler, Arbortext Architect, Arbortext Digital Media Publisher,
Arbortext CSDB for S1000D, Arbortext IETP Viewer for S1000D, Arbortext Reviewer for
S1000D, Arbortext Authoring Interface for S1000D, Arbortext Editor for S1000D, Arbortext
Publisher for S1000D, Arbortext Provisioning Manager, Arbortext Provisioning Reviewer, Arbortext
Provisioning Transaction Manager, Arbortext Parts Catalog Manager for S1000D, Arbortext
Learning Content Manager for S1000D, Arbortext Learning Management System, Arbortext
Reviewer for EAGLE, Arbortext LSA Interface, Associative Topology Bus, AutobuildZ, Auto
Round, CDRS, CoCreate Modeling, CoCreate Drafting, CoCreate Model Manager, CoCreate
Drawing Manager, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker,
Create Collaborate Control Communicate, ECAD Compare, EDAcompare, EDAconduit,
DataDoctor, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, Distributed Services Manager, DIVISION, e/ENGINEER,
eNC Explorer, Expert Framework, Expert MoldBase, Expert Toolmaker, FlexPDM, FlexPLM,
Harmony, Import Data Doctor, InSight, InterComm Expert, InterComm EDAcompare, InterComm
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
EDAconduit, collective creativity, ISSM, KDiP, Knowledge Discipline in Practice, Knowledge System
Driver, ModelCHECK, MoldShop, NC Builder, PDS Workbench, POLYCAPP, Pro/ANIMATE,
Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COLLABORATE,
Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONCEPT, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER,
Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE,
Pro/FEM POST, Pro/FICIENCY, Pro/FLY THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS, Pro/INTERFACE,
Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/Manikin, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View,
Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC ADVANCED, Pro/NC CHECK, Pro/NC MILL, Pro/NC POST, Pro/NC
SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC TURN, Pro/NC WEDM, Pro/NC Wire EDM, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR,
Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR,
Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN TOOLS,
Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/TABLE, Pro/TOOLMAKER, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link,
Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, ProductView, ProductView ECAD Compare, ProductView
Validate, PTC Precision, PTC DesignQuest, PTC Channel Advantage, Realized Value Platform,
Routed Systems Designer, Shrinkwrap, Validation Manager, Warp, Windchill ProjectLink, Windchill
SupplyLink, Windchill RequirementsLink, and Windchill Supplier Management..
Patents of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary
Registration numbers and issue dates follow. Additionally, equivalent patents may be issued or
pending outside of the United States. Contact PTC for further information. 5,771,392/23-June-1998;
(EP)0240557/02-October-1986;
5,423,023/05-June-1990;
4,956,771/11-September-1990;
5,058,000/15-October-1991;
5,140,321/18-August-1992;
5,297,053/22-March-1994;
5,428,772/27-June-1995;
5,469,538/21-Nov-1995;
5,469,538/21-November-1995;
5,506,950/09-April-1996;
4,310,614/30-April-1996;
5,513,316/30-April-1996;
5,526,475/11-June-1996;
5,561,747/01-October-1996;
5,526,475/6-November-1996;
5,557,176/09-November-1996;
5,680,523/21-October-1997;
5,689,711/18-November-1997;
5,771,392/23-June-1998;
5,838,331/17-November-1998;
5,844,555/01-Dec-1998;
5,844,555/1-December-1998;
5,850,535/15-December-1998;
4,310,615/21-December-1998;
4,310,614/22-April-1999;
6,275,866/14-Aug-2001;
6,275,866/14-August-2001;
6,308,144/23-October-2001;
6,447,223B1/10-Sept-2002;
6,473,673B1/29-October-2002;
PCT
03/05061/13-Feb-2003;
6,545,671B1/08-April-2003;
GB2354683B/04-June-2003;
GB2354683B/04-June-2003;
6,580,428B1/17-June-2003;
GB2354685B/18-June-2003;
GB2354684B/02-July-2003;
6,608,623B1/19-August-2003;
6,608,623B1/19-August-2003;
6,625,607B1/23-September-2003; GB2354924/24-September-2003; GB2384125/15-October-2003;
GB2354686/15-October-2003; GB2353376/05-November-2003; GB2354096/12-November-2003;
GB2353115/10-December-2003; 6,665,569B1/16-December-2003; (KO)415475/6-January-2004;
GB2388003B/21-January-2004;
GB2365567/10-March-2004;
EU0812447/26-May-2004;
GB2363208/25-August-2004;
GB2366639B/13-October-2004;
7,006,956/28-February-2006;
7,013,246B1/14-March-2006;
7,013,468/14-March-2006;
(JP)3,962,109/25-May-2007;
7,464,007B2/09-December-2008.
Third-Party Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator, Distiller, FrameMaker and the Acrobat logo are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. ANSYS is a registered trademark of ANSYS Inc. I
Run and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of Alias Ltd. TeX is a trademark of the American
Mathematical Society. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, Panther, and Tiger are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor, and RealDWG are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. BEA
WebLogic Server and BEA WebLogic Platform are trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. CATIA and
CADAM are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes, S.A. The Sigma Check icon, CETOL,
CETOL 6 Sigma are trademarks of Sigmetrix, LLC. MEDUSA and STHENO are trademarks of
CAD Schroer GmbH. Allegro, Cadence, and Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence
Design Systems, Inc. Cognos is a registered trademark of Cognos Corporation. CYA, iArchive,
HOTbackup, and Virtual StandBy are trademarks or registered trademarks of CYA Technologies,
Inc. DataDirect Connect is a registered trademark of DataDirect Technologies. Documentum
is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor
Company. JAWS is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific BLV Group, LLC in the United
States and other countries. Geomagic is a registered trademark of Geomagic, Inc. 2D DCM,
3D DCM, CDM and AEM are trademarks of D-Cubed Ltd. HP, Hewlett-Packard, and HP-UX are
registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM, DB2, DOORS, AIX, and WebSphere
are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Advanced ClusterProven, ClusterProven, the
ClusterProven design, Rational Rose, and Rational ClearCase are trademarks or registered
trademarks of International Business Machines in the United States and other countries and are
used under license. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of
this software product. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. OrbixWeb is a registered
trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. Feature-Following Anti-Aliasing is a trademark of LightWork
Design. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. 3Dconnexion is a registered trademark of
Logitech International S.A. MSC.NASTRAN is a registered trademark of MSC Software Corporation.
MainWin and Mainsoft are trademarks of Mainsoft Corporation. MatrixOne is a trademark of
MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphics and Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design,
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
AMPLE, and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation. Helix is a trademark
of Microcadam, Inc. Microsoft, ActiveX, Excel, JScript, Vista, Windows, the Windows logo, Visual
Basic, the Visual Basic logo, SharePoint, and Active Accessibility are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Moldflow is a
registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the
Mozilla Foundation. FLEXnet, FLEXnet Publisher, InstallShield, and InstallAnywhere are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Acresso Software Inc. Netscape, Netscape Navigator, Netscape
Communicator, and the Netscape N and Ship's Wheel logos are registered trademarks or service
marks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. OSF/Motif and
Motif are trademarks of the Open Software Foundation, Inc. Oracle and interMedia are registered
trademarks of Oracle Corporation. Palm Computing, Palm OS, Graffiti, HotSync, and Palm Modem
are registered trademarks, and Palm III, Palm IIIe, Palm IIIx, Palm V, Palm Vx, Palm VII, Palm,
More connected, Simply Palm, the Palm Computing platform logo, all Palm logos, and HotSync
logo are trademarks of Palm, Inc. or its subsidiaries. PANTONE is a registered trademark and
PANTONE CALIBRATED is a trademark of Pantone, Inc. Proximity and Linguibase are registered
trademarks of Proximity Technology, Inc. Elan License Manager and Softlock are trademarks of
Rainbow Technologies, Inc. RAND is a trademark of RAND Worldwide. RosettaNet is a trademark
and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet, a nonprofit
organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. IRIX is a registered
trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. S1000D (R) is a registered trademark of ASD. SolidWorks
and eDrawings are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolidWorks Corporation. SPARC is a
registered trademark and SPARCStation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc. (Products
bearing the SPARC trademarks are based on an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems,
Inc.) All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of
SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the
Sun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java based marks, and "The Network is the Computer"
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in
other countries. Symbolics, CLOE Runtime, and Minima are trademarks, and CLOE, Genera, and
Zetalisp are registered trademarks of Symbolics, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open
Group. TIBCO is a registered trademark and TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO
Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are trademarks or
registered trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in the United States and other countries. I-DEAS,
Metaphase, Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, TeamCenter, UG NX, and Unigraphics are trademarks
or registered trademarks of UGS Corp., a Siemens group company. Galaxy Application Environment
is a licensed trademark of Visix Software, Inc. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications,
Inc. API Tookit is a trademark of InterCAP Graphics Systems, Inc. BEA and WebLogic are registered
trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. X Window System is a trademark of X Consortium, Inc.
VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech. Product may contain
RealDWG technology by Autodesk, Inc., Copyright 1998-2006 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved
(www.autodesk.com/autodeskrealdwg). File Filters 1986-2002 Circle Systems, Inc. Certain
business intelligence reporting functionality is powered by Cognos. DFORMD.DLL is copyrighted
software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be distributed. Pro/TOOLMAKER
contains licensed third-party technology: 5AXMSURF is copyrighted software of ModuleWorks
GmbH. Certain 3D Read CAD data exchange tools are copyrighted software of Datakit SRL.
Hyphenologist Copyright 1986-1999, Computer Hyphenation Ltd. All rights reserved. RetrievalWare
is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation. DataDirect Connect is copyrighted software of
DataDirect Technologies. PStill and PSRaster software is copyright Dipl.- Ing. Frank Siegert,
1996 to present. FAST InStream is copyright of Fast Search & Transfer, Inc. Portions of the
Mathcad Solver 1990-2002 by Frontline Systems, Inc. Exceed and Exceed 3D are copyrighted
software of Hummingbird Ltd., a division of Open Text Corporation. Rational Rose and Rational
ClearCase are copyrighted software of IBM Corp. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not
responsible for the operation of this software product. G POST is copyrighted software and a
registered trademark of Austin NC. Xdriver and 3dxsrv are copyrighted software of 3Dconnexion,
Inc, a Logitech International S.A. company. Larson CGM Engine 9.4, Copyright 1992-2006 Larson
Software Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork
Design 19902001. MainWin Dedicated Libraries are copyrighted software of Mainsoft Corporation.
Microsoft Jet, Microsoft XML, Technology "Powered by Groove", Microsoft SQL Server 2005, Visual
Basic for Applications, Internet Explorer and Portions compiled from Microsoft Developer Network
Redistributable Sample Code, including Microsoft DLL redistributables, are all copyrighted software
of Microsoft Corporation. Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology. Fatigue
Advisor nCode libraries from nCode International. NuTCRACKER Server Operating Environment is
copyrighted software of MKS Inc.
Oracle 8i run time, Oracle 9i run time, and Oracle 10g run time are Copyright 20022004
Oracle Corporation. Oracle programs provided herein are subject to a restricted use license
and can only be used in conjunction with the PTC software they are provided with. PDFlib
software is copyright 1997-2005 PDFlib GmbH. All rights reserved. Proximity Linguistic
Technology provides Spelling Check/Thesaurus portions of certain software products, including:
The Proximity/Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag Database. Copyright 1997 Bertelsmann Lexikon
na
lU
se
nl
Verlag. Copyright 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/C.A.
Strombertg AB Database. Copyright 1989 C.A. Strombertg AB. Copyright 1989, All Rights
Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Editions Fernand Nathan Database. Copyright
1984 Editions Fernand Nathan. Copyright 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology,
Inc.; The Proximity/Espasa-Calpe Database. Copyright 1990 Espasa-Calpe. Copyright
1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre
i Maura Database. Copyright 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura Copyright 1991, All
Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc.
Database. Copyright 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright 1994, All Rights
Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Hachette Database. Copyright 1992
Hachette. Copyright 1992, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/IDE
a.s. Database. Copyright 1989, 1990 IDE a.s. Copyright 1989, 1990, All Rights Reserved,
Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc. Database. Copyright 1984, 1990
Merriam-Webster, Inc. Copyright 1984, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.;
The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc./Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Database. Copyright
1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. Copyright 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright 1994,
All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Munksgaard International Publishers
Ltd. Database. Copyright 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. Copyright 1990, All
Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/S. Fischer Verlag Database. Copyright
1983 S. Fischer Verlag. Copyright 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The
Proximity/Van Dale Lexicografie by Database. Copyright 1995, 1997 Van Dale Lexicografie by.
Copyright 1996, 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/William
Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. Database. Copyright 1984, 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd.
Copyright 1988, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Zanichelli
Database. Copyright 1989 Zanichelli. Copyright 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity
Technology, Inc. Certain license management is based on Elan License Manager 1989-1999
Rainbow Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. PDEFIT 1995-2002 Dr. Klaus Schittkowski.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
MuPAD OEM kernel, version 3.2.1 (Mathsoft Kernel) 2005 by SciFace Software GmbH & Co.
KG. TetMesh GHS3D provided by Simulog Technologies, a business unit of Simulog S.A. HOOPS
graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America,
Inc. TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of Technomatix
Technologies Ltd. TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service,
TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are provided by TIBCO Software Inc. Parasolid
is copyrighted software of UGS Corp, a Siemens group company. VisTools library is copyrighted
software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging
to VKI Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebEx Communications, Inc. Certain
graphics-handling portions are based on the following technologies: GIF: Copyright 1989, 1990 Kirk
L. Johnson. The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this software, including all implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any special,
indirect, or consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence, or other tortious action, arising out of or in
connection with the use or performance of this software. JPEG: This software is based in part on
the work of the Independent JPEG Group. PNG: Copyright 2004-2006 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.
TIFF: Copyright 1988-1997 Sam Leffler, Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
software is provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind, express, implied, or otherwise,
including without limitation, any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In
no event shall Sam Leffler or Silicon Graphics be liable for any special, incidental, indirect, or
consequential damages of any kind, or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether or not advised of the possibility of damage, or on any theory of liability, arising
out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. XBM, Sun Raster, and Sun
Icon: Copyright, 1987, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine
copyright 1994-2003 Wintertree Software, Inc. Portions of software documentation are used
with the permission of the World Wide Web Consortium. Copyright 19942006 World Wide Web
Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, European Research Consortium for Informatics
and Mathematics, Keio University). All Rights Reserved. http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal.
Such portions are indicated at their points of use. Copyright and ownership of certain software
components is with YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED, unauthorized use and copying of
which is hereby prohibited. YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED 1987. (Lic. #YSS:SC:9107001)
KCL (Kyoto Common Lisp) (C) Taiichi Yuasa and Masami Hagiya, 1984. 2D DCM, 3D DCM, CDM,
AEM Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 2006. BCGControlBar library (C) BCGSoft. Portions of this software
copyright Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2004-2005. PDFNet SDK is copyright
PDFTron Systems Inc., 2001-2006, and distributed by CoCreate Software GmbH under license.
All rights reserved. FE Analysis: Portions of this software copyright The MacNeal-Schwendler
Corporation 1996-2006. GOelan V4 is a registered trademark of CN Industries. Portions of
this software copyright LightWork Design Limited 1990 - 2005, 2006. Cabling copyright MIP
Ltd http://www.mip-group.com.
PartLibrary copyright TECHSOFT Datenverarbeitung GmbH
(http://www.techsoft.at).
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
LAPACK libraries used are freely available at http://www.netlib.org (authors are Anderson, E.
and Bai, Z. and Bischof, C. and Blackford, S. and Demmel, J. and Dongarra, J. and Du Croz, J.
and Greenbaum, A. and Hammarling, S. and McKenney, A. and Sorensen, D.). Certain software
components licensed in connection with the Apache Software Foundation and/or pursuant to
the Apache Software License Agreement (version 2.0 or earlier) or similar style license. All
rights are reserved by the Licensor of such works, and use is subject to the terms and limitations
(and license agreement) at http://www.apache.org. This software is provided by its Contributors
AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, and any expressed or
implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of title non-infringement,
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the Apache
Software Foundation or its Contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special,
exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute
goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on
any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise)
arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Software includes: Apache Server, Axis, Ant, Tomcat, Xalan, Xerces, Batik, Jakarta, Apache POI,
Jakarta Regular Expression, Commons-FileUpload, Solr, Tika, and XMLBeans IBM XML Parser
for Java Edition, the IBM SaxParser and the IBM Lotus XSL Edition DITA-OT - Apache License
Version IzPack: Java-based Software Installers Generator (http://www.izforge.com/izpack/start)
JakartaORO NekoHTML and CyberNeko Pull Parser software developed by Andy Clark
Copyright Andy Clark.
All rights reserved.
Lucene (http://lucene.apache.org) Quartz
(scheduler) Copyright 2004-20xx OpenSymphony (http://www.opensymphony.com/quartz/)
Jetty Copyright Mortbay.Org (http://www.mortbay.com/mbindex.html) Google Web Toolkit,
Google Web Toolkit (GWT) Incubator, and GWTx; Copyright Google U3D Library Copyright
1999 - 2006 Intel Corporation MyFaces (http://myfaces.apache.org/index.html) JDBCAppender
(http://www.dankomannhaupt.de/projects/index.html)
EHcache
Copyright
2003-2007
Luck Consulting Pty Ltd (http://ehcache.sourceforge.net/) cglib Copyright 2002-2004
(http://cglib.sourceforge.net/) LOG4PLSQL Copyright 2002 The LOG4PLSQL project team. All rights
reserved (http://log4plsql.sourceforge.net) Log4cxx (http://logging.apache.org/log4cxx/index.html)
SPRING
See
www.springframework.org.
HttpComponents
project
software
(http://hc.apache.org/) Commons Codec (http://commons.apache.org/codec/) Apache Log4net
(http://logging.apache.org/log4net/) Beans Scripting Framework (BSF) Copyright 2002-2006
The Apache Software Foundation - includes software developed at The Apache Software
Foundation (http://www.apache.org/) WebFX Coolbar 2 (http://webfx.eae.net) WebFX Cross
Browser tree Widget 1.17 (http://webfx.eae.net) PCRE 7.2 (http://www.pcre.org/) JDOM
Copyright 2000-2004 Jason Hunter & Brett McLaughlin. All rights reserved. This software
consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the JDOM Project
(http://www.jdom.org/) The Ajax Control Toolkit (including compiled, object code and source code
versions) are licensed only pursuant to the Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL) which can be found
at http://www.codeplex.com/AjaxControlToolkit. Microsoft Ajax Library provided pursuant to the
Microsoft Software Supplemental License Terms for Microsoft ASP.NET 2.0 AJAX Extensions. The
Boost Library - Misc. C++ software from http://www.boost.org; Provided pursuant to: Boost Software
License http://www.boost.org/more/license_info.html and http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt.
AspectJ (http://www.eclipse.org/aspectj/) and Eclipse SWT (http://www.eclipse.org/swt/);
Copyright 20xx The Eclipse Foundation are distributed under the Eclipse Public License (EPL)
(http://www.eclipse.org/org/documents/epl-v10.php) and is provided AS IS by authors with no
warranty therefrom and any provisions which differ from the EPL are offered by PTC. Upon request,
PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more than the cost of performing
this distribution. Command Line Argument Parser. Author peterhal@microsoft.com is licensed
pursuant to the Shared Source License for Command Line Parser Library and is provided by the
author "as is" with no warranties (none whatsoever). This means no express, implied, or statutory
warranty, including without limitation, warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose, or any warranty of title or noninfringement. No contributor to the Software will be liable
for any of those types of damages known as indirect, special, consequential, or incidental related
to the Software to the maximum extent the law permits, no matter what legal theory its based
on. The following software is incorporated pursuant to the "BSD License" (Berkeley Software
Distribution) or a similar style license: iCal4j is Copyright 2005, Ben Fortuna, All rights reserved.
Dojo Copyright 2005, The Dojo Foundation, All rights reserved. Jaxen (shipped as part of dom4j)
Copyright 2003-2006 The Werken Company. All Rights Reserved. XMP (eXtensible Metadata
Platform) technology from Adobe - Copyright 1999 - 2007, Adobe Systems Incorporated. All
rights reserved. Groovy Copyright 2003 James Strachan and Bob McWhirter. All Rights Reserved.
Firebug Copyright 2007, Parakey Inc. JMSN (http://sourceforge.net/projects/jmsn/) Thumb Plug
TGA Copyright 1991-2003 Echidna, Inc. All rights reserved. ASM Copyright 2000-2005 INRIA,
France Telecom. All rights reserved. PDFBox Copyright 2002-2007, www.pdfbox.org. All rights
reserved. BerkeleyDB (as used with OpenDS); Copyright 1990-20xx Oracle Corporation. All rights
reserved.
MiGLayout - The Java Layout Manager for Swing & SWT; Copyright 2004, Mikael Grev, MiG
InfoCom AB. (miglayout@Miginfocom.com). All rights reserved. PCRE - Perl Compatible Regular
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Expressions Basic Library Functions written by: Philip Hazel, Email local part: ph10, Email
domain: cam.ac.uk, University of Cambridge Computing Service, Cambridge, England. Copyright
1997-2008 University of Cambridge. All rights reserved. SIMILE Copyright The SIMILE Project
2006. All rights reserved. Note that JQuery: Copyright 2008 John Resig (www.jquery.com) is
included in the Ajax section of this distribution and is covered under the MIT LICENSE (see below).
Launch4j (http://launch4j.sourceforge.net/). The head subproject (the code which is attached to the
wrapped jars) is licensed under the MIT license. Launch4j may be used for wrapping closed source,
commercial applications. JempBox Java XMP Library: Copyright 2006-2007, www.jempbox.org.
All rights reserved. FontBox - Copyright 2003-2005, www.fontbox.org. All rights reserved. ANTLR
Copyright 2003-2008, Terence Parr. All rights reserved. Provided pursuant to ANTLR 3 License.
(http://www.antlr.org/license.html) NativeCall Java Toolkit (http://sourceforge.net/projects/nativecall/)
Redistribution and use of the above in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
is permitted provided that the following conditions are met: (i) Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer; (ii)
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution;
and (iii) Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of any other contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission. THE ABOVE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The Java Getopt.jar file, copyright 1987
1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #ZipLib GNU software is developed for the Free Software
Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA, copyright 1989,
1991. PTC hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program #ZipLib written by Mike Krueger.
#ZipLib licensed free of charge and there is no warranty for the program, to the extent permitted
by applicable law. Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or other
parties provide the program AS IS without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the program is with you. Should the
program prove defective, you assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction.
The following software is incorporated pursuant to the "MIT License" (or a similar license): SLF4J
source code and binaries Copyright 2004-20xx QOS.ch. All rights reserved. Script.aculo.us (built
on "prototype.conio.net"). Copyright 2005 Thomas Fuchs (http://script.aculo.us, http://mir.aculo.us).
ICU4J software Copyright 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others.
All rights reserved. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. json library: Copyright 2002 JSON.org.
XPM Copyright 1989-95 GROUPE BULL. DynamicToolbar FCKEditor plugin, v1.1 (080810);
Copyright 2008, Gonzalo Perez de la Ossa (http://dense13.com/). JQuery Copyright 2008 John
Resig (www.jquery.com) NATIVECALL (C) 20022008 Johann Burkard. All rights reserved.
(http://johannburkard.de/software/nativecall/) The above software is used and redistributed under
the following permissions: Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice
and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE. The Java Telnet Applet (StatusPeer.java, TelnetIO.java, TelnetWrapper.java,
TimedOutException.java), Copyright 1996, 97 Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meiner, is redistributed
under the GNU General Public License. This license is from the original copyright holder and the
Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. You may obtain a copy of the source
code for the Applet at http://www.mud.de/se/jta (for a charge of no more than the cost of physically
performing the source distribution), by sending e mail to leo@mud.de or marcus@mud.deyou
are allowed to choose either distribution method. Said source code is likewise provided under the
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
GNU General Public License. The following software, which may be called by certain PTC software
products, is licensed under the GNU General Public License (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.txt)
and if used by the customer is provided AS IS by the authors with no warranty therefrom without
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
(see the GNU GPL for more details). Upon request PTC will provide the source code for such
software for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution: The PJA (Pure Java
AWT) Toolkit library (http://www.eteks.com/pja/en). The following unmodified libraries are likewise
distributed under the GNU-GPL: libstdc and #ziplib (each are provided pursuant to an exception
that permits use of the library in proprietary applications with no restrictions provided that the
library is not modified). The following products are licensed with the Classpath exception (Linking
this library statically or dynamically with other modules is making a combined work based on
this library. Thus, the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License cover the whole
combination. As a special exception, the copyright holders of this library give you permission to
link this library with independent modules to produce an executable, regardless of the license
terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the resulting executable under
terms of your choice, provided that you also meet, for each linked independent module, the
terms and conditions of the license of that module. An independent module is a module which
is not derived from or based on this library.): javax.media.j3d package; Copyright 1996-2008
Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA. All rights reserved.
The source code is licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2. This project contains the
following third-party source code that is provided under separate licensing terms (These terms are
found in the THIRDPARTY-LICENSE-*.txt files in the top-level directory of this project. See the
README-FIRST.txt for more information.). 3D Graphics API for the Java Platform 1.6.0 Pre-Release
licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2, with the Classpath Exception. #ziplib
(SharpZipLib, formerly NZipLib), a Zip, GZip, Tar and BZip2 library, Copyright 2000-20xx IC#Code.
All rights reserved. #ZipLib was originally developed by Mike Krueger (mike@icsharpcode.net) with
the following attributions: (i) Zip/Gzip implementation (a Java version of the zlib) originally created
by the Free Software Foundation (FSF); (ii) zlib authors Jean-loup Gailly (jloup@gzip.org), Mark
Adler (madler@alumni.caltech.edu) and its other contributors; (iii) Julian R Seward for the bzip2
implementation; (iv) the Java port done by Keiron Liddle, Aftex Software (keiron@aftexsw.com);
(v) tar implementation by Timothy Gerard Endres (time@gjt.org); and (vi) Christoph Wille for
beta testing, suggestions, and the setup of the Web site. The following is distributed under GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL) which is at http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.html and
is provided AS IS by authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU LGPL for
more details). Upon request, PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge
no more than the cost of performing this distribution: eXist, an Open Source Native XML
Database. You may obtain a copy of the source code at http://exist.sourceforge.net/index.html.
The source code is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. GTK+ - The GIMP Toolkit. You may
obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.gtk.org/, which is likewise provided under the
GNU LGPL. Java Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn (arenn@urbanophile.com). You may
obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.urbanophile.com/arenn/hacking/download.html.
The source code is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. JFreeChart is licensed under
the GNU LGPL and can be found at http://www.jfree.org. OmniORB Libraries (OmniOrb is
distributed under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License). The generic
AIM library provided pursuant to the JAIMBot project (http://jaimbot.sourceforge.net/). JAIMBot
is a modular architecture for providing services through an AIM client. It contains a generic
AIM library and a Bot that uses this library to provide such services as Offline Messaging
and Weather.
PTC does not use the Bot.
JExcelApi (http://jexcelapi.sourceforge.net/).
7-Zip Copyright 1999-2006 Igor Pavlov (http://www.7-zip.org).
libiconv Copyright 1991
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
(http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/).
NHibernate
200x, Red Hat Middleware, LLC. All rights reserved (http://www.hibernate.org/343.html).
MPXJ 2000-2008, Packwood Software (http://mpxj.sourceforge.net/).
Java Server
Faces V3.0.1 (http://java.sun.com/javaee/javaserverfaces/).
DevlL Image Lib 0.1.6.7
(http://openil.sourceforge.net/). Zip Master Component Lib 1.79 (http://www.delphizip.org). Exadel
RichFaces 3.0.1 (http://www.exadel.com). Jfree / Jfree Chart 1.0.0 (http://www.jfree.org/). Memory
DLLLoading code 0.0.1 (http://www.dsplayer.de/open source probjects/BTMemoryModule.zip).
May include Jena Software Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, LP. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Jena includes:
JakartaORO software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (described above).
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
ICU4J software Copyright 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others All
rights reserved. Software is used under the MIT license described above. Except as contained in
this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright
holder. CUP Parser Generator Copyright 1996-1999 by Scott Hudson, Frank Flannery, C. Scott
Ananianused by permission. The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard
to this software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall
the authors or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages, or any
damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract,
negligence or other tortious action arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this
software. ImageMagick software is Copyright 1999-2005 ImageMagick Studio LLC, a nonprofit
organization dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available. ImageMagick
is freely available without charge and provided pursuant to the following license agreement:
http://www.imagemagick.org/script/license.php. Info-Zip and UnZip ( 1990 2001 Info ZIP, All
Rights Reserved) is provided AS IS and WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. For the complete
Info ZIP license see http://www.info-zip.org/doc/LICENSE. "Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set
of individuals: Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup
Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert
Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor
Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, and Mike White. ICU Libraries (International
Components for Unicode) Copyright 1995-2001 International Business Machines Corporation and
others, All rights reserved. Libraries are provided pursuant to the ICU Project (notice is set forth
above) at http://www-306.ibm.com/software/globalization/icu/index.jsp. The Independent JPEG
Group's JPEG software. This software is Copyright 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights
Reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. iText Library
- Copyright 1999-2006 by Bruno Lowagie and Paulo Soares. All Rights Reserved source
code and further information available at http://www.lowagie.com/iText. jpeg-6b.zip - JPEG image
compression library, version 6.2. Used to create images for HTML output; Provided pursuant to:
http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/part2. Pop up calendar components Copyright 1998 Netscape
Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. METIS, developed by George Karypis and Vipin
Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can be researched at http://www.cs.umn.edu/~karypis/metis.
Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License Version 1.1
(at http://www.mozilla.org/NPL). Software distributed under the Netscape Public License (NPL) is
distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied
(see the NPL for the rights and limitations that are governing different languages). The Original
Code is Mozilla Communicator client code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer of
the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape are
Copyright 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors:
Kazu Yamamoto (kazu@mozilla.gr.jp), Ryoichi Furukawa (furu@mozilla.gr.jp), Tsukasa Maruyama
(mal@mozilla.gr.jp), Teiji Matsuba (matsuba@dream.com). The following components are subject
to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.0 or 1.1 at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL (the MPL) and
said software is distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
expressed or implied and all warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations under PTCs
software license agreements are provided by PTC alone (see the MPL for the specific language
governing rights and limitations the source code and modifications thereto are available under the
MPL and are available upon request): Gecko and Mozilla components Spidermonkey Charset
Detector Saxon-B (http://www.saxonica.com/documentation/conditions/intro.html). Office Partner
Components 1.64 (http://sourceforge.net/projects/tpofficepartner/).
Rhino JavaScript engine,
distributed with a form of the Mozilla Public License (MPL). tiff-v3.4-tar.gz - Libtiff File IO Library
version 3.4: (see also http://www.libtiff.org ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff) Used by the image EFI
library; Provided pursuant to: http://www.libtiff.org/misc.html. The DITA standards, including
DITA DTDs, DITA Schemas, and portions of the DITA specification used in online help; copyright
2005-2009 OASIS Open. All rights reserved. This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/): Copyright 1998
2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) WHICH IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ''AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This
product also includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). pcre-4.3-2-src.zip Perl Compatible Regular Expression Library version 4.3. http://www.pcre.org; Provided pursuant
to: PCRE License. lpng120.zip - PNG image library version 1.2.0. http://www.ijg.org; Provided
pursuant to: http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt. libpng, Copyright 2004 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, which is distributed according to the disclaimer and license (as well as the list of
Contributing Authors) at http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt. METIS is 1997
Regents of the University of Minnesota.
Fo
r
Ed
uc
a
tio
na
lU
se
nl
Curl software, Copyright 1996 - 2005, Daniel Stenberg, All rights reserved. Software is used
under the following permissions: Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for
any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and
this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use, or other dealings. Java Advanced Imaging (JAI)
is provided pursuant to the Sun Java Distribution License (JDL) at http://www.jai.dev.java.net. The
terms of the JDL shall supersede any other licensing terms for PTC software with respect to JAI
components. Regular expression support is provided by the PCRE library package, which is open
source software, written by Philip Hazel, and copyright by the University of Cambridge, England.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Regular Expressions
support was derived from copyrighted software written by Henry Spencer, Copyright 1986 by
University of Toronto. SGML parser: Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998 James Clark,
1999 Matthias Clasen. XML parser and XSLT processing was developed using Libxml and Libxslt
by Daniel Veillard, Copyright 2001. libWWW (W3C's implementation of HTTP) can be found at:
http://www.w3.org/Library; Copyright 1994-2000 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique, Keio
University). All Rights Reserved. This program is distributed under the W3C's Software Intellectual
Property License at:
http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/2002/copyright-software-20021231.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. See W3C License http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal for more details. Copyright
1995 CERN. "This product includes computer software created and made available by CERN.
This acknowledgment shall be mentioned in full in any product which includes the CERN computer
software included herein or parts thereof." Perl support was developed with the aid of Perl Kit,
Version 5.0. Copyright 1989-2002, Larry Wall. All rights reserved. The cad2eda program
utilizes wxWidgets (formerly wxWindows) libraries for its cross-platform UI API, which is licensed
under the wxWindows Library License at http://www.wxwindows.org. ZLib - Compression library;
Copyright 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; Provided pursuant to ZLib License at
http://www.zlib.net/zlib_license.html. ATLPort copyright 1999, 2000 Boris Fomitchev is provided by
the copyright holder "as is" with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Permission to use
or copy this software for any purpose is granted without fee, provided the foregoing notices are
retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is granted,
provided the above notices are retained and a notice that the code was modified is included with the
above copyright notice. PTC reserves the right to modify this code and may do so without further
notice. OpenCASCADE software is subject to the Open CASCADE Technology Public License
Version 6.2 (the "License"). This software may only be used in compliance with the License.
A copy of the License may be obtained at http://www.opencascade.org. The Initial Developer
of the Original Code is Open CASCADE S.A.S., with main offices at 15 bis, rue Ernest Renan
92136, Issy Les Moulineaux, France. The Original Code is copyright Open CASCADE S.A.S.,
2001. All rights reserved. "The Original Code and all software distributed under the License
are distributed by OpenCASCADE on an "AS IS" basis, without warranty of any kind, and the
Initial Developer hereby disclaims all such warranties, including without limitation, any warranties
of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or noninfringement (please see the License
for the specific terms and conditions governing rights and limitations under the License). PTC
product warranties are provided solely by PTC. Certain Pro/TOOLMAKER functions/libraries are
as follows: CSubclassWnd version 2.0 - Misc. C++ software; Copyright 2000 NEWare Software.
STLPort - C++ templates; 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev; Provided pursuant to: STLPort License
http://stlport.sourceforge.net/License.shtml. Zip32 - Compression library; Copyright 1990-2007.
Info-ZIP; Provided pursuant to: Info-ZIP License http://www.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html.
Inno Setup - Installer package; Copyright 1997-2007 Jordan Russell; Provided pursuant to Inno
Setup License http://www.jrsoftware.org/files/is/license.txt. 7-Zip - Compression package; Copyright
1999-2007 Igor Pavlov; Provided pursuant to 7-Zip License http://www.7-zip.org/license.txt. The
implementation of the loop macro in CoCreate Modeling is based on code originating from MIT
na
lU
se
nl
and Symbolics, Inc. Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1986 by the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology and Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992 by Symbolics, Inc. All
Rights Reserved. Used under license pursuant to which permission to use, copy, modify and
distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is granted, provided
that the copyright holders copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The names "M.I.T." and
"Massachusetts Institute of Technology" and "Symbolics" may not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Notice must
be given in supporting documentation that copying distribution is by permission of the copyright
holders. The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for
any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. ORACLE, ODBC, and
DB2/CLI Template Library, Version 4.0.126, Copyright Sergei Kuchin, 1996, 20xx. This library
is free software. Permission to use, copy, modify and redistribute it for any purpose is hereby
granted without fee, provided that the preceding copyright statement appears in all copies. (see
http://otl.sourceforge.net/) The following items are used and licensed pursuant to the Common
Development and Distribution License (CDDL). See https://mq.dev.java.net/LICENSE.txt. Metro
Web Services Stack, Copyright Sun Microsystems. The copyright holders of this library give
permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable, regardless of the
license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the resulting executable
under differing terms, provided that, for each linked independent module, the terms and conditions
of the license of that module are met. Source Code for Metro will be provided upon request and is
licensed under the terms of the CDDL. Open MQ In addition, this project uses Mozilla Network
Security Services and Network Security Portable Runtime (NSS / NSPR) which are licensed under
the Mozilla Public License. OpenDS uses BerkeleyDB which is described above.
Ed
uc
a
tio
The following components are licensed pursuant to the Common Public License (CPL). All warranties
and awarded damage relief from use of the technology as provided by PTC are provided solely by
PTC and same is disclaimed by other contributors. Source code for the program is available upon
request under the terms of the CPL: WIX Installer Toolkit, copyright Microsoft Corp. NSIS (Nullsoft
Scriptable Install System), Copyright 1995-20xx, all Contributors. Includes zlib/libpng, bzip2, and
lzma compression modules with licensing information at http://nsis.sourceforge.net/License. Certain
software is Copyright 2000 - 2008 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle (http://www.bouncycastle.org).
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
to the following conditions. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
Fo
r
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and
Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a)
(JUN95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For
procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government
is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227 7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227 19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable. 05222009
Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA
PRINTING HISTORY
Document No.
T2232-370-01
Date
Description
09/07/2009
Initial Printing of:

Order Number DT-T2232-370-01

Printed in the U.S.A

T2232-370-01 SG-Edu Lec EN

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

T2232-370-01 SG-Edu Lec EN

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

T2232-370-01

Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 5.0

Authored and published using

Copyright 2009 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

About PTC University

An innovative learning methodology - PTCs Precision Learning

Instructor-led Training (ILT) - The ideal blend of classroom lectures,

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

Education Services Registration

Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting

Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact

Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key

After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided in order for you to

Precision Learning After the Class

A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a

Precision Learning Recommendations

Introduction to the Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire Basic Modeling

Using Sketcher Tools

Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft

Assembling with Constraints

Investigating Parent/Child Relationships

Understanding Pro/ENGINEER Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Pro/ENGINEER Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Selecting and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Editing Features and Regenerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating Sketcher Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Using Sketcher Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Creating Sweeps and Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Creating Rounds and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Creating Local Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Creating Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Measuring and Inspecting Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Assembling with Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

Assembling with Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assembling Components using the Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9

Drawing Layout and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Creating Drawing Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Using Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Viewing Part Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5

Capturing and Managing Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Resolving Failures and Seeking Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Student Preface Using the Header

Course Handbook Layout:

Procedure / Exercise Header:

Course Handbook Layout

Procedure / Exercise Header

To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as labs) as

The following items are indicated in the figure above:

1. Procedure/Exercise Name This is the name of the lab.

until the icon is disabled.

and then click OK.

Two other items to note for labs:

indicates that you

Saving Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless

Setting Up Pro/ENGINEER for Use with Training Labs

PROCEDURE - Student Preface Using the Header

Configure Pro/ENGINEER to ensure the system is set up to run

2. Locate your existing Pro/ENGINEER shortcut.